SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Oracle® Procurement Contracts
Implementation and Administration Guide
Release 12.1
Part No. E14436-03




August 2010
Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide, Release 12.1

Part No. E14436-03

Copyright © 2004, 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Primary Author:     Prashanti Gajjala

Contributing Author:     Shibhu Nambiar, Ashok Srinivasaraghavan, Yoav Eilat, Assad Akhavan

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks
of their respective owners.

This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on
use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your
license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license,
transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse
engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is
prohibited.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If
you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.

If this software or related documentation is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf
of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government
customers are "commercial computer software" or "commercial technical data" pursuant to the applicable
Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication,
disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the
applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the
additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle
USA, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.

This software is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not
developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may
create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software in dangerous applications, then you shall be
responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of
this software. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this
software in dangerous applications.

This software and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products and services
from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all
warranties of any kind with respect to third party content, products and services. Oracle Corporation and its
affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third
party content, products or services.
 
                                                                                                                    Contents


Send Us Your Comments

Preface

1   Introduction to Oracle Procurement Contracts
    Oracle Procurement Contracts - Overview............................................................................... 1-1
    Oracle Procurement Contracts - Key Features.......................................................................... 1-1


2   Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies
    Installation Verification............................................................................................................ 2-1
    Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies.......................................................................... 2-1
    Mandatory Dependencies......................................................................................................... 2-1
    Conditional Dependencies........................................................................................................ 2-2


3   Implementation Overview
    Process Description................................................................................................................... 3-1
    Implementation Task Sequence............................................................................................... 3-1


4   Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts
    Setting Up Organizations For Contract Terms......................................................................... 4-2
    Implementing Multiple Organizations Access Control........................................................... 4-4
    Profile Options and Profile Options Categories...................................................................... 4-6
    Setting Up Approvers and Approval Workflow.................................................................... 4-11
    Approval Workflows in Integrated Modules......................................................................... 4-11
    Setting Up Lookup Codes....................................................................................................... 4-12
    Enabling Keyword Search....................................................................................................... 4-12




                                                                                                                                                     iii
Setting Up Layout Templates..................................................................................................4-13
     Setting Up Purchasing Document Format.............................................................................. 4-16
     Using Descriptive Flexfields................................................................................................... 4-16
     Setting Up AutoNumbering.................................................................................................... 4-17
     Setting Up Value Sets.............................................................................................................. 4-18
     Oracle Procurement Contracts Function Security.................................................................. 4-19
     Importing Clauses from External Sources.............................................................................. 4-21
     Setting Up Contract Folders.................................................................................................... 4-21
     Setting Up Variables............................................................................................................... 4-21
     Setting Up Numbering Schemes.............................................................................................4-22
     Deploy Searchable Objects..................................................................................................... 4-23
     Setting Up Sections................................................................................................................. 4-23
     Setting Up Standard Clauses.................................................................................................. 4-24
     Setting Up Contract Templates............................................................................................... 4-24
     Setting Up Contract Expert...................................................................................................... 4-24
     Setting Up Contract Repository.............................................................................................. 4-25
     Setting Up Contracts Workbench........................................................................................... 4-28


5    Implementation and Other Considerations
     Overview ................................................................................................................................... 5-1
     Process Overview, Implementation Considerations, and Other Considerations....................5-2
           Establish Contract Standards............................................................................................... 5-2
           Negotiate Contracts........................................................................................................... 5-10
           Author Contracts............................................................................................................... 5-14
           Approve and Sign Contracts.............................................................................................. 5-25
           Execute and Monitor Contracts..........................................................................................5-28
           Administer Contract Changes............................................................................................5-29
           Renegotiate and Close Out Contracts................................................................................ 5-31


6    Setting Up Contract Terms Library
     Contract Terms Library............................................................................................................. 6-2
     Managing Standard Clauses..................................................................................................... 6-2
     Creating Standard Clauses........................................................................................................ 6-2
     Defining Related Clauses..........................................................................................................6-5
     Assigning Clauses to Folders.................................................................................................... 6-6
     Approving Clauses.................................................................................................................... 6-6
     Managing Clauses Across Organizations................................................................................. 6-7
     Searching for Clauses.............................................................................................................. 6-12
     Contract Clause Analysis Report............................................................................................ 6-16
     Managing Changes to Standard Clauses................................................................................ 6-16




iv
Importing Clauses................................................................................................................... 6-19
    Managing Contract Templates................................................................................................ 6-30
    Creating Contract Templates.................................................................................................. 6-31
    Adding Sections and Clauses..................................................................................................6-36
    Creating Contract Template Deliverables.............................................................................. 6-37
    Validating Templates.............................................................................................................. 6-40
    Preview Templates.................................................................................................................. 6-41
    Approving Templates.............................................................................................................. 6-42
    Searching for Templates......................................................................................................... 6-42
    Managing Changes to Contract Templates............................................................................. 6-44
    Defining Global Templates.................................................................................................... 6-47
    Managing Variables................................................................................................................ 6-48
    Managing Sections.................................................................................................................. 6-51
    Managing Folders.................................................................................................................... 6-53


7   Contract Expert Administration
    Overview................................................................................................................................... 7-1
    Managing Questions................................................................................................................. 7-3
    Creating User Questions........................................................................................................... 7-3
    Searching for Questions............................................................................................................ 7-5
    Updating Questions.................................................................................................................. 7-5
    Managing Constants.................................................................................................................. 7-6
    Creating Constants.................................................................................................................... 7-7
    Searching for Constants............................................................................................................ 7-7
    Updating Constants................................................................................................................... 7-8
    Managing Rules......................................................................................................................... 7-8
    Creating Rules........................................................................................................................... 7-9
    Searching for Rules................................................................................................................. 7-13
    Activating Rules...................................................................................................................... 7-14
    Disabling Rules....................................................................................................................... 7-16
    Updating Rules........................................................................................................................ 7-17
    Managing Question Sequence................................................................................................ 7-18
    Creating Dependencies Between Questions.......................................................................... 7-19
    Using Contract Expert on Business Documents..................................................................... 7-20


A   QA Validations
    Validations - Overview............................................................................................................. A-1
    Contract Templates Validations............................................................................................... A-1
    Contract Expert Validations...................................................................................................... A-3
    Business Documents Validations............................................................................................. A-5




                                                                                                                                                          v
Repository Validations............................................................................................................. A-7


B    Workflows
     Workflows - Overview.............................................................................................................. B-1
     Approval Workflows................................................................................................................ B-1


C    Concurrent Programs
     Contract Terms Library............................................................................................................. C-1


D    Seeded Data
     Responsibility........................................................................................................................... D-1
     Deliverables.............................................................................................................................. D-2
     Document Types....................................................................................................................... D-2
     Layout Template....................................................................................................................... D-3
     Notifications............................................................................................................................. D-4
     Procurement Notifications........................................................................................................ D-7
     System Variables...................................................................................................................... D-7
     Lookup Codes......................................................................................................................... D-28
     Function Security.................................................................................................................... D-29


E    XML Reference
     Contract Terms XML Reference................................................................................................ E-1


Glossary

Index




vi
 
                                               Send Us Your Comments

Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide, Release 12.1
Part No. E14436-03


Oracle welcomes customers' comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document.
Your feedback is important, and helps us to best meet your needs as a user of our products. For example:
•   Are the implementation steps correct and complete?
•   Did you understand the context of the procedures?
•   Did you find any errors in the information?
•   Does the structure of the information help you with your tasks?
•   Do you need different information or graphics? If so, where, and in what format?
•   Are the examples correct? Do you need more examples?

If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement, then please tell us your name, the
name of the company who has licensed our products, the title and part number of the documentation and
the chapter, section, and page number (if available).
Note: Before sending us your comments, you might like to check that you have the latest version of the
document and if any concerns are already addressed. To do this, access the new Oracle E-Business Suite
Release Online Documentation CD available on My Oracle Support and www.oracle.com. It contains the
most current Documentation Library plus all documents revised or released recently.
Send your comments to us using the electronic mail address: appsdoc_us@oracle.com
Please give your name, address, electronic mail address, and telephone number (optional).
If you need assistance with Oracle software, then please contact your support representative or Oracle
Support Services.
If you require training or instruction in using Oracle software, then please contact your Oracle local office
and inquire about our Oracle University offerings. A list of Oracle offices is available on our Web site at
www.oracle.com.




                                                                                                            vii
Oracle procurement contracts
 
                                                                                 Preface


Intended Audience
           Welcome to Release 12.1 of the Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and
           Administration Guide.
           Implementers and administrators of Oracle Procurement Contracts to be used in Oracle
           Purchasing, Oracle iSupplier Portal, Oracle Sourcing.
           See Related Information Sources on page x for more Oracle E-Business Suite product
           information.



Deaf/Hard of Hearing Access to Oracle Support Services
           To reach Oracle Support Services, use a telecommunications relay service (TRS) to call
           Oracle Support at 1.800.223.1711. An Oracle Support Services engineer will handle
           technical issues and provide customer support according to the Oracle service request
           process. Information about TRS is available at
           http://www.fcc.gov/cgb/consumerfacts/trs.html, and a list of phone numbers is
           available at http://www.fcc.gov/cgb/dro/trsphonebk.html.



Documentation Accessibility
           Our goal is to make Oracle products, services, and supporting documentation accessible
           to all users, including users that are disabled. To that end, our documentation includes
           features that make information available to users of assistive technology. This
           documentation is available in HTML format, and contains markup to facilitate access by
           the disabled community. Accessibility standards will continue to evolve over time, and
           Oracle is actively engaged with other market-leading technology vendors to address
           technical obstacles so that our documentation can be accessible to all of our customers.
           For more information, visit the Oracle Accessibility Program Web site at
           http://www.oracle.com/accessibility/.




                                                                                                   ix
Accessibility of Code Examples in Documentation
              Screen readers may not always correctly read the code examples in this document. The
              conventions for writing code require that closing braces should appear on an otherwise
              empty line; however, some screen readers may not always read a line of text that
              consists solely of a bracket or brace.


Accessibility of Links to External Web Sites in Documentation
              This documentation may contain links to Web sites of other companies or organizations
              that Oracle does not own or control. Oracle neither evaluates nor makes any
              representations regarding the accessibility of these Web sites.



Structure
              1  Introduction to Oracle Procurement Contracts
              2  Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies
              3  Implementation Overview
              4  Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts
              5  Implementation and Other Considerations
              6  Setting Up Contract Terms Library
              7  Contract Expert Administration
              A  QA Validations
              B  Workflows
              C  Concurrent Programs
              D  Seeded Data
              E  XML Reference
              Glossary



Related Information Sources
              You can choose from many sources of information, including online documentation,
              training, and support services, to increase your knowledge and understanding of Oracle
              Procurement Contracts.


Integration Repository
              The Oracle Integration Repository is a compilation of information about the service
              endpoints exposed by the Oracle E-Business Suite of applications. It provides a
              complete catalog of Oracle E-Business Suite's business service interfaces. The tool lets
              users easily discover and deploy the appropriate business service interface for
              integration with any system, application, or business partner.
              The Oracle Integration Repository is shipped as part of the E-Business Suite. As your
              instance is patched, the repository is automatically updated with content appropriate
              for the precise revisions of interfaces in your environment.




x
Online Documentation
                All Oracle E-Business Suite documentation is available online (HTML or PDF).
                •   PDF - See the Oracle E-Business Suite Documentation Library for current PDF
                    documentation for your product with each release. The Oracle E-Business Suite
                    Documentation Library is also available on My Oracle Support and is updated
                    frequently

                •   Online Help - Online help patches (HTML) are available on My Oracle Support.

                •   Release Notes - For information about changes in this release, including new
                    features, known issues, and other details, see the release notes for the relevant
                    product, available on My Oracle Support.

                •   Oracle Electronic Technical Reference Manual - The Oracle Electronic Technical
                    Reference Manual (eTRM) contains database diagrams and a detailed description of
                    database tables, forms, reports, and programs for each Oracle E-Business Suite
                    product. This information helps you convert data from your existing applications
                    and integrate Oracle E-Business Suite data with non-Oracle applications, and write
                    custom reports for Oracle E-Business Suite products. The Oracle eTRM is available
                    on My Oracle Support.



Guides Related to All Products

Oracle E-Business Suite User's Guide
                This guide explains how to navigate, enter data, query, and run reports using the user
                interface (UI) of Oracle E-Business Suite. This guide also includes information on setting
                user profiles, as well as running and reviewing concurrent programs.
                You can access this guide online by choosing "Getting Started with Oracle Applications"
                from any Oracle E-Business Suite product help file.


Guides Related to This Product

Oracle Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
                Oracle Contracts enable organizations to define the terms and conditions of a contract
                between the parties that are buying and selling products or services. These can be terms
                for pricing, shipment, payment, quality, and other business and legal obligations.
                Oracle Contracts provides the common infrastructure components for other contracts
                modules such as Oracle Sales Contracts, Oracle Procurement Contracts, Oracle Service
                Contracts, and Oracle Project Contracts.




                                                                                                            xi
Oracle Purchasing User's Guide
                 This guide describes how to create and approve purchasing documents, including
                 requisitions, different types of purchase orders, quotations, RFQs, and receipts. This
                 guide also describes how to manage your supply base through agreements, sourcing
                 rules, and approved supplier lists. In addition, this guide explains how you can
                 automatically create purchasing documents based on business rules through integration
                 with Oracle Workflow technology, which automates many of the key procurement
                 processes.


Installation and System Administration

Maintaining Oracle E-Business Suite Documentation Set
                 This documentation set provides maintenance and patching information for the Oracle
                 E-Business Suite DBA. Oracle E-Business Suite Maintenance Procedures provides a
                 description of the strategies, related tasks, and troubleshooting activities that will help
                 ensure the continued smooth running of an Oracle E-Business Suite system. Oracle
                 E-Business Suite Maintenance Utilities describes the Oracle E-Business Suite utilities that
                 are supplied with Oracle E-Business Suite and used to maintain the application file
                 system and database. It also provides a detailed description of the numerous options
                 available to meet specific operational requirements. Oracle E-Business Suite Patching
                 Procedures explains how to patch an Oracle E-Business Suite system, covering the key
                 concepts and strategies. Also included are recommendations for optimizing typical
                 patching operations and reducing downtime.


Oracle Alert User's Guide
                 This guide explains how to define periodic and event alerts to monitor the status of
                 your Oracle E-Business Suite data.


Oracle E-Business Suite Concepts
                 This book is intended for all those planning to deploy Oracle E-Business Suite Release
                 12, or contemplating significant changes to a configuration. After describing the Oracle
                 E-Business Suite architecture and technology stack, it focuses on strategic topics, giving
                 a broad outline of the actions needed to achieve a particular goal, plus the installation
                 and configuration choices that may be available.


Oracle E-Business Suite CRM System Administrator's Guide
                 This manual describes how to implement the CRM Technology Foundation (JTT) and
                 use its System Administrator Console.


Oracle E-Business Suite Developer's Guide
                 This guide contains the coding standards followed by the Oracle E-Business Suite




xii
development staff. It describes the Oracle Application Object Library components
                 needed to implement the Oracle E-Business Suite user interface described in the Oracle
                 E-Business Suite User Interface Standards for Forms-Based Products. It also provides
                 information to help you build your custom Oracle Forms Developer forms so that they
                 integrate with Oracle E-Business Suite. In addition, this guide has information for
                 customizations in features such as concurrent programs, flexfields, messages, and
                 logging.


Oracle E-Business Suite Installation Guide: Using Rapid Install
                 This book is intended for use by anyone who is responsible for installing or upgrading
                 Oracle E-Business Suite. It provides instructions for running Rapid Install either to carry
                 out a fresh installation of Oracle E-Business Suite Release 12, or as part of an upgrade
                 from Release 11i to Release 12. The book also describes the steps needed to install the
                 technology stack components only, for the special situations where this is applicable.


Oracle E-Business Suite System Administrator's Guide Documentation Set
                 This documentation set provides planning and reference information for the Oracle
                 E-Business Suite System Administrator. Oracle E-Business Suite System Administrator's
                 Guide - Configuration contains information on system configuration steps, including
                 defining concurrent programs and managers, enabling Oracle Applications Manager
                 features, and setting up printers and online help. Oracle E-Business Suite System
                 Administrator's Guide - Maintenance provides information for frequent tasks such as
                 monitoring your system with Oracle Applications Manager, administering Oracle
                 E-Business Suite Secure Enterprise Search, managing concurrent managers and reports,
                 using diagnostic utilities including logging, managing profile options, and using alerts.
                 Oracle E-Business Suite System Administrator's Guide - Security describes User
                 Management, data security, function security, auditing, and security configurations.


Oracle E-Business Suite User Interface Standards for Forms-Based Products
                 This guide contains the user interface (UI) standards followed by the Oracle E-Business
                 Suite development staff. It describes the UI for the Oracle E-Business Suite products and
                 tells you how to apply this UI to the design of an application built by using Oracle
                 Forms.


Other Implementation Documentation

Oracle Applications Multiple Organizations Implementation Guide
                 This guide describes how to set up multiple organizations and the relationships among
                 them in a single installation of an Oracle E-Business Suite product such that transactions
                 flow smoothly through and among organizations that can be ledgers, business groups,
                 legal entities, operating units, or inventory organizations. You can use this guide to
                 assign operating units to a security profile and assign this profile to responsibilities such
                 that a user can access data for multiple operation units from a single responsibility. In




                                                                                                            xiii
addition, this guide describes how to set up reporting to generate reports at different
                levels and for different contexts. Reporting levels can be ledger or operating unit while
                reporting context is a named entity in the selected reporting level.


Oracle Approvals Management Implementation Guide
                This guide describes transaction attributes, conditions, actions, and approver groups
                that you can use to define approval rules for your business. These rules govern the
                process for approving transactions in an integrated Oracle application. You can define
                approvals by job, supervisor hierarchy, positions, or by lists of individuals created
                either at the time you set up the approval rule or generated dynamically when the rule
                is invoked. You can learn how to link different approval methods together and how to
                run approval processes in parallel to shorten transaction approval process time.


Oracle Diagnostics Framework User's Guide
                This guide contains information on implementing, administering, and developing
                diagnostics tests for Oracle E-Business Suite using the Oracle Diagnostics Framework.


Oracle E-Business Suite Flexfields Guide
                This guide provides flexfields planning, setup and reference information for the Oracle
                E-Business Suite implementation team, as well as for users responsible for the ongoing
                maintenance of Oracle E-Business Suite product data. This guide also provides
                information on creating custom reports on flexfields data.


Oracle E-Business Suite Integrated SOA Gateway Implementation Guide
                This guide explains the details of how integration repository administrators can manage
                and administer the entire service enablement process based on the service-oriented
                architecture (SOA) for both native packaged public integration interfaces and composite
                services - BPEL type. It also describes how to invoke Web services from Oracle
                E-Business Suite by working with Oracle Workflow Business Event System, manage
                Web service security, and monitor SOAP messages.


Oracle E-Business Suite Integrated SOA Gateway User's Guide
                This guide describes how users can browse and view the integration interface
                definitions and services that reside in Oracle Integration Repository.


Oracle e-Commerce Gateway Implementation Manual
                This guide describes implementation details, highlighting additional setup steps needed
                for trading partners, code conversion, and Oracle E-Business Suite. It also provides
                architecture guidelines for transaction interface files, troubleshooting information, and a
                description of how to customize EDI transactions.




xiv
Oracle e-Commerce Gateway User's Guide
                This guide describes the functionality of Oracle e-Commerce Gateway and the
                necessary setup steps in order for Oracle E-Business Suite to conduct business with
                trading partners through Electronic Data Interchange (EDI). It also describes how to run
                extract programs for outbound transactions, import programs for inbound transactions,
                and the relevant reports.


Oracle iSetup User's Guide
                This guide describes how to use Oracle iSetup to migrate data between different
                instances of the Oracle E-Business Suite and generate reports. It also includes
                configuration information, instance mapping, and seeded templates used for data
                migration.


Oracle Product Lifecycle Management Implementation Guide
                This guide describes how you can define hierarchies of items using structure types,
                catalogs, and catalog categories, and define change categories and configure them for
                revised items or request lines. Oracle Product Lifecycle Management provides several
                predefined catalogs such as the Product Catalog, Asset Catalog, and the Service Catalog
                and predefined change categories such as change orders and ideas. Use this guide to
                learn how to define additional catalogs for browsing and reporting purposes and new
                change categories specific to your business needs. You can then learn how to set up
                users and responsibilities that provide or restrict access to these catalogs, catalog items,
                and change management objects.


Oracle Product Lifecycle Management User Guide
                This guide describes how to create and manage catalogs, create and maintain product
                attributes and attribute values, and manage item statuses and lifecycle phases. You can
                learn how to create change categories, create task templates for change orders, and
                create change management reports. In addition, you can use this guide to create roles,
                map roles to privileges, and maintain these roles.


Oracle Web Applications Desktop Integrator Implementation and Administration Guide
                Oracle Web Applications Desktop Integrator brings Oracle E-Business Suite
                functionality to a spreadsheet, where familiar data entry and modeling techniques can
                be used to complete Oracle E-Business Suite tasks. You can create formatted
                spreadsheets on your desktop that allow you to download, view, edit, and create Oracle
                E-Business Suite data, which you can then upload. This guide describes how to
                implement Oracle Web Applications Desktop Integrator and how to define mappings,
                layouts, style sheets, and other setup options.


Oracle Workflow Administrator's Guide
                This guide explains how to complete the setup steps necessary for any Oracle




                                                                                                           xv
E-Business Suite product that includes workflow-enabled processes. It also describes
                how to manage workflow processes and business events using Oracle Applications
                Manager, how to monitor the progress of runtime workflow processes, and how to
                administer notifications sent to workflow users.


Oracle Workflow Developer's Guide
                This guide explains how to define new workflow business processes and customize
                existing workflow processes embedded in Oracle E-Business Suite. It also describes how
                to define and customize business events and event subscriptions.


Oracle Workflow User's Guide
                This guide describes how Oracle E-Business Suite users can view and respond to
                workflow notifications and monitor the progress of their workflow processes.


Oracle XML Gateway User's Guide
                This guide describes Oracle XML Gateway functionality and each component of the
                Oracle XML Gateway architecture, including Message Designer, Oracle XML Gateway
                Setup, Execution Engine, Message Queues, and Oracle Transport Agent. It also explains
                how to use Collaboration History that records all business transactions and messages
                exchanged with trading partners.
                The integrations with Oracle Workflow Business Event System, and the
                Business-to-Business transactions are also addressed in this guide.


Oracle XML Publisher Administration and Developer's Guide
                Oracle XML Publisher is a template-based reporting solution that merges XML data
                with templates in RTF or PDF format to produce outputs to meet a variety of business
                needs. Outputs include: PDF, HTML, Excel, RTF, and eText (for EDI and EFT
                transactions). Oracle XML Publisher can be used to generate reports based on existing
                Oracle E-Business Suite report data, or you can use Oracle XML Publisher's data
                extraction engine to build your own queries. Oracle XML Publisher also provides a
                robust set of APIs to manage delivery of your reports via e-mail, fax, secure FTP,
                printer, WebDav, and more. This guide describes how to set up and administer Oracle
                XML Publisher as well as how to use the Application Programming Interface to build
                custom solutions. This guide is available through the Oracle E-Business Suite online
                help.


Oracle XML Publisher Report Designer's Guide
                Oracle XML Publisher is a template-based reporting solution that merges XML data
                with templates in RTF or PDF format to produce a variety of outputs to meet a variety
                of business needs. Using Microsoft Word or Adobe Acrobat as the design tool, you can
                create pixel-perfect reports from the Oracle E-Business Suite. Use this guide to design
                your report layouts. This guide is available through the Oracle E-Business Suite online




xvi
help.


Training and Support

Training
             Oracle offers a complete set of training courses to help you master your product and
             reach full productivity quickly. These courses are organized into functional learning
             paths, so you take only those courses appropriate to your job or area of responsibility.
             You have a choice of educational environments. You can attend courses offered by
             Oracle University at any of our many Education Centers, you can arrange for our
             trainers to teach at your facility, or you can use Oracle Learning Network (OLN), Oracle
             University's online education utility. In addition, Oracle training professionals can tailor
             standard courses or develop custom courses to meet your needs. For example, you may
             want to use your organization structure, terminology, and data as examples in a
             customized training session delivered at your own facility.


Support
             From on-site support to central support, our team of experienced professionals provides
             the help and information you need to keep your product working for you. This team
             includes your Technical Representative, Account Manager, and Oracle's large staff of
             consultants and support specialists with expertise in your business area, managing an
             Oracle server, and your hardware and software environment.



Do Not Use Database Tools to Modify Oracle E-Business Suite Data
             Oracle STRONGLY RECOMMENDS that you never use SQL*Plus, Oracle Data
             Browser, database triggers, or any other tool to modify Oracle E-Business Suite data
             unless otherwise instructed.
             Oracle provides powerful tools you can use to create, store, change, retrieve, and
             maintain information in an Oracle database. But if you use Oracle tools such as
             SQL*Plus to modify Oracle E-Business Suite data, you risk destroying the integrity of
             your data and you lose the ability to audit changes to your data.
             Because Oracle E-Business Suite tables are interrelated, any change you make using an
             Oracle E-Business Suite form can update many tables at once. But when you modify
             Oracle E-Business Suite data using anything other than Oracle E-Business Suite, you
             may change a row in one table without making corresponding changes in related tables.
             If your tables get out of synchronization with each other, you risk retrieving erroneous
             information and you risk unpredictable results throughout Oracle E-Business Suite.
             When you use Oracle E-Business Suite to modify your data, Oracle E-Business Suite
             automatically checks that your changes are valid. Oracle E-Business Suite also keeps
             track of who changes information. If you enter information into database tables using
             database tools, you may store invalid information. You also lose the ability to track who




                                                                                                       xvii
has changed your information because SQL*Plus and other database tools do not keep a
        record of changes.




xviii
1
               Introduction to Oracle Procurement
                                         Contracts

           This chapter covers the following topics:
           •   Oracle Procurement Contracts - Overview
           •   Oracle Procurement Contracts - Key Features



Oracle Procurement Contracts - Overview
           Procurement contracts play a critical role in all businesses. Companies rely on
           procurement contracts to define:
           •   Specific products or services that they buy.

           •   Contract terms governing their price, shipment, payment, quality, and other mutual
               obligations of the involved parties.

           Oracle Procurement supports the basic business processes of the procurement contract
           life cycle. Oracle Procurement Contracts enhances the ability of buying organizations to
           manage these stages by adding sophisticated contract management and compliance
           features to Oracle Purchasing, Oracle Sourcing, and Oracle iSupplier Portal.

                   Note: Oracle Contracts and Oracle Purchasing are mandatory
                   prerequisites for Oracle Procurement Contracts; Oracle Sourcing and
                   Oracle iSupplier Portal are optional.




Oracle Procurement Contracts - Key Features
           Oracle Procurement Contracts supports all the stages of a complete contract life cycle.
           The key stages of the contract life cycle are:
           •   Establish Contract Standards, page 1-2




                                                       Introduction to Oracle Procurement Contracts     1-1
•   Author Contracts, page 1-2

                   •   Negotiate Contracts, page 1-2

                   •   Approve and Sign Contracts, page 1-2

                   •   Execute and Monitor Contracts, page 1-3

                   •   Administer Changes, page 1-3

                   •   Renegotiate and Close Out Contracts, page 1-3

                               Note: In Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and
                               Administration guide, the expressions "contract" and "business
                               document" both imply any Sourcing or Purchasing document that
                               contains contract terms. When appropriate, the more explicit
                               expressions "sourcing document" and "purchasing document" are
                               used.



                   •   Search Contracts, page 1-3


Establish Contract Standards
                   You establish company-wide standards to manage your contracts by incorporating best
                   practices that ensure all contracts are authored and executed based on approved legal
                   and business policies and procedures. This streamlines your processes and reduces
                   contractual risks.


Author Contracts
                   When you author contract terms, you leverage standard clauses, templates, and
                   business rules set up in the library to define contractual obligations driven by legal and
                   business requirements. You also set up and monitor tasks that enable the fulfillment of
                   these obligations.


Negotiate Contracts
                   During negotiation, you create sourcing documents, such as RFIs or RFQs, with draft
                   contract terms. Suppliers review, respond, and may suggest changes to the contractual
                   terms. After all parties have reached agreement, and all sourcing documents have been
                   submitted, an award is made. You track and archive all interactions with the
                   prospective sellers for retrieval in case of disputes.


Approve and Sign Contracts
                   For the contract approval and signature process, you specify and communicate the
                   guidelines to the concerned individuals in your organization, and you authorize who




1-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
can sign the contracts in your organization. For standard contracts you fine tune your
                   review process; for exception cases you allocate additional legal review time.


Execute and Monitor Contracts
                   As you execute the contracts, you capture transactional data to enforce the agreed upon
                   contract terms. The contracts are monitored to ensure that the contractual obligations,
                   as defined in the contract terms, are fulfilled. Alerting and escalation mechanisms are
                   defined and adhered to.


Administer Changes
                   You define a formal contract change request process for your organization and the
                   supplier community. Amendments to contract terms are routed to designated
                   individuals for approval. You keep track of the changes for audit trail purposes.


Renegotiate and Close Out Contracts
                   After all contractual obligations have been fulfilled or the contract has expired, you can
                   renegotiate the contract to obtain optimal market pricing, or you can decide to close out
                   the contract.


Search Contracts
                   The Enterprise Contracts Search feature enables you to search for keywords and text in
                   structured data (such as contract terms) and unstructured data (such as text contained
                   in attached documents). The search is performed for Oracle Purchasing, Oracle
                   Sourcing, and Repository Contracts.




                                                             Introduction to Oracle Procurement Contracts     1-3
Oracle procurement contracts
2
                            Oracle Procurement Contracts
                                           Dependencies

             This chapter covers the following topics:
             •   Installation Verification
             •   Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies
             •   Mandatory Dependencies
             •   Conditional Dependencies



Installation Verification
             Before proceeding with implementation of Oracle Procurements Contract and its
             dependencies, you must verify that you have installed Oracle Applications correctly.
             For more information, see Oracle Applications Installing Oracle Applications Guide.



Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies
             To achieve the entire procurement contracts business flow, Oracle Procurement
             Contracts is built on infrastructure provided by various Oracle modules. Mandatory
             dependencies are required for Oracle Procurement Contracts to function properly.
             Conditional dependencies, when integrated, provide additional capabilities.
             This section describes mandatory and optional dependencies for Oracle Procurement
             Contracts.



Mandatory Dependencies
             For all the features to function properly, Oracle Procurement Contracts requires
             installation and implementation of the following modules:
             •   Oracle Purchasing: Provides the backbone to author, approve, amend,




                                                         Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies    2-1
communicate, and print contracts. For more information, see the Oracle Purchasing
                       User's Guide.

                  •    Oracle Contracts: Provides contract terms library, contract document attachment,
                       and contract terms authoring capabilities. For more information, see the Oracle
                       Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide.

                  •    Oracle General Ledger: Enables set up of ledgers and books. For complete setup
                       information, see the Oracle General Ledger User Guide. Set of Books are used as part
                       of the setup for autonumbering of clauses.

                  •    Oracle Human Resources: Provides organization setup information. Define or
                       confirm the definitions of your employees in Oracle Human Resources
                       Management System. For more information, see the Implementing Oracle HRMS
                       Guide.

                  •    Oracle Workflow: Provides notifications related to approvals of clauses, templates,
                       and contracts. For more information see the Oracle Workflow Administrator's Guide.

                  •    Oracle XML Publisher: Provides information on setting up and using RTF and PDF
                       templates that are used to preview and print contracts and contract templates. For
                       more information, see the Oracle XML Publisher Users Guide.



Conditional Dependencies
                  The following conditional dependencies provide additional functionality but are not
                  required for Oracle Procurement Contracts to function:
                  •    Oracle Sourcing: Provides complete contract terms negotiation capabilities. For
                       more information, see Oracle Sourcing Implementation and Administration Guide.

                  •    Oracle iSupplier Portal: Allows suppliers to view contract terms and request
                       changes. For more information, see the Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide.

                  •    Oracle E-Record: Provides electronic signature capabilities to Oracle Procurement
                       Contracts. For more information, see the Oracle E-Records Implementation Guide.




2-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
3
                                       Implementation Overview

           This chapter covers the following topics:
           •   Process Description
           •   Implementation Task Sequence



Process Description
           In procurement organizations, there is a need to author and negotiate procurement
           contracts using accepted legal and business terms. Many of these contracts tend to be
           similar in nature and can be created from previously defined templates. The Oracle
           Procurement Contracts Contract Terms Library is a repository of such templates and
           terms (clauses). This library also contains a repository of custom contract expert rules
           which bring in additional required clauses into a contract. These rules are based on
           information that is available in the contract or from additional questions to which
           contract authors respond during authoring. Procurement and Sourcing professionals
           can then create documents (including request for quotations (RFQ), blanket purchase
           agreements, and purchase orders) using standard templates, clauses, and contract
           expert rules. Setting up business documents and the Oracle Procurement Contracts
           Contract Terms Library are important steps in implementing Oracle Procurement
           Contracts.



Implementation Task Sequence
           Before installing Oracle Procurement Contracts, you must install Oracle Purchasing.
           You also need to install Oracle Sourcing and Oracle iSupplier Portal, if you are planning
           to utilize additional contract functionality provided by these applications.
           For more information, see Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies , page 2-1.
           The following table describes the implementation process for Oracle Procurement
           Contracts:




                                                                         Implementation Overview    3-1
Step   Description                   Mandat   Performed by Seeded             One Time
                                                        ory      Responsibility                  Set Up


                   1      Set up organizations          Yes      Oracle Purchasing Super User    Yes


                   2      Set up profile options        Yes      System Administrator            Yes


                   3      Set up approval               Yes      Oracle Workflow Administrator   Yes
                          workflows


                   4      Set up lookup codes           Yes      System Administrator            No


                   5      Enable keyword search         Yes      Contract Terms Library          No
                                                                 Administrator


                   6      Set up layout template        Yes      XML Publisher Administrator     Yes


                   7      Set up purchasing             Yes      Purchasing Super User           Yes
                          document format


                   8      Associate layout template     Yes      Purchasing Super User           Yes
                          to document types


                   9      Set up descriptive            No       System Administrator            Yes
                          flexfields


                   10     Set up AutoNumbering          No       System Administrator            Yes


                   11     Set up value sets             Yes      System Administrator            No


                   12     Set up function security      No       System Administrator            Yes


                   13     Migrate clauses to contract   Yes      Contract Terms Library          Yes
                          terms library                          Administrator


                   14     Import clauses from           No       Contract Terms Library          No
                          external sources                       Administrator


                   15     Set up contract folders       No       Contract Terms Library          No
                                                                 Administrator


                   16     Set up variables              No       Contract Terms Library          No
                                                                 Administrator




3-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
17   Set up numbering schemes     No    Contract Terms Library            No
                                        Administrator


18   Deploy Searchable Objects    Yes   Application Search                Yes
                                        Administration


19   Set up sections              Yes   Contract Terms Library            No
                                        Administrator


20   Set up standard clauses      Yes   Contract terms Library            No
                                        Administrator


21   Set up contract templates    Yes   Contract Terms Library            No
                                        Administrator


22   Set up contract expert       No    Contract Terms Library            No
                                        Administrator


23   Set up contract repository   No    Contracts Workbench               Yes
                                        Administrator


24   Set up contract workbench    No    Contracts Workbench               Yes
                                        Administrator




                                                         Implementation Overview    3-3
Oracle procurement contracts
4
Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts

    This chapter covers the following topics:
    •   Setting Up Organizations For Contract Terms
    •   Implementing Multiple Organizations Access Control
    •   Profile Options and Profile Options Categories
    •   Setting Up Approvers and Approval Workflow
    •   Approval Workflows in Integrated Modules
    •   Setting Up Lookup Codes
    •   Enabling Keyword Search
    •   Setting Up Layout Templates
    •   Setting Up Purchasing Document Format
    •   Using Descriptive Flexfields
    •   Setting Up AutoNumbering
    •   Setting Up Value Sets
    •   Oracle Procurement Contracts Function Security
    •   Importing Clauses from External Sources
    •   Setting Up Contract Folders
    •   Setting Up Variables
    •   Setting Up Numbering Schemes
    •   Deploy Searchable Objects
    •   Setting Up Sections
    •   Setting Up Standard Clauses
    •   Setting Up Contract Templates
    •   Setting Up Contract Expert




                                                  Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-1
•    Setting Up Contract Repository
                  •    Setting Up Contracts Workbench



Setting Up Organizations For Contract Terms
                  To use Oracle Procurement Contracts, you must define organizations in the Oracle
                  Human Resources application. For more information, see Oracle HRMS Enterprise and
                  Workforce Management Guide. Defining your organizations is the first step in the
                  Procurement Contracts implementation since the contract terms library as well as
                  procurement and sourcing documents are managed in these organizations.

                           Note: If your procurement contracts implementation is global (you
                           intend to use the solution world-wide across your different
                           organizations or divisions) you must identify one global organization
                           for the purpose of creating clauses and templates in the contract terms
                           library.


                  In addition, you must make the following business-related decisions to determine how
                  your organizations need to be setup to implement Procurement Contracts:
                  •    How many organizations will be involved in the implementation?

                  •    Will any of these organizations establish and administer standard contract policies
                       and terms at the global level?

                  •    Do your local organizations require customizing to meet local business and policy
                       regulations?

                  •    Do you have the following user roles for the library defined?
                       •   Contract Terms Library Administrator

                       •   Approvers for the contract terms library for procurement contracts

                                    Note: NOTE: The approvers of the contract terms library may
                                    be different than approvers of the procurement contracts
                                    themselves.
                                    If you are also implementing Sales Contracts, you can have an
                                    approver defined who is different than for Procurement
                                    Contracts.



                  Once these decisions are made, you are ready to setup contracts. To do this, you will
                  find the operating unit classification in the organizations definition pages. For the
                  operating unit listed in the Organization Classifications region, set up the following
                  Contract Terms options:




4-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•    Auto Adopt Global Clauses: This enables automatic adoption of global clauses in a
     local organization. The clauses do not have to be approved separately in the local
     organization if the Auto Adopt option is set to Yes.

•    Library Administrator (Buy Intent): Set a library administrator to receive
     notifications including
     •   System Failures - For example, failure of concurrent processes.

     •   FYI Notifications - For example, approval of global clauses that are now ready
         for adoption


•    Library Approver (Buy Intent):: Set a library approver for Buy Intent to route
     workflow approval notifications for clauses and templates.

             Note: Only users defined as FND_USERS, using the System
             Administrator responsibility, can be assigned the role of Library
             Administrator or Library Approver. If the users are no longer valid,
             make sure the contract terms setup is modified.



•    You must set up at least one contract template for each operating unit that is
     implementing Oracle Procurement Contracts. During contract authoring, this
     contract template can be applied to a Sourcing or Purchasing document. For details
     on how to create a contract template, see Creating Contract Templates, page 6-31.

             Note: Only users defined as FND_USERS can be assigned the role
             of Library Administrator or Library Approver. If the users are no
             longer valid, you must update the contract terms setup in the
             organizations setup.
             Even if your organization only implements Procurement Contracts,
             you must define an approver and administrator for the Sell intent
             in the setup described above. Failure to setup an approver and
             administrator for Sell intent may result in system errors while
             approving your clauses and templates.




Steps:
To set up operating units:
1.   Log in to the Human Resources responsibility.

2.   Open the Find Organization window.
     Navigation: Work Structures -> Organization -> Description.




                                               Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-3
3.   Select the desired operating unit from the list of values.

                  4.   Click the Find button.

                  5.   In the Organization Classifications region, place the cursor in the Operating Unit
                       classification.

                  6.   Click the Others button.

                  7.   Select the Contract Terms Setup option from the list of values.

                  8.   In the Contract Terms Setup window, enter values for the following options:
                       •   Auto Adopt Global Clauses: This enables automatic adoption of global clauses
                           in a local operating unit. The clauses do not have to be approved separately in
                           the local operating unit if the Auto Adopt option is set to Yes.

                       •   Library Administrator for Buy Intent: Set a library administrator Buy intent to
                           receive notifications when a global clause is created and needs adoption in the
                           local operating unit.

                       •   Library Approver for Buy Intent: Set a library approver for Buy intent to route
                           workflow approval notifications for clauses and templates.

                       •   Clause Sequence Category: Provide a value here if you want to activate the
                           AutoNumbering function for clauses in the operating unit. Leave it blank if you
                           want to number clauses manually. See: Setting Up AutoNumbering, page 4-17.

                               Note: Users who are defined as FND_USERS, using the System
                               Administrator responsibility, can only be assigned the role of
                               Library Administrators or Library Approvers. If the users are no
                               longer valid, you must manually update the information in the
                               contract terms setup. For example, if an employee is no longer with
                               your organization, ensure that the relevant updates are made to the
                               setup that was explained earlier.




Implementing Multiple Organizations Access Control
                  The Multiple Organizations (Multi-Org) access control feature enables you to define the
                  operating units within a specific responsibility that users can have access to. You can set
                  up Multi-Org access control in the Contract Terms Library which enables users to access
                  multiple operating units from one responsibility. In prior releases of Oracle Contracts,
                  access to an operating unit through a responsibility was controlled using the MO:
                  Operating Unit profile option. Users could define this profile option and access the
                  library for the specific operating unit.




4-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
To define security profiles:
1.   Log in to the Human Resources responsibility.

2.   Open the Profile page.
     Navigation: Security > Profile page

3.   Provide a name for the profile.

4.   Select a business group to which all the operating units belong. If you have not
     defined your own business groups, select the default business group.

5.   In the Security type field, select the "Secure Organizations by organization
     hierarchy and/or organization list" option from the list of values.

6.   Navigate to the Organization Security tab. At this stage, you can select one of the
     following options:
     •   Navigate to the Classification region and provide a list of operating units and
         their names. This will be the list of operating units under the security profile.

     •   Select an organization in the Organization Hierarchy field. To use this option,
         you must first set up an organization hierarchy. See: Setting Up Organization
         Hierarchy, page 4-5.


7.   Save your work.

8.   Run the Security List Maintenance program.

             •   You should select the One Named Security Profile option as the
                 value for the Generate Lists for parameter and then provide the
                 value of the security profile that you just created.

             •   If you have multiple security profiles, you can run this
                 program as many times as necessary. Also, you must run this
                 program after you update the security profile definitions.




To set up the organization hierarchy:
1.   Log in to the Human Resources responsibility.

2.   Open the Organization Hierarchy page.
     Navigation: Workstructures > Organization >Hierarchy

3.   Provide a hierarchy name.




                                                Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-5
4.   Save your work.

                  5.   Provide the version number and start date.

                  6.   Save your work and close the window.

                  7.   Query the hierarchy that you just created.

                  8.   Navigate to the Subordinates region.

                  9.   If you receive a warning message that indicates "The organization is not current as
                       at the start date," ignore it and provide the list of operating units that you want to
                       include in the hierarchy.

                  10. Save your work.




Profile Options and Profile Options Categories
                  Consider the following profile options when implementing Oracle Procurement
                  Contracts. Generally, the system administrator sets and updates profile values. See:
                  Setting User Profile Options, Oracle Applications System Administrator's Guide -
                  Maintenance.
                  Profile options are grouped into one or more profile option categories enabling you to
                  view only the profile options that pertain to your application or function.


List Of Procurement Contracts Profile Categories
                  •    Contracts Security, page 4-7

                  •    Contracts Setup, page 4-8



List Of Procurement Contracts Profile Options
                  •    EDR: E-records and E-signatures, page 4-9

                  •    MO: Default Operating Unit, page 4-9

                  •    MO: Security Profile, page 4-10

                  •    OKC: Clause Import XML File Location, page 4-10

                  •    OKC: Contract Expert Enabled , page 4-10

                  •    Contracts Intent Access Control, page 4-7




4-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•   Contract Repository Auto-Numbering Enabled, page 4-10

                  •   OKC: Generate deviations report for approval, page 4-10

                  •   OKC: Global Operating Unit, page 4-10

                  •   OKC: Layout Template for Contract Deviations Report, page 4-10

                  •   OKC:Use Clause Number in Contracts, page 4-11

                  •   OKC: Terms Library Intent, page 4-8

                  •   PO: Auto Apply Default Contract Templates, page 4-11

                  •   PO: Contracts Enabled, page 4-11

                  •   PO: Generate Amendment Documents, page 4-11

                  •   Self Service Accessibility Feature, page 4-11



Contracts Security Category
                  The table below lists the profile options that impact Contracts Security. This profile
                  category is used to group all the profiles used to enforce security in Oracle Procurement
                  Contracts.


Contracts Security Profile Options

Profile Option               Default   User       System         System          System          System
                                       Access     Administrati   Administratio   Administrati    Administrati
                                                  on: Site       n:              on:             on: User
                                                                 Application     Responsibili
                                                                                 ty


Contracts Intent Access                Update     Update         Update          Update          Update
Control, page 4-7


OKC: Terms Library Intent,             Update     Update         Update          Update          Update
page 4-8




Contracts Intent Access Control
                  When you define a contract and indicate the contract type, the system derives the
                  contract's intent, which is an indication of whether the contract is buy-side, sell-side, or
                  neither. Each contract type can be associated only with one intent. The possible values
                  for Intent are Buy, Sell, Other, or any combination of these. This profile option restricts




                                                                  Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-7
the users when that are creating or viewing Repository contracts, and when they are
                  using the Contracts Workbench.

                             Note: If this profile option is not set, the user will have access to all
                             three intents.




OKC: Terms Library Intent
                  Use this profile option to restrict the Intent while creating a clause, template, or rules in
                  the terms library. You can set the profile option value to Buy, Sell, or All. However, for
                  Oracle Procurement Contracts the value should be set to Buy

                             Note: If you leave this profile option blank, it will have the same effect
                             as setting it to All.




Contracts Setup Category
                  The table below lists the profile options that impact Contracts Setup. This profile
                  category is used to group all the profiles used in the setup of Oracle Procurement
                  Contracts, including the contract terms library, contract expert, repository as well as
                  contract authoring


Contracts Setup Options

Profile Option                 Default     User      System          System          System          System
                                           Access    Administrati    Administratio   Administrati    Administrati
                                                     on: Site        n:              on:             on: User
                                                                     Application     Responsibili
                                                                                     ty


EDR: E-records and                         Update    Update                                          Update
E-signatures, page 4-9


MO: Default Operating                                                                Update           
Unit, page 4-9


MO: Security Profile, page                 Update    Update                          Update          Update
4-10


OKC: Clause Import XML                               Update                                           
File Location, page 4-10


OKC: Contract Expert                                 Update                                           
Enabled , page 4-10




4-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Profile Option                 Default   User      System         System          System         System
                                         Access    Administrati   Administratio   Administrati   Administrati
                                                   on: Site       n:              on:            on: User
                                                                  Application     Responsibili
                                                                                  ty


Contract Repository                                Update                                         
Auto-Numbering Enabled,
page 4-10


OKC: Generate deviations                                          Update                          
report for approval, page 4-
10


OKC: Global Operating                              Update                                         
Unit, page 4-10


OKC: Layout Template for                                          Update                          
Contract Deviations
Report, page 4-10


OKC:Use Clause Number                              Update         Update                          
in Contracts, page 4-11


PO: Auto Apply Default                   Update    Update         Update          Update         Update
Contract Templates, page
4-11


PO: Contracts Enabled,                   Update    Update                                         
page 4-11


PO: Generate Amendment                   Update    Update         Update          Update         Update
Documents, page 4-11


Self Service Accessibility               Update    Update         Update          Update         Update
Feature, page 4-11




EDR: E-records and E-signatures
                   Use this profile option to enable electronic signature functionality. For more
                   information about electronic and manual signatures, see Approve and Sign Contracts,
                   page 5-25.


MO: Default Operating Unit
                   Optionally use this profile, in conjunction with the MO: Security Profile, to set a default




                                                                  Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-9
operating unit for creating contracts. The value of this profile must be one of the
                  operating units in the MO: Security Profile.


MO: Security Profile
                  Use this profile option to determine which operating unit or group of operating units
                  have access to the Procurement Contracts responsibility. To set up this profile option,
                  you need to first implement the Multi-Org Access feature.


OKC: Clause Import XML File Location
                  Use this profile option to specify the location of the XML file containing the clauses and
                  other data that are to be imported into the Contract Terms Library.


OKC: Contract Expert Enabled
                  Indicates whether Contract Expert is used by an organization. Contract Expert is not
                  enabled if the profile option value is set to No.


Contract Repository Auto-Numbering Enabled
                  If this profile option is set to Yes, the system will assign numbers automatically to the
                  new contracts created in Contract Repository. If you set the profile option to No, the
                  application users must enter contract numbers manually. Contract numbers must be
                  unique across all manually and automatically generated numbers.


OKC: Generate deviations report for approval
                  Use this profile option to control whether the deviations report is attached to the
                  approval workflow notification. If the profile option is set to No, the system will not
                  attach the deviations report to the notification.
                  For Oracle Sourcing, set the profile option to Not Applicable to remove this option from
                  the Review Contract Deviations page.


OKC: Global Operating Unit
                  Use this profile option to define your global organization.

                           Caution: Changing the value of this profile option, once it has been set,
                           is not recommended. This could cause data issues with clauses and
                           templates in the Contract Terms Library.




OKC: Layout Template for Contract Deviations Report
                  Identifies the layout template to control the format of the deviations report that is
                  attached to the approval workflow notification.




4-10    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
OKC:Use Clause Number in Contracts
                 Use this profile option to control whether the clause number is also displayed with the
                 clause title when viewing contract terms in the structured view during contract
                 authoring. For more information about structured terms, see the online help topics in
                 Oracle Procurement Contracts.


PO: Auto Apply Default Contract Templates
                 Indicates if the default contracts template should be auto-applied to the purchasing
                 document or not during the creation of the document.


PO: Contracts Enabled
                 To enable Oracle Procurement Contracts, you need to set the value of this profile to Yes.
                 After completing any subsequent purchasing transaction, changing the value of this
                 profile option to No may lead to data corruption and is not recommended.


PO: Generate Amendment Documents
                 To print the Amendment section in the contract document, set the value to Yes.


Self Service Accessibility Feature
                 Set to No to use the Rich Text feature in authoring clauses.



Setting Up Approvers and Approval Workflow
                 The system supports defining a single approver for each of the Buy and Sell intents as
                 standard out-of-the-box functionality. Use the Operating Units setup to identify
                 approvers of clauses and templates in the global and local operating units. For more
                 information, see the Setting Up Operating Units section, page 4-2.
                 You can customize the approval flows for clauses and templates to route it to multiple
                 approvers or change approvers based on additional context using Oracle Workflow. For
                 more information, see the Oracle Workflow Administrator's Guide.
                 The workflow names are
                 •   Contract Template Approval: OKCTPAPP

                 •   Contract Clause Approval: OKCARTAP



Approval Workflows in Integrated Modules
                 The following table lists the workflows that govern the approval of a sourcing or
                 purchasing document that includes Oracle Procurement Contracts clauses and
                 templates:




                                                              Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-11
Technical Name                                 Workflow Name


                   POAPPRV                                        PO Approval


                   PONAPPRV                                       Sourcing Approval


                   PONAWAPR                                       Sourcing Award Approval



                  You can customize approval flows. For more information, see the Oracle Workflow
                  Administrator's Guide.
                  These workflows are delivered with Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing, and can be
                  used to route purchasing documents and their associated contracts for special
                  contractual approval.



Setting Up Lookup Codes
                  Refer to the Look Up Codes appendix, page D-28 for the list of system, user, and
                  extensible lookup codes. Use these tables to identify the lookup codes that you must
                  define for your implementation. Use the Application Object Library Lookups window
                  to define the lookup codes.

                           Note: Modifying seeded lookup values can corrupt data that was
                           created using the lookup values. You cannot end date or disable seeded
                           values.




Enabling Keyword Search
                  The Procurement Contract Terms Library supports searching by keyword for both
                  clauses and templates. To effectively use this search feature, you must run the following
                  concurrent processes on a periodic basis:
                  •    Synchronize Clauses Text Index: This program synchronizes the clauses text index.

                  •    Optimize Clause Text Index: This program optimizes the clauses text index.

                  •    Synchronize Template Text Index: This program synchronizes the contract
                       templates text index.

                  •    Optimize Template Text Index: This program optimizes the contract templates text
                       index.




4-12    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Note: The recommended approach would be to run the
                          Synchronize and Optimize concurrent programs together. The
                          implementation teams need to determine the frequency of running
                          these programs, depending on the specific business needs. If the
                          clauses and templates are frequently updated, run these programs
                          more often to obtain accurate search results.




Setting Up Layout Templates
           To format and publish PDF versions of contract documents, Oracle Procurement
           Contracts uses specific layout templates in Oracle XML Publisher, an application in the
           Oracle E-Business Suite.
           Layout templates represent the format and layout of business documents. In Oracle
           XML Publisher, layout templates are created using XSL-FO, and are registered in the
           Template Manager. For more information, see the Oracle XML Publisher User's Guide.
           Oracle Procurement Contracts has seeded layout templates for each of the supported
           document types. For details on the seeded layout templates, see the Seeded Data
           appendix, page D-1.
           The seeded layout templates cannot be modified. However, you can download a copy
           of the layout to your desktop, modify it, and register it as a new layout template in
           Oracle XML Publisher. This section describes basic steps required to customize layout
           templates for contract templates using Oracle XML Publisher. The layout template that
           you select for a contract template defines how its format and layout appears when you
           generate the contract PDF.


           Creating a Layout Template:
           To change the layout, you need to create a new layout template in Oracle XML
           Publisher.
           To create a new template, you should start with a copy of one the seeded templates, for
           example Oracle Contract Terms Template.
           The following table displays the parameters that a layout template for contract
           templates should use.


            Field                                        Content


            Application                                  Oracle Contracts Core


            Data Source Name                             Contract Terms Data Definition




                                                        Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-13
Field                                          Content


                   Subtemplate                                    Unchecked


                   Template Type                                  XSL-FO



                  In addition, define the effective date range (start date and end date) of the layout
                  template such that it allows you to preview the contracts and contract templates. If you
                  leave the End Date field blank, you can use the layout template indefinitely.

                  Prerequisites
                  You must be familiar with Oracle XML Publisher and have access to Oracle XML
                  Publisher Administrator Responsibility.
                  1.   Log in to the XML Publisher Administrator responsibility.

                  2.   Click the Templates link.
                       The Templates Search page opens.

                  3.   In the Application field, enter Oracle Contracts Core.

                  4.   Click Go to view the search results.

                  5.   Click the Duplicate icon for the Oracle Contract Terms Template.

                  6.   In the Code field, enter a new code for the template.

                  7.   In the Name field, enter a new name.

                  8.   Click Apply to save the new template.

                  9.   In the Template Files region, click the Download icon for the OKCTERM_en.XSL
                       file.

                  10. Save the template to your desktop.

                  11. Open the template with a text or XSL editor.

                  12. Modify the layout or boilerplate to suit your needs.

                  13. Save the template with a new name, for example, MyTemplate_en.xsl.

                  14. In the Template Files region, click the Update icon for the OKCTERMS_en.xsl file.

                  15. Click the Browse button to locate and select your customized XSL-FO stylesheet




4-14    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
(Example: MyTemplate_en.xsl).

16. Click Apply.

    The system uploads the file and associates it with your layout template.

17. Click the Preview button to preview a sample document using your new layout
    template.


Customizing the Contract Terms XSL-FO Stylesheet:
To create a stylesheet for a contract template, you need to know the structure of the
contract XML document that is transformed by the XSL stylesheet. The XSL-FO
stylesheet, in the layout template, is applied to the contract XML document
representing a contract template to create a PDF document.
For a description of the contract XML format, see the XML Reference appendix, page E-
1.


Associating Layout Template to Document Types:
For every operating unit that is implementing Oracle Procurement Contracts, you must
associate a layout template with the following purchasing and sourcing document
types:
•   Standard Purchase Order

•   Blanket Purchase Agreement

•   Contract Purchase Agreement

•   RFQ

•   RFI

•   Auction

For each document type, you need to specify a layout template for the following
sections:
•   Procurement (either purchasing or sourcing)

•   Contract Terms and Conditions

You can create custom layout templates for every section and load them to the system
using XML Publisher. The layout templates determine the format of the Procurement
and Contract sections in the PDF document.




                                             Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-15
Steps
                  1.   Log in to the Purchasing Super User responsibility.

                  2.   Navigate to the Document Types form.
                       Navigation: Set Up > Purchasing > Document Types

                  3.   Select the Document Type from the list of values.

                  4.   Use the Document Type Layout field to associate a layout template for the Sourcing
                       or Purchasing section of the PDF.

                  5.   In the Contract Terms Layout field, set the name of the layout template that is
                       created for the Contract Terms and Conditions section of the PDF.



Setting Up Purchasing Document Format
                  To generate the contract document in the PDF format, you need to set the PO Output
                  Format value to PDF.


                  Steps:
                  1.   Log in to the Purchasing Super User responsibility.

                  2.   Navigate to the Purchasing Options window.
                       Navigation: Set Up > Organization > Purchasing Options

                  3.   Navigate to the Control tab.

                  4.   In the PO Output Format field, select the PDF option from the list.

                  5.   Save your work.



Using Descriptive Flexfields
                  Oracle Procurement Contracts supports the use of descriptive flexfields for users to
                  enter additional information for the following:
                  •    Standard Clauses

                  •    Contract Templates

                  •    Variables

                  •    Contract Template Deliverables




4-16    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•   Folders

           The following table displays the information for descriptive flexfields:


           Component          Name              Title             Description         Table


           Standard Clause    OKC_CLAUSES       Clause Versions   Descriptive         OKC_CLAUSE_
                              _DESCFLEX         DFF               flexfield for       VERSIONS
                                                                  clause versions


           Contract           OKC_TERMS_T       Contracts         Contracts           OKC_TERMS_T
           Templates          MPL_DFF           Template DFF      Template DFF        EMPLATES_AL
                                                                                      L


           Variables          OKC_VARIABL       OKC User          Oracle Contracts    OKC_BUS_VARI
                              ES_DESCFLEX       Defined           user-defined        ABLES_B
                                                Variables         variables
                                                Flexfield         flexfield


           Contract           DELIVERABLES      Additional        Additional          OKC_DELIVER
           Template           _FLEX             Attributes        attributes on       ABLES
           Deliverables                                           deliverables


           Folder             OKC_ART_DF        OKC Clause        Descriptive         OKC_FOLDERS
                                                Folders DF        flexfield for       _ALL_B
                                                                  folders




Setting Up AutoNumbering
           Use this setup to number clauses automatically during creation.
           Guidelines
           In all responsibilities that create clauses, set the Sequence Numbering profile option to
           yes.
           For more information on setting this profile option, see the Oracle Applications System
           Administrator's Guide.

                    Note: You can only delete a numbering scheme that is not assigned to a
                    contract template.
                    If you define a numbering scheme with the "a,b,c," numbering type and
                    a specific level with more that 26 entries, the system does not create
                    further alphabets. Instead, the system uses symbols for all entries
                    beyond 26. Preview the template or contract, as applicable, and make




                                                        Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-17
sure the numbering scheme used is changed to use some other type.




                  Steps:
                  1.   Log in to the System Administrator responsibility.

                  2.   Define a document sequence.
                       Navigation: Application > Document > Define
                       Enter a sequence name, the Contracts Core application, an effective date, Automatic
                       type, and an initial value.

                  3.   Define a sequence category.
                       Navigation: Document > Categories.
                       Define the category using OKC_ARTICLES_ALL as the table to be associated.

                  4.   Assign the category to a set of books.
                       Navigation: Document > Assign.
                       Associate the category defined with the set of books and sequence.

                  5.   Set the OKC: Clause Sequence Category profile option with the sequence created
                       above.



Setting Up Value Sets
                  Value sets are used in Oracle Procurement Contracts while creating user-defined
                  variables and in Contract Expert. For more information, see the Defining Value Sets
                  section of the Oracle Applications Developer's Guide.
                  For all user-defined variables, value sets are supported subject to the following
                  conditions:
                  •    Format Types: The supported format types are Number, Character, and Standard
                       Date. You must only use the supported format types when defining value sets for
                       user-defined variables.

                  •    Validation Types: The supported validation types are None, Independent, and
                       Table. You must only use the supported validation types when defining value sets
                       for user-defined variables.

                  Based on the value set definition, the system displays the list of values in the following
                  formats:
                  •    Table: A drop-down list or a list of values.




4-18    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•   Independent: A drop-down list or a list of values.

           •   None: an input field in the authoring, based on the following format types:
               •   For the CHAR format type, the system displays an input field.

               •   For the Number format type, the system displays an input field. However,
                   users can only enter numeric values in this field.

               •   For the Standard Date format type, the system displays a Date type field.

                           Note: Value set information is used in user-defined variables in
                           the Contract Terms Library. Deleting the value from a value set
                           or deleting the value set could cause data issues that impact the
                           following:
                           •    Contract templates containing clauses that use user-defined
                                variables.

                           •    Business documents that use user-defined variables in
                                standard and non-standard clauses.




Oracle Procurement Contracts Function Security
           Oracle Procurement Contracts enables organizations to control users' access to contact
           authoring features. In this way, users with different roles, such as contract negotiators,
           contract administrators, and contract approvers, can have access to only those features
           they need to use. For example:
           •   Contract negotiators may have standard authoring privileges allowing them access
               to standard clauses and pre-approved alternates from the library.

           •   Contract administrators may have additional privileges allowing them to author
               non-standard clauses or remove contract terms.

           •   Contract approvers or super users may have privileges that allow them to override
               standard authoring controls. For instance, with override authoring privileges, users
               can delete a mandatory clause from a business document or edit a protected clause.

           In Oracle Purchasing, the seeded Super User menu has full access to the features
           provided by Oracle Procurement Contracts. To restrict a specific function, choose one of
           the following options:
           •   Exclude the corresponding function from the user's responsibility.

           •   Create a new menu without the corresponding function, and associate the menu




                                                         Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-19
with the user responsibility.

                  The type of access to a business document is governed by the security features in Oracle
                  Purchasing, Oracle Sourcing, and Oracle iSupplier Portal. In addition to these existing
                  security features, Oracle Procurement Contracts provides the following levels of access
                  for authoring contractual terms and managing deliverables associated with a
                  purchasing or sourcing document:
                  •    No Authoring Privileges: User may be able to create a purchasing or sourcing
                       document, but without contract authoring privileges they would not be able to
                       author contract terms to a business document.

                  •    Standard Authoring Privileges: Users can add or remove standard clauses, update
                       variable values, and change the contract template.

                  •    Non-standard Authoring Privileges (Default): In addition to the available functions
                       in the Standard Authoring Privileges level, users can author non-standard clauses
                       and remove all the contract terms on a business document. The default access is set
                       at the Non-standard Authoring Privileges level.

                  •    Override Authoring Controls Privileges: In addition to the available functions in the
                       Non-standard Authoring Privileges level, users can delete mandatory clauses and
                       edit clause text on protected clauses.

                  For more information on function security, see the Seeded Data appendix, page D-29.
                  For information on implementation considerations for function security, see Establish
                  Authoring Roles and Controls , page 5-15.
                  Setting Up Function Security for Contract Repository
                  Functional security provides control over the user's access to certain functions in the
                  repository. A user can have View-Only, Authoring, or Administrator responsibility. The
                  following table displays the functions that each responsibility has access to:


                   Function                               View-Only            Authoring        Administrat
                                                          Responsibility       Responsibility   or
                                                                                                Responsibili
                                                                                                ty


                   View contract                          Yes                  Yes              Yes


                   Create and update contract             No                   Yes              Yes


                   Change status from Approved to         No                   Yes              Yes
                   Signed




4-20    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Function                               View-Only          Authoring          Administrat
                                                   Responsibility     Responsibility     or
                                                                                         Responsibili
                                                                                         ty


            Manage deliverables                    No                 Yes                Yes


            Manage risk                            No                 Yes                Yes


            Terminate contract                     No                 Yes                Yes


            Update contract administrator of a     No                 No                 Yes
            contract


            Change status from Draft directly to   No                 No                 Yes
            Signed


            Import contracts                       No                 No                 Yes


            Use Repository Setup tab               No                 No                 Yes




Importing Clauses from External Sources
            You can use the clause import feature to import existing clauses from external sources
            that your organization uses. You also can use this feature on an ongoing basis, where
            clause updates are continuously imported into the clause library, in order to stay
            current with changes in business process or government regulations. See: Importing
            Clauses , page 6-19.



Setting Up Contract Folders
            You can organize clauses under different folders for easier retrieval.
            For more information, see Managing Folders , page 6-53.



Setting Up Variables
            Oracle Procurement Contracts supports the use of business variables (tokens) in clause
            text.
            For more information, see Managing Variables , page 6-48.




                                                         Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-21
Setting Up Numbering Schemes
                  When creating contract templates, you can apply a numbering scheme to the sections
                  and clauses structure. This numbering scheme is applied to business documents in
                  which the contract template is used.
                  Use the Contract Terms Library to set up and manage numbering schemes.


                  Steps:
                  1.   Log in to the Contract Terms Library Administrator responsibility.

                  2.   Navigate to the Numbering Schemes page.
                       Navigation: Library > Numbering Schemes tab> Create Numbering Scheme button

                  3.   Enter the Scheme Name.

                  4.   Optionally, enter a Description for the scheme.

                  5.   Optionally, select the Number Clauses check box to automatically number the
                       clauses in the contract.

                  6.   Click the Add Another Level button to define the first numbering level.

                  7.   Enter the following information for the numbering level:
                       •   In the Sequence field, choose a sequence from the list of values.
                           •   Optionally, enter an End Character. For example, a close parentheses ()).

                           •   Optionally, select the Concatenate with Child check box to ensure that the
                               child level includes the numbering of its parent during previewing and
                               printing of the contract.
                               For instance, you would set up the numbering scheme as:
                               First level:
                               •   a,b,c

                               •   end character is "."

                               •   Concatenate with Child check box selected
                                   Second level:

                               •   I,II,III




4-22    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•   end character is ")"
                            The document will be numbered as:

                        •   First Level = a.

                        •   Second Level = a.I)



           8.   Click the Refresh button to preview the layout.

           9.   Optionally, add additional numbering levels.

           10. Click Apply to save and close the Numbering Scheme page.



           Managing Numbering Schemes:
           You can make changes to your existing numbering schemes. You can also delete any
           numbering scheme that is not assigned to a contract template. If the numbering scheme
           has been updated in the Contract Terms Library, the next time a contract template using
           that numbering scheme is used to create a new contract, the latest numbering scheme
           updates are applied. For contracts that already use the numbering scheme you must
           manually apply the numbering scheme to reflect the updates onto the contract.
           1.   Log in to the Contract Terms Library Administrator responsibility.

           2.   Navigate to the Numbering Schemes tab.
                Navigation: Library > Numbering Schemes.
                The system displays the list of available numbering schemes.

           3.   To make changes to a numbering scheme, click the Update icon.

           4.   To delete a numbering scheme click the Delete icon.
                You can only delete the numbering schemes that are not used in contract templates.



Deploy Searchable Objects
           From the Application Search Administration page, search and deploy the POC
           (Procurement Contracts) searchable objects.



Setting Up Sections
           Sections are headings under which you organize contract clauses. The headings provide
           structure and organization to a printed contract document. You can define sections that
           can be used in authoring templates and contracts.




                                                        Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-23
For more information, see Managing Sections, page 6-51.



Setting Up Standard Clauses
                  A standard clause is the text that describes the legal or business language used to
                  author a contract. Clauses are drafted based on both business and statutory
                  requirements.
                  For more information, see Managing Standard Clause, page 6-2.



Setting Up Contract Templates
                  Oracle Procurement Contracts enables you to define a standard set of templates to
                  easily default contract terms for contracts authored by your organization. You can
                  create templates that include both clauses and deliverables.
                  For more information, see Managing Contract Templates , page 6-30.



Setting Up Contract Expert

Prerequisites
                  •    Set up the Contract Terms Library.

                  •    Set the Use Contract Expert profile option toYes at the site level.
                       For more information, see the Setting Up Profile Options section, page 4-6.

                           Note: Contract Expert uses Oracle Configurator to process and evaluate
                           the Contract Expert rules on business documents. To function properly,
                           in Oracle Configurator the SSL port requires a special setting.


                  To use Contract Expert on business documents, you need to set up Contract Expert
                  rules in the Contract Terms Library. To set up Contract Expert rules:
                  •    Create and approve clauses, page 6-2

                  •    Create and approve contract templates, page 6-30

                  •    Define value sets, page 4-18

                  •    Create Constants, page 7-6

                  •    Create Questions, page 7-3

                  •    Create and activate a library of rules and assign them to appropriate contract




4-24    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
templates, page 7-8

                 •   Enable Contract Expert on contract templates , page 6-30

                 •   Determine the sequence of display of questions when Contract Expert is used on a
                     business document, page 7-18



Setting Up Contract Repository
                 Since the Oracle E-Business Suite 11i10 release, Oracle Contracts has provided the
                 ability to author and maintain contract terms in buy-side and sell-side Oracle
                 applications. For example, contract terms can be added to purchase agreements created
                 in Oracle Purchasing, or to quotes created in Oracle Quoting.
                 Oracle Contracts now enables you to create miscellaneous contracts, such as license
                 agreements, non-disclosure agreements, and merger agreements, which are not
                 specifically related to the functionality of other Oracle applications. You can also create
                 purchase or sales agreements for miscellaneous items that are outside the normal
                 purchasing or sales flows, for which full execution capabilities are not required.
                 These types of contracts are stored in a new Contract Repository, and are called
                 Repository contracts. Each Repository contract will have a user-defined contract type,
                 unlike the contracts created in other Oracle applications, which have system-defined
                 contract types.
                 Repository Contracts are integrated with Contract Terms Library to enable Structured
                 Terms Authoring. A Repository contract can include supporting documents and
                 amendments, deliverables with notification capabilities, and risk information.
                 Repository contracts support a flexible approval and signature process, and a bulk
                 import process is available for loading legacy contracts into the system.
                 This section covers the following topics:
                 •   Setting Up Profile Options, page 4-25

                 •   Defining Approval Workflows, page 4-26

                 •   Setting Up Contract Types, page 4-26

                 •   Setting Up Risks, page 4-27

                 •   Setting Up Contact Roles, page 4-27


Setting Up Profile Options
                 Define the following profile options:
                 •   Contract Repository Auto-Numbering Enabled




                                                               Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-25
•    Contracts Intent Access Control

                  For more information, see the Setting Up Profile Options section, page 4-6.


Defining Approval Workflows
                  Define approval hierarchy and approval rules through the Oracle Approvals Manager.
                  For more information, see the Setting Up Approvers and Approval Workflow section,
                  page 4-11.


Setting Up Contract Types
                  When users create Repository contracts in Oracle Contracts, they must select and assign
                  one of the user-defined contract types, such as Non-Disclosure Agreement and
                  Partnership Agreement, to the contract. You must define the contract types in advance.
                  User can enable contract terms for Structured Terms Authoring.


Steps
                  1.   Log in to the Contracts Workbench Administrator responsibility.

                  2.   Click the Contract Types link. The contract types you define should be unique
                       across all organizations within the company. Note: For your reference, the Contract
                       Types page displays the list of seeded and current user-defined contract types.

                  3.   Click the Create Contract Type button. The system displays the Create Contract
                       Type page.

                  4.   In the Name field, enter a unique identifier for the contract type.

                  5.   Enter a Description for the contract type.

                  6.   Select an Intent from the list of values. Depending on the nature (Intent) of a
                       contract, the contract could be buy-side, sell-side, or neither. Each Contract Type
                       should be associated with one Intent. The possible values for Intent are Buy, Sell,
                       and Other. If the Contracts Intent Access Control profile option is used, this
                       selection will limit which users will be able to select this Contract Type.

                               Important: If you select Intent as Other, Layout Template and
                               Enable Contract Terms are disabled.



                  7.   Select a Start Date. This is the date that the contract type becomes available.

                  8.   Optionally, select an End Date for the contract type. After the End Date has passed,
                       when creating new contracts, users will not be able to select this type.

                  9.   Select the Enable Contract Terms check box.




4-26    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
10. Select the appropriate Layout Template.

                   11. Click the Apply button.



Setting Up Risks
                   When users create Repository contracts in Oracle Contracts, they may select multiple
                   risks associated with these contracts. For example: partner bankruptcy,
                   non-performance of a deliverable, non-compliance with non-disclosure terms, loss or
                   infringement of intellectual property, and damage to property or humans. This risks
                   must be defined in advance.


Steps
                   1.   Log in to the Contracts Workbench Administrator responsibility.

                   2.   Click the Risks link.

                                Note: For your reference, the Risks page displays the list of all
                                user-defined risks. Oracle Contracts does not provide seeded risks.



                   3.   The risks you define should be unique across all organizations within the company.

                   4.   Click the Create Risk button. The system displays the Create Risk page.

                   5.   In the Name field, enter a unique identifier for the risk.

                   6.   Enter a Description for the risk.

                   7.   Select a Start Date.

                   8.   Optionally, select an End Date for the risk. After the End Date has passed, the risk
                        cannot be selected on a contract.

                   9.   Click Apply to save the risk.


Setting Up Contact Roles
                   The contact role indicates the responsibility or function of different people in a contract.
                   For example, an employee (internal contact) can be assigned the role of "Purchasing
                   Manager" in a contract. There are no seeded contact roles. You can define an unlimited
                   number of contact roles. These roles will be available to users when adding internal or
                   external contacts to a party on a Repository contract.

Steps
                   1.   Login to the Contracts Workbench Administrator responsibility.




                                                                  Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-27
2.   Click the Contact Roles. For your reference, the Contact Roles page displays the list
                       of all user-defined roles. The roles you define should be unique across all
                       organizations within the company.

                  3.   Click the Create Contact Role button. The system displays the Create Contact Role
                       page.

                  4.   In the Name field, enter a unique identifier for the role.

                  5.   Enter a Description for the role.

                  6.   Select a Start Date.

                  7.   Optionally, select an End Date for the role. After the End Date has passed, the role
                       cannot be selected on a contract.

                  8.   Click Apply to save the role.



Setting Up Contracts Workbench
                  A single view of all enterprise contracts is essential for effective management of contract
                  activities, and for reporting and analysis of outstanding supplier and customer
                  commitments. Oracle Contracts provides a centralized Contracts Workbench that gives
                  you access and visibility to all contractual agreements in the enterprise.
                  Contracts Workbench allows contract administrators to see which contracts require
                  attention, provides extensive search capabilities, and has links to common tasks such as
                  creating or approving a contract. Legal and financial managers can use Contracts
                  Workbench as a research tool. A flexible security model ensures that contracts can only
                  be viewed or updated by authorized users.
                  Contracts Workbench provides a single view of the following types of contracts:
                  •    Contracts created in buy-side and sell-side Oracle applications: purchase orders,
                       purchase agreements, negotiations, orders, quotes and sales agreements.

                  •    Repository contracts: For information, see Contract Repository, page 4-25.

                  All of these contracts are automatically visible in the Contracts Workbench, as long as
                  they include contract terms.
                  This section covers the following topics:
                  •    Setting Up Profile Options, page 4-29

                  •    Personalizing Contracts Workbench, page 4-29




4-28    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Setting Up Profile Options
                 You can use the Contracts Intent Access Control profile option to restrict the access to
                 Contracts. For more information, see the Setting Up Profile Options section, page 4-6.


Personalizing Contracts Workbench
                 Oracle Framework includes the OA Personalization Framework, which enables you to
                 personalize the appearance of Contracts Workbench without modifying any underlying
                 code.
                 The following are the most common ways to personalize Contracts Workbench:
                 1.   The default bins for the Contracts Workbench are:
                      •   Notifications

                      •   Recent Contracts

                      •   Expiring Contracts

                      •   Contract Deliverables

                      •   Contracts at Risk

                      You can use the personalization option to add the Bookmarks bin,, remove one of
                      the above bins, or change the order the bins are displayed.

                 2.   The default columns for the Advanced Search Results page are:
                      •   Contracts Number

                      •   Contract Name

                      •   Organization

                      •   Party Name

                      •   Contract Type

                      •   Intent

                      •   Status

                      •   Effective Date

                      You can use the personalization option to remove one of the above columns, change
                      the order the columns are displayed, or add any of the following columns:
                      •   Contract Administrator




                                                              Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-29
•   Overall Risk

                       •   Version

                       •   Expiration Date

                       •   Termination Date

                       •   Amount

                       •   Currency

                       •   Authoring Party

                       The personalization also impacts the Export option. After performing a search, the
                       user can export the search results to a Comma Separated (CSV) file. The exported
                       file will include only the columns shown on the screen. After personalization,
                       columns that are available for personalization but not selected will not be included
                       in the CSV file.
                       For more information on personalization, see:
                       •   Oracle Applications Framework Personalization Guide Release 11i(Metalink Note
                           268969.1)

                       •   Oracle Applications Component Reference Release 11i (Metalink Note 269136.1)




4-30    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
5
    Implementation and Other Considerations

           This chapter covers the following topics:
           •   Overview
           •   Process Overview, Implementation Considerations, and Other Considerations



Overview
           This chapter provides specific considerations for implementing Oracle Procurement
           Contracts, as well as additional considerations for end-users. It also provides an
           overview of the Oracle Procurement Contracts features that support the key stages of
           the procurement contract life cycle.
           Before you proceed with the implementation of Oracle Procurement Contracts, it is
           recommended that you address the business considerations outlined in the following
           table. The table also lists the sections in this guide where you can find relevant
           information:


           Question                                                   Related Section


           How many organizations will be involved in the             Establish Contract Standards, page
           implementation?                                            5-2

                                                                      Global Agreements, page 5-22


           Which organizations will administer and control the        Establish Contract Standards, page
           standard contract terms at the global level?               5-2




                                                            Implementation and Other Considerations    5-1
Question                                                     Related Section


                   How does your organization currently create and store        Clauses, page 5-4
                   contracts?
                                                                                Contract Templates, page 5-5

                                                                                Deliverables, page 5-9

                                                                                Variables, page 5-9


                   Do you need to translate your standard terms into            Contract Templates, page 5-5
                   multiple languages?
                                                                                Printed Contract Documents, page
                                                                                5-23


                   Does your organization have a formal approval cycle for      Approvals in Oracle Procurement
                   the standard contract terms? If so, do you need additional   Contracts, page 5-27
                   approvers to approve business documents with contract
                   terms as compared to business documents without
                   contract terms?


                   What are the processes that you and your suppliers will      Approve and Sign Contracts, page
                   collaborate on in order to complete and sign off on          5-25
                   contractual obligations?
                                                                                Supplier Authored Contracts,
                                                                                page 5-20


                   What are the standard print formats for your contracts?      Printed Contract Documents, page
                                                                                5-23


                   Are there standard business rules based on which contract    Contract Expert, page 5-6
                   clauses need to be included while authoring a contract?


                   Is the contract term always the same based on a              Automatic Application of
                   purchasing document type?                                    Templates, page 5-20




Process Overview, Implementation Considerations, and Other
Considerations
                  This section provides process overviews and specific considerations for the phases of
                  the contracts life cycle.


Establish Contract Standards




5-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Process Overview
                Oracle Procurement Contracts enables you to establish and manage your contract
                standards in the Contract Terms Library, a feature of Oracle Contracts. You establish
                your contract standards by defining the standard clauses, contract templates, and
                contract deliverables that you want to enforce while authoring your contracts.
                Organizations that operate globally can use the Contract Terms Library to establish
                organization-wide standards and enforce them on a global basis. To accommodate local
                or country specific regulations, an organization may provide local contract library
                administrators the flexibility of tailoring these global standards.


Create and Approve Standard Clauses
                Standard clauses contain the standard business language to be used in contracts.
                Contract administrators can create standard clauses in the library, route the clauses for
                approval, and publish the clauses for use across the organization.
                Contract administrators can optionally define alternate or incompatible clauses for a
                standard clause. Users can insert tokens, called variables, in the clause text. These
                tokens refer to the structured business terms that are negotiated on a contract. They are
                replaced with the negotiated values when the contract is printed.


Create and Approve Contract Templates
                Companies implement best practices by creating standard contract boilerplates
                (templates) based on their unique contracting requirements.
                Contract templates enable rapid assembly and creation of contracts and minimize the
                overhead involved in legal review and approval. Contract templates may include a set
                of pre-defined, pre-approved standard clauses. They may also include deliverables that
                are tasks or documents required to fulfill a contractual obligation. For instance,
                organizations may create deliverables to track the submission of a status report on the
                progress of the contract.
                As with standard clauses, contract administrators can route contract templates for
                approval, after which the contract templates can be used in contracts.
                You can create global templates which can be adopted by local organizations and
                modified based on local organizations' requirements.


Implementation and Other Considerations
                This section describes the implementation and other considerations for:
                •   Contract Terms Library, page 5-4

                •   Clauses, page 5-4

                •   Contract Templates, page 5-5




                                                              Implementation and Other Considerations    5-3
•    Setting up Contract Expert Rules, page 5-6

                  •    Deliverables, page 5-9

                  •    Variables, page 5-9


Contract Terms Library
                  Oracle Procurement Contracts leverages Oracle Contracts' functionality for creating and
                  managing standard clauses and contract templates, including deliverables.
                  The features provided by Oracle Contracts are:
                  •    Contract Terms Library
                       •   Clauses

                       •   Templates

                       •   Deliverables

                       •   Variables

                       •   Folders

                       •   Sections


                  •    Contract Document Attachments

                  •    Printing Contractual Terms

                  For detailed description of these features, see Setting Up Contract Terms Library, page
                  6-2.
                  Before proceeding with implementation of Oracle Procurement Contracts, you should
                  familiarize yourself with the setup procedures related to establishing contract standards
                  in the Contract Terms Library.


Clauses
                  Implementation considerations for setting up clauses include:
                  •    Intent: When defining a new clause, you must specify an intent (Buy or Sell) for the
                       clause. After setting the intent for a clause, it cannot be changed.

                  •    If your organization only uses the Contract Terms Library for the Buy intent, set the
                       value for the OKC Clauses Library Intent profile option to Buy. This ensures that
                       users only create clauses with the Buy intent. For Oracle Procurement Contracts the
                       intent should always be Buy.




5-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•     Include By Reference: Use this feature if you want to substitute an alternate
                     referenced text instead of the full clause text on a printed contract. To define
                     alternate text, use the Reference Text field while defining the clause. This is useful if
                     your printed contract is extensive and contains commonly used terms that you do
                     not have to repeat on every standard contract.
                     Note that users with the Override Authoring Controls privileges can override this
                     feature on a contract and choose to make the clause non-standard and include a
                     special text. In this case, the system does not print the reference text; instead, the
                     non-standard clause text from the contract is printed.
                     For details on the function security, see Establish Authoring Roles and Controls ,
                     page 5-15.

               •     Keyword Search Feature: To maximize the results of the search feature for standard
                     clauses, ensure that the following concurrent programs are run periodically:
                     •   Synchronize Clause Text Index

                     •   Optimize Clause Text Index
                         The frequency of running these programs should be determined during the
                         implementation based on the usage frequency of the Keyword field during
                         search.


               Other considerations for using clauses include:
               •     Provision Check Box: Sourcing documents may have provisions as clauses that are
                     applicable during the negotiation but are not intended to be part of the final
                     contract. Select the Provision check box to mark such clauses as Provision. A
                     provision clause can only be used in sourcing documents (such as RFQ) that are
                     supported by Oracle Procurement Contracts.
                     If you require a clause to be used in both Oracle Sourcing and Oracle Purchasing,
                     verify that the Provision check box is not selected. You cannot change this attribute
                     on subsequent versions of the clause.

               •     Deliverable Variables: If the printed contract needs to contain a tabular list of
                     deliverables, which are required to be fulfilled as part of contract execution, you
                     must create a clause that holds one or all the deliverable variables in it. Depending
                     on your business needs, you may include the deliverable variables as part of a
                     clause that contains additional text, or create a clause that only contains one or more
                     deliverable variables. Optionally, print the contract PDF document to validate the
                     exact location of the deliverable table within the clause text.


Contract Templates
               Contract templates are required to author procurement contracts. You can consider
               managing templates based on your specific needs, such as transaction types, products




                                                                Implementation and Other Considerations    5-5
or services procured, supplier categories, and so on. During contract authoring, users
                  can search for the appropriate contract template by the template name. So make sure
                  the template name reflects the major keywords that users might use during their search.
                  Implementation considerations for setting up contract templates include:
                  •    Intent: When defining a new contract template, you must specify an intent (Buy or
                       Sell) for the template. After setting the intent for a template, it cannot be changed.
                       If your organization only uses the Contract Terms Library for the Buy intent, set the
                       value for the OKC Clauses Library Intent profile option to Buy. This ensures that
                       users only create templates with the Buy intent. For Oracle Procurement Contracts
                       the intent should always be Buy.

                  •    Keyword Search Feature: To maximize the results of the search feature for contract
                       templates, ensure that the following concurrent programs are run periodically:
                       •   Synchronize Template Text Index

                       •   Optimize Template Text Index
                           Determine during implementation how often to run these programs based on
                           the usage frequency of the Keyword field during a search.


                  •    Document Types: To author procurement contracts, ensure that you have created at
                       least one template and assigned it to one or more procurement document types.
                       Examples of document types are RFQ, Auction, and Standard Purchase Order.
                       If you plan to use a common contract template to support multiple document types,
                       note the following: If the contract template contains clauses that use variables
                       sourced for specific document types, the system displays a warning if the same
                       clause is used in a contract for a different document type.
                       For example, if a contract template is assigned to document types RFQ and
                       Standard Purchase Order, you can apply the template to RFQs in Oracle Sourcing
                       or purchase orders in Oracle Purchasing. If this template contains a clause with a
                       system variable "Sourcing Document Number" the value for this variable will be
                       substituted on the RFQ, but not on the purchase order. For the users creating a
                       purchase order, the system displays a warning indicating that the variable could
                       not be resolved. One way to avoid issues on a contract is to carefully review the
                       validations results for the contract template and decide whether or not to include
                       clauses with these variables in the template.

                  •    Layout Template: When choosing a layout template for a contract template, ensure
                       that you do not choose the RTF type layout template. The RTF type is not supported
                       by Oracle Procurement Contracts.


Contract Expert Rules
                  Contract Expert is a rule-based contract creation tool that assists purchasing




5-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
professionals in authoring complex contracts. Using Contract Expert, organizations can
define their business policy rules that govern the contract clauses to be included in a
purchasing or sourcing document.
Contract Expert rules are defined in the contract terms library. Rules can be applicable
to specific templates or applied globally for all contracts authored in the organization.
During authoring, Contract Expert leads you through a contract creation questionnaire
and automatically adds needed clauses based on the responses that you provided
In addition to author responses, policy rules can also be based on the business terms
and other values contained in the purchasing or sourcing document, such as purchasing
category, payment term, and agreed contract amount. For example, buying
organizations may require additional clauses in contracts for the purchase of hazardous
materials, or contracts for which the supplier is located in a specific foreign country.
When setting up Contract Expert for authoring contracts consider the following:
Profile Options
•   Ensure that the Profile Option OKC: Enable Contract Expert is set to Yes before
    using Contract Expert. Even if the profile option is set to No, the Contract Expert
    Rules setup will still be available, but contract templates cannot be made Contract
    Expert enabled unless the profile option value is Yes

Value Set Restrictions:
•   Ensure that you understand the restrictions in using Value Sets provided in the
    Oracle Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide when you are creating
    questions based on response type 'List of Values'. For instance, Contract Expert
    does not support date based value sets. It is important you review these restrictions
    to avoid errors at later stages when creating rules.

•   Remember that deleting a value set or changing the name of a value set, after using
    it in a question, could potentially cause system issues when the question is used in a
    business document during contract authoring.

Contract Templates and Contract Expert
•   Contract Templates must be Contract Expert enabled in order to use Contract
    Expert in business documents.

•   When a global template is copied in a local organization, the rules from the global
    template are not copied over. However, if the local organization already has rules
    that are assigned to all templates, you would notice that those rules are available for
    the template you just created.

•   Currently, the system allows you to create and approve contract templates that are
    Contract Expert enabled without any clauses. However, from an implementation
    perspective, it is recommended that you provide at least the outline structure in the
    template. It would be useful to define all the sections of the contract and the order




                                              Implementation and Other Considerations    5-7
and numbering sequence that needs to be used for these sections.

                  •    It is recommended that you provide a Default Section assignment for clauses that
                       are used in Contract Expert rules. This ensures that the clauses are placed in
                       appropriate sections when Contract Expert is used on a contract. Contract Expert
                       uses the following order to determine the section into which an expert clause is
                       placed on a contract:
                       •   Obtain the Default Section assignment from the Clause Definition.

                       •   If the default section assignment is not found in the clause definition, get the
                           Default Section assignment from the template.


                  •    You must create a contract template revision to update any of the Contract Expert
                       fields. However, note that if you update the Expert Clauses Mandatory check box or
                       the Default Section field by creating a revision, the changes take effect on all new
                       and existing business documents the next time Contract Expert is used on a
                       business document even though the template may not have been reapplied on the
                       business document.

                  •    Exception to the previous point: If you disable Contract Expert on a contract
                       template revision, this will not impact existing business documents that have
                       already run Contract Expert using the original version of the contract template,
                       unless the contract template is reapplied on a business document. In other words,
                       you can continue to run Contract Expert on the business document until you
                       explicitly reapply the contract template.

                  •    Note that if you choose to check Expert Clauses Mandatory on a contract template,
                       all expert clauses will be made mandatory. Use this only if this is the desired
                       behavior. Clauses that are made mandatory cannot be removed from the business
                       document.

                  Creating Expert Rules
                  •    Remember Questions and Constants can be reused across multiple organizations.
                       You do not need to create these in every organization

                  •    Questions used in rules must be manually sequenced in the order in which you
                       expect the sales personnel or a contract administrator to answer them. Dependent
                       questions must be carefully placed under the main question so that they flow
                       logically as the users are answering questions.

                  •    Remember rules are unique to an organization. So, even if you have similar rules in
                       different organizations, you will have to create these rules individually in each
                       organization. Unlike clauses or templates, rules cannot be copied across
                       organizations.




5-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•   During implementation, pay additional attention to the Apply to all Templates
                   check box on a rule. Use it only if you are sure the rule will apply without exception
                   to all templates (current and future) created in the organization.

               •   Note that even though draft clauses are allowed to be included in a contract
                   template, this does not apply to contract expert rules assigned to that template. All
                   clauses used in rules must be in Approved status.

               •   Note that numeric value sets are not supported for questions with response type of
                   List of Values. If the response to your question is a number, remember to use a
                   constant instead.


Deliverables
               Deliverables are contractual commitments and obligations that can be associated to a
               contract template. This feature is specific to Oracle Procurement Contracts. Some
               considerations for using deliverables include:
               •   Contract Templates: You may have a common contract template that supports
                   multiple document types across Oracle Sourcing and Oracle Purchasing. When
                   such a template is applied to a purchasing document, clauses marked as
                   "Provisions" and deliverables of type "Negotiation" are not copied to the purchasing
                   document.

               •   Comments: When defining a deliverable on a contract template, the comments that
                   you enter provide additional details of the purpose of the deliverable, to the buyer
                   when the buyer authors the contract deliverables. This information, in the
                   Comments field, is not available to the supplier from the iSupplier Portal.

               •   Deliverable Types: Types of deliverable include Contractual, Internal Purchasing,
                   and Negotiation.
                   If a contract template, with all types of deliverables attached to it, is applied to a
                   sourcing document, all the deliverables are copied to the sourcing document.
                   However, only Negotiation type of deliverables can be acted upon during the
                   sourcing event. Applying the same contract template to a purchasing document will
                   not copy the Negotiation type deliverables.


Variables
               Oracle Procurement Contracts supports the following types of variables:
               •   System

               •   User-defined

               •   Deliverable




                                                             Implementation and Other Considerations    5-9
Note: Oracle Procurement Contracts does not support the Table
                               type variable.



                  Implementation considerations for setting up contract variables include:
                  •    Use the Value Set functionality to define values for the user-defined variables.

                  Other considerations for using contract variables include:
                  •    When using the Display Clauses feature in the Variables library, the clauses listed
                       are specific to the organization that you are currently in.

                  •    You cannot delete a variable if another procurement organization has used this
                       variable in a clause.
                       So if the system does not let you delete a variable that is not used in any clauses in
                       your organization, it is possible that another procurement organization is using the
                       variable in a clause.

                  •    To view the definition of a system variable used in Oracle Procurement Contracts,
                       you must click the Variable Name link in the Variables library. You cannot alter the
                       definition of system variables.
                       For the seeded system variables, see the System Variables, page D-7 section.



Negotiate Contracts

Process Overview
                  The contract negotiation process includes the stages of creating a sourcing document
                  with contract terms, publishing it, gathering responses, and finally making an award.


Online Negotiation for Oracle Sourcing Documents
                  To enable online negotiation of procurement contracts, Oracle Sourcing must be
                  implemented.
                  In addition to the standard negotiation processes in Oracle Sourcing, Oracle
                  Procurement Contracts enables buyers and suppliers to negotiate on the contractual
                  terms during a sourcing event and to capture additional information through
                  supplier-updatable contractual variables.
                  Using Oracle Procurement Contracts, buyers and suppliers can manage deliverables
                  that represent obligations arising from the negotiation process. They indicate the
                  success or failure of the fulfillment of the deliverable by changing the status of the
                  deliverable for the negotiation.
                  For example, a buyer may require a sourcing supplier to give a project proposal
                  presentation within a month of bid acknowledgement, and can define this requirement




5-10    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
as a negotiation deliverable. The supplier performs the presentation, and updates the
                deliverable status online.

                        Note: After buyers award business to a supplier, they can create a
                        purchasing document from a sourcing document. All the contract terms
                        are copied over except those that are specific to the sourcing document.


                For more information on general negotiation operations in Oracle Sourcing, see the
                Oracle Sourcing online Help.


Offline Negotiation for Oracle Purchasing Documents
                In an offline business scenario, a buyer creates a draft contract in Oracle Purchasing.
                The buyer and supplier then conduct negotiations offline. When both parties agree on
                the contractual details, including the contract terms, the buyer submits the contract for
                internal approval.


Implementation and Other Considerations
                This section covers the implementation and other considerations for:
                •   Authoring Negotiation Document, page 5-11

                •   Contract Terms Flow Down, page 5-12

                •   Contract Terms Validation in Oracle Sourcing, page 5-13

                •   Online Contract Negotiations, page 5-13

                •   Sourcing Templates Versus Contract Templates, page 5-13

                •   Approval Workflow, page 5-13


Authoring Negotiation Documents
                Implementation considerations for setting up the process of authoring negotiation with
                contract terms are:
                •   Contract Document Attachment:
                    •   Oracle Purchasing supports the use of contract document attachments on a
                        purchasing document, but Oracle Sourcing does not. To include additional
                        contract-related documents in an online negotiation, you can add them to a
                        sourcing document as a regular document attachment.

                    •   If you need to include these documents in the purchasing document, when the
                        negotiation is awarded, you must ensure that the purchase order is not
                        submitted for approval automatically from Oracle Sourcing. To do this, users of




                                                             Implementation and Other Considerations    5-11
Oracle Sourcing should make sure the Initiate Approval check box is not
                           selected during the award process.
                           As a result, the created purchasing document will have a status of Incomplete
                           and is not automatically routed for approval and signatures. At this point, you
                           can upload these attachments and classify them as Contract category in the
                           Manage Contract Document page.

                       •   Once the purchasing document is approved, you cannot attach any documents
                           with the Contract category unless you revise the purchasing document.

                                   Note: The supplier-updatable variables is a feature available
                                   only in Oracle Sourcing. So even if a purchasing document has
                                   such a variable, suppliers cannot update it from the Oracle
                                   iSupplier Portal application.



                  Other factors to consider when implementing the process of authoring negotiation with
                  contract terms are:
                  •    Flow down of Provision and Negotiation Deliverables:
                       •   You can define contractual, negotiation, and internal purchasing types of
                           deliverables to a sourcing document. Only negotiation deliverables can be acted
                           upon during the negotiation process.


                  •    Supplier Updatable Variables:
                       •   In the Contract Terms Library you can define a variable and enable it for
                           supplier updates. On sourcing documents, such as a bid, bidders are asked to
                           propose a value for these variables, which may be later used for analysis during
                           the award process. The values provided by the bidder in the awarded bid are
                           automatically carried over to the purchasing document.

                       •   You can use the user-defined variables feature to request additional
                           information, such as a DUNS Number, from a supplier that is then printed in
                           the final contract.



Contract Terms Flow Down
                  If you create a contract template and associate it with document types used only in
                  Oracle Sourcing, it will still be used on a purchasing document created after awarding a
                  sourcing document. You will not, however, be able to reapply the template to the
                  purchasing document. When you change the contract template, the current template
                  will not be available in the search results. Also, you cannot apply this template to a new
                  purchasing document.




5-12    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Contract Terms Validation in Oracle Sourcing
                When you publish or submit a sourcing document with contract terms for approval, the
                system validates the contact terms for errors and inconsistencies. The system only
                displays errors related to contract terms, but not the warning messages. Before
                publishing a contract or submitting it for approval, you should always validate the
                contract terms for inconsistencies using the Validate option in the Contract Terms page.
                For the seeded errors and warning messages, see List of QA Validations, page A-1.


Online Contract Negotiation
                As an integral part of the Oracle Sourcing process, Oracle Procurement Contracts
                enables you to leverage many of Oracle Sourcing's capabilities for the purpose of
                contract terms negotiation.
                Supported features include:
                •   Multi-round: You can use the multi-round functionality for negotiating contractual
                    terms. In the first round, you can invite multiple suppliers. Then, another round can
                    be initiated for detailed contractual negotiations with the selected supplier.

                •   Online Discussion: You can use the online discussion feature in Oracle Sourcing to
                    negotiate the detailed contract terms interactively.

                •   Amendments: Sourcing suppliers can request changes in contract terms. A sourcing
                    buyer can review the request and create amendments to the sourcing document if
                    needed.


Sourcing Template Versus Contract Templates
                Oracle Sourcing provides the Sourcing Template feature to ease the process of
                authoring sourcing documents. These templates include attributes, lines, supplier
                details, and so forth. With Oracle Procurement Contracts, you can also apply a contract
                template to a sourcing document. Contract templates are not part of the sourcing
                template. You can apply a contract template and a sourcing template separately to a
                sourcing document.


Approval Workflow
                Some sourcing documents with contract terms may require special approvals. You can
                achieve this by using the various seeded workflow functions, such as
                "STANDARDCONTRACT", which checks for the existence of contract terms in a
                document. You can customize the workflow to submit the document to different
                approvers, based on whether the document contains non-standard clauses or other
                criteria that is appropriate to your business.
                For details on seeded workflow functions in sourcing approval workflow, see Approval
                Workflows, page B-1.




                                                            Implementation and Other Considerations    5-13
Author Contracts

Process Overview
                  Contract authoring is the process of adding contract terms to a purchasing or sourcing
                  document.
                  In order to add contract terms, users of Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing must
                  first create their business documents.
                  If Oracle Procurement Contracts is installed, users can then add or view contract terms
                  in the following business documents:


                   Document Type                                  Required Application


                   RFI                                            Oracle Sourcing


                   RFQ                                            Oracle Sourcing


                   Auction                                        Oracle Sourcing


                   Response                                       Oracle Sourcing


                   Quote                                          Oracle Sourcing


                   Bid                                            Oracle Sourcing


                   Standard Purchase Order                        Oracle Purchasing


                   Blanket Purchase Agreement                     Oracle Purchasing


                   Contract Purchase Agreement                    Oracle Purchasing




Apply a Contract Template
                  To add contract terms, you must first apply a pre-approved contract template to the
                  business document.


Execute Contract Expert Rules
                  Expert enabled contract templates may have rules associated with them. Based on your
                  responses to the questionnaire and the commercial terms of the contract, expert
                  includes relevant clauses automatically in the contract.




5-14    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Modify and Add Contract Terms
                 After you have applied the contract template, you can modify the clauses and
                 deliverables that were added from the contract template. You can also add clauses and
                 deliverables specifically for the contract.


Manage Contract Document Attachments
                 With Oracle Procurement Contracts you can manage all your contract document
                 attachments specific to a contract. These attachments can be contractual agreements,
                 contract images or any supporting documents for the contract.


Validate the Contract
                 You can validate the contract, to check for inconsistencies and errors.


Preview the Contract
                 You can preview the contract, by generating and viewing an Adobe PDF version of the
                 complete business document.
                 For more information on creating business documents, see the Oracle Purchasing or
                 Oracle Sourcing online Help.


Implementation and Other Considerations
                 This section covers the implementation and other considerations for:
                 •      Establish Authoring Roles and Controls, page 5-15

                 •      Author Contracts, page 5-17

                 •      Supplier Authored Contracts, page 5-20

                 •      Master-Child Agreements, page 5-21

                 •      Global Agreements, page 5-22

                 •      Printed Contract Documents, page 5-23

                 •      Cancel Contracts, page 5-24


Establish Authoring Roles and Controls
                 Before using Oracle Procurement Contracts, you must determine the roles and
                 responsibilities of the application users. The responsibility, with the seeded Purchasing
                 Super User menu associated with it, will have full access to Oracle Procurement
                 Contracts features. To restrict any functionality to a certain user, you need to exclude
                 the corresponding security function from the user responsibility.




                                                                 Implementation and Other Considerations    5-15
Available function security options include:
                  •    No Contract Access: If you want to restrict the access to author or view contract
                       terms to certain users, ensure that the Manage Contract Terms function is excluded
                       from the responsibility provided to these users.

                  •    Standard Contracts Authoring: Identify the users who would author standard
                       contracts, but may not have permissions to author non-standard terms or to remove
                       contract terms on a contract. For these users, remove the following functions from
                       their responsibilities:
                       •   Allow Non-standard Terms

                       •   Override Authoring Controls


                  •    Non-standard Contracts Authoring: These are users in your organization with
                       special responsibilities who can negotiate and author non-standard terms. For these
                       users, remove the Override Authoring Controls function from their responsibilities.

                  •    Super User Privileges: These are users in your organization with overriding
                       privileges. They are able to override standard privileges, to edit clauses that are text
                       protected, or delete mandatory clauses. Use the menu from the seeded Oracle
                       Procurement Contracts responsibility for these users.

                  For the functions that are available in Oracle Procurement Contracts for user security,
                  see the Seeded Responsibility section of Appendix D, page D-1.
                  The following table displays the differences between a responsibility with full access to
                  Procurement Contracts functionality to another responsibility without any access to
                  Oracle Procurement Contracts features.


                   Full Access to Procurement Contracts             No Access to Procurement Contracts


                   PO Entry form: The Terms window displays         PO Entry form: The Terms window displays
                   the Contract Terms region. Buttons are           the Contract Terms region. Buttons are
                   enabled, varied by the phase of the Authoring    disabled and, if applicable, users can view the
                   flow.                                            contract template name.


                   Print capability: The generated purchase order   Print capability: The generated purchase order
                   PDF document includes the contract terms         PDF document only includes the purchase
                   along with purchase order details.               order details.


                   PO Summary form: The With Contract Terms         PO Summary form: The With Contract Terms
                   check box is visible and enabled.                check box is visible and enabled. Also, users
                                                                    can obtain a list of the purchase orders, open
                                                                    the purchase order, but not view the contract
                                                                    terms.




5-16    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Full Access to Procurement Contracts           No Access to Procurement Contracts


                   Copy Function: Users can view the Contract     Copy Function: Users can view the Contract
                   Terms copy choices, all radio buttons are      Terms copy choices, radio buttons are
                   enabled.                                       enabled. Also, users can copy the purchase
                                                                  order with contract terms to a new purchase
                                                                  order, but cannot view the contract terms on
                                                                  the new document.


                   View Contract Terms: Users can view contract   View Contract Terms: From the PO Summary
                   terms from the PO Summary form.                form, users cannot view contract terms. The
                                                                  menu option is displayed but disabled.


                   The Contract Terms Library setup navigation    The Contract Terms Library setup navigation
                   and Manage Deliverables page is accessible.    and Manage Deliverables page is not
                                                                  accessible.




Author Contracts
                   To create a contract, you can choose one of the following approaches:
                   •   New Contract: To author a contract, you can create a new purchasing document
                       and then apply an appropriate contract template to the document. In the new
                       contract, you can add or modify contract terms that were brought in from the
                       contract template.

                   •   Oracle Sourcing: You can set up a sourcing document, with contract terms, to
                       automatically create a purchasing document with contract terms after an award is
                       made.

                   •   Copy Purchasing Document: You can create a contract by copying an existing
                       contract. While copying, you have the following options:
                       •   Copy the contract terms from the original contract as-is.

                       •   Copy the contract terms from the original contract, but choose the latest
                           versions of the clauses from the Contract Terms Library.

                       •   Do not copy the contract terms. In this case, you can start in the copied
                           purchasing document by applying a default template or choosing another.


                   •   Purchasing Open Interface: You can use the existing Purchasing Open Interface to
                       create purchasing documents. However, contract terms cannot be imported using
                       the open interface. You should always import the purchasing document in the
                       Incomplete status if you intend to apply a contract template subsequently.




                                                                  Implementation and Other Considerations    5-17
Finally, when adding standard clauses to a procurement contract, if you perform a
                  keyword search and encounter the error message "You have encountered an
                  unexpected error. Please contact your System Administrator", it is possible that
                  technical issues exist with the text index for clauses. If the text index has not been
                  created, run the concurrent programs -- as detailed in the Using the Keyword Search
                  Feature section -- to resolve the issue.


Using Contract Expert
                  The contract template for your business document must be Contract Expert enabled in
                  order to use this feature, except in the following case:
                  •    If you have applied a Contract Expert enabled contract template to a business
                       document, and then disabled Contract Expert in the contract template, you can
                       continue to use Contract Expert on the business document, as long as you have not
                       explicitly reapplied the contract template to the business document.

                  Remember the following when you are answering Contract Expert questions on a
                  business document:
                  •    Before you submit the business document for approval, you must answer all the
                       mandatory questions.

                  •    If you want to edit responses to questions that depended on others, you must edit
                       the lowest-level questions first, then work back up the hierarchy as far as you
                       require. Changing the response to a parent question without first blanking the
                       response to a dependent question will not cause the dependent question to be
                       removed from the list of questions.

                  •    You may select a blank answer to a lower-level question to remove it from the list of
                       questions.

                  •    If the response for a question is numeric, and you do not provide a value, the
                       system uses 0 as the default value. It is strongly recommended that you provide a
                       value, otherwise Contract Expert may bring in or remove clauses based on the
                       response of 0.

                  Remember to run Contract Expert if you have made changes to the business document.
                  For instance, if you have changed value of Payment Terms in your business document
                  and the change needs to bring in a different clause, you must run contract expert again
                  to bring in the revised set of clauses into the document.
                  If contract expert brings in clauses under a default section and you decide to move the
                  clauses under different sections, remember to remove the empty sections from the
                  document. The system will not do this automatically.
                  Remember, if a clause, brought in by Contract Expert, has been made non-standard or
                  replaced by an alternate, the system will not bring back the original clause the next time
                  Contract Expert is run. However, if you have removed the clause from the document




5-18    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
and the clause is still recommended, it will be brought back into the document.
                If you have Contract Expert rule with a condition that uses the operator 'Not In' for a
                variable (for example, Payment Terms) and assume the business document does not
                have any payment terms filled in yet, the system will treat null as a valid value in this
                condition and execute the rule. Remember this behavior when defining rules with 'Not
                In'. So, in this case, if you wanted Clause A to be brought into the document if Payment
                Terms was Not In 'Net 30, Net 45 or Net 60', even though the document has no payment
                terms defined, Clause A will be brought into the document


Using the Contract Deviations Report
                Deviations are changes to contract terms in a business document that make them
                different from the standards established by the following:
                •   The contract terms in the contract template associated with the business document.

                •   Contract Expert rules, if they apply to the business document

                        Note: Because deviations are based on contract terms and rules
                        associated with a contract template, the concept of contract term
                        deviations does not apply to business documents whose Contract
                        Source is attached document.
                        Remember, not every change to the business document is reported as a
                        deviation. For instance, if the section name has been modified or the
                        clauses reordered within the document, these are not deviations.


                Remember, the Contract Approval Abstract is a powerful mechanism to report
                justifications for the contract deviations. If you report contract deviations in a special
                layout, you have several options:
                •   You can modify the layout template for the deviations report to incorporate your
                    unique formatting needs.

                •   You can download the system generated deviations report , including the approval
                    abstract, and format it offline and attach this offline document for approval.
                    Remember to use the Category 'Approval Abstract' if you want to attach this
                    document for approval. Only documents attached in the categories 'Contract' and
                    'Approval Abstract' will be attached to the approval notification.

                If you plan on using your document attachment as the contract deviations report, do
                not select the Generate for Approval check box in the document to avoid potentially
                attaching duplicate and incorrect reports in the approval notification.
                Impact of Contract Expert on Deviation Reports
                There are special considerations regarding Contract Expert and the reporting of
                deviations:




                                                               Implementation and Other Considerations    5-19
•    If Contract Expert has never been run on the business document, the deviation
                       report will not report any Contract Expert related errors. If you validate the contract
                       terms of the business document, the validation process will report a warning that
                       Contract Expert has not been run.

                  •    If Contract Expert has been run on the business document, the deviation report will
                       not report any Contract Expert related errors in the following cases:
                       •   Incomplete configuration: You have not provided responses to all the questions.

                       •   Invalid configuration: There are system issues with Contract Expert.


                  •    In both cases, remember to validate the contract terms of the business document to
                       review the errors in the validation report. If Contract Expert has been run on the
                       business document, and you run the deviation report, the system also runs the
                       Contract Expert process. This evaluates the conditions and determines if the clauses
                       on the document satisfy the conditions. If the results indicate that additional clauses
                       should be included or that some clauses should be excluded, these will individually
                       be reported as deviations.


Automatic Application of Contract Templates
                  If you have enabled the automatic application of contract templates for a Purchasing
                  document, that document can be automatically sourced to the appropriate vendor and
                  issued without any buyer intervention with your default contract. The default contract
                  template is applied to all outgoing standard purchase orders, blanket purchase
                  agreements, or contract purchase agreements.
                  Setup Steps:
                  1.   Set the system profile PO: Auto Apply Default Contract Templates to Yes.

                               Note: This can be set at the Site, Application, Responsibility, or
                               User level as is appropriate for your organization.



                  2.   Using the Contract Administrator responsibility create the contract template that
                       you wish to be a default and assign the document type to that contract with Default
                       Template enabled.


Supplier Authored Contracts
                  At times you may receive contract documents authored by a supplier or an external
                  party. For example, you purchase a software program and sign a software license
                  agreement with a software vendor. The software vendor authors the contract,
                  documenting the service level agreements that both parties have consented to. If you
                  need to track these supplier-authored contracts, perform the following:




5-20    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
1.   · Navigate to the Update Contract Source page.

                   2.   · Set the Authoring Party as Supplier.

                   3.   · Upload the contract document provided by the supplier.

                   Oracle Procurement Contracts supports two types of Contract Source, Attached
                   Document and Structured Terms. In the case of Structured Terms, the contract terms are
                   represented by the sections and clauses included in the contract. Otherwise the contract
                   terms are represented by the primary contract document that is uploaded for the
                   contract. You can utilize the Deliverables feature in either scenario.

Collaboration using Microsoft Word
                   Negotiating contract terms is one of the most important activities that contract
                   administrators, library administrators, approvers and users carry out. Editing is needed
                   in the internal phases of the contract lifecycle, when contracts are authored, reviewed
                   and approved, and also in the external phases, when contracts are negotiated and
                   signed. Oracle Procurement Contracts has an in-built word processor to effectively
                   manage authoring and editing. However, to achieve widespread adoption, Oracle
                   Procurement Contracts also supports standard applications and data, especially when
                   collaborating with external parties, who may not always have the ability or the
                   inclination to adopt new technologies proposed by the internal party.
                   Oracle Procurement Contracts supports import of the Microsoft Word document and
                   the synchronization of the changes with the structured contract stored in the system.
                   Modifications to the original contract can be reviewed before changes are accepted. This
                   two-way integration with Microsoft Word streamlines the contract collaboration
                   process involving the buyer, contract administrator, legal and supplier. It also provides
                   a non-intrusive, easy to use, bidirectional and reliable integration solution.

                            Note: For full synchronization with Oracle Procurement Contracts, the
                            Microsoft Word document should be in Microsoft Office 2003 XML
                            format (also known as WordprocessingML). It must have been
                            originally exported from Oracle Procurement Contracts using the Word
                            Export Function.




Master-Child Agreements
                   Your organization may have a master service agreement (master contract) with a group
                   of pre-approved suppliers, and later you create separate contracts (child contract) for
                   specific transactions. For example, your company already has negotiated a master
                   service agreement for general insurance and liability clauses with an advertising firm.
                   Your company now wants to negotiate a separate contract for a specific advertising
                   campaign with the same general insurance and liability clauses. In this case, you can
                   design a campaign-specific child contract that references the master contract for its
                   general liability and insurance clauses.




                                                                 Implementation and Other Considerations    5-21
To achieve this, you can consider one of the following options:
                  •    Capture the master agreement as a global blanket purchase agreement or a contract
                       purchase agreement (global or regular) with the general insurance and liability
                       clause. Subsequently create a standard purchase order to capture the child contract.
                       This standard purchase order should reference the master agreement and should
                       have project-specific contract terms

                  •    Model a contract purchase agreement after a master agreement and reference it in a
                       standard purchase agreement, if there are no specific lines in the master agreement.

                  Referencing a master contract in a standard purchase order does not copy the contract
                  terms from the master contract to the standard purchase order. Instead, the document
                  number of the global blanket agreement or the contract purchase agreement is
                  referenced in the standard purchase order.
                  Furthermore, contract terms cannot be associated with planned purchase orders and
                  blanket releases. Therefore, do not use a regular blanket purchase agreement as the
                  master contract, if a child contract will need to have additional contract terms.


Global Agreements
                  Contract templates that are applied to a global agreement (for example, blanket
                  purchase agreement or contract purchase agreement) are also effective in the operating
                  unit that references the global agreement.
                  Consider the following business case for an organization with two operating units, OU1
                  and OU2:
                  •    You create a contract template in OU1.

                  •    You create a global agreement in OU1 and apply the contract template.

                  •    You enable the global agreement for OU2.

                  You can create global agreement in a central procurement organization and apply this
                  contract template. If you enable the global agreement for other organizations, all
                  operating units can utilize the contract terms associated with the global agreement, and
                  you do not need to author them again in these operating units.
                  Since the contract terms are now referenced in multiple operating units, while creating a
                  contract template ensure the terms are legally applicable to all the operating units in
                  which it is referenced directly or indirectly.


Miscellaneous Contracts
                  With Contract Repository you can create miscellaneous contracts, such as license
                  agreements, non-disclosure agreements, and merger agreements, which are not
                  specifically related to the purchasing function. You can create purchase agreements for
                  miscellaneous items that are outside the normal purchasing flow, for which full




5-22    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
execution capabilities are not required.


Add Contract Terms to Existing Contracts
                Your organization may have critical, high value contracts already is place. You can add
                contract terms to such contracts and start reaping the benefits provided by Oracle
                Procurement Contracts such as embedding contract clauses on the contract and
                managing deliverables.


Printed Contract Documents
                Implementation considerations for printed contract documents include:
                •   Customize Layout Template: Oracle Procurement Contract enables you to generate
                    your purchasing document with contract terms in PDF format. You can customize
                    the layout of the PDF document. Important factors to consider include:
                    •   Contract Format: You can create your own format for the contract document.
                        For example, you may want to place the company logo on contract documents.
                        After creating a custom XSL-FO stylesheet, you need to upload it into the XML
                        Publisher template repository using the XML Publisher Administrator
                        responsibility. Currently, Oracle Procurement Contracts only supports layout
                        templates of type XSL-FO.
                        For more information, see the XML Publisher User Guide. For details on how to
                        set up layout template, see Setting Up Layout Templates , page 4-13.

                    •   Translation: You can translate the XSL-FO stylesheet to the local language so
                        the content in the PDF file is created in the desired language.

                    •   Association: After creating your layout template, you need to associate the
                        layout template to the document type that you need to use it with. Use the
                        Document Types form to associate your layout template to the document type.
                        The layout templates that Oracle Procurement Contracts uses are Document
                        Type Layout and Contract Terms Layout. The Document Type Layout template
                        defines the Cover Page and the Purchasing or Sourcing Document Details. The
                        Contract Terms Layout template defines the Amendment, Terms, and Signature
                        Block.
                        The printed procurement contract consists of the Document Layout followed by
                        the Contract Terms Layout. Both templates should be consistent and created
                        with that knowledge in mind. For more information on seeded layout
                        templates, see Layout Template, page D-1 .


                You should review your layout requirements for all these components, evaluate the
                default print layouts, and decide if changes are needed.
                Other considerations for printed contract documents include:




                                                            Implementation and Other Considerations    5-23
•   Printed document content: The system generates contract documents in PDF
                       format. A contract document includes the following components:
                       •   Cover Page: This page contains the contract effectivity text for new contracts. In
                           case of amendments to a contract, you can have different verbiage in the cover
                           page. It also has the summary of the changes that the submitter enters while
                           submitting the contract for approval using the Approval form.

                       •   Purchasing or Sourcing Document Details: This section includes the details on
                           the purchasing or sourcing document, such as supplier address, item, need by
                           date, and ship to location in a tabular structure.

                       •   Amendment: This section lists the details of the changes to each clause, section,
                           and deliverable, after a Sourcing or Purchasing document is amended.

                       •   Terms: All the clause text and sections as heading, along with the deliverables,
                           are printed in this section.

                       •   Signature: This section is for obtaining signatures of the relevant parties
                           involved in the contract.

                               Note: : If you upload a contract document as the representation of
                               the contract that was not generated by Oracle Procurement
                               Contracts, the system will not be able to merge the commercial
                               section and the contract terms section of the Oracle Purchasing PDF
                               document.




Review Contract Terms
                   Implementation considerations for printed contract documents include:
                   •   Microsoft Word Integration: You can export the section and clauses included by a
                       contract template in a Microsoft Word format. You can send this Microsoft Word
                       Document to you legal user for review. You can perform spell check and track
                       changes utilizing the features provided by Microsoft Word.
                       If the review comments are minimal, you can make those changes to the clauses
                       and retain the structure of the contract terms. Otherwise, you can upload the
                       Microsoft Word document as a representation of the contract.

                   •   Contract Deviation Report: Oracle Procurement Contract enables you to review the
                       deviation in the contract terms compared to the standard contract template. You
                       can attach the Contract Deviation Report to the approval notification.


Cancel Contracts
                   Purchasing document with contract terms can only be canceled from the Enter PO form




5-24    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
and not from the PO Summary form.


Approve and Sign Contracts

Process Overview

Approve Contracts
                    A contract must be approved internally by management, and optionally by legal
                    professionals, before it is sent to the supplier for signing. Depending on the complexity
                    of your contracts, you can route them to different or additional approvers. For example,
                    if some contracts contain non-standard clauses that are specially negotiated, you can
                    route those contracts to legal professionals for additional review and approval.
                    See the Oracle Purchasing online Help for more details.

Sign Contracts
                    You must identify contract signatories and establish guidelines for the contract
                    signature process and communicate it across the organization. Oracle Procurement
                    Contracts supports two ways to sign a contract, manually or electronically. In both
                    cases, the supplier's acceptance of the contract is recorded.
                    Electronic Signature: To enable electronic signature, Oracle E-Records must be
                    installed. During the award process in Oracle Sourcing, you choose "Document And
                    Signature" as the acceptance criteria to require the supplier to electronically sign the
                    purchasing document that is auto-created.
                    In Oracle Purchasing, to require electronic signature, you set the acceptance criteria to
                    "Document and Signature" while authoring a contract.
                    After the contract is approved internally, the supplier receives a notification for
                    signature. The supplier signs the contract online. A notification is sent to the buyer, who
                    then signs the contract online. Oracle E-Records keeps the signed contract copies in the
                    evidence store for future reference.

                            Note: When you create an amendment for a signed document, the
                            acceptance criteria is automatically set to "Document and Signature".
                            You must set acceptance criteria to "None" if you do not require the
                            amendments to be signed by the supplier.


                    Digital Signature: You can enable Digital Certificate based signatures for your
                    organization whether a contract is signed by supplier or the buyer. Oracle Procurement
                    Contracts utilizes Oracle Workflow technology to enable this feature. Oracle's digital
                    signature is PKCS7 compliant based on X.509 certificates. You need to obtain the digital
                    certificate from third party certificate provider and upload these certificates to the user's
                    browser and also the Oracle database.
                    See the Oracle Workflow User's Guide for details.




                                                                  Implementation and Other Considerations    5-25
Manual Signature: After the contract has been approved internally, the contract
                    document can be e-mailed, or printed and sent to the supplier for manual signature.
                    After the contract has been signed offline, the buyer can record the acceptance of the
                    contract in an Acceptances screen.
                    For more details on accepting contracts, see the Oracle Purchasing User's Guide.


Implementation and Other Considerations
                    This section covers the implementation and other considerations for:
                    •   Approve Contracts, page 5-26

                    •   Approval Workflow, page 5-27

                    •   Approvals in Oracle Procurement Contracts, page 5-27

                    •   Contract Statuses, page 5-27


Approve Contracts
                    The following factors are important to the approval process and your contract
                    administrators and buyers should be familiar with them:
                    •   With Oracle Procurement Contracts you can approve both purchasing documents
                        and legal terms through the existing purchasing approval workflow. As a result,
                        approvers in legal and business groups can approve the document through the
                        same approval process and thus minimize the disputes between the approvers in
                        two groups. When you design or update the PO Approval workflow, you need to
                        include approvers for legal terms.

                    •   You should make it a business practice to review all validations, including
                        warnings, to help identify potential issues with the contract data and reduce the
                        number of amendments.

                    •   You should also make it a business practice to run the Contract Deviations report
                        and review those change identified.

                    •   To upload a contract document attachment in the Contract category, you need to
                        initiate a new revision. You cannot classify a contract document attachment as
                        Contract, if the purchasing document is in the Approved status.

                    •   The contract template that is applied in the initial version of a contract cannot be
                        removed or changed after this version is signed and accepted by the supplier and
                        the buyer.

                    •   In a new version of a purchasing document, you cannot modify contract documents
                        that were carried over from a previous version. You can only delete them from the
                        current version and upload the modified version.




5-26    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•   In Oracle Procurement Contracts, buyers and suppliers can sign contracts manually
                        or electronically. Signer identity is authenticated by requiring users to reenter
                        usernames and passwords when signing contracts electronically or using a unique
                        digital certificate (issued by a certification authority).

                    •   The system-generated contract PDF is only attached to the document after
                        approval. If the PDF document is not attached after a purchasing document is
                        approved, ensure that the PO Output format in Oracle Purchasing setup is set to
                        PDF and the Approval workflow is functioning properly.


Approval Workflow
                    When a contract has a non-standard clause, you may want to route the contract to
                    additional or different reviewers for special approvals. You can achieve this by using
                    the workflow function seeded in the Purchasing Approval workflows.
                    For details on seeded workflow function, refer to the Approval Workflows appendix,
                    page B-1.

Approvals in Oracle Procurement Contracts
                    You should identify at which point in the business flow you want to customize your
                    approval workflow and you also want to identify the individuals who would be
                    performing the approval at each point. Given the various touch points described below,
                    consider the nature and extent of changes you would require to your various workflow
                    approval programs.
                    •   Approving Clauses: You approve clauses in the Contract Terms Library.

                    •   Approving Contract Templates: Standard clauses from the library are used for
                        creating contract templates. You approve templates in the Contract Terms Library.

                    •   Approval Before Publishing: A template can be applied to a sourcing document and
                        then you can submit the sourcing document for internal approvals before
                        publishing it to external parties.

                    •   Approval During Award: You can submit a sourcing document for internal
                        approvals before you make an award to a supplier.

                    •   Approving Purchase Orders: You can submit a purchasing document with contract
                        terms for approval.


Contract Statuses
                    With Oracle Procurement Contracts, the existing purchasing document status have
                    additional implications.
                    The table below lists the event in a contract life cycle and related purchasing document
                    status:




                                                                Implementation and Other Considerations    5-27
Event Description                               Status


                   Buyer has approval authority on the spending    Pre-approved
                   amount, but chooses to submit the purchasing
                   document for additional approval.


                   Internal approver rejects the purchasing        Rejected
                   document.


                   A purchasing document is approved by the        Pre-approved
                   internal approver and is waiting for supplier
                   and buyer signatures.


                   Supplier or buyer rejects the purchasing        Rejected
                   document during the signature process.




Execute and Monitor Contracts

Process Overview
                  A signed document can be executed through the regular shipment and receiving
                  processes supported by Oracle Purchasing. In addition, buyers and suppliers can
                  execute and track additional contractual obligations through the deliverables feature
                  provided by Oracle Procurement Contracts. It is important to note that buyers and
                  suppliers can only manage deliverables that are assigned to them.
                  This section covers the implementation and other considerations for:
                  •    Deliverables, page 5-28

                  •    Supplier Contacts, page 5-29

                  •    Search Contract Based On Clause Usage, page 5-29


Deliverables
                  The due date for a deliverable can be set to:
                  •    Fixed due date. For example, December 10th, 2005.

                  •    Relative Due Date. For example, 10 days after the agreement expires.

                  Deliverable due dates that cannot be resolved are not displayed on the Deliverables
                  page until the event that it refers to actually occurs. For example, the system cannot
                  resolve the due date for a deliverable, if it is set to "10 days after the purchase order is
                  closed" until the purchase order is actually closed. The reason is, the system does not




5-28    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
know when the contract will be closed. Users will not have visibility to the deliverables
                until the purchase order is closed.
                To avoid the above situation, consider selecting events for which the due dates can be
                resolved. For example, the "Agreement expires" event for blanket agreement can be
                resolved based on the expiry date of the agreement. In the case of standard purchase
                order, you may consider using the event "10 days after purchase order signed" instead
                of "10 days after purchase order closed."


Supplier Contacts
                During contract authoring, users can create one or more deliverables with a supplier
                contact associated with it. However, in order for the suppliers to follow through and
                manage these deliverables, they must have registered with Oracle iSupplier Portal as
                users of the application.


Search Contract Based On Clause Usage
                To improve future contract negotiations, or to comply with regulatory requirements,
                contract administrators or legal may need to periodically review and revise their
                contract standards. Analyzing the contract language used in existing contracts is a
                critical step in effectively updating existing standards. Oracle Procurement Contracts
                enables users to search for all contracts where certain clauses are used, or have been
                modified. The search can be filtered by various criteria like contracts with a specific
                supplier, contracts above a certain amount, contracts for one or all Operating Units, or
                contracts authored using a specific template. Information on the number of times a
                certain clause has been used or modified is also provided as part of the results.
                Using Oracle Procurement Contracts you can perform the following kinds of search:
                •   Contract Administrators can search for all contracts across multiple organizations
                    that have any clause pertaining to a specific clause type. For example, 'Termination'
                    to identify if any clauses are being created non-standard.

                •   Legal professionals can find all contracts that use a specific clause that needs to be
                    modified due to new regulations.

                •   Contract Administrators and legal professionals can search for keywords and text
                    from Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing and repository contracts.

                            Note: Users can search for versions only if the contract belongs to
                            Oracle Purchasing or the Repository Contracts.




Administer Contract Changes




                                                              Implementation and Other Considerations    5-29
Process Overview
                  You can amend a contract, including contract terms, at any time after the contract is
                  signed. An amendment increments the version of the Sourcing or Purchasing
                  document.
                  A contract amendment may be initiated by the buyer or the supplier. Buyers need to
                  review and approve change requests submitted by suppliers. To incorporate changes,
                  buyers need to manually update the contract terms after approving the change request.
                  For details on general amendments in purchasing and sourcing documents, see the
                  Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing online Help.


Implementation and Other Considerations
                  This section covers the implementation and other considerations for setting up:
                  •    Amendment Cover Pages, page 5-30

                  •    Supporting Documents, page 5-30

                  •    Change Requests, page 5-30

                  •    Printing Amendments, page 5-31

                  •    Amendment Workflow Functions, page 5-31


Amendment Cover Pages
                  With Oracle Procurement Contracts you can create custom layout for the cover page for
                  an amendment document. For detailed instruction on customizing your contract
                  document lay, refer to Setting Up Contract Terms Library.


Supporting Documents
                  If you have supporting documents for a contract that are critical, then changes to these
                  documents may need to be governed by formal revision process. A formal revision
                  process may require users to submit the changes for internal approval and supplier
                  signature before the changes become effective. For your reference, changes are
                  displayed in the PO Revision History page. To require a formal revision process, you
                  should categorize the supporting document as a "Contract"' in the contract document
                  attachment.


Change Requests
                  After the contract is signed and accepted by both parties, it can be executed. The
                  supplier can request changes to contract terms using Oracle iSupplier Portal. After the
                  buyer has reviewed and accepted the changes requested, the system does not
                  automatically reflect the changes to the contract terms. The buyer need to revise the




5-30    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
purchase order and amend the relevant contract terms.


Printing Amendments
               You can make changes to a contract after it is accepted and signed by the supplier and
               the buyer and it is ready to be executed. Any modification would appear in the
               Amendment section of the contract PDF file, if the PO: Generate Amendment
               Documents profile option is set to Yes.
               Other considerations include:
               •   Amendment Descriptions: When you amend a contract clause or deliverable, you
                   can annotate each amendment by entering text in the Amendment Description field
                   that is specific to that particular amendment. In order to provide the business
                   context and reason for amendments, you should provide an amendment
                   description for all amendments.

               •   Print Text feature: While amending a clause in a contract, you can use the Print Text
                   feature to print the amended clause text in the Amendments section of the printed
                   contract, in addition to the amendment description.


Amendment Workflow Functions
               Any changes made to a signed contract would require approval. Oracle Procurement
               Contract provides you with additional workflow functions that you can use for routing
               the contract for special approvals, in case contract terms are amended. For the seeded
               workflow functions in the sourcing and purchasing approval workflows, see the
               Approval Workflows appendix, page B-1.


Renegotiate and Close Out Contracts

Process Overview
               When a contract nears expiration, you may renegotiate or close out the contract. Using
               Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing, you can renegotiate the business elements of an
               existing contract.
               If Oracle Procurement Contracts is enabled, you can additionally include contract terms
               during your renegotiation process.
               During the closeout process, you may require one or more tasks to be performed, such
               as submitting a contract performance report, or creating a budget versus actual cost
               analysis. With Oracle Procurement Contracts enabled, you can model these tasks as
               internal deliverables and track them as part of the contract.
               For more information on renegotiating and closing out contracts, see the Oracle
               Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing online Help.




                                                           Implementation and Other Considerations    5-31
Implementation and Other Considerations

Monitor Expirations
                      You can specify start and end dates on a blanket or a contract purchase agreement. To
                      track the expiration of the contract, you can create an internal deliverable with a due
                      date such as "one month before agreement expires." The person responsible for the
                      deliverable would be notified and can take necessary actions before the contract expires.
                      Note that standard purchase orders do not support start and end effective dates. To
                      support closeout and renewal, you can use the Purchase Order Signed event or a fixed
                      due date event when setting up the deliverables.

Contract Renegotiation
                      Contracts that are currently executed may have to be renegotiated after they expire. You
                      can create a sourcing RFQ or a Reverse Auction from a purchasing document, like a
                      blanket purchase agreement. The relevant attributes pertaining to the purchasing
                      document are copied over to the newly created sourcing document. With Oracle
                      Procurement Contracts, the contract terms associated with the purchasing document are
                      copied over to the sourcing document as well.




5-32    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
6
       Setting Up Contract Terms Library

This chapter covers the following topics:
•   Contract Terms Library
•   Managing Standard Clauses
•   Creating Standard Clauses
•   Defining Related Clauses
•   Assigning Clauses to Folders
•   Approving Clauses
•   Managing Clauses Across Organizations
•   Searching for Clauses
•   Contract Clause Analysis Report
•   Managing Changes to Standard Clauses
•   Importing Clauses
•   Managing Contract Templates
•   Creating Contract Templates
•   Adding Sections and Clauses
•   Creating Contract Template Deliverables
•   Validating Templates
•   Preview Templates
•   Approving Templates
•   Searching for Templates
•   Managing Changes to Contract Templates
•   Defining Global Templates
•   Managing Variables




                                              Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-1
•    Managing Sections
                  •    Managing Folders



Contract Terms Library
                  Contract terms Library is the central library of all pre-approved clauses and contract
                  templates that can be used to create contracts across the enterprise.
                  The library gives the legal department and business organizations a powerful tool to
                  create reusable clauses. Clauses can be grouped into sections and stored as reusable
                  contract templates to codify best practices. Templates provide a framework for rapid
                  assembly and creation of contracts. These capabilities provide the foundations for
                  contract process standardization controls across the enterprise. Another key feature of
                  the Contracts Terms Library is the ability to establish global standards and enforce these
                  standards enterprise-wide. Organizations can manage clauses and templates centrally
                  in a global organization. Local organizations can then use or duplicate these clauses and
                  templates and customize them to meet their own specific local requirements.
                  In addition to standard clauses and contract templates, the Contract Terms Library
                  supports the creation and maintenance of a library of folders, sections and variables.



Managing Standard Clauses
                  A standard clause is the text that describes the legal or business language used to
                  author a contract. Clauses are drafted based on both business and statutory
                  requirements.



Creating Standard Clauses
                  You can create standard clauses in the following ways:
                  •    Create a new clause

                  •    Duplicate an existing clause


                  Creating a New Clause:
                  1.   Navigate to the Create Clauses page.
                       Navigation: Library > Clauses tab > Create Clause button

                  2.   Enter the following attributes:
                       •   Number. This field can be manually entered or automatically generated. To
                           automatically generate the number, see the Setting Up Auto Numbering
                           section.




6-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•   Clause Title: Enter a title for the clause. The clause title is unique within an
    organization.

•   Display Name: Optionally enter the display name for the clause. The display
    name does not have to be a unique name. Your organization could have
    alternate names with the same display name. The system uses the Display
    Name on a printed contract field. If you leave this field blank, the Clause Title is
    used as the display name.

•   Intent: Select the intent of the contracts that can use the clause. Select the Buy or
    Sell option from the list of values.

        Note: Based on the OKC: Clause Intent profile option setup, you
        can create clauses for buy, sell, or both intents. If you set the profile
        option to either Buy or Sell, the system provides read-only access to
        the Intent field. This profile option also governs other feature in the
        Contract Terms Library, including contract templates and variables.


•   Type: Use the Type field to classify the clause according to the business purpose
    (for example, General or Payment terms). Select a clause type from the list of
    values.

•   Default Section: Optionally select the default section from the list of values. You
    can use sections as heading to format contracts.

•   Description: Optionally enter a description for the clause.

•   Status: The system controls this field. During the creation process, the clause is
    in Draft status.

•   Version: The system generates the version number.

•   Start date. Accept the default or change the start date.

•   End date. Optionally enter an expiration date for the clause.

•   Provision. Provisions are used in negotiation documents in Oracle Sourcing
    only. If applicable, select the Provision check box.

•   Protect text. To prevent modification to the clause text in documents, select the
    protect Text check box.

•   Global. To make the clause available to all organizations, select the global check
    box. This field is only available in the Global operating unit.

•   Text. Enter the necessary text for the clause. Clause texts can include business




                                                   Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-3
variables. In the text area you can choose one of the following modes:
                           •   Rich Text. The Rich Text editor provides special formatting of the text that
                               is driven by business and legal requirements. The Rich Text editor provides
                               a Tool bar and a Text area.

                           •   Text. The Text mode provides a plain text area only. If you use the Rich
                               Text mode to enter the clause text and then toggle to the Text mode, the
                               system displays the HTML source for the text you have entered. However,
                               the system prints the clause using the Rich Text features even if you have
                               toggled to the Text mode.


                       •   Add Variables. Click Add Variables to search for available variables, The Add
                           Variables page appears. From this page you can search for available variables,
                           then click the Insert icon to add the variable that you want into your text, at the
                           location of the cursor within the text area. In the clause text, variables are
                           displayed as tags in the format [@variable name@].

                                    Note: If you do not use the Rich Text editor to author clause
                                    text, the system inserts the variables at the end of the test
                                    instead of where the cursor is located. You can use the Cut and
                                    Paste operation to move a variable tag, within the clause text to
                                    the appropriate location.



                       •   Instructions. Optionally enter instructions on how and when to use the clause
                           in a contract template or business document. Users can view these instructions
                           when they add the clause to a contract template or business document.

                       •   Allow Include by Reference. Select the check box to replace the clause text with
                           the Reference text when the clause is used in a contract. Optionally enter the
                           following information:
                           •   Reference Source. Provide the source of the clause that may not Be printed
                               in full text.

                           •   Reference Text. Enter the reference text. The system prints the reference text
                               instead of the clause text, on a printed contact.

                                        Note: If you select the Allow Include by Reference check
                                        box, the Reference Text field becomes mandatory.




                  3.   To complete your operation, select one of the following buttons:
                       •   Submit. To submit the clause for approval, click this button.




6-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•   Apply and Add Details. Click this button to save your work and move to the
                    Update Clauses page.

                •   Apply. Click Apply to save the clause and close the Create Clauses page.

                •   Cancel. Click Cancel to close the Create Clauses page without saving the clause.



           Duplicating an Existing Clause:
           You can use the Duplicate feature to create new clauses form existing ones. The
           Duplicate feature is available from the Search and View Clauses pages.
           1.   Navigate to the Search Clauses page.
                Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab

           2.   Search and select a clause. For more information , see the searching for Clauses
                section.

           3.   Click the Duplicate button.

           4.   In the New Clause Title field, enter a unique title.

           5.   Optionally choose to copy folders and related clauses.

           6.   Click the Save and Continue button.

           7.   Enter of change the information as describes in the Defining Clauses section.



Defining Related Clauses
           For any given clause, you can define alternate and incompatible clauses. You can use
           alternate clauses as a substitute for the main clause on a contract. Incompatible clauses
           cannot be used on the same contract.

                    Note: You can add alternate an incompatible clauses to an approved
                    clause without requiring the creation of a new version.


           1.   Navigate to the Create Clauses or Update Clauses page.

           2.   Open the Related Clauses subtab.

           3.   Click Add Another Row.

           4.   In the Relationship field, select one of the following options:




                                                                  Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-5
•   Alternate

                       •   Incompatible


                  5.   In the Clause Title field, enter the clause title. You can also use the List of Values
                       icon to search and select the clause.

                  6.   Click Save.

                  7.   Click Compare to compare related clauses. Select the two clauses that you want to
                       compare and then click the button.

                  8.   Click Compare with Current to compare the related clause with the current clause.
                       Select only one clause from the list and click the button

                  9.   Click Remove to delete a clause relationship.



Assigning Clauses to Folders
                  You can assign clauses to folders from the Update Clause page. Note that you must
                  have previously defined the folder
                  1.   navigate to the Clauses page.
                       Navigation: contract Terms Library > Clauses tab.

                  2.   Open a clause for update.

                  3.   Open the Clause Folders subtab.

                  4.   Click Add Another Row

                  5.   In the Name field, enter the folder name. You can also click the List of Values icon
                       to search and select the folder name.

                  6.   Click Save or Apply.



Approving Clauses
                  To make standard clauses available for use in contracts, they must be approved first.
                  You can
                  •    Approve once clause at a time.

                  •    Select and submit more than one clause for approval at the same time.

                  •    Respond to approval.




6-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•    Comment on either approval or rejection decision.

           You must have set up an approver first.

                    Note: The default workflow supports a single approver. However, you
                    can modify the workflow processes to include more approvers and
                    route approvals based in additional business conditions.


           1.   Navigate to the Clauses page.
                Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab.

           2.   Create a new clause or search and open a clause in Draft status.

           3.   Click Submit to
                •   Change the clause status from Draft to Pending Approval.

                •   Send a workflow notification to the approver.


           4.   The approver opens the notification and reviews the clause.

           5.   The approver either approves or rejects the clause. As a result
                •   The clause status is changed to Approved or Rejected.

                •   A workflow notification informs the author of the clause of the decision.




Managing Clauses Across Organizations
           This section discusses how organizations with global operations can manage clauses
           across multiple organizations. This feature is useful for companies that contract with
           customers across the globe with operations in different countries and locations.
           Organizations are identified based on the operating unit assignments in the define
           Organizations form. In this document, we refer to those operating units that have been
           set up to use the Contract Terms Library as organizations.
           A central organization can define global clauses and make them available for use by
           local organizations. To define global clauses, you need to identify your global
           organization, usually the corporate headquarters. The designated global organization is
           responsible for the creation of clauses for business terms that need to be enforced
           globally. On approval, the clauses are made available to local organizations. A
           workflow notification is sent to the local organizations that need to review the clause.
           In the local organizations, library administrators review the clause and decide if it needs
           to be modified to meet local requirements. If necessary, the clause is modified
           (localized) and routed for internal approvals. If not, the clause is adopted with no
           changes or modifications and routed internally for approvals. Alternatively, local




                                                                 Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-7
organizations can be set up to automatically adopt all global clauses.
                  Prior to creating global clauses, you must
                  •    Set up the OKC: Global Operating Unit profile option. This is a site level profile
                       option to determine the operating unit that can create global clauses and templates.
                       A check box to identify global type clauses and templates becomes available after
                       you set up this profile option.

                  •    Create global clauses in the global organization

                  •    Approve global clauses to make them available in local organizations.

                  This section covers the following topics:
                  •    Adoption of Global Clauses by Local Organizations, page 6-8

                  •    Creating Global Clauses, page 6-9

                  •    Notifying Local Operating Units, page 6-9

                  •    Reviewing Global Clauses for Adoption, page 6-9

                  •    Approving Global Clauses in Local Operating Units, page 6-11

                  •    Viewing Adoption Status, page 6-11

                  •    Adopting Global Clauses in a New Operating Unit, page 6-12


                  Adoption of Global Clauses by Local Organizations:
                  You can set up your local organizations to adopt global clauses automatically or
                  manually.
                  •    Auto adoption of global clauses. This feature provides automatic adoption of global
                       clauses to operating units that do not require a manual review and approval
                       process. For example, a company with more than one operating unit can define
                       global clauses and make them available to all operating units. During the workflow
                       approval for a global clause, when the clause is approved, the system verifies the
                       operating units that are set to adopt clauses automatically. The system
                       automatically adopts the global clause for these operating units with no manual
                       intervention.

                  •    Manually adopting or localizing global clauses. For operating units that require a
                       review and approval process, this feature enables them to make the global clauses
                       available for use in their own organization. The operating units can use one of the
                       following:
                       •   Adopt Global Clause as-is. Adopt the global clause without changes. The




6-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
system records the user name and system date and time of adoption along with
         the adopting organization. The local operating unit can adopt multiple global
         clauses at the same time. After adoption and approval of global clauses, the
         local operating unit can use the clauses to author contracts.

     •   Localize Global Clauses. Localize the global clause by making some changes to
         the clause or translating it to the language of the local organization. The system
         creates a copy of the clause in Draft status. During localizations, you can
         modify the clause text and add or delete variables from the text. You can then
         submit the local clause for approval. the system records the approver name and
         data as the adoption details for the clause. Note that if you are not changing the
         intent of the clause text and only translating it into a local language, you can
         select the translation Only check box. This is for informational purposes and
         can be used to report on why a clause was localized.



Creating Global Clauses:
Use these steps to create a global clause.
1.   Create a standard clause.

2.   Select the Global check box. This check box is only available in the designated
     global organization. When a global clause is approved, it remains global on all
     subsequent versions. However, if an earlier version of a clause is not global, you can
     make the subsequent versions global.

             Note: When a global clause is approved, it remains global on all
             subsequent versions. However, if an earlier version of a clause is
             not global, you can make the subsequent versions global.




Notifying Local Organizations:
When a global clause is approved, the system send a notification to the library
administrators, in all local organizations, to consider the clause for adoption. In case a
local organization is set to automatically adopt global clauses, a notification is sent to
these organizations informing the local administrators that a new global clause has been
automatically adopted for their organization. Note that library administrators must be
set up.


Reviewing for Adoption:
As the library administrator in a local organization, you can review and adopt global
clauses.
1.   Navigate to the Clauses page.
     Navigation: Contract terms Library > Clauses tab.




                                                      Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-9
2.   Search for Global clauses. For more information, see Searching for Clauses, page 6-
                       12.
                       Note that:
                       •   A global clause that is approved (in the global operating unit) is available for
                           adoption in local operating units. If a global clause is on hold or expired,
                           although the clause is displayed in the search results, local operating units
                           cannot adopt or localize it.

                       •   In a local operating unit, the first version of an adopted global clause must be
                           manually assigned to a folder that is created in that operating unit. However,
                           after adoption, the system assigns the subsequent versions of the global clause
                           to the same folder.

                       •   Each time that a new version is created and approved for a global clause, that
                           version becomes available for adoption in the local operating units. Each
                           version of a global clause must be adopted individually.


                  3.   In the Adoption Type field, choose available for Adoption

                               Note: For performance reasons, you cannot search for clauses by
                               the Adoption Type alone. In searching for clauses that are available
                               for adoption, you must enter additional search criteria such as
                               Clause Type or Keyword.



                  4.   Click Go to view the list of available clauses.

                  5.   Review every clause on a case-by-case basis and decide whether to adopt the clause
                       as-is or localize it.

                               •    If a previous version of a global clause was adopted as-is, you
                                    must adopt subsequent versions of the clause in the same
                                    manner. You cannot change the adoption type on subsequent
                                    versions on a clause.

                               •    If the first version of a global clause is localized and the next
                                    version is now available for adoption, when you choose to
                                    localize the second version, the Localize page displays the text
                                    from the localized version. Currently, the system does not
                                    provide a comparison of the current localized text and the
                                    second version of the global text. To view the text of the second
                                    version of the global clause, you must view the clause form the
                                    Search page.




6-10    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
6.   Click for Adoption to view the full text and clause details. At this point you can:
     •   Adopt the clause as-is. In this case, you only need to submit the clause for local
         approval.

     •   Localize the clause. When you localize a clause, you can modify the text and
         check the Translation Only check box to indicate that the changes were for
         translation purposes. Submit the localized clause for approval on completing
         the modifications. Note that you can delete a clause that had been localized and
         is in draft status. This makes the original global clause available again for
         adoption.



Approving Global Clauses in Local Organizations:
At the time a global clause is adopted and submitted for local approval, the library
administrator receives a workflow notification requesting approval for adoption of the
clause.
The local administrator can approve or reject the clause. After approval, the global
clause (or the modified localized clause) becomes available for use in the local
organization. If a clause is rejected, the local organization may choose to continue
modifying the clause, based on the rejection comments, or modify the adoption type.
For example, a clause that was previously adopted as-is can now be localized.
When local organizations adopt a global clause, the system sends a notification to the
global organization with details on date and type of adoption.

         Note: When approving or rejecting a clause or contract template, you
         can use the Comments section to provide your remarks in the Approval
         notification. Your comments are visible to the user who has submitted
         the original approval request.
         Also, you can send the approval notifications by e-mail. However, this
         would require additional configuration. For more information on how
         to set up the e-mail client to receive all notifications, see the Oracle
         Applications System Administrator's Guide.




Viewing Adoption status:
Global organizations can monitor when and how global clauses are adopted across local
organizations. The Adoption Status report provides an overview of the adoption status
across multiple local organization for a given global clause. This report is only available
in the global organization and allows the global organization to analyze cases where the
global clauses are not adopted in a timely manner.
1.   Navigate to the Clauses page.
     Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab




                                                     Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-11
2.   In the global organization, search for global clauses. For more information, see the
                       Searching for Clauses, page 6-12.

                  3.   Click the clause title to view the clause detail.

                  4.   select the View Adoption Status option from the list.

                  5.   Click Go
                       the View Adoption Status report provides the following information:
                       •   Organization Name

                       •   Clause Title

                       •   Version

                       •   Adoption Type (indicates if the global clause was adopted as-is or localized)

                       •   Translation Only (indicates if the global clause was only translated to the local
                           language).

                       •   Adoption Status (indicates if the clause was approved in the local organization
                           or not).

                       •   Adoption Date (the date the clause was adopted.



                  Adopting Global Clauses in a New Organization:
                  For any new organization that is set up to adopt global clauses, Oracle Procurement
                  Contracts provides a concurrent program to adopt all global clauses that were created
                  before the new organization was created.
                  To adopt the global clauses, you must run the Adopt Global Clauses for a New
                  Organization concurrent program. It is not necessary to rerun the program for a given
                  organization more than once, if all the migrated clauses and the new global clauses
                  have been created in the global organization at the time of running the concurrent
                  program.
                  The clause status in the new organization could be one of the following:
                  •    Adopted: If the organization is set up to automatically adopt clauses.

                  •    Available for Adoption: If the organization is set up to manually adopt clauses



Searching for Clauses
                  You can search or browse to find clauses in the Clauses Library. This section covers the
                  following topics




6-12    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•    Searching for Clauses, page 6-13

•    Using the Keyword Search Feature, page 6-14

•    Browsing for Clauses, page 6-15


Searching for Clauses:
1.   Navigate to the Clauses page.
     Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab

2.   In the Search region, search for clauses by
     •   Operating Unit (mandatory field)

     •   Keyword

     •   Type

     •   Title

     •   Number


3.   To access additional search options, click the Show More Search Options link. These
     options are:
     •   Intent

     •   Status

     •   Start and end dates

     •   Provisions only

     •   Variables used in the clause

     •   Used in templates

     •   Default section

     •   Show all versions check box

     •   Adoption Type (available only in local operating units)
         To perform your search, you must enter information in the Operating Unit field
         and one of the following fields:

     •   Number




                                                   Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-13
•   Title

                       •   Keyword

                       •   Type

                       •   Status

                       •   Start Date

                       •   End Date

                       •   Used in Templates

                               •    You cannot perform blind searches or start your search criteria
                                    with the wildcard character (%).

                               •    If you do not select the Show All Versions check box, the
                                    system displays only the latest version of the clauses that match
                                    the search criteria.

                               •    Description does not work with leading searches. Also, the
                                    description returns only those clauses for which the description
                                    begins with the search criteria that you enter. For instance, if
                                    you enter A% in the Description field, only those clauses for
                                    which the description begins with the letter A are returned.



                  4.   Click Go to view the search results.

                  5.   In the Search Result section, select the check box for any clause and click one of the
                       following buttons:
                       •   Submit. Submit the clause for approval.

                       •   Duplicate. Create a new clause by copying from an existing clause.

                       •   Create New Version. Create a new version.

                       •   Review for Adoption. This button is available only to local organizations for
                           adopting global clauses. See: Approving Global Clauses in Local Operating
                           Units section, page 6-11.



                  Using the Keyword Search Feature:
                  You can search for clauses in the Contract Terms Library using the Keyword Search
                  feature. The system searches for clauses than contain the text you enter in any of the




6-14    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
following fields:
•    Clause Title

•    Display Name

•    Clause Description

•    Clause Text

To perform the keyword search, you must run the following concurrent programs
periodically:
•    Synchronize Clauses Text Index

•    Optimize Clauses Text Index

If you have not run the concurrent programs, the search will not provide accurate
results. The frequency for running these programs must be decided on a case-by-case
basis. You can schedule the concurrent programs to run together automatically at
predefined intervals.

         Note: You do not need to run the foregoing concurrent programs for
         each operating unit. Running the program synchronizes the data across
         the operating units that use the Contract Terms Library.




Browsing for a Clause:
In addition to search, you can use the Browse feature to search for clauses using folders.
1.   Navigate to the Clauses page.
     Navigation: Library > Clauses tab

2.   Click Browse to search through folders for the clause that you want to retrieve. The
     system displays the list of available folders.

3.   To view all clauses assigned to a folder, select the check box for that folder.

4.   Optionally, click the clause title to view clause details.

5.   If applicable, select the check box for any clause and click and of the following
     buttons:
     •   Submit. Submit the clause for approval.

     •   Duplicate. Create a new clause by copying from an existing clause.

     •   Create New Version. Create a new version.




                                                       Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-15
•   Review for Adoption. This button is available only to local organizations for
                           adopting global clauses.

                       •   Update. Open the clause for update




Contract Clause Analysis Report
                  The Contract Clause Analysis report enables you to search for the contracts where a
                  given set of clauses is used. After entering the search criteria for the clauses and the
                  contracts, the system displays a list of all appearances of the clauses in those contracts.
                  For more information on Contract Clause Analysis report, see the online help topics in
                  Oracle Contracts, Oracle Procurement Contracts, or Oracle Sales Contracts.



Managing Changes to Standard Clauses
                  This section covers the following topics
                  •    Updating clauses

                  •    Versioning clauses

                  •    Comparing clauses

                  •    Placing clauses on hold

                  •    Deleting clauses


                  Updating Clauses:
                  You can modify clauses and their versions subject to certain business rules. When
                  updating a clause, you can:
                  •    View and assign alternate clauses

                  •    View and assign incompatible clauses

                  •    Add clauses to folders

                  •    View all versions of the clause

                  •    Choose one version and compare with the one that is being updated

                  •    Change the status to On Hold (only if the clause is in Approved status)

                  •    Submit the clause for approval




6-16    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•    Delete the clause (only if the clause is in Draft status).

             Note: A new version is required if:

             •    The clause is inactive

             •    The clause is in Approved status and the attributes that are
                  controlled at the clause version level need to be updates.



1.   Navigate to the Clauses page.
     Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab

2.   Search for the clause that you want to update.

3.   Verify the clause status:
     •   If the clause is in draft status, all the fields are available for update.

     •   If the clause is in any other status, certain fields are protected and cannot be
         updated.


4.   Click the Update icon. The system opens the clause for update.

5.   Make the necessary changes:
     •   Except for the first version of a clause in draft status, you cannot change the
         clause number, title, and intent.

     •   For clauses with the approved status, you cannot make changes to the
         following fields: Display Name, Start Date, Provision, and Global check boxes,
         Clause Text, and Allow Include by Reference.


6.   Select one of the following actions:
     •   Create new version (not available for clauses in draft status)

     •   Submit for approval (only available for clauses in draft status)

     •   Put on hold (not available for clauses on draft status)

     •   Delete (only available for clauses in draft status).

     •   Apply

     •   Save




                                                        Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-17
•   Cancel



                  Versioning Clauses:
                  The Versioning feature enables you to make changes to clauses that are already in use
                  on contracts. You can modify clause details including clause text and description. New
                  versions need to be approved before they can be used in contracts.
                  A new version is required if:
                  •    The clause is not in draft status

                  •    the clause is approved and the attributes controlled at the clause version level
                       require updating.

                  1.   Navigate to the Clauses page.
                       Navigation: Library > Clauses tab.

                  2.   In the Search region, enter the search criteria for the clause that you want.

                  3.   Click Go. The system displays the search results.

                  4.   Select the check box for the clause.

                  5.   Click Create New Version. Fields from the previous version are copied to the new
                       version. You cannot change clause title, number, and intent, when creating a new
                       version.

                  6.   Select one of the following options:
                       •   Apply

                       •   Save

                       •   Submit

                       •   Cancel

                       You can delete the new version of a clause if it is in draft status.


                  Comparing Clauses:
                  You can compare any two versions of a clause. the system provides a redline
                  comparison of the changed made to the clause text.
                  You can choose any two versions of a clause, and then click the Compare button
                  available in the Version History subtab of Updating Clause page.




6-18    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Placing Clauses on Hold:
           You can place clauses on hold to prevent them from being used in contract templates
           and contracts. You can also release the hold to make the clause available again.
           1.   Navigate to the Clauses page.
                Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab

           2.   Search for the clause that you want put on hold.

           3.   Verify the clause status.

           4.   Click the Update icon or the clause title link.

           5.   Click Put on Hold

           6.   Click Yes to confirm.

           7.   To release the hold, open the clause for update.

           8.   Click release Hold. The system confirms the release.


           Deleting Clauses:
           You can only delete clauses that are in draft or rejected status.
           1.   Navigate to the Clauses page.
                Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab

           2.   Search for the clause you want to delete.

           3.   Verify the clause status.

           4.   Click the Update icon or the clause title link.

           5.   Click Delete. The system asks you to confirm your request for deletion.

           6.   Click Yes.



Importing Clauses
           You use the Clause import feature to import clauses into the Contract Terms Library. In
           addition to clauses, you can import the following related entities:
           •    Variables

           •    Value sets that are used in variables




                                                                  Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-19
•    Value set values

                  •    Clause relationships that establish a clause to be an alternate or incompatible with
                       one or more clauses

                  Clause import can also be used on an ongoing basis to update these entities in the
                  library.
                  You can import clauses and the related entities using the following methods:
                  •    Open Interface, page 6-26: For this method, use SQL*Loader, PL/SQL Scripts, or
                       JDBC to load the entities directly into the corresponding interface tables. This
                       process is outside the scope of the Clause import program. The clause import
                       validates the data and imports the content into the library.

                  •    XML Data File, page 6-27: Using this method, you import data directly from a
                       source XML file that conforms to the XML schema that is published for import. The
                       clause import validates the XML data and imports the content into the library.

                  The following tables identify and describe the attributes that are imported for each
                  entity:


                  Clauses

                   Attribute                                      Description


                   Clause Number                                  Number that identifies the clause. Two
                                                                  alternatives for a clause could have the same
                                                                  number.


                   Description                                    Description of the clause.


                   Title                                          Clause title or name.


                   Clause Type                                    Type of clause.


                   Display Title                                  Title that is displayed for the clause in the
                                                                  application.


                   Start Date                                     Date from which the clause can be used.


                   End Date                                       Date until which the clause can be used.




6-20    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Attribute                        Description


Date Published                   Date that uniquely identifies the updates. This
                                 date determines whether the update is
                                 subsequent to the one already in the clause
                                 library and whether a new version of the
                                 clause will be created.


Clause Text                      Legal text of the clause. The variables in the
                                 clause text should be enclosed within <Var>
                                 and <Var/> tags.


Intent                           Business intent of the clause: (B) for Buy and
                                 (S) for Sell.


Language                         Language in which the clause is authored.


Provision Indicator              Indicates whether the clause is a provision.

                                 It only applies to clauses with the Buy intent.


Include By Reference Indicator   Indicates whether the clause should be used
                                 by reference in a contract.


Reference Source                 Source from which clause is referenced.


Reference Title                  Title of the clause in the source.


Operating Unit                   Operating unit using the clause.


Global Clause Indicator          Indicates if the clause is a global clause (all
                                 operating units can use them).


Standard Indicator               Indicates whether the clause is standard or
                                 nonstandard.


Clause Status                    Status of the clause. Valid values are Draft,
                                 Approved, Pending Approval, and Rejected.


Lock Text Indicator              Indicates if the clause text can be modified.


Action                           Action that the import process should perform
                                 on the clause.




                                        Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-21
Clause Relationships

                   Attribute                                      Description


                   Clause1 Number                                 Clause number of the first clause.


                   Source Clause1 Title                           Clause title of the first clause.


                   Clause2 Number                                 Clause number of the second clause.


                   Source Clause2 Title                           Clause title of the second clause.


                   Relationship Type                              Relationship type code:

                                                                  •    ALTERNATE: Clause1 and Clause2 are
                                                                       alternatives to each other.

                                                                  •    INCOMPATIBLE: Clause1 and Clause2
                                                                       are incompatible with each other.



                  User-Defined Variables
                  Clauses can have variables embedded in the clause text. System variables are already
                  defined in the system and are available for use in clause text. However, user-defined
                  variables must be defined in the system before they can be used in clauses. A variable
                  code uniquely identifies the variable and must be specified as part of the definition. It is
                  recommended that the variable code follow the pattern OKC$<intent>$<code> and
                  must be unique in the system. For example, if the variable is the VAT code of the
                  supplier and is used in buy-side transactions, then the code could look like
                  OKC$B$VATCODE where B stands for buy intent.


                  User-Defined Variables

                   Attribute                                      Description


                   Code                                           Variable code that uniquely identifies the
                                                                  variable.


                   Name                                           Variable name.


                   Description                                    Description of the variable.




6-22    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Attribute                                    Description


Data Type                                    Data type of the value of the variable. Valid
                                             values are Date, String, and Number.


Valueset                                     Code of the valueset used.


Intent                                       Intent of the variable: B (Buy) and S (Sell).


External User Updatable                      Indicates whether suppliers can update the
                                             variable.

                                             •    Y, if suppliers provide the value.

                                             •    N, if suppliers do not provide the value.


                                               Note: This attribute is not available for
                                               Sales Contracts.




Language                                     Language of the variable.


Contract Expert Enabled Indicator            Indicates whether the variable can be used in
                                             Contract Expert.

                                             •    N: Do not use in Contract Expert.

                                             •    Y: Enabled for use in Contract Expert.
                                                  Note that the value set for the variable
                                                  should have a format type that is
                                                  character or number and validation type
                                                  independent.



Value Sets
Each user-defined variable that is embedded in the clause sources the value from a
value set. Value sets can also be defined during the import process. Value sets can either
enforce the data types or the actual values that a variable can have. It is recommended
that value sets that are defined during the import process should have a name in the
format OKC$<SOURCE>$<VALUESETNAME> to distinguish them from other value
sets in Oracle Applications. For example, a value set for a variable called Business Type
used in a FAR clause can have the name OKC$FAR$BUSINESSTYPE.
Each valueset should have the following attributes:




                                                    Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-23
Value Sets

                   Attribute                                      Description


                   Name                                           Name of the value set.


                   Description                                    Description of the value set.


                   Format Type                                    Format of the values that are provided by the
                                                                  value set:

                                                                  •   D (Date)

                                                                  •   N (Number)

                                                                  •   C (Character)


                   Minimum Size of Values                         Minimum number of characters for each value
                                                                  in the value set. Valid values are 1–38.


                   Maximum Size of Values                         Maximum number of characters for each
                                                                  value in the value set. Valid values are 1–38.


                   Uppercase Values Allowed Indicator             Indicates whether uppercase values are
                                                                  allowed:

                                                                  •   Y: Allowed

                                                                  •   N: Not Allowed


                   Precision Allowed for Number Types             Number of decimal points allowed for
                                                                  number values.


                   Validation Type                                Validation type for the value set:

                                                                  •   N: None

                                                                  •   I: Independent



                  Each value set that has validation type of independent should have a list of valid
                  values.




6-24    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Value Set Values

Attribute                                     Description


Value                                         Actual value


Description                                   Description of the value




Interface Tables Used for Import:
The following tables are used during the import process:


Interface Tables Used for Import

Table Name                                    Description


OKC_ART_INTERFACE_ALL                         This is the main interface table where the
                                              users load data from external systems.


OKC_ART_RELS_INTERFACE                        This is the interface table that stores the
                                              relationships between clauses.


OKC_VARIABLES_INTERFACE                       This interface table is used to import variables
                                              that are used in clauses.


OKC_VALUESETS_INTERFACE                       This interface table is used to import value
                                              sets that are used in variables.


OKC_VS_VALUES_INTERFACE                       This interface table stores the values for the
                                              value sets that are used in variables.


OKC_ART_INT_ERRORS                            This table stores the errors that are reported
                                              by the run in the validation or import mode.


OKC_ART_INT_BATPROCS_ALL                      This is an internal system table that stores the
                                              batch run details. This includes the processing
                                              status as well as all the parameters that are
                                              used for the run.



For detailed information about the preceding tables, see the Oracle eTechnical Reference
guide (eTRM).




                                                     Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-25
Clause Import - Open Interface Method:
                  The following tasks constitute the Clause Import With Open Interface procedure:
                  •    Preparing and loading data

                  •    Importing in validate mode

                  •    Reviewing error messages

                  •    Correcting errors

                  •    Importing data into the library

                  •    Approving imported clauses in draft status

                  •    Purging interface records

                  Prerequisites
                  •    Set up necessary lookup codes, for example, clause types.

                  •    Set up all necessary data, for example, variables and sections.

                  •    Operating unit setup:
                       •   Set up clause approvers for Buy and Sell intent.

                       •   Determine whether the AutoNumbering option should be set up for the
                           operating unit.


                  Steps
                  1.   Format the data in a form that is suitable for loading into the interface table. For
                       example, if you are using SQL*Loader to load data into the interface tables, you can
                       choose to use a comma separated data file (CSV) and a control file that describes the
                       data format.

                  2.   Run the Import Clauses concurrent program in validation mode to identify any
                       invalid data or errors. This is recommended but not a mandatory step. You can
                       specify the following parameters for the Import Clauses concurrent program:




6-26    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Concurrent        Possible Values     Mandat     Function
     Program                               ory
     Parameter


     Batch Name        Name of the batch   Yes        Provide a batch name to easily identify
                                                      the records that you are importing.


     Run in            Yes / No            No         Set to Yes if you want to run in
     Validation                                       validation mode to identify potential
     Mode                                             errors.


     Commit Size       1 to 300            Yes        Indicates the maximum number of
                                                      records that the system processes and
                                                      commits to the database at one time.
                                                      For example, if you have 1,000 records
                                                      to be imported and your commit size is
                                                      set to 100, and an error occurs on the
                                                      150th record, the system has already
                                                      processed the first 100, and the data
                                                      will not be reprocessed the next time
                                                      that you run the program. Consult your
                                                      database administrator for the
                                                      appropriate value.




3.   The Import program generates a report that lists the success and error messages.
     The errors at this stage would primarily be related to data format or missing
     required data. Review the report and correct the errors outside the system and
     prepare the data for a reload.

4.   Reload the data into the interface table after correcting the errors.

5.   Run the Import Clauses concurrent program in import mode to create or update
     data in the library. If the program was run previously in the validation mode with
     no errors, then the import should succeed. The Import program generates a report
     that lists the success and error messages. Records with errors remain in the interface
     tables until they are purged or corrected.

6.   If clauses are imported in Draft status, they must be approved before they are
     available for authoring contracts. If they are imported in the pending approval
     status, the system automatically routes the clauses to approvers for review and
     approval.

7.   Purge the Interface records. See: Purge Interface Records, page 6-30.




                                                      Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-27
Clause Import - XML Data File Method:
                  Prerequisites
                  Set up the following:
                  •    Necessary lookup codes, for example, clause types.

                  •    Necessary data, for example, variables and sections.

                  •    For the operating unit:
                       •   Set up clause approvers for Buy and Sell intent.

                       •   Determine whether the AutoNumbering option should be set up.


                  •    The OKC: Clause Import XML File Location profile option. This specifies the
                       location (file directory) of the XML file. This is mandatory setup for using the
                       XML-based import.


                  To import clauses using XML
                  1.   Data preparation: Format the data to be imported in a form that is suitable for XML
                       import. This involves generating an XML file with the clause data that conforms to
                       the XML schema that was published for import (see the table below for how to
                       access the schema definition file in Oracle XML Publisher).


                       Schema Definition      Application           XML Schema           XML Preview File
                       File Name


                       Clause Import XML      Contracts Core        OKCXMLIMPDFN.x       OKCXMLIMPDFN.x
                       Data Definition                              sd                   ml




                  2.   Staging the XML import file: Copy the XML file to the location specified by the
                       OKC: Clause Import XML File Location profile option.

                  3.   Import in the Validate mode: Run the Import Clauses from XML File concurrent
                       program in the Validate mode to identify any invalid data or errors. This is
                       recommended but is not a mandatory step. The program parses the XML file and
                       populates the interface tables. You can specify the following parameters for the
                       concurrent program:




6-28    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Parameter          Possible         Defa   Manda    Function
                        Values           ult    tory


     XML File Name                       No     Yes      Name of the XML import file. The
                                                         file must be present in the location
                                                         that is specified by the profile
                                                         option OKC: Clause Import XML
                                                         File Location.


     Default            Any operating    No     No       Identifies the operating unit for
     Operating Unit     unit for which                   which the Import process needs to
                        contract terms                   run. Leave it blank if the operating
                        are enabled                      unit has already been provided for
                                                         each record in the XML file. This
                                                         value is used as the default for
                                                         those records for which the
                                                         operating unit is not provided.


     Create as Global   Yes/No           No     No       If this parameter is set to Yes, it will
     Clause (Default)                                    import all clauses as global clauses.
                                                         Note that the operating unit in
                                                         which the clauses are imported
                                                         must be set up as the global
                                                         operating unit.


     Default Clause     Approved,        No     No       This identifies the status in which to
     Status             Draft, Pending                   import the clauses. Leave it blank if
                        Approval                         the records already have a status.
                                                         This value is used as the default for
                                                         those records for which the status is
                                                         not provided.


     Validate Only      Yes/No           Yes    No       Run the Import process in validate
                                                         mode to identify invalid data or
                                                         errors.




4.   Review the error messages: The import program generates a report that lists the
     success and error messages. The errors at this stage would primarily be related to
     data format or missing required data. Review the report and correct the errors
     outside the system and prepare the data for a reload.

5.   Correct the errors: Review the report in the log file and correct errors in the XML
     data file.

6.   Import data into the library: Run the Import Clauses from XML File concurrent
     program in import mode to create or update data in the library. If the program was




                                                      Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-29
run previously in validation mode with no errors, then the import should go
                       through successfully. The Import program generates a report that lists the success
                       and error messages.

                  7.   Approvals: If clauses are imported in the Draft status, they must be approved
                       before they are available for authoring contracts. If they are imported in the
                       Pending Approval status, the system automatically routes the clauses to approvers
                       for review and approval.

                  8.   Purge the interface records. See: Purge Interface Records, page 6-30.


                  Purge Interface Records:
                  To optimize performance, you should periodically run the Purge Clause Import
                  Interface Table concurrent program. This program purges records in the interface tables
                  for clauses and the other related entities.
                  The following table describes the parameters for the Purge program:


                   Concurrent Program             Mandat     Purpose
                   Parameter                      ory


                   Start Date, End Date           No         Use the Start and End Dates to identify the range of
                                                             dates for interface records that need to be purged.


                   Process Status                 No         Provide a specific status if you want to purge
                                                             interface records with that status. The possible
                                                             values are Error, Success, and Warning.


                   Batch Name                     No         Provide a specific batch name if you want to purge
                                                             records belonging to that batch only.



                           Note: If you do not specify any parameters, the system displays the
                           following warning message: "No parameters found for this run. This
                           request will delete all the records for your organization in the interface
                           tables."




Managing Contract Templates
                  Oracle Contracts enables you to define a standard set of templates to easily default
                  terms for contracts authored by your organization. You can create templates that
                  include both clauses and deliverables. These templates can then be used to default
                  clauses and deliverables on a contract.




6-30    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Not that the Deliverables functionality is currently supported only on contract
           templates with the Buy intent.
           1.



Creating Contract Templates
           To create a contract template, you can:
           •    Create a new contract template

           •    Duplicate from an existing template


           Creating a New Contract Template:
           1.   Navigate to the Create Template page

           2.   Select an operating unit from the list of values. The list of values is based on the
                security profile that was defined for the responsibility that you are using. For more
                information, see Setting Up Operating Units, page 4-2 and Setting Up Profile
                Options, page 4-6.

                        Note: After you save a template, you cannot change its operating
                        unit, even if the template is in Draft status. Make your selection
                        carefully when creating a template from the list of available
                        operating units.



           3.   Enter a unique name for the template. This template name must be unique within
                an organization.

           4.   Select the intent for the template. Normally for procurement it would be Buy.

                        Note: You cannot change the intent on a template even if the
                        template is in draft status if it contains clauses or deliverables or is
                        associated to one of more document types. You must remove these
                        if you want to change the intent.



           5.   Accept the default start date (system date) or change the date.

           6.   Optionally, enter a description for the template.

           7.   When you create a new template, the system sets the template status to draft.
                Except for the On Hold status, the system controls all statuses on a template. You
                can manually change the status of a template from Approved to On Hold.

           8.   Link all contract templates that have the same context and purpose but are in




                                                                 Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-31
different languages. To do this, use the Language and Translated from Template
                       fields to specify the language and primary template for the contract template:

                               •   The list of values for the Languages field displays all active
                                   languages that have been installed in your instance.

                               •   The list of values for the Translated from Template field
                                   includes all contract templates that are in the same operating
                                   unit as the current template, with the same intent but in a
                                   different language.

                               •   If you select a Translated From template, you also must select a
                                   language for the template.

                               •   You cannot update the Translated From Template field on a
                                   template that is referenced by other translated templates.

                               •   You can update the Language and Translated from Template
                                   fields after approval without requiring a template revision.



                       After you save the template, the system displays the Translated Templates subtab.
                       If applicable, the subtab displays the following information: Name, Description,
                       Language, Status, and Translated From.

                  9.   Select a layout template from the list of values. The layout template is used by the
                       system to prepare the template for preview.

                  10. Optionally, enter an instructions for using the template.

                  11. Optionally, select the Global check box to make the template available for
                       duplication in all operating units. This is applicable only for global operating units.
                       For more information, see the Global Templates section, page 6-47.

                  12. Select the Contract Expert Enabled check box to make the Contract Expert feature
                       available on a business document to which the template is applied. By selecting the
                       check box:
                       •   Contract Expert rules can be assigned to the template.

                       •   All existing Contract Expert rules with the Apply to All Templates option
                           selected are assigned to the template automatically. For more information about
                           creating and assigning rules, see the Creating Rules section, page 7-9.

                       •   The system displays the Rules subtab (after the user has saved the template).
                           From the Rules subtab, you can view the Contract Expert rules that are
                           applicable to the contract template. Also, you can view the sequence of




6-32    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
questions that are used in the rules.


13. Select the Expert Clauses Mandatory check box if you want to make the clauses,
    brought in by Contract Expert, mandatory on the business documents. You can
    select the Expert Clauses Mandatory check box only if you first select the Contract
    Expert Enabled check box.

            Note: Selecting this box makes all of the Contract Expert clauses
            mandatory on the contract. You cannot apply this option to only
            certain clauses.



14. Select a Default Section if the template is enabled for Contract Expert.

    Contract Expert places the clauses that it selects into the Default section of the
    template if those clauses do not have a default section assigned to them in the
    library.

            Note: If you want to make changes to the Contract Expert fields
            after a contract template has been approved, see the special
            considerations that apply when you change Contract Expert fields
            on contract template revision, page 7-1.



15. In the Document Types region, you can assign the template to one or more business
    document types. This allows the users to select this template during authoring a
    contract for this document type.

16. To add a document type, click Add Another Row and enter the following
    information:
    •   Select the Document Type from the list of values.

    •   Optionally, select the Default Template check box to set the template as a
        default for all business documents that are authored using that document. type.
        All contract types for Repository Contracts.
        For Oracle Sourcing the valid document types are:
        •   RFQ

        •   RFI

        •   Auction

        For Oracle Purchasing the valid document types are:
        •   Standard Purchase Order




                                                     Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-33
•   Blanket Purchase Agreement

                             •   Contract Purchase Agreement


                  17. Click Apply and Add Details.

                  18. Add sections and clauses to the template. See Adding Sections and Clauses, page 6-
                       36.

                  19. If Contract Expert is enabled on the contract template, you can click the Rules tab to
                       view the list of rules that are assigned to the template. From the Rules table, you can
                       click a rule link to view the rule details.
                       You can also view the question sequence in the Questions table.
                       You can change the question sequence for the contract template on the Contract
                       Expert tab. For more information, see the Managing Question Sequence section,
                       page 7-18.

                  20. Add deliverables to the template. See Creating Contract Template Deliverables,
                       page 6-37.

                  21. From the Actions menu, choose:

                       •     Submit. Submit the template for approval. A contract template created with no
                             clauses or deliverables cannot be submitted for approval.

                       •     Validate. Run the QA check process to validate that the template is correct. If
                             the validation returns errors, you cannot submit the template for approval until
                             the errors are corrected.

                       •     Preview. Preview the contract template to ensure that the format and layout of
                             the template is according to the organization's contract printing standards.

                       •     Delete. Delete the contract template. You can only delete templates in draft or
                             rejected status.


                  Consider the following when creating and using contract templates:
                  •    Searching for templates: As a convenience, you can perform blind searches on
                       contract templates. If you are not sure about the criteria to search for templates,
                       clicking Go, without entering any criteria, displays all the templates that exist in the
                       system. However, note that Operating Unit is a mandatory search parameter.

                  •    Using Language and Translated from Template features: If your company creates
                       contracts in multiple languages, you may want to consider using these features. The
                       Language and Translated from Template fields help you when selecting a contract
                       template that you want to apply to a business document. In addition, if you are




6-34    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
using Oracle iStore, the system automatically displays the template in the
     appropriate language, based on the language preferences setup.

•    Clauses used in language templates: Clauses do not have languages associated with
     them. So, if you are creating templates in a specific language, ensure the clauses that
     you want to add to the template are also in the appropriate language.

•    Default section for Contract Expert: This section is used to bring in Contracts Expert
     clauses that are not already assigned to any other section. From an implementation
     perspective, if you use Contract Expert to bring in the clause, a default section
     should be assigned to that clause.
     Also, the list of values, for the default section on the template, is based on the
     sections that are created in the Contract Terms Library. For example, if you create a
     new section on the template, you cannot set this section as the default section.
     If a section that was assigned as the default section is later inactivated, this change
     will not impact existing contracts. However, when the template is next updated, an
     appropriate warning is provided to update the default section assignment.

•    A contract template that is enabled for Contract Expert can also contain standard
     clauses and sections. As with all contract templates, its constituent clauses and
     sections are automatically added to a business document when the contract
     template is applied to the business document.

•    Clauses are not mandatory for templates enabled for Contract Expert. However,
     they are mandatory for other templates.


Duplicating from an Existing Template:
You can create new templates by copying existing templates. Templates that the same
organization has created are available to copy, regardless of the template status. The
system copies all clauses and deliverables from the original template to the new one.
You can also duplicate a global template in the local organization.
1.   Navigate to the Contract Templates page.

2.   Search for the source template.

3.   In the Results section, select the source template.

4.   Click Duplicate to open the Duplicate Contract Template page.

5.   In the Name field, enter a new name for the template. The system copies the entire
     content of the source template along with the new section, subsections, layout, and
     formatting details to the new template. The new template's status is draft.

6.   Make other necessary changes to the new template.




                                                      Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-35
7.   Save the template.

                  8.   From the Actions menu, select an action and click Go.



Adding Sections and Clauses
                  Use these procedures to add sections and clauses to a template.
                  1.   Navigate to the Create Contract Templates page.

                  2.   Enter the general information for the template.

                  3.   Click Apply and Add Details.

                  4.   Navigate to the Clauses subtab. In the Clauses subtab, you can define the structure
                       and layout of the template consisting of sections, subsections and clauses. This is
                       the component that contains all the contract terms. From the Clauses subtab, you
                       have access to the following options:
                       •   Add Sections. You can build a hierarchy of sections and subsections and insert
                           clauses into this hierarchy. You can create a new section or select from a library
                           of sections. If you pick a section from the library, you cannot override the
                           section name. To add clauses, you need to define at least one section on the
                           template.

                       •   Add Clauses. To add a clause, select a location for the clause in the hierarchy
                           and click the Add Clause button. You can insert clauses only in the context of a
                           section or subsection. You can search for clauses by browsing through folders,
                           or based on:
                           •   Keyword

                           •   Number

                           •   Clause Type

                           •   Title

                           •   Default Section

                           •   Provisions Only. Select the check box only if you want to search for
                               Provision type clauses (this field is available for templates with the Buy
                               intent only).


                  5.   To make a clause mandatory in the template, select Mandatory. You cannot delete a
                       mandatory clause (except through special privileges) on a contract.




6-36    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
6.   If a clause has alternate relationships defined, the Select Alternate icon is enabled.
                 Click Select alternate to view all the alternates for the clause on the template. If you
                 select an alternate clause, it replaces the original clause on the template.

            7.   After creating the necessary sections and subsections and inserting clauses, you can
                 use the Move button to change the order of clauses and sections in the template.
                 Select the sections or clauses that you want to move and click Move. Select the
                 location in the hierarchy where you want to move the selections to. Then, for
                 sections, use the Location field to indicate whether you want to move before, after
                 or within the selected location.

            8.   You can apply a numbering scheme to the sections and clauses structure. Use the
                 Renumber button to renumber the terms. Note that if you have used the Move
                 feature to reorganize sections or clauses, or added or removed sections or clauses,
                 the system will not automatically renumber the sections and clauses. You need to
                 use the Renumber feature to reapply the numbering scheme.



Creating Contract Template Deliverables
            Business enter into contractual agreements with their trading partners, and as part of
            the contractual agreement, will have commitments to fulfill. The commitments on the
            contracts, besides products and services bought or sold, are classified as deliverables,
            under the Terms and Conditions of the contract. In addition to the contractual
            commitments that business need to fulfill, they might define other internal tasks that
            contribute to the overall execution of the contract.
            You can define deliverables as part of the contract template creation process. If a
            contract refers to a contract template, all deliverables associated with that template are
            copied to the contract.

                     Note: You can only define deliverables for templates with the Buy
                     intent.


            1.   Navigate to the Create Contract Templates page.

            2.   In the Deliverable subtab, select Create Deliverable.

            3.   Enter the Deliverable Name. This is the name of the task being requested.

            4.   Select the deliverable type. You can define the following type of deliverables:
                 •   Contractual Deliverable. A deliverable on a contractual document (for example,
                     Purchase Orders, Blanket Purchase Agreement)

                 •   Negotiation Deliverable. A deliverable on a negotiation document (for example,
                     Request for Quote (RFQ), Request for Information (RFI)).




                                                                  Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-37
•   Internal Purchasing Deliverable. Internal Purchasing deliverables are used to
                           track internal schedules and commitments relevant to a contract. They are not
                           part of the contractual terms of a contract and hence do not directly represent a
                           formal commitment between the parties.


                  5.   Select the responsible Party. The responsible party is specified as the party that
                       fulfills the deliverable.

                  6.   Optionally, enter the Description of the task and how to perform it.

                  7.   Optionally, select Buyer Contact. The buyer contact is the person responsible for
                       performing the deliverable if you select the Buyer Organization as the responsible
                       party. In case the supplier company is responsible for performing the deliverable,
                       the buyer contact is responsible to accept the fulfillment of the deliverable.

                  8.   Optionally, select the Requester. This is the name of the person who has requested
                       the deliverable. The requester usually verifies if the deliverable was completed
                       satisfactorily.

                  9.   Optionally, enter any Comments. These comments are visible only to the internal
                       users of the buying organization.

                  10. Use the Due Date region to define one time or recurring deliverables.

                       A one time deliverable can have a fixed due date relative to a contract lifecycle
                       event on the document.
                       With a relative due date, you can identify a date that is based on a period of time
                       before or after a certain business document event. For example, five days after the
                       contract is signed, or two weeks after the RFQ is published. In this case, you need to
                       specify both the period of time and the event. For deliverables that have a relative
                       due date, the actual due date will be calculated when the contract on which the
                       template is applied is approved or is signed.
                       You are not required to provide a fixed due date for a deliverable on a contact
                       template. However, you are required to provide complete due date information if
                       the deliverable is a one time deliverable with a relative due date, or a recurring
                       deliverable.
                       All events related to business documents with the same intent as the template are
                       available for users to choose while defining a relative due date. Selecting a
                       particular business document event for a due date on a deliverable would also
                       make the deliverable specific to that given business document for execution (for
                       example, five days after the blanket purchase agreement is closed). This deliverable
                       is copied over and executed only on a blanket purchase agreement. If the contract
                       template containing this deliverable is applied on a purchase order document, the
                       deliverable is dropped. If the same contract template is applied on a negotiation, for
                       example, an RFQ which concludes in a blanket purchase agreement award, then the




6-38    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
deliverables related to the blanket purchase agreement are retained on the
    negotiation document and carried forward to the blanket purchase agreement.
    Deliverables can also be of a recurring nature. For example, a progress report is due
    every first Monday of the month. You can define a recurring deliverable by
    selecting the repeating due date type. The repeating deliverable instances are
    created upon approval or signing of the contract they are on. You can track and
    update the status of each instance like a one time deliverable. To create a recurring
    deliverable, you need to enter the following:
    •   Start Date. This is specified through a fixed date or a date relative to a certain
        event.

    •   Repeating Type. For example: daily, weekly, or monthly.

    •   Frequency. In combination with the repeating Type, this gives the frequency of
        the repeating deliverable, such as every six weeks, or every three months.

    •   In case of weekly frequency events, the day of the week on which to repeat.

    •   In case of monthly frequency events, the month on which to repeat.

    Example
    A report needs to be sent on the fifth day of the month every three months (every
    quarter) after the purchase agreement is signed. In this case:
    •   The event is the signing of the purchase agreement.

    •   Frequency is monthly.

    •   Interval is 3.

    •   Day of the month is 5.


11. Use the Notifications region to inform the contacts about the progress of
    deliverables. Notifications are sent during the lifecycle of the deliverable, after the
    contract has been signed. Note that you can only define recipient for escalation
    notifications here, all others are sent to contacts on the deliverables. The
    notifications have a subject, a message body, and buttons to take certain actions, a
    notes area, and attached documents. Notifications can be sent for a deliverable in
    the following scenarios:
    •   Prior to Due Date. You can specify how many days, weeks, or months to wend
        the notification before the due date. Recipient of this notification is the buyer
        contact and supplier contact.

    •   Status Change. send notifications for any status change of the deliverable.
        Statuses could be any of the following: completed, submitted, rejected,




                                                     Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-39
canceled, or failed to perform.

                       •   Overdue. Send notifications when the due date of the deliverable is passed.

                       •   Escalate after Due date. You can specify how many days after the due date to
                           send an escalation notification. You can also specify the recipient of the
                           notification.


                  12. In the Attachments region, attach any additional documents as part of the
                       deliverable creation that you want your trading partner to see. for example, you
                       might want the supplier to use a standard progress report template for this contract.
                       You must provide a description for the attachment to identify the nature, context,
                       and purpose of the attachment on the deliverable. In addition, you need to specify a
                       name for the attachment.
                       Click Add Attachments, and define your attachment as one of the following types:
                       •   File. You can attach a file from your local desktop.

                       •   URL. You can specify a URL where the document is available.

                       •   Text. You can enter information in the Text field.


                  13. Click Apply.




Validating Templates
                  Prior to submitting a contract template for approvals, you can validate the template to
                  identify potential errors and warnings. In addition, the system automatically runs the
                  validation process when you submit a template for approval. If any error conditions are
                  found, the template is not submitted for approval. You must fix the error conditions
                  and resubmit the template for approval.
                  The table below displays the type of validations that the system performs when you run
                  the validation process.


                   Validation Type                Condition    Description


                   Inactive Clauses               Error        This validation checks for clauses in draft,
                                                               expired, rejected, or on hold status. Templates
                                                               with clauses in these statuses cannot be
                                                               submitted for approval. Note that this error is
                                                               enforced only for those clauses that do not have
                                                               any approved, previous versions.




6-40    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Validation Type                 Condition    Description


           Alternate Clauses               Warning      This validation checks for the presence of two
                                                        alternate clauses on the same template.


           Incompatible Clauses            Warning      This validation checks for the presence of
                                                        incompatible clauses on a document.


           Layout Template not Defined     Warning      This validation checks if the contract template
                                                        has a layout template assigned to it.


           Invalid Variable for            Warning      This validation checks if the system variables
           Document Type                                embedded within clauses used in the template
                                                        are supported for the document types in which
                                                        the contract template is used.


           Duplicate Clauses               Warning      This validation checks if the contract template
                                                        contains duplicate clauses.



           You can run the QA process at any stage during the template creation. The system also
           runs the QA process when a template is submitted for approval.
           1.   Navigate to the Contract Templates page.
                Navigation: Library > Contract templates tab

           2.   Open the template for update.

           3.   Select the Validate option from the list.

           4.   Click Go. The system performs the validation and displays the results along with
                the suggested fixes.

           5.   Click Printable Page if you want to print the list of validations.

           6.   If applicable, fix the error conditions and resubmit the template for validation.



Preview Templates
           Oracle Contracts uses the Layout template, assigned to the contract template, to prepare
           the template for preview.
           1.   Navigate to the Contract Templates page.
                Navigation: Library > Contract templates tab




                                                                 Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-41
2.   Search for the template that you want to preview.

                  3.   Click Go. The system displays the search results.

                  4.   Select the Update icon for the template.

                  5.   select the Preview option from the Actions list of values.

                  6.   Click Go. The system displays the template in the Portable Document Format (.pdf).



Approving Templates
                  You can use a standard workflow process to submit the templates for approval. You
                  need to request approval:
                  •    When a new template is created.

                  •    After making updates to a rejected template.

                  •    When a template revision is created.

                  Approvers can approve or reject the template. When a template is rejected, the system
                  sends a workflow notification to the author of the contract template. The reason for
                  rejection is also included in the workflow notification. The submitter can update the
                  template based on the comments and resubmit the template for approval.
                  1.   Navigate to the Contract Templates page.
                       Navigation: Library > Contract templates tab

                  2.   Open the template for update.

                  3.   Select the Submit option from the Actions list of values. Alternatively, from the
                       search results, query the template and click the Submit button.



Searching for Templates
                  To find a template in the Contract Terms Library, choose one of the following options:
                  •    Searching for templates

                  •    using the Keywork Search feature


                  Searching for Templates:
                  Use these procedures to search for contract templates.
                  1.   Navigate to the contract Templates page.




6-42    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Navigation: Library > Contract templates tab

2.   To access the Advanced search options, click the Show More Search Options link.

3.   search for the template using the following criteria:
     •   Template Name

     •   Keyword. Keywoard searches on the Template Name, Description, and
         Instructions fields

     •   Status. Search on Approved, Draft, Rejected, Revision, On Hold, and Pending
         Approval templates.

     •   Template Intent. Search on Buy, Sell, or All.

     •   Contains Clause. Search for a specific clause that is used in a template. Note
         that the version of the clause is not considered in this search. If a clause has
         multiple versions, the system retrieves the templates that use any of those
         versions.

     •   Used in Document Type. Search on the document type usage for the template.

     •   Template Effectivity. Search for templates based on Start and End dates.

     •   Owning Organization. (only available for local organizations). Search for
         template used in the local organization or the global organization. Note that the
         search is set by default to local organization. Also, if the owning organization is
         set to Global, the only applicable status value is Approved. You cannot search
         for global templates in other statuses in a local organization.

     •   Default Templates Only. Search for any templates that are used as the default
         for document types.

     •   Global Only (only available for global organizations). Search for global
         templates in the global organization.


4.   Click Go. The system displays the templates that matched your criteria.


Using the Keyword Search Feature:
You can search for templates in the Contract Terms Library using the Keyword Search
feature. The system searches for templates that contain the text that you enter in any of
the following fields:
•    Template Name

•    description




                                                      Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-43
•    Instructions

                  To perform the keyword search, you must run the following concurrent programs
                  periodically:
                  •    Synchronize Template Text Index

                  •    Optimize Template Text Index

                  If the concurrent programs have not been run, the search will not provide accurate
                  results. Companies must decide on the frequency for running these programs on a
                  case-by-case basis.



Managing Changes to Contract Templates

                  Updating Templates:
                  You can update general information about an approved template including the
                  description, instruction, document type, and layout template. However, you must
                  create a revision to update any of the sections, clauses, or deliverables. You can update
                  templates in any of the following statuses:
                  •    Draft. The template name, intent, and start date fields can be updated only in the
                       first version of the template in draft status. You can update all other fields and
                       attributes of the template

                  •    Approved. To update an approved template for its layout and content, first you
                       need to create a revision. then you can make modifications to the revision, approve
                       it, and replace the original template.

                  •    Pending Approval. You cannot update templates in this status.

                  You can also perform the following updates to contract templates:
                  •    Place on Hold

                  •    Release the Hold

                  •    End date

                  1.   Navigate to the Contract Terms page.
                       Navigation: Library > Contract Templates tab.

                  2.   Enter the search criteria for the template.

                  3.   Click Go. The system displays the search results.

                  4.   select the Update icon for the template you want to update. You can perform the




6-44    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
following actions while updating a template:
     •   Add, update or delete sections and clauses.

     •   Add, update, or delete deliverables (only available for templates in draft,
         rejected, and revision statuses)

     •   Submit for approval (only available for templates in draft, rejected, and revision
         statuses)

     •   Place on hold (not available for templates in draft, rejected, and revision
         statuses)

     •   Delete (only available for templates in draft, rejected, and revision statuses)

     •   Validate (all statuses)

     •   Create revision (only available for templates in approved status)

     •   Preview



Reordering Deliverables:
You can change the sequence in which the deliverables are printed.
1.   Navigate to the Contract Terms page.
     Navigation: Library > Contract Templates tab.

2.   Enter the search criteria for the template.

3.   Open the template for update.

4.   Click the Deliverables tab.

5.   Click Reorder. The Reorder Deliverables page opens.

6.   For each deliverable that you want to re-sequence, click the deliverable and then
     click the Up or Down arrow. Deliverables are printed in the order that you
     specified.

7.   Click Apply.


Creating Template Revisions:
You can create revisions to approved contract templates. However, you cannot change
the following fields:
•    Template Name




                                                     Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-45
•    Intent

                  •    Start Date

                  Revisions need to be approved before they can be made available for use in authoring
                  business documents. After a template revision has been approved, it completely
                  replaces the original approved template. Template history of previous approved
                  versions is not currently supported.
                  1.   Navigate to the Contract Terms page.
                       Navigation: Library > Contract Templates tab.

                  2.   Enter the search criteria for the template.

                  3.   Open the template for update. The template must be in approved status.

                  4.   Choose the Create Revision option form the Actions list of values.

                  5.   Click Go. The status of the template changes to revision.

                  6.   Make the necessary changes.

                  7.   Submit the template for approval.


                  Placing Templates on Hold:
                  You can place templates on hold to prevent usage on contracts. You can also release the
                  hold and make templates available again. You can only place templates that are in
                  approved status on hold.
                  1.   Navigate to the Contract Terms page.
                       Navigation: Library > Contract Templates tab.

                  2.   search for the template that you want to place on hold.

                  3.   Click Go. The system displays the search results.

                  4.   Select the Update icon for the template.

                  5.   Choose the Place on Hold option from the Actions list of values.

                  6.   Click Go.


                  Deleting Templates:
                  You can delete templates that are in draft or rejected status
                  1.   Navigate to the Contract Terms page.




6-46    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Navigation: Library > Contract Templates tab.

           2.   Search for the template that you want to delete.

           3.   Click Go. The system displays the search results.

           4.   Select the Update icon for the template.

           5.   Choose the Delete option from the Actions list of values.

           6.   Click Go.

           7.   Click Yes to confirm.



Defining Global Templates
           To define a global template, you need to identify your global organization, usually the
           corporate headquarters. The designated global organization is responsible to for the
           creation of templates that local organizations can use. On approval, the global templates
           are available for local organizations to duplicate.
           The global templates feature is different from the global clauses. Unlike a global clause,
           the system does not track adoption of global templates. It is up to the local
           organizations to determine if they want to duplicate a global template. The system
           allows a local organization to duplicate the global template subject to the following
           conditions:
           •    If the global template has clauses that are not global, these clauses are not copied
                over during copy.

           •    If a local organization has adopted clauses manually, only those clauses that have
                been adopted and approved in the local organization will be copied over.

           •    If the local organization has localized clauses, the global clauses will be replaced by
                approved localized clauses during copy.

           The process of creating and using global templates includes:
           •    Global Operating Unit profile option. Users must set this site level profile option to
                determine global operating unit. You use the same profile option to create global
                clauses.

           •    Global check box in the contract template. To create a global template, users must
                select the Global check box. Once the template is approved, it becomes available in
                local organizations for copy.

           •    Duplicate Global Templates. Local organizations can search for global templates
                using the search field Owning Organization and selection the Global radio button.




                                                                 Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-47
Note that users can preview the global template first to ensure that the contract
                       terms meet their requirements. Users in local organizations cannot modify or delete
                       global templates.



Managing Variables
                  Oracle Contracts supports the use of business variables (tokens) in clause text. During
                  authoring, values from the business document replace the variables. Oracle Contracts
                  supports the following types of variables:
                  •    System-defined variables. Represent contract document attributes such as payment
                       terms, customer name, and supplier name. You can embed system variables in the
                       clause text, which will automatically be substituted with values when the clause is
                       used in a contract.

                  •    Table variable. Attach Table type variables to clause text to display product and
                       pricing information as part of contract terms. The actual products and prices are
                       sourced from the business document during contract authoring. Note that table
                       variables are currently supported only for Sell intent contracts. Oracle Contracts
                       supports the following seeded table variables:
                       •   Lines

                       •   Modifiers

                       •   Price Lists


                  •    Deliverable variables. Attach Deliverable type variables to clause text to display
                       deliverable information as part of contract terms. Note that deliverable variables are
                       currently supported only for Buy intent contracts. Oracle Contracts supports the
                       following seeded deliverable variables:
                       •   Supplier Contractual Deliverable

                       •   Buyer Contractual Deliverable

                       •   Supplier Negotiation Deliverable

                       •   All Negotiation Deliverables


                  •    User-defined variables. User-defined variables are tokens that the business defines
                       over and above the system variables. Users must provide values for these variables
                       as part of the contract authoring process.


                  Creating Variables:
                  Oracle Contracts provides seeded and user-defined variables:




6-48    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•    Seeded variables cannot be deleted or modified. Seeded variables include:
     •   System Variables. These variables represent contract document attributes.

     •   Deliverables Variables. These variables capture deliverable information on a
         contract.

     •   Table Variables. These variables capture structure information such as items
         and price lists that map to multiple rows.


•    User-Defined variables are based on the needs of the organization's contractual
     documents. These variables are replaced with values during contract authoring. In
     most cases, you can update or delete these variables.

As a prerequisite to defining variables, you must define any value sets they use.
1.   Navigate to the Create Variable page.
     Navigation: Library > Variables tab > Create Variable

2.   In the Variable Name field, enter the name that you want the system to display in
     clauses.

3.   Optionally, enter a description for the variable.

4.   In the Value Set field, choose a value set from the list of values.

5.   In the Intent field, choose the intent for the variable. You can choose the Buy or Sell
     option from the list of values. Only clauses with the same intent can use the variable
     for embedding.

6.   Optionally, select the External Party Updateable check box to allow updates to the
     variable by external users. Note that currently the system supports this feature only
     for authoring contracts with the Buy intent. Suppliers can be required to provide
     values for user-defined variables during the negotiation process. By selecting the
     External Party Updateable check box, the variables are displayed in the iSupplier
     Portal for supplier inputs. Suppliers using the iSupplier Portal to respond to
     purchase orders or blanket agreements cannot update variables in their responses.

7.   Click Apply to save the variable.


Searching for Variables:
You can search for both user-defined and system variables. For performance reasons,
you must search on at least on of the following:
•    Name

•    Description




                                                       Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-49
•    Type

                  The system does not support wildcard searches.
                  1.   Navigate to the Variables page.
                       Navigation: Library > Variables tab

                  2.   IN the Variables Search region, you can perform searches on variables by:
                       •   name

                       •   Description

                       •   Type

                       •   Intent.


                  3.   Click Go. The system displays the list of variables that match your search criteria.

                  4.   To view a variable, click the Variable Name link.


                  Displaying Clauses Using a Variable:
                  You can obtain a list of clauses that use a specific variable.
                  1.   Navigate to the Variables page.
                       Navigation: Library > Variables tab

                  2.   Search for the variable you want.

                  3.   In the Results section, select the variable's check box.

                  4.   Click Display Clauses to view clauses that use the variable. The system displays all
                       versions of t clause that use the specific variable.

                               Note: Clauses are displayed only for the current organization. Even
                               though the variables can be used across multiple organizations, the
                               users can only view clauses and other details for the organization
                               they are currently in.




                  Managing Changes to Variables:
                  You can only change or delete user-defined variables.


                  Updating User-Defined Variables:
                  You can update user-defined variables. However, you cannot change the value set in a




6-50    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
variable that is used in a contract.
           1.   Navigate to the Variables page.
                Navigation: Library > Variables tab

           2.   Search for the variable that you want to update. .

           3.   Click the Update button to open the variable for update. You cannot update the
                variable name or intent. Also, once the variable has been used in a clause, you can
                only update the variable description and select the Disable check box. You must
                create a new variable if you want to change the value set assigned to a user-defined
                variable after the variable has been used in a clause

           4.   Make the necessary changes.

           5.   Select the Disable check box if you want to prevent further use

           6.   Click Apply to save the variable.



Managing Sections
           Sections are headings under which you organize contract clauses. The headings provide
           structure and organization to a printed contract document. You can define sections that
           can be used in authoring templates and contracts. Previously defined sections are not
           required for creating contract templates since you can also define template-specific
           sections when creating a template.


           Creating Sections:
           1.   Navigate to the Create section page.
                Navigation: Library > Sections tab > Create Section button.

           2.   Enter the following parameters:
                •   Code

                •   Name

                •   Description (optional)

                •   Effective From

                •   Effective To (optional)


           3.   Click Apply to save the new section and close the Create Section page.




                                                                Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-51
Note: If you end date a section, it will not impact existing contract
                               templates of business documents. However, the inactive section
                               cannot be used to author new contract templates or business
                               documents.




                  Searching for Sections:
                  Use these procedures to search for sections.
                  1.   Navigate to the Sections page.
                       Navigation: Library > Sections tab.

                  2.   Enter your search criteria
                       •   Name

                       •   Code


                  3.   Click Go. The system displays the sections that match your search criteria.


                  Updating Sections:
                  You cannot update a section name after it has been saved. End dating a section only
                  impacts clauses, contract templates, and contracts authored in the future. The system
                  continues to use the end-dated sections if sections have already been used in a contract
                  template or contract. However, in the case of contract templates in draft status, the
                  system provides an error message when users view the section details from the
                  template.
                  1.   Navigate to the Sections page.
                       Navigation: Library > Sections tab

                  2.   Search for the section that you want to update.

                  3.   Click the Update icon for the section.

                  4.   Make the necessary changes. You can change the Description and the Effective To
                       fields.

                  5.   Click Apply to save your changes and close the page.

                               Note: You must manage Sections using the Create and Update
                               Sections pages in Oracle Contracts. Sections sshould not be created
                               or modified using the Oracle Applications Foundation Lookups




6-52    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
module.




Managing Folders
           You can organize clauses under different folders for easier retrieval. After creating
           folders, you can use the Update Folders feature to organize clauses in different folders.
           You can assign the same clause to more than one folder.


           Creating Folders:
           Folders are unique within an organization. Organizations that use the Contract Terms
           Library must create their own folders. When reviewing the clauses for adoption, folders
           that are created in a global organization are not copied over or created in the local
           organization.
           1.   Navigate to the Create Folder page.
                Navigation: Library > Folders > Create Folder

           2.   Enter a name for the folder.

           3.   Optionally, enter a description for the folder.

           4.   Click Save of Apply.


           Searching for Folders:
           For performance reasons, you must provide at least a name or description when
           searching for folders. You cannot use wildcard searches.
           1.   Navigate to the Folders page.
                Navigation: Library > Folders tab

           2.   Enter either a folder name or description.

           3.   Click Go. The system displays all folders that match your search criteria.


           Updating Folders:
           You can update folders by changing the folder name or description, and adding or
           removing clauses.
           1.   Navigate to the Folders page.
                Navigation: Library > Folders tab

           2.   Search for the folder you wish to update.




                                                                  Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-53
3.   In the Result section, click the Update icon for the folder you want to change.


                  Adding Clauses to Folders:
                  You can assign one clause to more than one folder
                  1.   Navigate to the Folders page.
                       Navigation: Library > Folders tab

                  2.   Search for the folder you want to update.

                  3.   In the Result section, click the Update icon for the folder that you want to add
                       clauses to.

                  4.   Click Add Clauses to open the Search Clause page.

                  5.   Enter the search criteria for the clause. Note that you can add clauses of any status
                       to a folder. The system does not maintain references to a specific version of a clause
                       when it is added to a folder. When you browse a folder to select clauses on a
                       contract template or contract, the appropriate version will be selected on the
                       template or the contract.

                  6.   Click Go to view the search results.

                  7.   Select the clause(s) that you want to add.

                  8.   Click Apply to add the clauses to the folder.

                  9.   Click Save or Apply to save your changes.


                  Removing Clauses from Folders:
                  1.   Navigate to the Folders page.
                       Navigation: Library > Folders tab

                  2.   Search for the folder you want to update.

                  3.   In the Result section, click the Update icon for the folder that you want to add
                       clauses to.

                  4.   In the Clauses section, select the checkbox for the clause that you want to remove.

                  5.   Click Remove.

                  6.   Click Save or Apply to save your changes.




6-54    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Deleting Folders:
1.   Navigate to the Folders page.
     Navigation: Library > Folders tab

2.   Search for the folder you want to update.

3.   In the Result section, click the Delete icon for the folder that you want to add
     clauses to.

4.   Click Yes to confirm.




                                                      Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-55
Oracle procurement contracts
7
                          Contract Expert Administration

           This chapter covers the following topics:
           •   Overview
           •   Managing Questions
           •   Creating User Questions
           •   Searching for Questions
           •   Updating Questions
           •   Managing Constants
           •   Creating Constants
           •   Searching for Constants
           •   Updating Constants
           •   Managing Rules
           •   Creating Rules
           •   Searching for Rules
           •   Activating Rules
           •   Disabling Rules
           •   Updating Rules
           •   Managing Question Sequence
           •   Creating Dependencies Between Questions
           •   Using Contract Expert on Business Documents



Overview
           The Contract Expert feature enables organizations to define rules for creating contracts
           and reporting policy deviations.




                                                                   Contract Expert Administration    7-1
•    Contract Creation Rules: These rules assist users in authoring complex contracts
                       with minimal legal supervision. Using Contract Expert, companies can centrally
                       define and enforce their business policy rules that govern the contract clauses to be
                       included in a contract document. Rules can be applicable to specific templates or
                       applied globally for all contracts that are authored in the organization.
                       After rules are defined, you can invoke Contract Expert while authoring a business
                       document like Sales Agreement, Sales Order, Blanket Purchase Agreement, or
                       Purchase Order. Contract Expert leads you through a contract creation
                       questionnaire and automatically adds required clauses based on the responses that
                       you provided. In addition to the responses to these questions, rules can also be
                       based on the terms that are negotiated on a business document, such as payment or
                       shipment terms, and item category. For example, contracting organizations may
                       require additional clauses in contracts involving hazardous materials, or in
                       contracts for which the supplier or customer is located in a specific foreign country.
                       Contract administrators can choose to remove the clauses that are brought in by
                       Contract Expert or select alternates during negotiation. However, these changes are
                       flagged as deviations during the approval process, ensuring proper scrutiny of all
                       nonstandard terms.

                  •    Policy Deviation Rules: These rules can capture and report changes in business
                       terms on business documents as deviations from corporate policy. As a result of
                       negotiations on business documents, organizations may negotiate terms that exceed
                       preapproved company policies and regulatory limits. For example, as a policy, all
                       customers are allowed payment terms of Net 45. However, the contract
                       administrator may agree to payment terms of Net 60 on a specific business
                       document. This deviation should be brought to the attention of contract approvers
                       to ensure that all deviations from corporate standards are approved in accordance
                       with the approval policies. The Policy Deviation Rules feature helps you define all
                       such corporate policies and identify any variations from these policies on contracts.

                  The sections in this chapter include:
                  •    Managing Questions, page 7-3

                  •    Managing Constants, page 7-6

                  •    Managing Rules, page 7-8

                  •    Managing Question Sequence, page 7-18

                  •    Creating Dependencies Between Questions, page 7-19

                  •    Using Contract Expert on Business Documents, page 7-20




7-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Managing Questions
                In Oracle Contracts, you can define questions that drive both clause selection and policy
                deviation rules. You can also define the response type that is appropriate for different
                questions.
                When you author a business document, Contract Expert displays the list of questions
                for which responses are required and the appropriate set of responses for you to select
                from.
                This section covers the following topics:
                •    Creating User Questions, page 7-3

                •    Searching for Questions, page 7-5

                •    Updating Questions, page 7-5



Creating User Questions
                You can create three types of questions, which are distinguished by the type of
                response: Yes/No, Numeric, or List of Values.
                You must provide the intent for the question, that is, Buy or Sell. A question name must
                be unique for a given intent.
                After you define these question types, questions are available across all operating units
                that use the Contract Terms Library.


Prerequisites
                If the response type to a question is Numeric, you must set up constants.
                If the response type to a question is List of Values, you must set up value sets with the
                following properties:
                •    Format Type = Char

                •    Validation Type = Independent, Translatable Independent, or Table.

                For more information, see the Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide.


Steps
                To create user questions:
                1.   Navigate to the Create Questions page.
                     Navigation: Contract Expert > Questions tab > Create Question button




                                                                         Contract Expert Administration    7-3
2.   In the Name field, enter a short name for the question. The name must be unique
                       for a given intent and across all operating units.

                  3.   In the Description field, describe the purpose of the question.

                  4.   In the Intent field, select the intent for the question: Buy or Sell.

                  5.   In the Question Prompt field, enter the question that you want to appear at run time
                       for the users to respond to.

                  6.   Use the Disable check box to disable the question to prevent it from being used in a
                       rule. The Disable check box is available only in Update mode.

                  7.   Select a response type from the list of values. The system supports the following
                       response types:
                       •   Yes and No: At run time, the response appears as a drop-down list with two
                           values, Yes and No. Select the appropriate response.

                       •   Numeric: The response is a numeric value that should be provided at run time.

                       •   List of Values: This option provides an enumerated list of values as its response.
                           For example, possible responses to the Contract Type question could include
                           Fixed Price, Cost Plus Pricing, and Services only Pricing.


                  8.   If in the Response Type field you selected the List of Values option, the system
                       displays the Value Set field.
                       Enter a value set or use the Search for Value Set icon to search for and select a value
                       set.

                               Note: You must set up value sets as described in the prerequisites
                               section, page 7-3.
                               For example, if your question checked that a contract type should
                               include the values Fixed Price, Cost Plus Pricing, and Services only
                               Pricing, you would first need to define these three values in a value
                               set. Then, when creating the question, you would need to select
                               Response Type = List of Values, and Value Set = the name of your
                               defined value set.



                  9.   Click Apply to activate and save the question.

                           Note: Contract Expert does not currently support default responses on
                           user questions. An exception, however, is a question with response
                           type Numeric that always defaults to 0 in the business document. You




7-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
must change this default value when answering numeric questions.




Searching for Questions
           Use these steps to search for questions.


Steps
           To search for questions:
           1.   Navigate to the Questions page.
                Navigation: Contract Expert > Questions tab

           2.   Enter your search criteria for the question.
                The following fields are available as search criteria:
                •   Name

                •   Description

                •   Question Prompt

                •   Intent
                    You can also search on the following fields:

                •   Value Set

                             Note: The Value Set search provides only the value sets that
                             have been used in the questions, not all the value sets that were
                             created in the system.



                •   Response Type

                •   Enabled check box


           3.   Click Go.
                The system displays the questions that match your search criteria.



Updating Questions
           You can make changes to the existing questions. However, you cannot update Name,
           Intent, Response Type, and Value Set if the question is used in a rule. You can update




                                                                         Contract Expert Administration    7-5
Description and Question Prompt even if the question is used in a rule. For the prompt
                  changes to take effect on a business document, you must run the Contract Expert:
                  Synchronize Templates concurrent program.


Steps
                  To update questions:
                  1.   Navigate to the Questions page.
                       Navigation: Contract Expert > Questions tab

                  2.   Search for the question that you want to update.
                       For more information, see the Searching for Questions section, page 7-5. The system
                       displays the questions that match your search criteria. From this page, you can
                       select one of the following options:
                       •   Update: To make changes to a question, click the Update icon. The system
                           displays the Update Question page. You can use the Disable check box to
                           prevent the question from being used in a new rule. This will not impact
                           existing rules that use this question.

                       •   Delete: A question cannot be deleted if it is used in a rule. To delete a question,
                           click the Delete icon. The system displays the Warning page. Click Yes to
                           confirm.




Managing Constants
                  You can define numeric constants in Oracle Contracts. Numeric constants can be used
                  in Contract Expert rules that use numeric conditions.
                  For instance, you may want to define a rule as follows:
                  •    Condition: All contracts for which the contract amount is greater than $1,000,000.

                  •    Result: Add the Special Payment Terms clause.

                  Define a constant called Contract Amount Threshold. In the constant, provide a value of
                  $1,000,000.
                  Then, when you create the rule, you simply use the Contract Amount Threshold
                  constant instead of entering the amount $1,000,000 on the rule. This way, if the
                  threshold is increased later to $2,000,000, you need to update only the constant
                  definition instead of every rule that uses this condition.
                  This section covers the following topics:
                  •    Creating Constants, page 7-7




7-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•    Searching for Constants, page 7-7

           •    Updating Constants, page 7-8



Creating Constants
           You must provide the intent for the constant, that is, Buy or Sell. A constant name must
           be unique for a given intent.
           After they are defined, constants are available across all operating units that use the
           Contract Terms Library.


Steps
           To create constants:
           1.   Navigate to the Create Constant page.
                Navigation: Contract Expert > Constants tab > Create Constant button

           2.   In the Name field, enter a short name for the constant.

           3.   In the Description field, describe the purpose of the constant.

           4.   Select the intent for the constant: Buy or Sell.

           5.   In the Value field, enter a numeric value for the constant.

           6.   Click Apply to save the constant.



Searching for Constants
           Use these steps to search for constants.


Steps
           To search for constants:
           1.   Navigate to the Constants page.
                Navigation: Contract Expert > Constants tab

           2.   Optionally, enter your search criteria:
                •   Name

                •   Description




                                                                     Contract Expert Administration    7-7
•   Intent

                               Note: You can perform a blind search. You can also enter the single
                               wildcard character % as your search parameter.



                  3.   Click Go.
                       The system displays the constants that match your search criteria.



Updating Constants
                  The name and intent of a constant cannot be changed if the constant is used in a rule.
                  Use the following steps to update a constant.


Steps
                  To update constants:
                  1.   Navigate to the Constants page.
                       Navigation: Contract Expert > Questions tab

                  2.   Search for the constant that you want to update.
                       For more information, see the Searching for the Constants section, page 7-7. The
                       system displays the constants that match your search criteria. From this page, you
                       can select one of the following options:
                       •   Update: To make changes to a constant, click the Update icon. The system
                           displays the Update Constant page. You can make changes to the name,
                           description, intent, and value of the constant if the constant is not used in any
                           rules. If the constant is included in a rule, you can change only its value and
                           description.

                       •   Delete: You can delete a constant if it is not used in a rule. To delete a constant,
                           click the Delete icon. The system displays the Warning page. Click Yes to
                           confirm.




Managing Rules
                  Contract Expert rules are created based on Buy or Sell intent for a specific organization.
                  These rules can be applicable to all templates of one organization or can be associated
                  with specific templates.
                  This section covers the following topics:
                  •    Creating Rules, page 7-9




7-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•     Searching for Rules, page 7-13

           •     Activating Rules, page 7-14

           •     Disabling Rules, page 7-16

           •     Updating Rules, page 7-17



Creating Rules
           To define a rule, you can enter multiple values for a single condition. The system
           displays a search page so that you can select multiple values and add to the rule. Use
           the following steps to create a rule.


Steps
           To create rules:
           1.    Navigate to the Create Rule page.
                 Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Contract Expert > Rule tab > Create Rule
                 button

           2.    Select the operating unit for the rule.

           3.    Select one of the following rule types:
                 •   If you want to set up a rule to bring additional clauses into a business
                     document, select the Clause Selection rule type.

                 •   To set up a rule to capture and report changes in business terms on contracts,
                     select the Policy Deviation rule type.

                 For more information about the rule types, see the Contract Expert - Overview
                 section, page 7-1.

           4.    Enter a unique name for the rule to identify the rule.

           5.    Enter a description explaining the nature and purpose of the rule.

           6.    Select the intent for the rule: Buy or Sell.

           7.    Review the Status field, which is a read-only field.
                 Contract Expert supports the following statuses for a rule:
                 •   Draft: When you can create and update a rule, the rule is in the Draft status.

                 •   Active (in Progress): When the rule is submitted for activation, the status of the




                                                                        Contract Expert Administration    7-9
rule is changed from Draft to Active (in Progress).

                       •   Active: The status of the rule is changed to Active when it is available for use in
                           Contract Expert.

                       •   Disabled (in Progress): This is the status of the rule while Contract Expert is
                           performing the process of disabling the rule (when the disabled rule is exported
                           to Oracle Configurator).

                       •   Disabled: The status of a rule is changed to Disabled when it is no longer
                           available for use in Contract Expert.

                       •   Revision: When you update an Active rule, its status is changed to Revision.


                  8.   To add a condition, click the Add Another Row button.

                  9.   Select the Match All or Match Any condition option.
                       If the conditions must all be true to select the results, select the Match All radio
                       button. Select the Match Any radio button if any condition can be true to select the
                       results.

                  10. In the Type field, select one of the following condition types:

                       •   Clause: The Clause type is available only for Clause Creation rules. Use this
                           type if the rule requires a Contract Expert selected clause to be present in the
                           business document. For instance, select the Clause type to create a rule to bring
                           in Clause B if Clause A, which was selected by Contract Expert, is present in the
                           document.

                       •   Variable: You can use the Variable type to create Clause Creation and Policy
                           Deviation rules.
                           Use this type for the Clause Creation rules if a system or user-defined variable
                           drives the clause selection on a business document. For instance, bring Clause
                           A if the variable Payment terms = Net 30 is in the document.
                           For Policy Deviation rules, use this type if a system or user-defined variable
                           drives the policy deviation for a business document. For instance, if Contract
                           Amount is less than $1,000,000, then the standard for Payment Terms is Net 30.
                           Or if the non-solicitation remedy is more than $25,000, then the standard for
                           Termination Days is 30 days.

                       •   Question: Use this type if a user question should drive the clause selection or
                           policy deviation on business documents. For instance, bring Clause A if the
                           answer to Question B is Yes.




7-10    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Note: You can use both system and user-defined variables to define
             Contract Expert rules.


    For more information about Variables, see Managing Variables, page 6-48.

11. Select a name in the Name field: the available options are based on the condition
    type that you selected in the Type field:
    •   Clause: The Name field is not available for this option.

    •   Variable: The system provides access to a search page for both seeded and
        user-defined variables.

    •   Question: The system provides access to a search page for questions that are
        defined in the Contract Expert.


12. Select an operator in the Operator field. Operators provide the logic in defining a
    condition, for instance, Payment terms IS Net 30.
    To create a rule, Oracle Contracts supports the following operators:
    •   Logic Condition operators

    •   IS

    •   IS NOT

    •   IN (allows selection of multiple values)

    •   NOT IN (allows selection of multiple values)

    •   Numeric Condition operators:

    •   >=: Greater than or equal to

    •   <=: Less than or equal to

    •   =: Equal to

    •   Not equal to

    •   >: Greater than

    •   <: Less than


13. Depending on the Type and other options, you must select one or more values in
    either the Value or Update Values field. For example:




                                                        Contract Expert Administration    7-11
•   For condition Type = Clause, use the Update Values field.

                       •   For condition Type = Question and if the response type is "Yes or No" or the
                           question uses a value set of type Independent, use the Value field.

                       •   For condition Type = Question with response type of Numeric or List of Values,
                           use the Update Values field.
                           You can click the Show Details link to view the selected values for Question and
                           Variable conditions, and clause name for Clause conditions.

                               Note: If you select multiple values in a condition, the system
                               displays "Multiple values" in the Value field. Click the Show/Hide
                               icon in the Details field to view all the value selections.



                  14. Click the Remove icon if you want to delete a condition from a rule.

                  15. Use the Results region to define the results if the defined conditions are met. The
                       Results region is available only for Clause Creation rules.
                       In the Results region, you can select clauses that must be brought in and ask the
                       user additional questions on a business document.

                  16. In the Results - Clauses region, click the Add Clauses button to add another Result
                       row to the rule.
                       The Results - Clauses Table displays the Clause Title and Description for the clauses
                       that you have chosen.

                  17. In the Results - Clauses Table, you can access the following:

                       •   Show Details: The system provides a hide or show option to display general
                           information about one clause or all the clauses.

                       •   Remove icon: You can use the icon to delete a result row from the rule.


                  18. Use the Question Table of the Results region to select one or more additional
                       questions that should be asked at run time if the conditions are met.

                               Note: This is one of the steps that is required to set up
                               dependencies between questions. For more details, see Creating
                               Dependencies Between Questions, page 7-7.


                       The Question table includes:
                       •   Question: You can select from the list of questions that are already defined
                           during Contract Expert setup.




7-12    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
•   Question Prompt: The system displays the question prompt details from the
                   library.

               •   Delete icon: You can delete a question row from the rule.

               •   Add Questions button: Click this button if you want to add another question to
                   the result row of the rule.


           19. Use the Contract Template Assignments region to assign the rule to one, many, or
               all contract templates. You can assign contract templates in Draft or Approved
               status to a rule. Only contract templates that are Contract Expert-enabled and
               belong to the same intent as the rule will be available to be assigned to the rule.

                       Note: Even though you can assign templates in any status to a rule,
                       because only approved templates can be used to author business
                       documents, the rules are effective only when applied to approved
                       templates.


               •   To assign a rule to all contract templates in an organization, select the Apply to
                   All Templates check box.

               •   To select and assign one or more contract templates, click the Add Template
                   button.


           20. Select one of the following options:

               •   Cancel: The system closes the Create Rule page without saving any changes.

               •   Save: The system validates the rule but does not close the page. If the rule fails
                   validation, the system displays an error message.

               •   Apply: The system validates the rule and displays the Rules Summary page. If
                   the rule fails validation, the system displays an error message.

               •   Apply and Add Another: The system validates the rule that was created and
                   opens a new Create Rule page. If the rule fails validation, the system remains in
                   the page and displays an error message.




Searching for Rules
           Use these steps to search for existing rules.


Steps
           To search for rules:




                                                                   Contract Expert Administration    7-13
1.   Navigate to the Rule page.
                       Navigation: Contract Expert > Rules tab

                  2.   In the Search region, search for rules by:
                       •   Operating Unit (mandatory field)

                       •   Name

                       •   Intent

                       •   Status

                       •   Contains Clause (search for a rule that uses a specific clause)
                           This option searches only for clauses that are currently used in rules.

                       •   Contains Variable (search for a rule that uses a specific variable)
                           The list of values displays only those variables that have been used on rules.

                       •   Contains Question (search for a rule that uses a specific question)
                           The list of values displays only those questions that have been used on rules.

                       •   Assigned to Template (search for a rule that is assigned to a contract template)
                           The list of values displays only the templates that are Contract Expert-enabled.


                  3.   Click Go.
                       The system displays the rules that match your search criteria.



Activating Rules
                  You can activate draft rules and make them available for use in Contract Expert.


Prerequisites
                  You must assign at least one contract template to the rule, but the contract template
                  need not be in the Approved status.


Steps
                  To activate rules:
                  1.   Navigate to the Rules page.
                       Navigation: Contract Expert > Questions tab




7-14    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
2.   Search for the rule that you want to activate.
     For more information, see Searching for Rules, page 7-13. The system displays the
     rules that match your search criteria.

3.   Click Activate.
     The Active Rules: Confirmation page appears. This page provides validation
     information on rules that are eligible to be published and those rules that cannot be
     published due to validation problems.
     The validations include the following:
     •   The rule contains invalid clauses (that is, clauses that are not in the Approved
         status) in conditions or results.

     •   The rule contains questions with invalid value sets. That is, the value set is not
         valid either because it was set up incorrectly or because a value set has been
         removed. For details of setting up value sets, see the prerequisites in the
         Creating User Questions section, page 7-3.

     •   The rule contains no contract template assignments.

     •   The rule contains inactive questions.

     •   Values that are used in rules are invalid. For instance, the values that are used
         in a value set are no longer valid.


4.   If validation errors occur, you cannot complete rule activation. You must first
     correct the errors, and then restart the Rule Activation process.

5.   When the Activate Rules: Confirmation page shows only rules that are ready to be
     activated, click Finish.
     This generates the following processes:
     •   The system submits the Contract Expert: Activate Rules concurrent program,
         and the status of the rule is changed to Active (in Progress).

     •   If the program finishes successfully, the status of the rule changes to Active.

     •   If any system errors are encountered during the activation process, the system
         stops the concurrent program, and the status of the rule remains Active (in
         Progress). The rule will be picked up for disabling the next time that you select
         other rules to be activated.

     •   Alternatively, you can run the Contract Expert: Activate Rules concurrent
         program manually from the Contract Terms Library Administrator
         responsibility.




                                                         Contract Expert Administration    7-15
On successful completion of the rule activation process, the system makes the
                           rule available for use in Contract Expert.


                           Note: To improve database performance, run the following
                           Configurator concurrent programs periodically:
                           •   Purge Configurator Tables: This program physically removes all
                               logically deleted records in the tables and subschemas of the CZ
                               schema.

                           •   Purge to Date Configurator Import Tables: This program deletes
                               data in the CZ_IMP tables, and the corresponding data in the
                               CZ_XFR_RUN_INFOS and CZ_XFR_RUN_RESULTS control
                               tables. The data for the number of days, which is specified in the
                               Input parameter, is retained.

                           For more information, see the Oracle Configurator Implementation Guide.
                           For additional information about improving database performance, see
                           the Oracle Configurator Performance Guide.




Disabling Rules
                  You can disable active rules and make them unavailable for use in Contract Expert.


Steps
                  To disable rules:
                  1.   Navigate to the Rules page.
                       Navigation: Contract Expert > Rules tab

                  2.   Search for the rule that you want to disable or activate.
                       For more information, see the Searching for Rules section, page 7-13. The system
                       displays the rules that match your search criteria.

                  3.   Click Disable.
                       When you choose to disable a rule:
                       •   The system runs the Contract Expert: Disable Rules concurrent program, and
                           the status of the rule is changed to Disabled (in Progress).

                       •   If the program finishes successfully, the status of the rule changes to Disabled.

                       •   If any system errors are encountered during the disabling process, the system




7-16    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
stops the concurrent program, and the status of the rule remains in the Disabled
                    (in Progress). The rule is picked up for disabling the next time that you select
                    other rules to be disabled.

                •   Alternatively, you can run the Contract Expert: Disable Rules concurrent
                    program manually from the Contract Terms Library Administrator
                    responsibility.




Updating Rules
           The steps for updating active rules are:


Steps
           To update rules:
           1.   Navigate to the Rules page.
                Navigation: Contract Expert > Rules tab

           2.   Search for the rule that you want to update.
                For more information, see the Searching for Rules section, page 7-13. The system
                displays the rules that match your search criteria. From this page, you can update,
                duplicate, or delete rules.

           3.   Update Rules: If you click the Update icon, the system changes the status of the
                active rule to Revision; if you update a draft rule, the status remains Draft. The
                system allows updates to the conditions, results, and template assignments.
                However, you cannot update the following fields:
                •   Operating Unit

                •   Rule Type

                •   Name

                •   Intent

                •   Apply to All Templates


           4.   Delete Rules: You can delete only rules in the Draft status.

           5.   Duplicate Rules: You can duplicate rules within your organization. The system
                creates a new rule. You must provide a new name and description for the rule. The
                system validates the rule when you click the Save, Apply, or Apply and Add
                Another button. The contract template assignments are also copied during the




                                                                    Contract Expert Administration    7-17
duplicate process



Managing Question Sequence
                  You can view the default sequence of questions that are used in a contract template and
                  update the ordering sequence. The sequence controls the order in which the questions
                  are displayed during document authoring. Use the following steps to view and reorder
                  the sequence of questions.


                  Steps:
                  To manage question sequence:
                  1.   Navigate to the Rules page.
                       Navigation: Contract Expert > Rules tab

                  2.   To view or reorder the question sequence, select a contract template to use to view
                       or update the sequence and then click the View Question Sequence button to open
                       the View Question Sequence page.

                  3.   Use the Contract Template field to search for and select a template. The system
                       displays the default sequence of questions for the selected template.
                       In the Questions area of the View Question Sequence page, the column Displayed
                       During Authoring, when selected, indicates the availability of questions during
                       document authoring. The questions that are not selected belong to inactive rules. To
                       enable these questions, you must activate the rules.

                  4.   To change the question sequence, click the Reorder button. The system displays the
                       Reorder Question page. To indicate a dependant question, the system shows a
                       character (-) next to the question. Organize the dependent questions in the desired
                       order within the main question.

                  5.   Use the Up and Down arrows to change the question sequence.

                               Note: During authoring, a dependent, lower-level question appears
                               only if a higher-level question is answered. If the dependent
                               question is not properly organized under the higher-level question,
                               the dependent question appears out of sequence in the
                               questionnaire during document authoring. For more information
                               about question dependencies, see Creating Dependencies Between
                               Questions, page 7-19.



                  6.   Click Apply to save and close the page.

                  7.   Run the Contract Expert: Synchronize Templates concurrent program to publish the




7-18    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
updates to question sequence. You must run this concurrent program manually to
                 enable the changes at run time for document authoring. The concurrent program
                 can finish with either of two statuses:
                 •   Completed/Normal

                 •   Completed/Error: If the program fails due to system errors, a notification is sent
                     to the Contract Expert Administrator.




Creating Dependencies Between Questions
             This section describes how to set up independent and dependent questions for a
             Contract Expert session.


Overview
             When you use Contract Expert, in the process of authoring a business document, you
             typically are asked a series of questions.
             Your answers to the first-level questions may cause further questions to appear in the
             Contract Expert session. These extra questions are dependent questions. In turn,
             answering these dependent questions can cause lower-level dependent questions to
             appear, up to a maximum of five levels.
             Ultimately, the objective of the questions is to specify which clauses are to be added to
             the business document.


Setting Up Independent Questions
             The following describes the general principle of defining a first-level, or independent,
             question in a rule:
             •   In the Conditions region, specify a Question type condition.

             •   In the Results region, specify one or more clauses, but no additional questions.

             •   Associate the rule with a Contract Expert-enabled contract template.

             When you answer the question in a Contract Expert session during contract authoring,
             Contract Expert may add the clauses that are specified in the rule results, but no further
             questions will appear.


Setting Up Dependent Questions
             You can set up to five levels of dependency for questions.
             The method of setting up dependent questions is illustrated in the following diagram
             that shows the simplest case of dependent question setup.




                                                                     Contract Expert Administration    7-19
The following are the general principles that are involved in the setup of all the
                  elements to produce a dependent question:
                  •    Create the questions first.

                  •    Create the rules. Which rule is created first does not matter.

                  •    Add the questions to the rules, as shown in the diagram.

                  •    Associate both rules with a Contract Expert-enabled contract template.

                               Note: If Rule R2 is the only rule that is associated with a contract
                               template, then Q2 becomes an independent (that is, first-level)
                               question in a Contract Expert session for any business document
                               that uses that contract template.




Using Contract Expert on Business Documents
                  You can use the Contract Expert functionality to author contract terms and conditions
                  based on the corporate standards and policies. Observe the following guidelines when
                  using Contract Expert:
                  •    Start with a standard contract template that may contain some standard clauses.

                  •    Use Contract Expert on the business document to bring in additional clauses, based




7-20    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
on criteria including items, item categories, payment terms, and other business
    terms in the document.

•   You may need to provide additional responses in Contract Expert to drive further
    clause selection.

•   All of the Contract Expert-recommended clauses are brought into the business
    document and organized under appropriate sections.

•   You can periodically run Contract Expert on the business document to ensure that
    the document contains all the appropriate clauses based on the latest set of business
    rules.

For more information about using Contract Expert on business documents, see the
online help topics in Oracle Contracts, Oracle Procurement Contracts, and Oracle Sales
Contracts.




                                                       Contract Expert Administration    7-21
Oracle procurement contracts
A
                                                                  QA Validations

            This appendix covers the following topics:
            •   Validations - Overview
            •   Contract Templates Validations
            •   Contract Expert Validations
            •   Business Documents Validations
            •   Repository Validations



Validations - Overview
            This appendix lists all validations that are provided by the system during validation of
            contract templates and business documents.



Contract Templates Validations
            The following table lists all errors and warnings that the system uses as part of the
            validation process for Contract Templates.


            Validation Type                Condition                     Description


            Alternate Clauses              Warning                       Checks for the presence of
                                                                         alternate clauses on the
                                                                         document.


            Clause Default Section         Error                         Checks whether the default
                                                                         section of the draft clause is
                                                                         valid.




                                                                                    QA Validations    A-1
Validation Type                 Condition                  Description


                   Clause Inactive Variable        Error                      Checks whether the draft
                                                                              clause contains an inactive
                                                                              variable.


                   Clause Invalid Status Change    Error                      Checks whether the clause is
                                                                              being changed to an invalid
                                                                              status.


                   Clause Type                     Error                      Checks whether the clause
                                                                              type of the draft clause is
                                                                              valid.


                   Clause Variable Invalid Value   Error                      Checks whether the draft
                   Set                                                        clause contains a user-defined
                                                                              variable with an inactive
                                                                              value set.


                   Contract Expert Template Not    Warning                    Checks whether a template is
                   Exported                                                   not exported for Contract
                                                                              Expert.


                   Contract Expert Template Not    Warning                    Checks whether a template is
                   Published                                                  not published for Contract
                                                                              Expert.


                   Duplicate Clauses               Warning                    Checks the document for
                                                                              presence of repeated clauses.


                   Empty Section                   Warning                    Checks for the presence of
                                                                              sections with no clauses.


                   Inactive Clauses                Error                      This checks for the presence
                                                                              of invalid clauses in the
                                                                              document.


                   Incompatible Clauses            Warning                    Checks for the presence of
                                                                              incompatible clauses on a
                                                                              document.


                   Invalid Default Section in      Warning                    This checks for the presence
                   Template                                                   of a valid default section in
                                                                              the Contract Expert area.




A-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Validation Type                Condition                     Description


            Invalid Variable for           Warning                       Checks for variables without
            Document Type                                                any document type
                                                                         association.


            Layout Template Not Defined    Warning                       Checks whether a stylesheet
                                                                         has been defined on a
                                                                         template.


            Template Rules That Are Not    Warning                       Checks whether any rules are
            Active                                                       attached to templates that are
                                                                         not active.


            Template With No Active        Warning                       Checks whether the template
            Rules                                                        has no Active rules attached.


            Translated Template Has        Warning                       Checks whether the parent
            Been Revised                                                 template has been revised.


            Translated Template is         Warning                       Checks whether the parent
            Invalid                                                      template is expired or on
                                                                         hold.




Contract Expert Validations
            The following table lists all errors and warnings that the system uses as part of the
            validation process for Contract Expert rules.


            Validation Type                Condition                     Description


            Expired Clause                 Error                         Checks for any expired clause
                                                                         that is used in the rule.


            Invalid Clause                 Error                         Checks for any On Hold
                                                                         clause that is used in the rule.


            Draft Clause                   Error                         Checks for any Draft clause
                                                                         that is used in the rule.




                                                                                    QA Validations    A-3
Validation Type                 Condition                  Description


                   Circular Dependency             Error                      Checks for questions with
                                                                              circular dependencies on
                                                                              other rules.


                   Invalid Question Valueset       Error                      Checks for an invalid valueset
                   Query                                                      query in a question that is
                                                                              used on a rule.


                   Invalid Variable Valueset       Error                      Checks for an invalid valueset
                   Query                                                      query in a variable that is
                                                                              used on a rule.


                   Missing Valueset Value in       Error                      Checks for any missing
                   Question                                                   valueset values for a question
                                                                              that is used in a rule.


                   Missing Valueset Value in       Error                      Checks for missing valueset
                   Variable                                                   values for a variable that is
                                                                              used in a rule.


                   Invalid Valueset in Question    Error                      Checks for deleted valueset
                                                                              for a question that is used in a
                                                                              rule.


                   Invalid Valueset in Variable    Error                      Checks for deleted valueset
                                                                              for a variable that is used in a
                                                                              rule.


                   Invalid Question                Error                      Checks for disabled questions
                                                                              in the rule.


                   Invalid Default Section         Warning                    Checks for the effectivity of
                                                                              the default section that is
                                                                              associated with the template.


                   Missing Template Association    Error                      Checks for missing template
                                                                              associations in
                                                                              non-organization-wide rules.


                   Invalid Procedure in Variable   Error                      Checks for invalid procedure
                                                                              in the variable that is used in
                                                                              a rule.




A-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Validation Type                Condition                    Description


           Invalid Procedure Name in      Error                        Checks for incorrect
           Variable                                                    procedure name format for
                                                                       user-defined variables. The
                                                                       correct format is: <schema
                                                                       name>.<package
                                                                       name>.<procedure name>


           Invalid or Missing Procedure   Warning                      Checks for invalid procedure
                                                                       in a new user-defined
                                                                       variable.




Business Documents Validations
           The following table lists errors and warnings that are used in the application, during
           authoring, as part of the validation process for contract documents.

                   Note: The Error and Warning conditions may have been defined
                   differently based on the individual application. Refer to the relevant
                   documentation within Procurement Contracts and Sales Contracts for
                   the exact condition that is used in the relevant applications.




           Validation Type                Condition                    Description


           Alternate Clauses              Warning                      Checks for the presence of
                                                                       alternate clauses on the
                                                                       document.


           No Clause Amendment            Warning                      Checks for the presence of
           Description                                                 amended clauses without
                                                                       amendment descriptions.


           No Clauses Exist               Warning                      Checks whether any clause
                                                                       exists on the document.


           Inactive Clauses               Warning                      Checks for the presence of
                                                                       inactive clauses in the
                                                                       document.




                                                                                 QA Validations    A-5
Validation Type                 Condition                  Description


                   Check Contract                  Warning                    Checks whether you have
                   Administrator                                              defined a contract
                                                                              administrator for the
                                                                              document.


                   Duplicate Clauses               Warning                    Checks the document for the
                                                                              presence of repeated clauses.


                   Empty Section                   Warning                    Checks for the presence of
                                                                              sections with no clauses.


                   Contract Expert not Run on      Warning                    Checks whether Contract
                   Document                                                   Expert has been run on a
                                                                              document.


                   Unresolved External             Warning                    Checks for the presence of
                   Variables                                                  external variables without
                                                                              values.


                   Incompatible Clauses            Warning                    Checks for the presence of
                                                                              incompatible clauses on a
                                                                              document.


                   Incomplete Contract Expert      Warning                    Checks for an incomplete
                   Configuration                                              Contract Expert configuration
                                                                              based on current document
                                                                              attribute values.


                   Unresolved Internal Variable    Warning                    Checks the document for the
                                                                              presence of internal variables
                                                                              without values.


                   Invalid Contract Expert Setup   Warning                    Checks for an invalid
                                                                              Contract Expert configuration
                                                                              based on the current
                                                                              document attribute values.


                   Old Version of Clause Used      Warning                    Checks the document for
                                                                              older versions of a clause
                                                                              from the library.


                   Contract Locked                 Warning                    Checks whether the contract
                                                                              has been locked.




A-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Validation Type                Condition                     Description


            New Contract Expert Clause     Warning                       Checks whether Contract
                                                                         Expert returns a clause that is
                                                                         not in the Contract Expert
                                                                         configuration that is currently
                                                                         in the document.


            Not Required Contract Expert   Warning                       Checks for Contract Expert
            Clause                                                       clauses in the document that
                                                                         are no longer required.


            Primary Contract Document      Warning                       Checks whether a primary
            not Found                                                    contract document is
                                                                         uploaded when the Contract
                                                                         Source is set to Attached
                                                                         Document.


            No Section Amend               Warning                       Checks whether the
            Description                                                  amendment description is
                                                                         missing for a section-related
                                                                         change during amendment of
                                                                         a document.


            Inactive Template              Warning                       Checks for an inactive
                                                                         contract terms template when
                                                                         it is used to create business
                                                                         document terms and
                                                                         conditions.


            Unassigned Clause              Warning                       Checks for clauses that are
                                                                         not assigned to any section.


            Unresolved System Variable     Warning                       Checks for the system
                                                                         variables without any values.


            Invalid Variable for           Warning                       Checks for the variables
            Document Type                                                without any document type
                                                                         association.




Repository Validations
            The following table lists the validation codes for Repository.




                                                                                    QA Validations    A-7
Validation Type                Condition                   Description


                   Validate Effective Date        Error                       Checks whether the contract
                                                                              has a valid effective date.


                   Validate External Party        Warning                     Checks whether the contract
                                                                              has an external party.


                   Contract Type Active           Warning                     This checks whether the
                                                                              contract has a valid contract
                                                                              type.


                   Contact Role Active            Warning                     Checks the contract for the
                                                                              presence of invalid contract
                                                                              roles.


                   Risk Active                    Warning                     Checks whether the contract
                                                                              was assigned an invalid risk.


                   External Party Active          Warning                     Checks for the presence of
                                                                              invalid external parties in a
                                                                              contract.


                   Contact Active                 Warning                     Checks for the presence of
                                                                              invalid contacts in a contract.




A-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
B
                                                                         Workflows

           This appendix covers the following topics:
           •   Workflows - Overview
           •   Approval Workflows



Workflows - Overview
           The following tables list the new workflows for Contract Terms Library, Repository,
           and Deliverables.



Approval Workflows
           The following table lists the Oracle Purchasing approval workflow functions that you
           can utilize for routing the purchasing document for special approvals based on contract
           terms.




                                                                                   Workflows    B-1
Condition         Function Name      Mode         Parameter Name       Return Value
                   Checked


                   Standard          IS_STANDARD_       Update       p_deviation_from_s   •   NO_CHANGE:
                   Contracts         CONTRACT                        tandard                  No change
                                                                                              from Contract
                                                                                              template.

                                                                                          •   ARTICLES_CH
                                                                                              ANGED: Only
                                                                                              clauses
                                                                                              changed from
                                                                                              the contract
                                                                                              template.

                                                                                          •   DELIVERABLE
                                                                                              S_CHANGED:
                                                                                              Only
                                                                                              deliverables
                                                                                              changed from
                                                                                              the contract
                                                                                              template.

                                                                                          •   ALL_CHANGE
                                                                                              D: Both clauses
                                                                                              and
                                                                                              deliverables
                                                                                              changed from
                                                                                              the contract
                                                                                              template.


                   Template          IS_CONTRACT_       Update       p_templ_expired      •   Y: Yes
                   Expired           TEMPLATE_EX
                                     PIRED                                                •   N: No




B-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Condition       Function Name   Mode     Parameter Name         Return Value
Checked


Clauses Exist   IS_CONTRACT_    Update   p_article_exists       •   NONE: No
                ARTICLES_EXIS   Amend                               clause exists.
                T
                                                                •   ONLY_STAND
                                                                    ARD: Contains
                                                                    standard
                                                                    clauses only.

                                                                •   NON_STAND
                                                                    ARD: Contains
                                                                    non- standard
                                                                    clauses.


Deliverables    IS_CONTRACT_    Update   p_deliverable_exists   •   NONE: No
Exist           DELIVERABLES                                        deliverable
                _EXIST                                              exists.

                                                                •   CONTRACTU
                                                                    AL: Contains
                                                                    contractual
                                                                    deliverables
                                                                    only.

                                                                •   INTERNAL:
                                                                    Contains
                                                                    internal
                                                                    deliverables
                                                                    only.

                                                                •   ALL: Contains
                                                                    contractual and
                                                                    internal
                                                                    deliverables.




                                                                    Workflows    B-3
Condition         Function Name      Mode         Parameter Name       Return Value
                   Checked


                   Clauses           IS_CONTRACT_       Amend        p_article_amended    •   NONE: No
                   Amended           ARTICLES_AM                                              clauses
                                     ENDED                                                    amended.

                                                                                          •   ONLY_STAND
                                                                                              ARD: Only
                                                                                              standard
                                                                                              clauses are
                                                                                              amended.

                                                                                          •   NON_STAND
                                                                                              ARD:
                                                                                              Non-standard
                                                                                              clauses are
                                                                                              amended


                   Deliverables      IS_CONTRACT_       Amend        p_deliverable_amen   •   ALL: All
                   Amended           DELIVERABLES                    ded                      deliverables are
                                     _AMENDED                                                 amended.

                                                                                          •   NONE: No
                                                                                              deliverable is
                                                                                              amended.

                                                                                          •   CONTRACTU
                                                                                              AL: Only
                                                                                              contractual
                                                                                              deliverables are
                                                                                              amended.

                                                                                          •   INTERNAL:
                                                                                              Only internal
                                                                                              deliverables are
                                                                                              amended.



                  The following table lists the Oracle Sourcing Approval workflow functions that you can
                  utilize for routing the sourcing document for special approvals based on contract terms.




B-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Condition   Function Name   Mode     Parameter Name       Return Value
Checked


Standard    STANDARDCO      Update   p_deviation_from_s   •   NO_CHANGE:
Contracts   NTRACT                   tandard                  No change
                                                              from contract
                                                              template.

                                                          •   ARTICLES_CH
                                                              ANGED: Only
                                                              clauses
                                                              changed from
                                                              the contract
                                                              template.

                                                          •   DELIVERABLE
                                                              S_CHANGED:
                                                              Only
                                                              deliverables
                                                              changed from
                                                              the contract
                                                              template.

                                                          •   ALL_CHANGE
                                                              D: Both clauses
                                                              and
                                                              deliverables
                                                              changed from
                                                              the Contract
                                                              template.


Template    TEMPLATEEXPI    Update   p_templ_expired      •   T: True
Expired     RED
                                                          •   F: False




                                                               Workflows    B-5
Condition          Function Name     Mode         Parameter Name         Return Value
                   Checked


                   Clauses Exist      ARTICLESEXIST     Update       p_article_exists       •   NONE: No
                                                        Amend                                   clause exists.

                                                                                            •   ONLY_STAND
                                                                                                ARD: Contains
                                                                                                standard
                                                                                                clauses only.

                                                                                            •   NON_STAND
                                                                                                ARD: Contains
                                                                                                non- standard
                                                                                                clauses.


                   Deliverables       DELIVERABLES      Update       p_deliverable_exists   •   NONE: No
                   Exist              EXIST                                                     deliverable
                                                                                                exists.

                                                                                            •   CONTRACTU
                                                                                                AL: Contains
                                                                                                contractual
                                                                                                deliverables
                                                                                                only.

                                                                                            •   INTERNAL:
                                                                                                Contains
                                                                                                internal
                                                                                                deliverables
                                                                                                only.

                                                                                            •   CONTRACTU
                                                                                                AL_AND_INT
                                                                                                ERNAL:
                                                                                                Contains
                                                                                                contractual and
                                                                                                internal
                                                                                                deliverables.




B-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Condition   Function Name   Mode    Parameter Name      Return Value
Checked


Clauses     ARTICLESAME     Amend   p_article_amended   •   NONE: No
Amended     NDED                                            clause is
                                                            amended.

                                                        •   ONLY_STAND
                                                            ARD: Only
                                                            standard
                                                            clauses are
                                                            amended.

                                                        •   NON_STAND
                                                            ARD:
                                                            Non-standard
                                                            clauses are
                                                            amended.




                                                            Workflows    B-7
Condition          Function Name     Mode         Parameter Name       Return Value
                   Checked


                   Deliverables       DELIVERABLES      Amend        p_deliverable_amen   •   ALL: All
                   Amended            AMND                           ded                      deliverables are
                                                                                              amended.

                                                                                          •   NONE: No
                                                                                              deliverable is
                                                                                              amended.

                                                                                          •   CONTRACTU
                                                                                              AL: Only
                                                                                              contractual
                                                                                              deliverables are
                                                                                              amended.

                                                                                          •   INTERNAL:
                                                                                              Only internal
                                                                                              deliverables are
                                                                                              amended.

                                                                                          •   SOURCING:
                                                                                              Only sourcing
                                                                                              deliverables are
                                                                                              amended.

                                                                                          •   CONTRACTU
                                                                                              AL_AND_INT
                                                                                              ERNAL:
                                                                                              Contractual
                                                                                              and internal
                                                                                              deliverables are
                                                                                              amended.

                                                                                          •   CONTRACTU
                                                                                              AL_AND_SOU
                                                                                              RCING:
                                                                                              Contractual
                                                                                              and sourcing
                                                                                              deliverables are
                                                                                              amended.

                                                                                          •   SOURCING_A
                                                                                              ND_INTERNA
                                                                                              L: Sourcing and
                                                                                              internal




B-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Condition   Function Name   Mode   Parameter Name   Return Value
Checked


                                                       deliverables are
                                                       amended.




                                                        Workflows    B-9
Oracle procurement contracts
C
                                               Concurrent Programs

           This appendix covers the following topics:
           •   Contract Terms Library



Contract Terms Library
           The following table lists the new concurrent programs for Contract Terms Library.


            Concurrent Program           Technical Name              Description


            Synchronize Clauses Text     ARTSYNCCTX                  Use this program to
            Index                                                    synchronize the clauses text
                                                                     index and enable searching
                                                                     for clauses using the Clause
                                                                     Keyword field. The keyword
                                                                     searches the clause name,
                                                                     clause display name, clause
                                                                     description, and clause text
                                                                     fields.


            Optimize Clause Text Index   ARTOPTCTX                   Use this program to optimize
                                                                     the clauses text index for
                                                                     improved performance when
                                                                     users search for clauses using
                                                                     clause keyword.




                                                                         Concurrent Programs    C-1
Concurrent Program              Technical Name             Description


                   Synchronize Contract            OKCTMPLSYNCCTX             Use this program to
                   Template Text Index                                        synchronize the contract
                                                                              templates text index to search
                                                                              for templates using the
                                                                              template keyword field. The
                                                                              keyword searches the
                                                                              template name and
                                                                              description.


                   Optimize Contract Template      OKCTMPLOPTCTX              Use this program to optimize
                   Text Index                                                 the contract templates text
                                                                              index for improved
                                                                              performance when users
                                                                              search for templates using the
                                                                              template keyword.


                   Adopt Global Clauses for a      OKCADPNEWORG               Use this program to
                   New Organization                                           automatically adopt approved
                                                                              global clauses for a new local
                                                                              organization.


                   Import Clauses                  OKCARTIMPORT               Use this program to import
                                                                              external clauses into the
                                                                              Clause Library. This program
                                                                              validates data in the open
                                                                              interface table, and imports
                                                                              the valid clauses into the
                                                                              Contract Terms Library.


                   Migrate Standard Clauses to     OKCSTDARTMIG               Use this program to migrate
                   11.5.10                                                    standard clauses to multiple
                                                                              organizations. This program
                                                                              is used for upgrades from
                                                                              earlier releases.


                   Purge Clause Import Interface   OKCPURARTINF               Use this program to purge
                   Table                                                      data from the Clause Interface
                                                                              table after the clause import
                                                                              has been completed.




C-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Concurrent Program              Technical Name       Description


Overdue Deliverable Notifier    OKCOVERDUEDELMGR     Use this program to
                                                     periodically send out
                                                     notifications or e-mail
                                                     messages to the concerned
                                                     parties for all overdue
                                                     deliverables.


Deliverable Due Date Notifier   OKCBEFOREDUEDELMGR   Use this program to
                                                     periodically send out
                                                     reminder notifications or
                                                     e-mail messages for all
                                                     deliverables that are about to
                                                     become due.


Deliverable Escalation          OKCESCALATEDELMGR    Use this program to
Notifier                                             periodically send notifications
                                                     to the escalation assignee for
                                                     all overdue deliverables.




                                                         Concurrent Programs    C-3
Concurrent Program             Technical Name              Description


                   Oracle Contracts Purge         OKCPURGE                    Use this program to purge
                   Routines                                                   data that is used in the
                                                                              application. Currently, purge
                                                                              of the following data is
                                                                              allowed through this
                                                                              program:

                                                                              •   QA Validation Errors:
                                                                                  Purges all validation
                                                                                  results (errors or
                                                                                  warnings) that are
                                                                                  generated during
                                                                                  contract template or
                                                                                  business document
                                                                                  approvals.

                                                                              •   Standard Deviations
                                                                                  Date: Purges all
                                                                                  deviations data that is
                                                                                  generated when the
                                                                                  Contract Deviations
                                                                                  report is run (either by
                                                                                  the system or by the user)
                                                                                  on a business document.

                                                                              •   Contracts Workbench:
                                                                                  Purges the oldest items in
                                                                                  the Recent Contracts bin.




C-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
D
                                                                       Seeded Data

            This appendix covers the following topics:
            •    Responsibility
            •    Deliverables
            •    Document Types
            •    Layout Template
            •    Notifications
            •    Procurement Notifications
            •    System Variables
            •    Lookup Codes
            •    Function Security



Responsibility
            The seeded responsibilities are:
            •    Contracts Workbench Administrator

            •    Contracts Workbench User

            •    Contract Terms Library Administrator
                 This responsibility can be used only if the MO: Operating Unit profile option has a
                 value that is assigned either at the site level or for this responsibility.

            To create new responsibilities for the Contract Terms Library, use the following:
            •    Root Menu: OKC Contracts Application HTML Root Menu

            •    Data Group: Standard




                                                                                    Seeded Data    D-1
•   Request Group: Contract Terms Request Group

                  To create new responsibilities for the Contracts Workbench, use the following:
                  •   Root Menu: OKC Contract Repository Root Menu

                  •   Request Group: Contract Repository Requests (available to the Contracts
                      Workbench Administrator responsibility)

                           Note: Changing the seeded menu structure is not recommended. You
                           must first customize the standard menus, and then create
                           responsibilities.




Deliverables
                  The following table displays the seeded deliverables:


                   Name                                     Description


                   All Contractual Deliverables             All contractual deliverables.


                   All Negotiation Deliverables             All negotiation deliverables.


                   Buyer Contractual Deliverables           Contractual deliverables where the buyer is the
                                                            responsible party.


                   Supplier Contractual Deliverables        Contractual deliverables where the supplier is the
                                                            responsible party


                   Supplier Negotiation Deliverables        Negotiation deliverables where the supplier is the
                                                            responsible party.




Document Types
                  The following table displays the seeded document types which can be associated to
                  contractual terms:


                   Name                    Description                Document Class        Application


                   AUCTION                 Auction                    SOURCING              Oracle Sourcing




D-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Name                  Description                  Document Class     Application


           AUCTION_RESPON        Bid                          SOURCING           Oracle Sourcing
           SE


           PA_BLANKET            Blanket Purchase             PO                 Oracle Purchasing
                                 Agreement


           PA_CONTRACT           Contract Purchase            PO                 Oracle Purchasing
                                 Agreement


           PO_STANDARD           Standard Purchase Order      PO                 Oracle Purchasing


           RFI                   RFI                          SOURCING           Oracle Sourcing


           RFI_RESPONSE          RFI Response                 SOURCING           Oracle Sourcing


           RFQ                   RFQ                          SOURCING           Oracle Sourcing


           RFI_RESPONSE          Sourcing Quote               SOURCING           Oracle Sourcing




Layout Template
           To print contract documents and the Deviations reports, Oracle Procurement Contracts
           provides seeded layout templates in Oracle XML Publisher. The layout templates are
           stored in the XML Publisher Layout Template repository.
           The following table lists the seeded layout templates in Oracle Procurement Contracts:


           Document Type                 Document Type Layout           Contract Terms Layout


           Standard Purchase Order       Standard Purchase Order        Oracle Contract Terms
                                         Stylesheet                     Template


           Blanket Purchase Agreement    Blanket Agreement Stylesheet   Oracle Contract Terms
                                                                        Template


           Contract Purchase Agreement   Contract Agreement             Oracle Contract Terms
                                         Stylesheet                     Template




                                                                                   Seeded Data    D-3
Document Type                  Document Type Layout              Contract Terms Layout


                   Sourcing RFI                   Sourcing Style Sheet              Oracle Contract Terms
                                                                                    Template


                   Sourcing RFQ                   Sourcing Style Sheet              Oracle Contract Terms
                                                                                    Template


                   Auction                        Sourcing Style Sheet              Oracle Contract Terms
                                                                                    Template



                  The following table lists the seeded layout templates for the Deviations Report:


                   Name                           Type                   Description


                   Contract Deviations Sourcing   RTF                    The main Rich Text Format template for
                   Template                                              Sourcing.


                   Contract Deviations            RTF                    The main Rich Text Format template for
                   Purchasing Template                                   Purchasing.


                   Contract Deviations Report     RTF                    Sub template for contract deviations
                   Template                                              summary details.


                   Contracts RTE Handler          XSL-FO                 Sub template for handling HTML tags
                   Template                                              used in Rich Text Editor for contracts.


                   Contract Deviations            XSL-FO                 Sub template containing all context
                   Constants Template                                    information.


                   Contract Deviations Variable   XSL-FO                 Sub template for variables resolution.
                   Resolution Template




Notifications
                  The following table lists the different types of notifications that are seeded in Oracle
                  Contracts:




D-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Seeded Notifications

Type                   Business Context                Description


Clauses                Clause submitted for            Notifies the global or local
                       approval                        organization approvers when
                                                       a global or local clause
                                                       requires approval.


Clauses                Global Clause approved          Sends a notification to the
                                                       requestor and library
                                                       administrators of local
                                                       organizations when a global
                                                       clause is approved.


Clauses                Clause rejected                 Sends a notification to the
                                                       requestor in a global or local
                                                       organization when a clause is
                                                       rejected.


Clauses                Auto-adoption of global         Sends a notification to the
                       clause                          library administrator of a
                                                       local organization when a
                                                       global clause is automatically
                                                       adopted in that organization.


Clauses                Global clause available for     Notifies the library
                       adoption                        administrator of a local
                                                       organization when a global
                                                       clause is available for
                                                       adoption.


Clauses                Clause requiring approval for   Sends a notification that a
                       adoption                        global clause was adopted in
                                                       a local organization and
                                                       submitted for approval.


Clauses                Clause adoption approved        Sends a notification that a
                                                       global clause was approved
                                                       for adoption in a local
                                                       organization.


Clauses                Clause adoption rejected        Sends a notification that a
                                                       global clause was rejected for
                                                       adoption in a local
                                                       organization.




                                                                     Seeded Data    D-5
Type                           Business Context                 Description


                   Contract Templates             Contract template submitted      Notifies global or local
                                                  for approval                     organization approvers when
                                                                                   a global or local template
                                                                                   requires approval.


                   Contract Templates             Contract template approved       Sends a notification to
                                                                                   requestor when a contract
                                                                                   template is approved.


                   Contract Templates             Contract template rejected       Sends a notification to
                                                                                   requestor in a global or local
                                                                                   organization when a contract
                                                                                   template is rejected.


                   Contract Deliverables          Overdue notification             Sends a notification for
                                                                                   overdue status on the due
                                                                                   date of the deliverable.


                   Contract Deliverables          Before due notification          Sends a notification prior to
                                                                                   the due date of a deliverable.


                   Contract Deliverables          Escalation notification          Sends a status notification to
                                                                                   escalation assignee after the
                                                                                   due date if the deliverable
                                                                                   was performed.


                   Contract Deliverables          Status change notification       Sends a notification when
                                                                                   either party changes the
                                                                                   status of the deliverable.


                   Repository                     Approval request notification    Notifies the contract approver
                                                                                   when a contract requires
                                                                                   approval.


                   Repository                     Contract approved                Notifies the contract approval
                                                  notification                     requester that the contract has
                                                                                   been approved.


                   Repository                     Contract rejected notification   Notifies the contract approval
                                                                                   requester that the contract has
                                                                                   been rejected.




D-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Type                           Business Context                 Description


              Repository                     Contract expiration              Notifies the contract
                                             notification                     administrator that a contract
                                                                              is about to expire.




Procurement Notifications
             The following table lists the notifications seeded for Oracle Procurement Contracts:


              Type          Business Context                       Description


              Signature     Buyer responding to contract after     Notifies the supplier that the buyer has
                            supplier signature                     responded to the contract.


              Signature     Contract approval                      Notifies the supplier that the contract
                                                                   was sent for signature.


              Signature     Supplier rejects the contract          Notifies the buyer that the supplier has
                                                                   rejected the contract.


              Signature     Supplier signs the contract            Notifies the buyer that the supplier has
                                                                   signed the contract, and the contract is
                                                                   now requires the buyer signature.




System Variables
             The following tables display the:
             •   Seeded system variables in Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing.

             •   Sources used by the system to retrieve values.

             •   Document types in which the values are used.



Oracle Purchasing Seeded System Variables
             The following table displays the seeded system variables in Oracle Purchasing.
             Legend:
             •   A - Sourced from the document.




                                                                                            Seeded Data    D-7
•   B - Organization, Legal Entity, Supplier Site, Ship-to, and Bill-to addresses are a
                      concatenation of the address components. For example, Address Lines, City, State,
                      Zip Code, and Country.

                  •   Note that Organization, Legal Entity, Ship-to, and Bill-to address formats follow the
                      HR Locations address format. However, Supplier Site address format follows the
                      PO Vendors address format.


                   System          Description         Source                 Standard   Blanket     Contract
                   Variable                                                   Purchas    Purchas     s/
                                                                              e Order    e/ Global   Global
                                                                                         Agreeme     Contract
                                                                                         nt          Purchas
                                                                                                     e
                                                                                                     Agreeme
                                                                                                     nt


                   Header Level                                                                       


                   Organization    Organization        Organization           A          A           A
                                   name


                   Organization    Address of          Organization Address   A          A           A
                   Address (B)     organization


                   Organization    Address style       Organization Address   A          A           A
                   Address Style                       Style


                   Organization    Organization        Organization Address   A          A           A
                   Address Line    address line 1      Line 1
                   1


                   Organization    Organization        Organization Address   A          A           A
                   Address Line    address line 2      Line 2
                   2


                   Organization    Organization        Organization Address   A          A           A
                   Address Line    address line 3      Line 3
                   3


                   Organization    Organization        Organization Address   A          A           A
                   Address -       address - town or   - Town or City
                   Town or City    city




D-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
System          Description         Source                 Standard   Blanket     Contract
Variable                                                   Purchas    Purchas     s/
                                                           e Order    e/ Global   Global
                                                                      Agreeme     Contract
                                                                      nt          Purchas
                                                                                  e
                                                                                  Agreeme
                                                                                  nt


Organization    Organization        Organization Address   A          A           A
Address -       address - postal    - Postal Code
Postal Code     code


Organization    Organization        Organization Address   A          A           A
Address -       address - country   - Country
Country


Organization    Organization        Organization Address   A          A           A
Address -       address - region    - Region 1
Region 1        1


Organization    Organization        Organization Address   A          A           A
Address -       address - region    - Region 2
Region 2        2


Organization    Organization        Organization Address   A          A           A
Address -       address - region    - Region 3
Region 3        3


Legal Entity    Legal entity        Legal Entity           A          A           A
                name


Legal Entity    Address of the      Legal Entity Address   A          A           A
Address (B)     legal entity


Legal Entity    Address style       Legal Entity Address   A          A           A
Address Style                       Style


Legal Entity    Legal entity        Legal Entity Address   A          A           A
Address Line    address - line 1    Address Line 1
1


Legal Entity    Legal entity        Legal Entity Address   A          A           A
Address Line    address - line 2    Address Line 2
2




                                                                          Seeded Data    D-9
System         Description         Source                   Standard   Blanket     Contract
                   Variable                                                    Purchas    Purchas     s/
                                                                               e Order    e/ Global   Global
                                                                                          Agreeme     Contract
                                                                                          nt          Purchas
                                                                                                      e
                                                                                                      Agreeme
                                                                                                      nt


                   Legal Entity   Legal entity        Legal Entity Address     A          A           A
                   Address Line   address - line 3    Address Line 3
                   3


                   Legal Entity   Legal Entity        Legal Entity Address -   A          A           A
                   Address -      address - town or   Town or City
                   Town or City   city


                   Legal Entity   Legal Entity        Legal Entity Address -   A          A           A
                   Address -      address - postal    Postal Code
                   Postal Code    code


                   Legal Entity   Legal Entity        Legal Entity Address -   A          A           A
                   Address -      address - country   Country
                   Country


                   Legal Entity   Legal Entity        Legal Entity Address -   A          A           A
                   Address -      address - region    Region 1
                   Region 1       1


                   Legal Entity   Legal Entity        Legal Entity Address -   A          A           A
                   Address -      address - region    Region 2
                   Region 2       2


                   Legal Entity   Legal Entity        Legal Entity Address -   A          A           A
                   Address -      address - region    Region 3
                   Region 3       3


                   Document       Document type       Type                     A          A           A
                   Type


                   PO             PO document         PO Number                A          A           A
                   Document       number
                   Number


                   Document       Document            Revision                 A          A           A
                   Revision       revision number




D-10    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
System           Description        Source                  Standard   Blanket     Contract
Variable                                                    Purchas    Purchas     s/
                                                            e Order    e/ Global   Global
                                                                       Agreeme     Contract
                                                                       nt          Purchas
                                                                                   e
                                                                                   Agreeme
                                                                                   nt


Supplier         Supplier name      Supplier Name           A          A           A
Name


Supplier Site    Name of the        Supplier Site Name      A          A           A
                 supplier site


Supplier Site    Address of the     Supplier Site Address   A          A           A
Address (B)      supplier site


Supplier         Supplier address   Supplier Address -      A          A           A
Address -        - line 1           Line 1
Line 1


Supplier         Supplier address   Supplier Address -      A          A           A
Address -        - line 2           Line 2
Line 2


Supplier         Supplier address   Supplier Address -      A          A           A
Address -        - line 3           Line 3
Line 3


Supplier         Supplier address   Supplier Address -      A          A           A
Address -        - line 4           Line 4
Line 4


Supplier State   Supplier address   Supplier State          A          A           A
                 - state


Supplier Zip     Supplier address   Supplier Zip Code       A          A           A
Code             - zip code


Supplier         Supplier address   Supplier Country        A          A           A
Country          - country


Supplier         Name of supplier   Supplier Contact        A          A           A
Contact          contact




                                                                           Seeded Data    D-11
System           Description         Source                    Standard   Blanket     Contract
                   Variable                                                       Purchas    Purchas     s/
                                                                                  e Order    e/ Global   Global
                                                                                             Agreeme     Contract
                                                                                             nt          Purchas
                                                                                                         e
                                                                                                         Agreeme
                                                                                                         nt


                   Supplier         Supplier            Supplier Classification   A          A           A
                   Classification   classification


                   Supplier         Supplier            Supplier Minority         A          A           A
                   Minority         minority type       Type
                   Type


                   Ship To          Ship to address     Ship To Address           A          A           A
                   Address


                   Ship To          Address style       Ship To Address -         A          A           A
                   Address -                            Style
                   Style


                   Ship To          Ship to address -   Ship To Address -         A          A           A
                   Address -        line 1              Line 1
                   Line 1


                   Ship To          Ship to address -   Ship To Address -         A          A           A
                   Address -        line 2              Line 2
                   Line 2


                   Ship To          Ship to address -   Ship To Address -         A          A           A
                   Address -        line 3              Line 3
                   Line 3


                   Ship To          Ship to address -   Ship To Address -         A          A           A
                   Address -        town or city        Town or City
                   Town or City


                   Ship To          Ship to address -   Ship To Address -         A          A           A
                   Address -        postal code         Postal Code
                   Postal Code


                   Ship To          Ship to address -   Ship To Address -         A          A           A
                   Address -        country             country
                   Country




D-12    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
System         Description         Source                     Standard   Blanket     Contract
Variable                                                      Purchas    Purchas     s/
                                                              e Order    e/ Global   Global
                                                                         Agreeme     Contract
                                                                         nt          Purchas
                                                                                     e
                                                                                     Agreeme
                                                                                     nt


Ship To        Ship to address -   Ship To Address -          A          A           A
Address -      region 1            Region 1
Region 1


Ship To        Ship to address -   Ship To Address -          A          A           A
Address -      region 2            Region 2
Region 2


Ship To        Ship to address -   Ship To Address -          A          A           A
Address -      region 3            Region 3
Region 3


Bill to        Bill to Address     Bill to Address            A          A           A
Address (B)


Bill to        Address style       Bill to Address - Style    A          A           A
Address -
Style


Bill to        Bill to address -   Bill to Address - Line 1   A          A           A
Address -      line 1
Line 1


Bill to        Bill to address -   Bill to Address - Line 2   A          A           A
Address -      line 2
Line 2


Bill to        Bill to address -   Bill to Address - Line 3   A          A           A
Address -      line 3
Line 3


Bill to        Bill to address -   Bill to Address - Town     A          A           A
Address -      town or city        or City
Town or City




                                                                             Seeded Data    D-13
System         Description         Source                     Standard   Blanket     Contract
                   Variable                                                      Purchas    Purchas     s/
                                                                                 e Order    e/ Global   Global
                                                                                            Agreeme     Contract
                                                                                            nt          Purchas
                                                                                                        e
                                                                                                        Agreeme
                                                                                                        nt


                   Bill to        Bill to address -   Bill to Address - Postal   A          A           A
                   Address -      postal code         Code
                   Postal Code


                   Bill to        Bill to address -   Bill to Address -          A          A           A
                   Address -      country             Country
                   Country


                   Bill to        Bill to address -   Bill to Address -          A          A           A
                   Address -      region 1            Region 1
                   Region 1


                   Bill to        Bill to address -   Bill to Address -          A          A           A
                   Address -      region 2            Region 2
                   Region 2


                   Bill to        Bill to address -   Bill to Address -          A          A           A
                   Address -      region 3            Region 3
                   Region 3


                   Transaction    Document            PO Currency                A          A           A
                   Currency       transaction
                                  currency


                   Functional     The currency that   Functional Currency        A          A           A
                   Currency       an operating unit
                                  uses to conduct
                                  business


                   Buyer          Buyer name          Buyer                      A          A           A


                   PO Total       Total amount of     PO Total Amount            A                       
                   Amount         the purchase        (Transaction
                   (Transaction   order in the        Currency)
                   Currency)      transaction
                                  currency




D-14    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
System         Description        Source                  Standard   Blanket     Contract
Variable                                                  Purchas    Purchas     s/
                                                          e Order    e/ Global   Global
                                                                     Agreeme     Contract
                                                                     nt          Purchas
                                                                                 e
                                                                                 Agreeme
                                                                                 nt


PO Total       Total amount of    PO Total Amount         A                       
Amount         the purchase       (Functional Currency)
(Functional    order in the
Currency)      functional
               currency


Agreement      Total agreement    Agreement Amount                   A           A
Amount         amount for         (Transaction
(Transaction   blanket or         Currency)
Currency)      contract
               agreement in the
               transaction
               currency


Agreement      Total agreement    Agreement Amount                   A           A
Amount         amount for         (Functional Currency)
(Functional    blanket or
Currency)      contract
               agreement in the
               functional
               currency


Rate Type      Rate type          Rate Type               A          A           A


Rate Date      Rate date          Rate Date               A          A           A


Rate           Rate               Rate                    A          A           A


Payment        Terms of           Payment Terms           A          A           A
Terms          payment


Freight        Terms of freight   Freight Terms           A          A           A
Terms


Carrier        Carrier            Carrier                 A          A           A




                                                                         Seeded Data    D-15
System         Description        Source                    Standard   Blanket     Contract
                   Variable                                                    Purchas    Purchas     s/
                                                                               e Order    e/ Global   Global
                                                                                          Agreeme     Contract
                                                                                          nt          Purchas
                                                                                                      e
                                                                                                      Agreeme
                                                                                                      nt


                   FOB            Free on board      FOB                       A          A           A
                                  designation


                   Pay On         Pay-on terms       Pay On                    A          A           A


                   Acceptance     Acceptance         Acceptance Method         A          A           A
                   Method         method


                   Acceptance     The required due   Acceptance Required       A          A           A
                   Required By    date for the       By Date
                   Date           acceptance


                   Agreement      Effective start    Effective Start Date      A          A           A
                   Start Date     date of the
                                  agreement


                   Agreement      Effective end      Effective End Date                   A           A
                   End Date       date of the
                                  agreement


                   Minimum        Minimum release    Minimum Release                      A           A
                   Release        amount for         Amount (Transaction
                   Amount         blanket or         Currency)
                   (Transaction   contract
                   Currency)      agreements in
                                  the transaction
                                  currency


                   Minimum        Minimum release    Minimum Release                      A           A
                   Release        amount for         Amount (Functional
                   Amount         blanket or         Currency)
                   (Functional    contract
                   Currency)      agreements in
                                  the functional
                                  currency




D-16    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Oracle Sourcing Seeded System Variables
             The following table displays the seeded system variables in Oracle Sourcing.
             Legend:
             •   A - Sourced from the document.

             •   B - Organization, Legal Entity, Supplier Site, Ship-to, and Bill-to addresses are a
                 concatenation of the address components. For example, Address Lines, City, State,
                 Zip Code, and Country.

             •   Note that Organization, Legal Entity, Ship-to, and Bill-to address formats follow the
                 HR Locations address format. However, Supplier Site address format follows the
                 PO Vendors address format.


              System       Description                   Source                 Buyer'   Sour   Requ
              Variable                                                          s        cing   est
                                                                                Auctio   Requ   for
                                                                                n        est    Infor
                                                                                         for    mati
                                                                                         Quot   on
                                                                                         e


              Header                                                                             
              Level


              Organizati   Organization name             Organization           A        A      A
              on


              Organizati   Address of organization       Organization Address   A        A      A
              on
              Address
              (B)


              Organizati   Address style                 Organization Address   A        A      A
              on                                         Style
              Address
              Style


              Organizati   Organization address line 1   Organization Address   A        A      A
              on                                         Line 1
              Address
              Line 1




                                                                                    Seeded Data    D-17
System       Description                   Source                   Buyer'   Sour   Requ
                   Variable                                                            s        cing   est
                                                                                       Auctio   Requ   for
                                                                                       n        est    Infor
                                                                                                for    mati
                                                                                                Quot   on
                                                                                                e


                   Organizati   Organization address line 2   Organization Address     A        A      A
                   on                                         Line 2
                   Address
                   Line 2


                   Organizati   Organization address line 3   Organization Address     A        A      A
                   on                                         Line 3
                   Address
                   Line 3


                   Organizati   Organization address - town   Organization Address -   A        A      A
                   on           or city                       Town or City
                   Address -
                   Town or
                   City


                   Organizati   Organization address -        Organization Address -   A        A      A
                   on           postal code                   Postal Code
                   Address -
                   Postal
                   Code


                   Organizati   Organization address -        Organization Address -   A        A      A
                   on           country                       Country
                   Address -
                   Country


                   Organizati   Organization address -        Organization Address -   A        A      A
                   on           region 1                      Region 1
                   Address -
                   Region 1


                   Organizati   Organization address -        Organization Address -   A        A      A
                   on           region 2                      Region 2
                   Address -
                   Region 2




D-18    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
System       Description                     Source                   Buyer'   Sour   Requ
Variable                                                              s        cing   est
                                                                      Auctio   Requ   for
                                                                      n        est    Infor
                                                                               for    mati
                                                                               Quot   on
                                                                               e


Organizati   Organization address -          Organization Address -   A        A      A
on           region 3                        Region 3
Address -
Region 3


Legal        Legal entity name               Legal Entity             A        A      A
Entity


Legal        Address of the legal entity     Legal Entity Address     A        A      A
Entity
Address
(B)


Legal        Address style                   Legal Entity Address     A        A      A
Entity                                       Style
Address
Style


Legal        Legal entity address - line 1   Legal Entity Address     A        A      A
Entity                                       Address Line 1
Address
Line 1


Legal        Legal entity address - line 2   Legal Entity Address     A        A      A
Entity                                       Address Line 2
Address
Line 2


Legal        Legal entity address - line 3   Legal Entity Address     A        A      A
Entity                                       Address Line 3
Address
Line 3


Legal        Legal Entity address - town     Legal Entity Address -   A        A      A
Entity       or city                         Town or City
Address -
Town or
City




                                                                          Seeded Data    D-19
System      Description                     Source                   Buyer'   Sour   Requ
                   Variable                                                             s        cing   est
                                                                                        Auctio   Requ   for
                                                                                        n        est    Infor
                                                                                                 for    mati
                                                                                                 Quot   on
                                                                                                 e


                   Legal       Legal Entity address - postal   Legal Entity Address -   A        A      A
                   Entity      code                            Postal Code
                   Address -
                   Postal
                   Code


                   Legal       Legal Entity address -          Legal Entity Address -   A        A      A
                   Entity      country                         Country
                   Address -
                   Country


                   Legal       Legal Entity address - region   Legal Entity Address -   A        A      A
                   Entity      1                               Region 1
                   Address -
                   Region 1


                   Legal       Legal Entity address - region   Legal Entity Address -   A        A      A
                   Entity      2                               Region 2
                   Address -
                   Region 2


                   Legal       Legal Entity address - region   Legal Entity Address -   A        A      A
                   Entity      3                               Region 3
                   Address -
                   Region 3


                   Document    Document type                   (Auction) Type           A        A      A
                   Type


                   Sourcing    Sourcing document number        (Auction) Number         A        A      A
                   Document
                   Number


                   Ship To     Ship to address                 Ship To Address          A        A      A
                   Address




D-20    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
System      Description                     Source                     Buyer'   Sour   Requ
Variable                                                               s        cing   est
                                                                       Auctio   Requ   for
                                                                       n        est    Infor
                                                                                for    mati
                                                                                Quot   on
                                                                                e


Ship To     Address style                   Ship To Address - Style    A        A      A
Address -
Style


Ship To     Ship to address - line 1        Ship To Address - Line 1   A        A      A
Address -
Line 1


Ship To     Ship to address - line 2        Ship To Address - Line 2   A        A      A
Address -
Line 2


Ship To     Ship to address - line 3        Ship To Address - Line 3   A        A      A
Address -
Line 3


Ship To     Ship to address - town or       Ship To Address - Town     A        A      A
Address -   city                            or City
Town or
City


Ship To     Ship to address - postal code   Ship To Address - Postal   A        A      A
Address -                                   Code
Postal
Code


Ship To     Ship to address - country       Ship To Address -          A        A      A
Address -                                   country
Country


Ship To     Ship to address - region 1      Ship To Address -          A        A      A
Address -                                   Region 1
Region 1


Ship To     Ship to address - region 2      Ship To Address -          A        A      A
Address -                                   Region 2
Region 2




                                                                           Seeded Data    D-21
System      Description                      Source                     Buyer'   Sour   Requ
                   Variable                                                                s        cing   est
                                                                                           Auctio   Requ   for
                                                                                           n        est    Infor
                                                                                                    for    mati
                                                                                                    Quot   on
                                                                                                    e


                   Ship To     Ship to address - region 3       Ship To Address -          A        A      A
                   Address -                                    Region 3
                   Region 3


                   Bill to     Bill to Address                  Bill to Address            A        A      A
                   Address
                   (B)


                   Bill to     Address style                    Bill to Address - Style    A        A      A
                   Address -
                   Style


                   Bill to     Bill to address - line 1         Bill to Address - Line 1   A        A      A
                   Address -
                   Line 1


                   Bill to     Bill to address - line 2         Bill to Address - Line 2   A        A      A
                   Address -
                   Line 2


                   Bill to     Bill to address - line 3         Bill to Address - Line 3   A        A      A
                   Address -
                   Line 3


                   Bill to     Bill to address - town or city   Bill to Address - Town     A        A      A
                   Address -                                    or City
                   Town or
                   City


                   Bill to     Bill to address - postal code    Bill to Address - Postal   A        A      A
                   Address -                                    Code
                   Postal
                   Code


                   Bill to     Bill to address - country        Bill to Address -          A        A      A
                   Address -                                    Country
                   Country




D-22    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
System       Description                    Source                     Buyer'   Sour   Requ
Variable                                                               s        cing   est
                                                                       Auctio   Requ   for
                                                                       n        est    Infor
                                                                                for    mati
                                                                                Quot   on
                                                                                e


Bill to      Bill to address - region 1     Bill to Address - Region   A        A      A
Address -                                   1
Region 1


Bill to      Bill to address - region 2     Bill to Address - Region   A        A      A
Address -                                   2
Region 2


Bill to      Bill to address - region 3     Bill to Address - Region   A        A      A
Address -                                   3
Region 3


Transactio   Document transaction           Negotiation Currency       A        A      A
n            currency
Currency


Functional   The currency that an           Negotiation Currency       A        A      A
Currency     operating unit uses to
             conduct business


Buyer        Buyer name                     (Enterprise) Contact       A        A      A


Agreemen     Total agreement amount for     Total Agreement            A        A       
t Amount     blanket or contract            Amount
(Transacti   agreement in the transaction
on           currency
Currency)


Agreemen     Total agreement amount for     Total Agreement            A        A       
t Amount     blanket or contract            Amount
(Functiona   agreement in the functional
l            currency
Currency)


Payment      Terms of payment               Payment Terms              A        A      A
Terms




                                                                           Seeded Data    D-23
System       Description                    Source                 Buyer'   Sour   Requ
                   Variable                                                           s        cing   est
                                                                                      Auctio   Requ   for
                                                                                      n        est    Infor
                                                                                               for    mati
                                                                                               Quot   on
                                                                                               e


                   Freight      Terms of freight               Freight Terms          A        A      A
                   Terms


                   Carrier      Carrier                        Carrier                A        A      A


                   FOB          Free on board designation      FOB                    A        A      A


                   Agreemen     Effective start date of the    Effective Start Date   A        A       
                   t Start      agreement
                   Date


                   Agreemen     Effective end date of the      Effective End Date     A        A       
                   t End Date   agreement


                   Minimum      Minimum release amount         Minimum Release        A        A       
                   Release      for blanket or contract        Amount (Transaction
                   Amount       agreements in the              Currency)
                   (Transacti   transaction currency
                   on
                   Currency)


                   Minimum      Minimum release amount         Minimum Release        A        A       
                   Release      for blanket or contract        Amount (Functional
                   Amount       agreements in the functional   Currency)
                   (Functiona   currency
                   l
                   Currency)


                   Outcome      Oracle Purchasing Style of     (Auction) Outcome      A        A
                                the purchasing document
                                created as an outcome of a
                                negotiation


                   Outcome      Document Type of the           (Auction) Outcome      A        A       
                   Document     Oracle Purchasing document     Document Type
                   Type         created as an outcome of a
                                negotiation




D-24    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
System       Description                  Source                     Buyer'   Sour   Requ
Variable                                                             s        cing   est
                                                                     Auctio   Requ   for
                                                                     n        est    Infor
                                                                              for    mati
                                                                              Quot   on
                                                                              e


Title        Sourcing document title      (Auction) Title            A        A      A


Response     Response style               Response Style             A        A      A
Style


Response     Method to determine how      Bid/Quote Ranking          A        A      A
Ranking      responses are ranked


Enterprise   Enterprise name              Auctioneers / Buyer        A        A      A
Name


Open         The date the negotiation     Open Response Date         A        A      A
Response     opens
Date                                      (If the Open Response
                                          Date is set to Null, the
                                          System Date would be
                                          used.)


Close        The date the negotiation     Close Response Date        A        A      A
Response     closes
Date


Preview      During the preview period,   Preview Date               A        A      A
Date         all eligible suppliers can
             view the auction/RFQ, but
             not submit responses


Scheduled    The date by which the        Scheduled Award Date       A        A       
Award        auction/RFQ is awarded
Date


Amendme      Amendment description        Amendment Description      A        A      A
nt
Descriptio
n


Response     Response document number     Response Number            A        A      A
Number




                                                                         Seeded Data    D-25
System         Description                 Source                   Buyer'   Sour   Requ
                   Variable                                                            s        cing   est
                                                                                       Auctio   Requ   for
                                                                                       n        est    Infor
                                                                                                for    mati
                                                                                                Quot   on
                                                                                                e


                   Response       Currency of the response    Response Currency        A        A      A
                   Currency       document




Contract Expert System Variables
                  The following table displays seeded Contract Expert system variables and value sets
                  associated with them.


                   System Variable                  Purchasing Value Set          Sourcing Value Set


                   Organization                     OKC_XPRT_OPER_UNIT            OKC_XPRT_OPER_UNIT


                   Legal Entity                     OKC_XPRT_LEGAL_ENTITY         OKC_XPRT_LEGAL_ENTITY


                   Document Type                    POC_XPRT_DOC_TYPE             POC_XPRT_DOC_TYPE


                   Supplier Name                    POC_XPRT_SUPPLIER             NOT APPLICABLE


                   Supplier Country                 OKC_XPRT_COUNTRY              NOT APPLICABLE


                   Transaction Currency             OKC_XPRT_CURRENCY             OKC_XPRT_CURRENCY


                   Functional Currency              OKC_XPRT_CURRENCY             OKC_XPRT_CURRENCY


                   PO Total Amount                  NOT APPLICABLE                NOT APPLICABLE
                   (Transaction Currency)


                   PO Total Amount (Functional      NOT APPLICABLE                NOT APPLICABLE
                   Currency)


                   Agreement Amount                 NOT APPLICABLE                NOT APPLICABLE
                   (Transaction Currency)




D-26    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
System Variable                 Purchasing Value Set    Sourcing Value Set


Agreement Amount                NOT APPLICABLE          NOT APPLICABLE
(Functional Currency)


Global Flag                     OKC_XPRT_YES_NO         OKC_XPRT_YES_NO


Rate Type                       OKC_XPRT_RATE_TYPE      NOT APPLICABLE


Payment Terms                   POC_XPRT_PAY_TERMS      POC_XPRT_PAY_TERMS


Freight Terms                   POC_XPRT_FREIGHT_TERM   POC_XPRT_FREIGHT_TERM
                                S                       S


Carrier                         OKC_XPRT_CARRIER        OKC_XPRT_CARRIER


FOB                             POC_XPRT_FOB            POC_XPRT_FOB


Pay On                          POC_XPRT_PAY_ON         POC_XPRT_PAY_ON


Supply Agreement Flag           OKC_XPRT_YES_NO         NOT APPLICABLE


Minimum Release Amount          NOT APPLICABLE          NOT APPLICABLE
(Transaction Currency)


Minimum Release Amount          NOT APPLICABLE          NOT APPLICABLE
(Functional Currency)


Outcome                         NOT APPLICABLE          PON_CONTRACT_TYPE_PO


Style                           NOT APPLICABLE          PON
                                                        _BID_VISIBILITY_CODE


Display Scoring Criteria Flag   NOT APPLICABLE          PON _YES_NO


Currency Responses Allowed      NOT APPLICABLE          PON _YES_NO
Flag


Invitation Only Participation   NOT APPLICABLE          PON _YES_NO
Flag


See Other Supplier's            NOT APPLICABLE          PON _YES_NO
Responses Flag




                                                                 Seeded Data    D-27
System Variable                Purchasing Value Set         Sourcing Value Set


                   Selective Response Allowed     NOT APPLICABLE               PON _YES_NO
                   Flag


                   Full Quantity Response         NOT APPLICABLE               PON _YES_NO
                   Required Flag


                   Multiple Responses Allowed     NOT APPLICABLE               PON _YES_NO
                   Flag


                   Multiple Rounds Allowed        NOT APPLICABLE               PON _YES_NO
                   Flag


                   Manual Close Allowed Flag      NOT APPLICABLE               PON _YES_NO


                   Manual Extend Allowed Flag     NOT APPLICABLE               PON _YES_NO


                   AutoExtend Allowed Flag        NOT APPLICABLE               PON _YES_NO


                   Response Prices Decrease       NOT APPLICABLE               PON _YES_NO
                   Flag


                   Item Category                  POC_XPRT_ITEM_CATEGO         POC_XPRT_ITEM_CATEGO
                                                  RY                           RY


                   Purchasing Style               PO_XPRT_PURCHASING_ST        NOT APPLICABLE
                                                  YLE


                   Transportation Arranger        PO_XPRT_TRANSPORTATI         NOT APPLICABLE
                                                  ON_ARRANGED


                   Outcome Document Type          NOT APPLICABLE               PON_CONTRACT_TYPE




Lookup Codes

Standard ACCEPTANCE_TYPE Lookup Codes
                  The following table displays the values for the ACCEPTANCE_TYPE lookup code:




D-28    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Look Up Code Value                         Description


            ACCEPT WITH CHANGES                        Accepted purchase order and changes are
                                                       present.


            ACCEPTED TERMS                             Accepted all purchase order terms.


            OPEN                                       Open


            ON SCHEDULE                                Purchase order on schedule.


            UNACCEPTABLE CHANGES                       Unacceptable purchase order changes.



           For more information about lookup codes, see Lookup Codes, Oracle Contracts
           Implementation and Administration Guide.



Function Security
           The following table lists the security functions provided by Oracle Procurement
           Contracts and the specific functionality that these functions and sub-menus would
           enable in Oracle Purchasing, Oracle Sourcing, and Oracle iSupplier Portal:


            New Menu or Function        Technical Name                Description
            Name


            Author Contract Terms in    PO_CONTRACT_TERMS             Controls whether Oracle
            Oracle Purchasing                                         Purchasing users can author
                                                                      contract terms.


            Author Deliverables Main    OKC_AUTHOR_DELIVERAB          Author Deliverables main
            Menu                        LES_MAIN                      menu: included in Sourcing
                                                                      Buyer and Sourcing Super
                                                                      User menus.


            Contract Terms Access in    PON_BUYER_CONTRACT_T          Enables Sourcing Buyer to
            Oracle Sourcing             ERMS                          access contract terms.


            Contract Terms Library      OKC_TERMS_LIBRARY_MA          Enables Oracle Purchasing
            Access                      IN                            users to directly access the
                                                                      contract terms library.




                                                                                 Seeded Data    D-29
New Menu or Function           Technical Name               Description
                   Name


                   Contract Terms User            OKC_CONTRACT_TERMS_          Contracts Terms User:
                                                  USER                         included in Sourcing Buyer
                                                                               and Sourcing Super User
                                                                               menus.


                   Create RFQ                     PON_NEG_CRT_CONTRAC          Used to grant/deny access to
                   <RFQ_NUMBER>: Define           TS                           the Enter Contract Terms
                   Contract Terms                                              page.


                   Manage Deliverables            OKC_DELIVERABLES_WKB         Enables access to the Manage
                                                  NCH_VIEW                     Deliverables option under the
                                                                               Orders tab in Oracle iSupplier
                                                                               Portal.


                   Manage Deliverables for PO     PO_DELIVERABLES_WKBN         Controls the display of the
                                                  CH                           following:

                                                                               •   Deliverables tab in the
                                                                                   Professional Buyer's
                                                                                   Work Center

                                                                               •   Manage Deliverables
                                                                                   option in the Action list
                                                                                   for a purchase order

                                                                               •   Manage Deliverables
                                                                                   option in the navigator
                                                                                   menu

                                                                               •   Update Deliverable
                                                                                   Status button in the
                                                                                   Terms window in Forms


                   Manage Deliverables Main       OKC_MANAGE_DELIVERA          Manage Deliverables main
                   Menu                           BLES_MAIN                    menu: gives Oracle Sourcing
                                                                               and Oracle Purchasing users
                                                                               access to manage deliverables.


                   Manage Contract Deliverables   POS_MANAGE_DELIVERAB         Controls whether a supplier is
                                                  LES                          enabled to manage
                                                                               deliverables.




D-30    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
New Menu or Function       Technical Name        Description
Name


Sign Purchase Order        POS_SIGN_ORDER        Controls whether a supplier is
                                                 enabled to sign purchase
                                                 orders.


Update Response            PON_DELIV_RES         Enables access to the Update
Deliverables                                     Response Deliverables page.


View Contract Amendments   POS_VIEW_AMENDMENTS   Controls whether a supplier is
                                                 enabled to view contract
                                                 deliverables and clauses.


View Document              PO_VIEW_DOCUMENT      Controls whether a supplier is
                                                 enabled to view the PDF
                                                 version of a purchase order
                                                 document.




                                                            Seeded Data    D-31
Oracle procurement contracts
E
                                                                    XML Reference

                 This appendix covers the following topics:
                 •   Contract Terms XML Reference



Contract Terms XML Reference
                 The complete definition of the contract terms XML is provided as an XML schema
                 seeded with Oracle Contracts. You can find the XML schema file in the XML Publisher
                 data definition Contract Terms Data Definition. The XML defined in this section
                 represent contract templates. However, the contract XML is also included in sourcing
                 documents, procurement contracts, sales contracts, quotes and other contracts to
                 represent contract terms.

Contract Terms XML
                 The complete definition of the XML format is provided as an XML schema. The XML
                 schema file can be found in the XML Publisher data definition Contract Terms Data
                 Definition. The ContractTermsAM element is the top-level node of the XML document
                 for a contract template. Other XML documents, such as sales contracts XML, include the
                 ContractTermsAM element as a child node.
                 The ContractTermsAM XML element has the following structure:
                 ContractTermsAM
                 VariablesMetaDataVO (1)
                 VariablesMetaDataVORow (0 or more)
                 ParametersVO (1)
                 ParametesVORow (1)
                 SectionsArticlesToPrintVO (1)
                 SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow (0 or more)
                 DeliverablesAM (1)
                 DeliverablesAllForBusinessDocExpVO (0 or 1)
                 DeliverablesAllForBusinessDocExpVORow (0 ormore)




                                                                                    XML Reference    E-1
DeliverablesForAllSourcingExpVO (0 or 1)
                  DeliverablesForAllSourcingExpVORow (0 or more)
                  DeliverablesForInternalContractualExpVO (0 or 1)
                  DeliverablesForInternalContractualExpVORow (0 or more)
                  DeliverablesForExternalSourcingExpVO (0 or 1)
                  DeliverablesForExternalSourcingExpVORow (0 or more)
                  DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVO (0 or 1)
                  DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVORow (0 or more)
                  DeliverablesForInternalSourcingExpVO (0 or 1)
                  DeliverablesForInternalSourcingExpVORow (0 or more)

                  The following is an example of a contract terms XML document. This XML document is
                  a shortened version of the preview XML document that is also available in the Contract
                  Terms Data Definition.
                  <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>
                  <ContractTermsAM type="AM" name="ContractTermsAM1">
                  <VariablesMetadataVO type="VO" name="VariablesMetadataVO">
                  <VariablesMetadataVORow>
                  <ArticleVersionId>6319</ArticleVersionId>
                  <VariableCode>EXTERNAL_CONTRACTUAL_DEL</VariableCode>
                  <VariableType>D</VariableType>
                  <DocType>TEMPLATE</DocType>
                  <ViewObjectName>DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVO</ViewObjectName>
                  <ExternalYn>N</ExternalYn>
                  </VariablesMetadataVORow>
                  <VariablesMetadataVORow>
                  <ArticleVersionId>6313</ArticleVersionId>
                  <VariableCode>1022</VariableCode>
                  <VariableType>U</VariableType>
                  <ExternalYn>N</ExternalYn>
                  </VariablesMetadataVORow>
                  </VariablesMetadataVO>
                  <ParametersVO type="VO" name="ParametersVO">
                  <ParametersVORow>
                  <PrintAmendments>0</PrintAmendments>
                  <DocumentName>Example Contract Template</DocumentName>
                  </ParametersVORow>
                  </ParametersVO>
                  <SectionsArticlesToPrintVO type="VO" name="SectionsArticlesToPrintVO">
                  <SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow>




E-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
<UniqueId>SECTION14394</UniqueId>
<StructureLevel>1</StructureLevel>
<ObjectType>SECTION</ObjectType>
<DocumentId>3941</DocumentId>
<DocumentType>TEMPLATE</DocumentType>
<DisplaySequence>10</DisplaySequence>
<Label>I.</Label>
<Title>Contract Terms and Conditions</Title>
<ArticleText />
<CatId>14394</CatId>
</SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow>
<SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow>
<UniqueId>ARTICLE36293</UniqueId>
<StructureLevel>2</StructureLevel>
<ObjectType>ARTICLE</ObjectType>
<ParentId>14394</ParentId>
<DocumentId>3941</DocumentId>
<DocumentType>TEMPLATE</DocumentType>
<DisplaySequence>10</DisplaySequence>
<Label>1.</Label>
<Title>Limitation of Government Liability</Title>
<ArticleNumber>10415</ArticleNumber>
<ArticleText>
<P>a) A <var name="1022" type="U" meaning="Contract Type"/>
<EM>[insert specific type of contract]</EM>
definitive contract is contemplated. </P>
<P>(b) In performing this contract, the Contractor is not authorized to
make expenditures or incur obligations exceeding

<var name="OKC$B_AGREEMENT_AMOUNT_TXN" type="S" meaning="Agreement
Amount (Transaction Currency)" />
<var name="OKC$B_TXN_CURRENCY" type="S" meaning="Transaction Currency"
/>. </P>
</ArticleText>
<ArticleVersionId>6312</ArticleVersionId>
<ArticleId>6006</ArticleId>
<CatId>36293</CatId>
<InsertByReference>N</InsertByReference>
</SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow>
</SectionsArticlesToPrintVO>




                                                        XML Reference    E-3
<DeliverablesAM type="AM" name="DeliverablesAM1">
                  <DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVO type="VO"
                  name="DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVO">
                  <DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVORow>
                  <DeliverableId>29101</DeliverableId>
                  <DeliverableName>Prototype</DeliverableName>
                  <ResponsiblePartyName>Supplier Organization</ResponsiblePartyName>
                  <PrintDueDate>01/03/2004</PrintDueDate>
                  </DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVORow>
                  </DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVO>
                  </DeliverablesAM>
                  </ContractTermsAM>


ContractTermsAM
                  The ContractTermsAM element is the top-level node (root node) of the Contract Terms
                  XML for contract templates.
                  The following table displays the nodes for the ContractTermsAM element:


                   Element/Attribute       Set to Null            Type           Comments


                   VariablesMetaDataV      Yes                    Complex        The definition and
                   O                                                             values for variables.
                                                                                 Contract templates do
                                                                                 not contain variable
                                                                                 values.


                   ParametersVO            Yes                    Complex        Parameters that
                                                                                 describe how the
                                                                                 document should be
                                                                                 printed.


                   SectionsArticlesToPri   Yes                    Complex        Sections and articles
                   ntVO                                                          of the contract terms.


                   DeliverablesAM          Yes                    Complex        Deliverables included
                                                                                 in the contract
                                                                                 template.




ContractTermsAM Components
                  The following sections describe the components of the ContractTermsAM:




E-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
SectionsArticlesToPrintVO
                  This XML element contains the text of sections and clauses for the contract terms. The
                  SectionsArticlesToPrintVO is a child element of the ContractTermsAM element. It only
                  contains SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow elements. Each of these elements contains
                  either a section or a clause.
                  The following table displays the child elements for the SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow
                  element:


                   Element/Attribute    Set to Null           Type                  Comments


                   Uniqueld             No                    String                The unique identifier
                                                                                    for this element. The
                                                                                    unique identifier is
                                                                                    composed of the
                                                                                    prefix "SECTION" or
                                                                                    "ARTICLE" and the
                                                                                    CatId.


                   StructureLevel       No                    Integer               The indention level of
                                                                                    the section or clause.
                                                                                    For example, sections
                                                                                    with StructureLevel=2
                                                                                    are subsections.


                   ObjectType           No                    Enumeration           The object type is
                                                                                    either SECTION or
                                                                                    ARTICLE.


                   ParentID             No                    Long                  The CatId of the
                                                                                    parent element. For a
                                                                                    subsection this would
                                                                                    be the identifier of the
                                                                                    section in which you
                                                                                    find the subsection.
                                                                                    Since only sections
                                                                                    and not clauses can
                                                                                    be parents, the CatId
                                                                                    is unique.


                   DocumentID           No                    Long                  The identifier of the
                                                                                    contract document.




                                                                                      XML Reference    E-5
Element/Attribute      Set to Null             Type        Comments


                   DocumentType           No                      String      The type of the
                                                                              contract document.
                                                                              For a contract
                                                                              template, the type is
                                                                              TEMPLATE.


                   DisplaySequence        No                      Integer     The display or
                                                                              printing order for
                                                                              sections and clauses.


                   Label                  No                      String      The sequential
                                                                              number defined by
                                                                              the numbering
                                                                              scheme for sections
                                                                              and clauses.


                   Title                  No                      String      The title of a section
                                                                              or a clause.


                   ArticleNumber          No                      String      The clause number.


                   ArticleText            No                      String      The text of the clause.
                                                                              This text may contain
                                                                              selected HTML tags
                                                                              such as <EM>,
                                                                              <STRONG> or <B>.
                                                                              Oracle Contracts
                                                                              ensures that all tags
                                                                              are closed and XML
                                                                              compliant.


                   ArticleId              No                      Long        The unique clause
                                                                              identifier (may be
                                                                              identical to a section
                                                                              identifier).


                   ArticleVersionId       No                      Long        The unique identifier
                                                                              for the clause version.




E-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Element/Attribute   Set to Null   Type          Comments


CatId               No            Long          A document may
                                                contain the same
                                                clause more than
                                                once. Therefore, the
                                                ArticleId and the
                                                ArticleVersionId may
                                                not be unique for a
                                                document. However,
                                                the CatId is different,
                                                even if the same
                                                clause is twice in the
                                                same document.


InsertByReference   Yes           Enumeration   Especially in
                                                government contracts
                                                (FAR), clauses may be
                                                inserted by reference.
                                                If this clause should
                                                be inserted by
                                                reference, the value is
                                                "Y", otherwise "N".


ReferenceText       Yes           String        The text shown when
                                                a clause inserted by
                                                reference.


AmendDescription    Yes           String        The amendment
                                                description for the
                                                clause. If the clause
                                                has not been
                                                amended or no
                                                amendment
                                                description has been
                                                provided, the element
                                                is missing.




                                                  XML Reference    E-7
Element/Attribute      Set to Null             Type             Comments


                   AmendmOperation        Yes                     String           The translated
                   Meaning                                                         description of the
                                                                                   AmendmentOperatio
                                                                                   nCode. For English
                                                                                   language, the values
                                                                                   are: Added, Updated,
                                                                                   and Deleted. If the
                                                                                   deliverable has not
                                                                                   been amended, the
                                                                                   element is missing.


                   AmendmentOperatio      Yes                     Enumeration      The code for the
                   nCode                                                           amendment
                                                                                   operation. The code
                                                                                   can be set to:
                                                                                   ADDED, UPDATE, or
                                                                                   DELETED. If the
                                                                                   deliverable has not
                                                                                   been amended, the
                                                                                   element is missing.


                   PrintTextYm            Yes                     String           If the clause has been
                                                                                   amended, the user
                                                                                   chooses if the
                                                                                   complete clause text
                                                                                   should be displayed
                                                                                   (PrintTextYn="Y") or
                                                                                   not
                                                                                   (PrintTextYn="N").




DeliverablesAM
                  This XML element contains the deliverables for the contract terms. The DeliverablesAM
                  element is a child element of the ContractTermsAM and may contain the multiple child
                  elements. The child elements correspond to the deliverable variables supported by
                  Oracle Contracts.
                  The following table displays the child elements for the DeliverablesAM element:


                   Element/Attribute      Set to Null             Type             Comments


                   DeliverablesAllForBu   Yes                     Complex          All deliverables of the
                   sinessDocExpVO                                                  document.




E-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Element/Attribute       Set to Null          Type                 Comments


DeliverablesForAllSo    Yes                  Complex              All deliverables
urcingExpVO                                                       specific to the
                                                                  sourcing phase.


DeliverablesForIntern   Yes                  Complex              All internal or
alContractualExpVO                                                outbound contractual
                                                                  deliverables.


DeliverablesForExter    Yes                  Complex              All external or
nalSourcingExpVO                                                  inbound deliverables
                                                                  during the sourcing
                                                                  phase. Deliverables
                                                                  that have to be
                                                                  fulfilled by the other
                                                                  party.


DeliverablesForExter    Yes                  Complex              All external or
nalContractualExpVO                                               inbound contractual
                                                                  deliverables.
                                                                  Deliverables that
                                                                  have to be fulfilled by
                                                                  the other party.


DeliverablesForIntern   Yes                  Complex              All internal or
alSourcingExpVO                                                   outbound
                                                                  deliverables during
                                                                  the sourcing phase.



Each of these elements may have multiple child elements witch has the same name and
the added suffix "Row". For example, the DeliverablesAllForBusinessDocExpVO
element has DeliverablesAllForBusinessDocExpVORow child elements.
Each of these elements contains the data for one deliverable.
The following table displays the child elements for each of these DeliverablesRow
elements:


Element/Attribute       Set to Null          Type                 Comments


DeliverableId           No                   Long                 The unique identifier
                                                                  of the deliverable.




                                                                    XML Reference    E-9
Element/Attribute      Set to Null            Type          Comments


                   DeliverableName        No                     String        The name of the
                                                                               deliverable.


                   Description            Yes                    String        The description of the
                                                                               deliverable.


                   ResponsiblePartyNa     No                     String        The name of the party
                   me                                                          that is responsible for
                                                                               fulfilling the
                                                                               deliverable. Either
                                                                               "Supplier
                                                                               Organization" or
                                                                               "Buyer Organization".


                   PrintDueDate           Yes                    String        A string that
                                                                               describes the date
                                                                               when the deliverable
                                                                               is due. This may be a
                                                                               fixed date such as
                                                                               "03/10/06", or an
                                                                               expression such as
                                                                               "Due 30 days after
                                                                               Purchase Order
                                                                               Signed".


                   AmendmentNotes         Yes                    String        The amendment
                                                                               description for the
                                                                               deliverable. If the
                                                                               deliverable has not
                                                                               been amended the
                                                                               element is missing.


                   AmendmentMeaning       Yes                    String        The translated
                                                                               description of the
                                                                               AmendmentCode.
                                                                               For English the values
                                                                               are: "Added",
                                                                               "Updated" and
                                                                               "Deleted". If the
                                                                               deliverable has not
                                                                               been amended the
                                                                               element is missing.




E-10    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Element/Attribute     Set to Null            Type                     Comments


                  AmendmentCode         Yes                    Enumeration              The code for the
                                                                                        amendment
                                                                                        operation: ADDED,
                                                                                        UPDATE or
                                                                                        DELETED. If the
                                                                                        deliverable has not
                                                                                        been amended the
                                                                                        element is missing.




VariablesMetaDataVO
                 The VariablesMeatDataVO contains variable values (for user variables) or the XPath to
                 the element that contains the data for the variable. Typically contract templates do not
                 contain variable values. The only exception is deliverable variables, since deliverables
                 can be associated with templates. The variable section is automatically resolved by the
                 code in the stylesheet, and there should be little need to customize this code.
                 The VariablesMetaDataVO is a child element of the ContractTermsAM element. It may
                 only contain multiple VariablesMetadataVORow elements. These child elements
                 describe the variables that may be found in the contract template.


                  Element/Attribute     Set to   Type           Comments
                                        Null


                  ArticleVersionId      Yes      Long           This field is only important for user variables
                                                                since user variables may have different
                                                                values for different clauses. The identifier of
                                                                the clause version that has this value.


                  VariableCode          No       String         The code of the variable: a unique identifier
                                                                in the document.


                  VariableType          No       Enumeration    The variable type:

                                                                •     D: Deliverable

                                                                •     S: System

                                                                •     U: User

                                                                •     T: Table




                                                                                        XML Reference    E-11
Element/Attribute      Set to   Type              Comments
                                          Null


                   DocType                Yes      String            The type of the contract document. For a
                                                                     contract template the type is TEMPLATE.


                   Value                  Yes      String            The value for a user variable


                   CatId                  Yes      String            The CatId of the clause that contains this
                                                                     value for the user variable.


                   ViewObjectName         Yes      String            XPath of the data associated with system
                                                                     variable.


                   AttributeName          Yes      String            The name of the element that contains the
                                                                     variable. The element is relative to the XPath
                                                                     of the "ViewObjectName"


                   ExternalYn             Yes      Enumeration       Indicates if the variable is external (Y) or not
                                                                     (N). In a negotiation, this flag controls, if a
                                                                     variable should be communicated to an
                                                                     external party or not.




ParametersVO
                  The ParametersVO contains information about how to print the document. The
                  ParametersVO element is a child of the ContractTermsAM and contains one
                  ParametersVORow child element.
                  The following table displays the child elements that the ParametersVORow element
                  contains:


                   Element/Attribute      Set to    Type         Comments
                                          Null


                   PrintAmendments        No        Enumerati    This parameter determines the print area. It can
                                                    on           be set to:

                                                                 •    0: Only the contract is printed.

                                                                 •    1: Only the amendment (change) is printed.

                                                                 •    2: Amendments and changes are printed.




E-12    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
Element/Attribute   Set to   Type     Comments
                    Null


DocumentName        Yes      String   The name of the contract document.


ContractStatus      Yes      String   Status of the Contract:

                                      •   Draft

                                      •   Pending Approval

                                      •   Approved

                                      •   Rejected


Watermark Text      Yes      String   The text for the watermark.


Organization Name   Yes      String   Name of the organization that owns the
                                      document.




                                                                XML Reference    E-13
Oracle procurement contracts
Glossary

Adopt As-Is
An option that allows a local organization to adopt a global clause without
modification. However, the clause still goes through formal approvals in the local
organization.

Amendment
Any changes made to the terms of a signed contractual business document. These
changes could be made to the contract language or to the deliverables.

Auto-Adoption
Allows organizations to use global clauses automatically, without formal approval
processes.

Business Document
A document generated in the procurement contracting business flows. For example,
Standard Purchase Order, Blanket Purchase Agreement, and RFQ.

Clause
Business or legal language that constitutes the terms of a contract. Note that in earlier
releases of Oracle Contracts, clauses were referred to as articles.

Contract
A binding agreement between two or more individuals or organizations that describes
the obligations and rights of the parties and is enforceable by law.

Contract Document
Any document that is used for the purpose of or incidental to a contractual negotiation
or execution. Examples of contract documents include, signed contract image and
supporting documents.

Contract Template
A document containing standard (boilerplate) terms that organizations use to rapidly




                                                                                 Glossary-1
create new contracts with pre-approved legal language.

             Contract Terms
             See: Terms and Conditions., page Glossary-5

             Contract Terms Library
             A centralized repository for approved Contract Templates., page Glossary-1

             Contract XML
             The XML document that represents a contract's terms. Oracle Contracts uses this
             document to generate the contract document in PDF using a layout template configured
             by the user.

             Contracts Workbench
             Users can access contracts authored in other applications such as Oracle Order
             Management, Oracle Quoting, Oracle Procurement and Oracle Sourcing and manage
             repository contracts from the contracts workbench.

             Contractual Deliverable
             A task that is part of the contract's terms, and that one of the parties needs to perform
             during the life of the contract.

             Data Source Name
             The name of the data definition for a layout template.

             Deliverable
             A task that needs to be performed as part of the execution of the contract, either once or
             in a repeating fashion. Deliverables are part of the terms of a contract.

             Deliverable Variable
             A variable that captures the list of deliverables applicable to a contract. The list appears
             in table format on a printed contract.

             Document Type
             A categorization of business documents, in the Contract Terms Library, to identify
             documents that are generated in the procurement contracting business flows.

             Execute a Contract
             Means to fulfill the commitments under the contract. Note that some organizations use
             this term to describe the act of signing of a contract.




Glossary-2
External Party
Represents all business units or organizations with which a contract can be entered into.
In the application, External Party specifically identifies supplier as understood in the
procurement flows.

Global Organization
An operating unit in an organization that sets contract standards for all operating units
worldwide.

Insert by Reference
Allows users to print only a reference to the full clause text on a printed contract
without printing the entire text. The text of a clause with this attribute is standard and
publicly available. A reference to the location of the full text is sufficient on the printed
document. This is typically used in procurement contracts of U.S. government agencies.

Intent
Determines the usage of contract.

Internal Deliverable
A task that the internal party needs to perform but is not part of the terms. Internal
Deliverables typically are fulfilled to augment the contractual deliverables and stay
compliant with contract terms.

Internal Party
Internal party represents a business unit or organization that has implemented and uses
the Oracle Procurement Contracts solution.

Keyword Search
An easy method to search for clauses and contract templates in the Contract Terms
Library. The search is performed across several attributes, such as Description, Title,
and Clause Text.

Layout Template
A document that defines the layout of contract templates or contract terms on other
business documents. The layout template is designed using the following file types:
•   XSL-FO

•   RTF (Rich Document Format)

•   PDF (Portable Document Format)




                                                                                  Glossary-3
Local Organization
             An operating unit of a larger organization. Local organizations subscribe to global
             clauses approved by the global organization, and adopt or localize them for use in local
             contracts., page Glossary-4, page Glossary-1

             Localization
             The process by which a local organization uses Oracle Contracts to modify global
             clauses to enable the use of clauses in that organization.

             Negotiation Deliverable
             A deliverable that needs to be performed during the negotiation phase of the contract. It
             is authored and managed in Oracle Sourcing.

             Numbering Scheme
             A definition of the numbering format that numbers clauses and sections in a printed
             contract.

             Party
             Refers to any business unit or organization representing both sides of a contract,
             whether internal or external.

             PDF
             (Portable Document Format) An open printable-document standard that Adobe
             Systems, Incorporated developed and that Oracle Contracts uses as the format for
             printed contracts. Use the Adobe Acrobat application to view and print PDF
             documents.

             Provision
             Used in the Federal Government contracting. A provision is a type of clause that is used
             only in negotiations and is dropped when the negotiation is converted to a contract.

             Redline Comparisons
             Compares and highlights the differences between two pieces of clause text. Oracle
             Contracts offers redline comparisons between two versions of a standard clause,
             between a non-standard clause and its original standard clause, and more.

             Rich Text Editor
             An online editing tool used to format clause text on a business document or in the
             Contract Terms Library. The rich text editor supports font effects (bold, italic,
             underline), alignment, indentation, and bulleted or numbered lists.




Glossary-4
RTF
The Rich Text Format (RTF) specification provides a format for text and graphics
interchange that can be used with different applications, output devices, operating
environments, and operating systems.

Section
Section is a categorization that helps group clauses under a logical common heading.

System Variable
A variable whose value is set by Oracle Procurement Contracts and represents an
attribute of the purchasing document. For example, PO Amount, Payment Terms, and
PO Number.

Table Variable
One of several variables that capture certain types of structured information, such as
items and price lists, in sales contracting flows.

Template
See: Contract Templates or Layout Template, page Glossary-3, page Glossary-1

Terms and Conditions
The set of clauses and deliverables that together constitute the terms and conditions of a
contract. Also known as the legal language of the contract.

User-Defined Variable
Variables that an organization defines over and above the system variables. Users must
provide values for these variables as part of the contract authoring process.

Variable
A piece of information that is generated by the system or filled in by the user, and can
appear inside a clause. Variables often represent a negotiated term or a field from the
business document.

XML
(eXtensible Markup Language) An industry standard for formatting data to allow easy
exchange and processing of business documents. Oracle Contracts uses Contract XML
documents to format contracts for previewing and printing.

XSL-FO Stylesheet
(eXtensible Stylesheet Language - Formatting Objects) An industry standard for
formatting XML documents. Oracle Contracts uses XSL-FO stylesheets to format XML
data documents for printing.




                                                                               Glossary-5
Oracle procurement contracts
 
                                                                                       Index

                                                       XML import, 6-27
A                                                    Close Out Contracts, 5-31
                                                     Contract Amendment, 5-29
Administer Contract Changes, 5-29
                                                     Contract Authoring, 5-14
Amendments, 5-29
                                                     Contract Clause Analysis report, 6-16
Application Object Library Lookups window, 4-
                                                     Contract expert
12
                                                       managing constants, 7-6
Approval Workflows, 4-11
                                                       managing questions, 7-3
Approve and Sign Contracts, 5-25
                                                       managing rules, 7-8
   approve, 5-26
                                                       overview of, 7-1
   sign, 5-25
                                                       using contract expert on business documents,
Approvers, 4-11
                                                       7-20
Author Contracts, 5-14
                                                     Contract expert constants
   automatic application of contract templates, 5-
                                                       managing, 7-6
   20
                                                       searching for, 7-7
   cancel contracts, 5-24
                                                       updating, 7-8
   Contract Deviations Report, 5-19
                                                     Contract expert questions
   Contract Expert, 5-18
                                                       updating questions, 7-5
   create a contract, 5-17
                                                     Contract expert rules
   global purchasing agreement, 5-22
                                                       activating, 7-14
   master service agreement, 5-21
                                                       creating, 7-9
   printed contract documents, 5-23
                                                       disabling, 7-16
   roles and responsibilities, 5-15
                                                       searching for, 7-13
   supplier authored, 5-20
                                                       setting up question sequence, 7-18
Automatic Application of Contract Templates, 5-
                                                       updating, 7-17
20
                                                     Contract Negotiation, 5-10
AutoNumbering, 4-17
                                                     Contract Standards, 5-2
                                                     Contract Templates, 4-24
C
                                                     Contract terms library
clauses                                                setting up approval rules, 4-11
   importing, 6-19                                     setting up contract expert, 4-24
   open interface, 6-26                                setting up lookup codes, 4-12
   searching for, 6-12                               Contract Terms Library




                                                                                             Index-1
muli-org access control, 4-4                 XML data file method, 6-27
Contract Terms Setup window, 4-4             Importing Clauses, 6-19
Create Constant page, 7-7                    Importing Clauses from External Sources, 4-21
Create Questions page, 7-3
Create Rule page, 7-9                        K
                                             Key Features, 1-1
D
Defining security profiles, 4-5              L
Dependencies, 2-1
                                             Layout Templates, 4-13
  conditional, 2-2
                                               create, 4-13
  mandatory, 2-1
                                               document types, 4-15
Descriptive Flexfields, 4-16
                                               stylesheet, 4-15
                                             Lookup codes, 4-12
E                                            Lookup Codes, D-28
Enabling Keyword Search, 4-12
Execute and Monitor Contracts, 5-28          M
  clause usage, 5-29
                                             Managing Clauses
  deliverables, 5-28
                                               across operating units, 6-7
  supplier contact, 5-29
                                             Managing contract expert constants
                                               creating constants, 7-7
F                                            Managing contract expert questions, 7-3
Find Organization window, 4-3                  creating user questions, 7-3
Flexfields, 4-16                               searching for questions, 7-5
Folders, 4-21                                Managing contract expert rules, 7-8
Function Security, 4-19                        creating dependencies between questions, 7-19
   repository functions, 4-20                Managing standard clauses
                                               searching for clauses, 6-12
G                                            Master-Child Agreements, 5-21
                                             multi-org access control
Global Clauses
                                               for contract terms library, 4-4
  adoption by local operating units, 6-8
                                             Multiple Organizations Access Control, 4-4
  approving in local operating units, 6-11
  creating, 6-9
  reviewing for adoption, 6-9                N
  viewing adoption status, 6-11              Negotiate Contracts, 5-10
                                             Numbering Schemes, 4-22
I
Implementation Tasks, 3-1                    O
  Oracle iSupplier Portal, 3-1               Operating units, 4-2
  Oracle Purchasing, 3-1                     Organization hierarchy, 4-5
  Oracle Sourcing, 3-1                       Organization Hierarchy page, 4-5
  steps, 3-1                                 Organizations For Contract Terms, 4-2
Importing clauses                            Overview, 1-1
  methods of, 6-20
  open interface method, 6-26                P
  purge interface, 6-30




Index-2
profile option categories
  contracts security, 4-7                     V
  contracts setup, 4-8
                                              Value Sets, 4-18
Profile Options, 4-6
                                              Variables, 4-21
Profile Options Categories, 4-6
                                                user-defined, 6-22
Purchasing Document Format, 4-16

Q
Questions
  setting up, 7-19
  setting up dependent , 7-19
  setting up independent , 7-19
Question sequence
  managing, 7-18
Questions page, 7-5

R
Renegotiate Contracts, 5-31
Rule page, 7-13

S
Searching For Clauses, 6-12
   browsing, 6-15
   keywords, 6-14
   searching, 6-13
Sections, 4-23
Security profiles, 4-5
Setting up approval rules
   for contract terms library, 4-11
Setting Up AutoNumbering, 4-17
Setting up contract expert
   for contract terms library, 4-24
Setting Up Layout Templates, 4-13
Setting up lookup codes
   for contract terms library, 4-12
Setting Up Numbering Schemes, 4-22
Setting up operating units
   for contract terms library, 4-2
Setting up organization hierarchy, 4-5
Setting Up Organizations, 4-2
Setting Up Profile Options, 4-6
Setting Up Purchasing Document Format, 4-16
Setting Up Value Sets, 4-18
Standard Clauses, 4-24




                                                                     Index-3
Oracle procurement contracts

More Related Content

PDF
Oracle Purchasing – Purchase Order Types & Difference between Standard & Plan...
PDF
Oracle Sourcing Setup
PDF
Oracle R12 Legal Entity
PDF
Oracle financials functional training on ap, ar & gl
PPT
iSupplier
PDF
Oracle R12 Order Management - Back to Back (B2B) Order Flow:
DOCX
Oracle inventory R12 Setup Guide
PPTX
Oracle R12.1.3 Costing Overview
Oracle Purchasing – Purchase Order Types & Difference between Standard & Plan...
Oracle Sourcing Setup
Oracle R12 Legal Entity
Oracle financials functional training on ap, ar & gl
iSupplier
Oracle R12 Order Management - Back to Back (B2B) Order Flow:
Oracle inventory R12 Setup Guide
Oracle R12.1.3 Costing Overview

What's hot (20)

PPT
R12 inventory features
PPT
Oracle i procurement
PPT
Basics of Oracle Purchasing
DOCX
Oracle Ebs Enterprise Asset Management.docx
PDF
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management,
PPTX
Oracle Apps SCM Functional Overview
PPT
128224154 oracle-inventory-ppt
PPT
Sla and cost acctg
DOCX
Blanket purchase agreement and blanket release in oracle r12
DOCX
BR100 Oracle AP Setup
PPTX
Drop Ship Sales Order Across Operating Units
PDF
Oracle Order Management - Order to Cash Cycle (O2C) - Data Flow
PDF
Oracle Accounting reporting sequences
PDF
Oracle applications sla r12 SLA- demos
PPT
Oracle fixed assets
PPTX
Smart forms and information templates in Oracle iProcurement
ODP
Introduction to Oracle Financials
PPT
Oracle Inventory
PDF
152633980 accrual-reconciliation-process-and-troubleshooting-in-r12-pdf
R12 inventory features
Oracle i procurement
Basics of Oracle Purchasing
Oracle Ebs Enterprise Asset Management.docx
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management,
Oracle Apps SCM Functional Overview
128224154 oracle-inventory-ppt
Sla and cost acctg
Blanket purchase agreement and blanket release in oracle r12
BR100 Oracle AP Setup
Drop Ship Sales Order Across Operating Units
Oracle Order Management - Order to Cash Cycle (O2C) - Data Flow
Oracle Accounting reporting sequences
Oracle applications sla r12 SLA- demos
Oracle fixed assets
Smart forms and information templates in Oracle iProcurement
Introduction to Oracle Financials
Oracle Inventory
152633980 accrual-reconciliation-process-and-troubleshooting-in-r12-pdf
Ad

Viewers also liked (14)

DOCX
Oracle procurement contracts
PPTX
Advanced procurement v1.2
PPT
Procurement of Services using Oracle EBS
PPTX
Supplier Information and Lifecycle Management
PDF
Oracle SLM : What's New in Supplier Onboarding through Oracle.
PPTX
iSupplier Portal- Manage supplier/vendor challenges
PPT
Pricing and Revenue management in SCM
PPTX
Pricing & Revenue Management In A Supply Chain
DOC
Contract Procurement Management Report of Ntpc
PPTX
Supply Chain Management, Sourcing Pricing and Procurement Process
PPT
Oracle Applications R12 Sourcing Training
PPTX
Types of Contract in Construction Management
PPT
Types of contract in Project management
DOCX
Proc contracts part1
Oracle procurement contracts
Advanced procurement v1.2
Procurement of Services using Oracle EBS
Supplier Information and Lifecycle Management
Oracle SLM : What's New in Supplier Onboarding through Oracle.
iSupplier Portal- Manage supplier/vendor challenges
Pricing and Revenue management in SCM
Pricing & Revenue Management In A Supply Chain
Contract Procurement Management Report of Ntpc
Supply Chain Management, Sourcing Pricing and Procurement Process
Oracle Applications R12 Sourcing Training
Types of Contract in Construction Management
Types of contract in Project management
Proc contracts part1
Ad

Similar to Oracle procurement contracts (20)

PDF
R12 Shipping Execution User guide
PDF
121poug
PDF
Odi installation guide
PDF
Installing and conf guide for hp sm connector
PDF
Coherence developer's guide
PDF
121cash mgmt
PDF
Party merge
PDF
Informatica installation guide
PDF
Fscm91sbil b1109
PDF
Firstcup
PDF
Web logic installation document
PDF
PDF
Punchout
PDF
Adf tutorial oracle
PDF
Osb developer's guide
PDF
122qpug
PDF
121adpp patching procedures
PDF
Javaeetutorial6
PDF
Getting started with odi
PDF
2.oracle purchasing
R12 Shipping Execution User guide
121poug
Odi installation guide
Installing and conf guide for hp sm connector
Coherence developer's guide
121cash mgmt
Party merge
Informatica installation guide
Fscm91sbil b1109
Firstcup
Web logic installation document
Punchout
Adf tutorial oracle
Osb developer's guide
122qpug
121adpp patching procedures
Javaeetutorial6
Getting started with odi
2.oracle purchasing

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Electronic commerce courselecture one. Pdf
PDF
Agricultural_Statistics_at_a_Glance_2022_0.pdf
PPTX
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
PDF
Machine learning based COVID-19 study performance prediction
PDF
Dropbox Q2 2025 Financial Results & Investor Presentation
PDF
KodekX | Application Modernization Development
PDF
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
PDF
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25 Week I
PDF
Building Integrated photovoltaic BIPV_UPV.pdf
PPTX
Digital-Transformation-Roadmap-for-Companies.pptx
PDF
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
PDF
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
PPTX
Detection-First SIEM: Rule Types, Dashboards, and Threat-Informed Strategy
PDF
Architecting across the Boundaries of two Complex Domains - Healthcare & Tech...
PPT
“AI and Expert System Decision Support & Business Intelligence Systems”
PDF
Unlocking AI with Model Context Protocol (MCP)
PDF
Diabetes mellitus diagnosis method based random forest with bat algorithm
PDF
Bridging biosciences and deep learning for revolutionary discoveries: a compr...
PDF
Mobile App Security Testing_ A Comprehensive Guide.pdf
PDF
Build a system with the filesystem maintained by OSTree @ COSCUP 2025
Electronic commerce courselecture one. Pdf
Agricultural_Statistics_at_a_Glance_2022_0.pdf
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
Machine learning based COVID-19 study performance prediction
Dropbox Q2 2025 Financial Results & Investor Presentation
KodekX | Application Modernization Development
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25 Week I
Building Integrated photovoltaic BIPV_UPV.pdf
Digital-Transformation-Roadmap-for-Companies.pptx
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
Detection-First SIEM: Rule Types, Dashboards, and Threat-Informed Strategy
Architecting across the Boundaries of two Complex Domains - Healthcare & Tech...
“AI and Expert System Decision Support & Business Intelligence Systems”
Unlocking AI with Model Context Protocol (MCP)
Diabetes mellitus diagnosis method based random forest with bat algorithm
Bridging biosciences and deep learning for revolutionary discoveries: a compr...
Mobile App Security Testing_ A Comprehensive Guide.pdf
Build a system with the filesystem maintained by OSTree @ COSCUP 2025

Oracle procurement contracts

  • 1. Oracle® Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide Release 12.1 Part No. E14436-03 August 2010
  • 2. Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide, Release 12.1 Part No. E14436-03 Copyright © 2004, 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. Primary Author:     Prashanti Gajjala Contributing Author:     Shibhu Nambiar, Ashok Srinivasaraghavan, Yoav Eilat, Assad Akhavan Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing. If this software or related documentation is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable: U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are "commercial computer software" or "commercial technical data" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle USA, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065. This software is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of this software. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software in dangerous applications. This software and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content, products and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content, products or services.
  • 3.   Contents Send Us Your Comments Preface 1 Introduction to Oracle Procurement Contracts Oracle Procurement Contracts - Overview............................................................................... 1-1 Oracle Procurement Contracts - Key Features.......................................................................... 1-1 2 Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies Installation Verification............................................................................................................ 2-1 Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies.......................................................................... 2-1 Mandatory Dependencies......................................................................................................... 2-1 Conditional Dependencies........................................................................................................ 2-2 3 Implementation Overview Process Description................................................................................................................... 3-1 Implementation Task Sequence............................................................................................... 3-1 4 Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts Setting Up Organizations For Contract Terms......................................................................... 4-2 Implementing Multiple Organizations Access Control........................................................... 4-4 Profile Options and Profile Options Categories...................................................................... 4-6 Setting Up Approvers and Approval Workflow.................................................................... 4-11 Approval Workflows in Integrated Modules......................................................................... 4-11 Setting Up Lookup Codes....................................................................................................... 4-12 Enabling Keyword Search....................................................................................................... 4-12     iii
  • 4. Setting Up Layout Templates..................................................................................................4-13 Setting Up Purchasing Document Format.............................................................................. 4-16 Using Descriptive Flexfields................................................................................................... 4-16 Setting Up AutoNumbering.................................................................................................... 4-17 Setting Up Value Sets.............................................................................................................. 4-18 Oracle Procurement Contracts Function Security.................................................................. 4-19 Importing Clauses from External Sources.............................................................................. 4-21 Setting Up Contract Folders.................................................................................................... 4-21 Setting Up Variables............................................................................................................... 4-21 Setting Up Numbering Schemes.............................................................................................4-22 Deploy Searchable Objects..................................................................................................... 4-23 Setting Up Sections................................................................................................................. 4-23 Setting Up Standard Clauses.................................................................................................. 4-24 Setting Up Contract Templates............................................................................................... 4-24 Setting Up Contract Expert...................................................................................................... 4-24 Setting Up Contract Repository.............................................................................................. 4-25 Setting Up Contracts Workbench........................................................................................... 4-28 5 Implementation and Other Considerations Overview ................................................................................................................................... 5-1 Process Overview, Implementation Considerations, and Other Considerations....................5-2 Establish Contract Standards............................................................................................... 5-2 Negotiate Contracts........................................................................................................... 5-10 Author Contracts............................................................................................................... 5-14 Approve and Sign Contracts.............................................................................................. 5-25 Execute and Monitor Contracts..........................................................................................5-28 Administer Contract Changes............................................................................................5-29 Renegotiate and Close Out Contracts................................................................................ 5-31 6 Setting Up Contract Terms Library Contract Terms Library............................................................................................................. 6-2 Managing Standard Clauses..................................................................................................... 6-2 Creating Standard Clauses........................................................................................................ 6-2 Defining Related Clauses..........................................................................................................6-5 Assigning Clauses to Folders.................................................................................................... 6-6 Approving Clauses.................................................................................................................... 6-6 Managing Clauses Across Organizations................................................................................. 6-7 Searching for Clauses.............................................................................................................. 6-12 Contract Clause Analysis Report............................................................................................ 6-16 Managing Changes to Standard Clauses................................................................................ 6-16 iv
  • 5. Importing Clauses................................................................................................................... 6-19 Managing Contract Templates................................................................................................ 6-30 Creating Contract Templates.................................................................................................. 6-31 Adding Sections and Clauses..................................................................................................6-36 Creating Contract Template Deliverables.............................................................................. 6-37 Validating Templates.............................................................................................................. 6-40 Preview Templates.................................................................................................................. 6-41 Approving Templates.............................................................................................................. 6-42 Searching for Templates......................................................................................................... 6-42 Managing Changes to Contract Templates............................................................................. 6-44 Defining Global Templates.................................................................................................... 6-47 Managing Variables................................................................................................................ 6-48 Managing Sections.................................................................................................................. 6-51 Managing Folders.................................................................................................................... 6-53 7 Contract Expert Administration Overview................................................................................................................................... 7-1 Managing Questions................................................................................................................. 7-3 Creating User Questions........................................................................................................... 7-3 Searching for Questions............................................................................................................ 7-5 Updating Questions.................................................................................................................. 7-5 Managing Constants.................................................................................................................. 7-6 Creating Constants.................................................................................................................... 7-7 Searching for Constants............................................................................................................ 7-7 Updating Constants................................................................................................................... 7-8 Managing Rules......................................................................................................................... 7-8 Creating Rules........................................................................................................................... 7-9 Searching for Rules................................................................................................................. 7-13 Activating Rules...................................................................................................................... 7-14 Disabling Rules....................................................................................................................... 7-16 Updating Rules........................................................................................................................ 7-17 Managing Question Sequence................................................................................................ 7-18 Creating Dependencies Between Questions.......................................................................... 7-19 Using Contract Expert on Business Documents..................................................................... 7-20 A QA Validations Validations - Overview............................................................................................................. A-1 Contract Templates Validations............................................................................................... A-1 Contract Expert Validations...................................................................................................... A-3 Business Documents Validations............................................................................................. A-5     v
  • 6. Repository Validations............................................................................................................. A-7 B Workflows Workflows - Overview.............................................................................................................. B-1 Approval Workflows................................................................................................................ B-1 C Concurrent Programs Contract Terms Library............................................................................................................. C-1 D Seeded Data Responsibility........................................................................................................................... D-1 Deliverables.............................................................................................................................. D-2 Document Types....................................................................................................................... D-2 Layout Template....................................................................................................................... D-3 Notifications............................................................................................................................. D-4 Procurement Notifications........................................................................................................ D-7 System Variables...................................................................................................................... D-7 Lookup Codes......................................................................................................................... D-28 Function Security.................................................................................................................... D-29 E XML Reference Contract Terms XML Reference................................................................................................ E-1 Glossary Index vi
  • 7.   Send Us Your Comments Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide, Release 12.1 Part No. E14436-03 Oracle welcomes customers' comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document. Your feedback is important, and helps us to best meet your needs as a user of our products. For example: • Are the implementation steps correct and complete? • Did you understand the context of the procedures? • Did you find any errors in the information? • Does the structure of the information help you with your tasks? • Do you need different information or graphics? If so, where, and in what format? • Are the examples correct? Do you need more examples? If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement, then please tell us your name, the name of the company who has licensed our products, the title and part number of the documentation and the chapter, section, and page number (if available). Note: Before sending us your comments, you might like to check that you have the latest version of the document and if any concerns are already addressed. To do this, access the new Oracle E-Business Suite Release Online Documentation CD available on My Oracle Support and www.oracle.com. It contains the most current Documentation Library plus all documents revised or released recently. Send your comments to us using the electronic mail address: appsdoc_us@oracle.com Please give your name, address, electronic mail address, and telephone number (optional). If you need assistance with Oracle software, then please contact your support representative or Oracle Support Services. If you require training or instruction in using Oracle software, then please contact your Oracle local office and inquire about our Oracle University offerings. A list of Oracle offices is available on our Web site at www.oracle.com.     vii
  • 9.   Preface Intended Audience Welcome to Release 12.1 of the Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide. Implementers and administrators of Oracle Procurement Contracts to be used in Oracle Purchasing, Oracle iSupplier Portal, Oracle Sourcing. See Related Information Sources on page x for more Oracle E-Business Suite product information. Deaf/Hard of Hearing Access to Oracle Support Services To reach Oracle Support Services, use a telecommunications relay service (TRS) to call Oracle Support at 1.800.223.1711. An Oracle Support Services engineer will handle technical issues and provide customer support according to the Oracle service request process. Information about TRS is available at http://www.fcc.gov/cgb/consumerfacts/trs.html, and a list of phone numbers is available at http://www.fcc.gov/cgb/dro/trsphonebk.html. Documentation Accessibility Our goal is to make Oracle products, services, and supporting documentation accessible to all users, including users that are disabled. To that end, our documentation includes features that make information available to users of assistive technology. This documentation is available in HTML format, and contains markup to facilitate access by the disabled community. Accessibility standards will continue to evolve over time, and Oracle is actively engaged with other market-leading technology vendors to address technical obstacles so that our documentation can be accessible to all of our customers. For more information, visit the Oracle Accessibility Program Web site at http://www.oracle.com/accessibility/.     ix
  • 10. Accessibility of Code Examples in Documentation Screen readers may not always correctly read the code examples in this document. The conventions for writing code require that closing braces should appear on an otherwise empty line; however, some screen readers may not always read a line of text that consists solely of a bracket or brace. Accessibility of Links to External Web Sites in Documentation This documentation may contain links to Web sites of other companies or organizations that Oracle does not own or control. Oracle neither evaluates nor makes any representations regarding the accessibility of these Web sites. Structure 1  Introduction to Oracle Procurement Contracts 2  Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies 3  Implementation Overview 4  Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts 5  Implementation and Other Considerations 6  Setting Up Contract Terms Library 7  Contract Expert Administration A  QA Validations B  Workflows C  Concurrent Programs D  Seeded Data E  XML Reference Glossary Related Information Sources You can choose from many sources of information, including online documentation, training, and support services, to increase your knowledge and understanding of Oracle Procurement Contracts. Integration Repository The Oracle Integration Repository is a compilation of information about the service endpoints exposed by the Oracle E-Business Suite of applications. It provides a complete catalog of Oracle E-Business Suite's business service interfaces. The tool lets users easily discover and deploy the appropriate business service interface for integration with any system, application, or business partner. The Oracle Integration Repository is shipped as part of the E-Business Suite. As your instance is patched, the repository is automatically updated with content appropriate for the precise revisions of interfaces in your environment. x
  • 11. Online Documentation All Oracle E-Business Suite documentation is available online (HTML or PDF). • PDF - See the Oracle E-Business Suite Documentation Library for current PDF documentation for your product with each release. The Oracle E-Business Suite Documentation Library is also available on My Oracle Support and is updated frequently • Online Help - Online help patches (HTML) are available on My Oracle Support. • Release Notes - For information about changes in this release, including new features, known issues, and other details, see the release notes for the relevant product, available on My Oracle Support. • Oracle Electronic Technical Reference Manual - The Oracle Electronic Technical Reference Manual (eTRM) contains database diagrams and a detailed description of database tables, forms, reports, and programs for each Oracle E-Business Suite product. This information helps you convert data from your existing applications and integrate Oracle E-Business Suite data with non-Oracle applications, and write custom reports for Oracle E-Business Suite products. The Oracle eTRM is available on My Oracle Support. Guides Related to All Products Oracle E-Business Suite User's Guide This guide explains how to navigate, enter data, query, and run reports using the user interface (UI) of Oracle E-Business Suite. This guide also includes information on setting user profiles, as well as running and reviewing concurrent programs. You can access this guide online by choosing "Getting Started with Oracle Applications" from any Oracle E-Business Suite product help file. Guides Related to This Product Oracle Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide Oracle Contracts enable organizations to define the terms and conditions of a contract between the parties that are buying and selling products or services. These can be terms for pricing, shipment, payment, quality, and other business and legal obligations. Oracle Contracts provides the common infrastructure components for other contracts modules such as Oracle Sales Contracts, Oracle Procurement Contracts, Oracle Service Contracts, and Oracle Project Contracts.     xi
  • 12. Oracle Purchasing User's Guide This guide describes how to create and approve purchasing documents, including requisitions, different types of purchase orders, quotations, RFQs, and receipts. This guide also describes how to manage your supply base through agreements, sourcing rules, and approved supplier lists. In addition, this guide explains how you can automatically create purchasing documents based on business rules through integration with Oracle Workflow technology, which automates many of the key procurement processes. Installation and System Administration Maintaining Oracle E-Business Suite Documentation Set This documentation set provides maintenance and patching information for the Oracle E-Business Suite DBA. Oracle E-Business Suite Maintenance Procedures provides a description of the strategies, related tasks, and troubleshooting activities that will help ensure the continued smooth running of an Oracle E-Business Suite system. Oracle E-Business Suite Maintenance Utilities describes the Oracle E-Business Suite utilities that are supplied with Oracle E-Business Suite and used to maintain the application file system and database. It also provides a detailed description of the numerous options available to meet specific operational requirements. Oracle E-Business Suite Patching Procedures explains how to patch an Oracle E-Business Suite system, covering the key concepts and strategies. Also included are recommendations for optimizing typical patching operations and reducing downtime. Oracle Alert User's Guide This guide explains how to define periodic and event alerts to monitor the status of your Oracle E-Business Suite data. Oracle E-Business Suite Concepts This book is intended for all those planning to deploy Oracle E-Business Suite Release 12, or contemplating significant changes to a configuration. After describing the Oracle E-Business Suite architecture and technology stack, it focuses on strategic topics, giving a broad outline of the actions needed to achieve a particular goal, plus the installation and configuration choices that may be available. Oracle E-Business Suite CRM System Administrator's Guide This manual describes how to implement the CRM Technology Foundation (JTT) and use its System Administrator Console. Oracle E-Business Suite Developer's Guide This guide contains the coding standards followed by the Oracle E-Business Suite xii
  • 13. development staff. It describes the Oracle Application Object Library components needed to implement the Oracle E-Business Suite user interface described in the Oracle E-Business Suite User Interface Standards for Forms-Based Products. It also provides information to help you build your custom Oracle Forms Developer forms so that they integrate with Oracle E-Business Suite. In addition, this guide has information for customizations in features such as concurrent programs, flexfields, messages, and logging. Oracle E-Business Suite Installation Guide: Using Rapid Install This book is intended for use by anyone who is responsible for installing or upgrading Oracle E-Business Suite. It provides instructions for running Rapid Install either to carry out a fresh installation of Oracle E-Business Suite Release 12, or as part of an upgrade from Release 11i to Release 12. The book also describes the steps needed to install the technology stack components only, for the special situations where this is applicable. Oracle E-Business Suite System Administrator's Guide Documentation Set This documentation set provides planning and reference information for the Oracle E-Business Suite System Administrator. Oracle E-Business Suite System Administrator's Guide - Configuration contains information on system configuration steps, including defining concurrent programs and managers, enabling Oracle Applications Manager features, and setting up printers and online help. Oracle E-Business Suite System Administrator's Guide - Maintenance provides information for frequent tasks such as monitoring your system with Oracle Applications Manager, administering Oracle E-Business Suite Secure Enterprise Search, managing concurrent managers and reports, using diagnostic utilities including logging, managing profile options, and using alerts. Oracle E-Business Suite System Administrator's Guide - Security describes User Management, data security, function security, auditing, and security configurations. Oracle E-Business Suite User Interface Standards for Forms-Based Products This guide contains the user interface (UI) standards followed by the Oracle E-Business Suite development staff. It describes the UI for the Oracle E-Business Suite products and tells you how to apply this UI to the design of an application built by using Oracle Forms. Other Implementation Documentation Oracle Applications Multiple Organizations Implementation Guide This guide describes how to set up multiple organizations and the relationships among them in a single installation of an Oracle E-Business Suite product such that transactions flow smoothly through and among organizations that can be ledgers, business groups, legal entities, operating units, or inventory organizations. You can use this guide to assign operating units to a security profile and assign this profile to responsibilities such that a user can access data for multiple operation units from a single responsibility. In     xiii
  • 14. addition, this guide describes how to set up reporting to generate reports at different levels and for different contexts. Reporting levels can be ledger or operating unit while reporting context is a named entity in the selected reporting level. Oracle Approvals Management Implementation Guide This guide describes transaction attributes, conditions, actions, and approver groups that you can use to define approval rules for your business. These rules govern the process for approving transactions in an integrated Oracle application. You can define approvals by job, supervisor hierarchy, positions, or by lists of individuals created either at the time you set up the approval rule or generated dynamically when the rule is invoked. You can learn how to link different approval methods together and how to run approval processes in parallel to shorten transaction approval process time. Oracle Diagnostics Framework User's Guide This guide contains information on implementing, administering, and developing diagnostics tests for Oracle E-Business Suite using the Oracle Diagnostics Framework. Oracle E-Business Suite Flexfields Guide This guide provides flexfields planning, setup and reference information for the Oracle E-Business Suite implementation team, as well as for users responsible for the ongoing maintenance of Oracle E-Business Suite product data. This guide also provides information on creating custom reports on flexfields data. Oracle E-Business Suite Integrated SOA Gateway Implementation Guide This guide explains the details of how integration repository administrators can manage and administer the entire service enablement process based on the service-oriented architecture (SOA) for both native packaged public integration interfaces and composite services - BPEL type. It also describes how to invoke Web services from Oracle E-Business Suite by working with Oracle Workflow Business Event System, manage Web service security, and monitor SOAP messages. Oracle E-Business Suite Integrated SOA Gateway User's Guide This guide describes how users can browse and view the integration interface definitions and services that reside in Oracle Integration Repository. Oracle e-Commerce Gateway Implementation Manual This guide describes implementation details, highlighting additional setup steps needed for trading partners, code conversion, and Oracle E-Business Suite. It also provides architecture guidelines for transaction interface files, troubleshooting information, and a description of how to customize EDI transactions. xiv
  • 15. Oracle e-Commerce Gateway User's Guide This guide describes the functionality of Oracle e-Commerce Gateway and the necessary setup steps in order for Oracle E-Business Suite to conduct business with trading partners through Electronic Data Interchange (EDI). It also describes how to run extract programs for outbound transactions, import programs for inbound transactions, and the relevant reports. Oracle iSetup User's Guide This guide describes how to use Oracle iSetup to migrate data between different instances of the Oracle E-Business Suite and generate reports. It also includes configuration information, instance mapping, and seeded templates used for data migration. Oracle Product Lifecycle Management Implementation Guide This guide describes how you can define hierarchies of items using structure types, catalogs, and catalog categories, and define change categories and configure them for revised items or request lines. Oracle Product Lifecycle Management provides several predefined catalogs such as the Product Catalog, Asset Catalog, and the Service Catalog and predefined change categories such as change orders and ideas. Use this guide to learn how to define additional catalogs for browsing and reporting purposes and new change categories specific to your business needs. You can then learn how to set up users and responsibilities that provide or restrict access to these catalogs, catalog items, and change management objects. Oracle Product Lifecycle Management User Guide This guide describes how to create and manage catalogs, create and maintain product attributes and attribute values, and manage item statuses and lifecycle phases. You can learn how to create change categories, create task templates for change orders, and create change management reports. In addition, you can use this guide to create roles, map roles to privileges, and maintain these roles. Oracle Web Applications Desktop Integrator Implementation and Administration Guide Oracle Web Applications Desktop Integrator brings Oracle E-Business Suite functionality to a spreadsheet, where familiar data entry and modeling techniques can be used to complete Oracle E-Business Suite tasks. You can create formatted spreadsheets on your desktop that allow you to download, view, edit, and create Oracle E-Business Suite data, which you can then upload. This guide describes how to implement Oracle Web Applications Desktop Integrator and how to define mappings, layouts, style sheets, and other setup options. Oracle Workflow Administrator's Guide This guide explains how to complete the setup steps necessary for any Oracle     xv
  • 16. E-Business Suite product that includes workflow-enabled processes. It also describes how to manage workflow processes and business events using Oracle Applications Manager, how to monitor the progress of runtime workflow processes, and how to administer notifications sent to workflow users. Oracle Workflow Developer's Guide This guide explains how to define new workflow business processes and customize existing workflow processes embedded in Oracle E-Business Suite. It also describes how to define and customize business events and event subscriptions. Oracle Workflow User's Guide This guide describes how Oracle E-Business Suite users can view and respond to workflow notifications and monitor the progress of their workflow processes. Oracle XML Gateway User's Guide This guide describes Oracle XML Gateway functionality and each component of the Oracle XML Gateway architecture, including Message Designer, Oracle XML Gateway Setup, Execution Engine, Message Queues, and Oracle Transport Agent. It also explains how to use Collaboration History that records all business transactions and messages exchanged with trading partners. The integrations with Oracle Workflow Business Event System, and the Business-to-Business transactions are also addressed in this guide. Oracle XML Publisher Administration and Developer's Guide Oracle XML Publisher is a template-based reporting solution that merges XML data with templates in RTF or PDF format to produce outputs to meet a variety of business needs. Outputs include: PDF, HTML, Excel, RTF, and eText (for EDI and EFT transactions). Oracle XML Publisher can be used to generate reports based on existing Oracle E-Business Suite report data, or you can use Oracle XML Publisher's data extraction engine to build your own queries. Oracle XML Publisher also provides a robust set of APIs to manage delivery of your reports via e-mail, fax, secure FTP, printer, WebDav, and more. This guide describes how to set up and administer Oracle XML Publisher as well as how to use the Application Programming Interface to build custom solutions. This guide is available through the Oracle E-Business Suite online help. Oracle XML Publisher Report Designer's Guide Oracle XML Publisher is a template-based reporting solution that merges XML data with templates in RTF or PDF format to produce a variety of outputs to meet a variety of business needs. Using Microsoft Word or Adobe Acrobat as the design tool, you can create pixel-perfect reports from the Oracle E-Business Suite. Use this guide to design your report layouts. This guide is available through the Oracle E-Business Suite online xvi
  • 17. help. Training and Support Training Oracle offers a complete set of training courses to help you master your product and reach full productivity quickly. These courses are organized into functional learning paths, so you take only those courses appropriate to your job or area of responsibility. You have a choice of educational environments. You can attend courses offered by Oracle University at any of our many Education Centers, you can arrange for our trainers to teach at your facility, or you can use Oracle Learning Network (OLN), Oracle University's online education utility. In addition, Oracle training professionals can tailor standard courses or develop custom courses to meet your needs. For example, you may want to use your organization structure, terminology, and data as examples in a customized training session delivered at your own facility. Support From on-site support to central support, our team of experienced professionals provides the help and information you need to keep your product working for you. This team includes your Technical Representative, Account Manager, and Oracle's large staff of consultants and support specialists with expertise in your business area, managing an Oracle server, and your hardware and software environment. Do Not Use Database Tools to Modify Oracle E-Business Suite Data Oracle STRONGLY RECOMMENDS that you never use SQL*Plus, Oracle Data Browser, database triggers, or any other tool to modify Oracle E-Business Suite data unless otherwise instructed. Oracle provides powerful tools you can use to create, store, change, retrieve, and maintain information in an Oracle database. But if you use Oracle tools such as SQL*Plus to modify Oracle E-Business Suite data, you risk destroying the integrity of your data and you lose the ability to audit changes to your data. Because Oracle E-Business Suite tables are interrelated, any change you make using an Oracle E-Business Suite form can update many tables at once. But when you modify Oracle E-Business Suite data using anything other than Oracle E-Business Suite, you may change a row in one table without making corresponding changes in related tables. If your tables get out of synchronization with each other, you risk retrieving erroneous information and you risk unpredictable results throughout Oracle E-Business Suite. When you use Oracle E-Business Suite to modify your data, Oracle E-Business Suite automatically checks that your changes are valid. Oracle E-Business Suite also keeps track of who changes information. If you enter information into database tables using database tools, you may store invalid information. You also lose the ability to track who     xvii
  • 18. has changed your information because SQL*Plus and other database tools do not keep a record of changes. xviii
  • 19. 1 Introduction to Oracle Procurement Contracts This chapter covers the following topics: • Oracle Procurement Contracts - Overview • Oracle Procurement Contracts - Key Features Oracle Procurement Contracts - Overview Procurement contracts play a critical role in all businesses. Companies rely on procurement contracts to define: • Specific products or services that they buy. • Contract terms governing their price, shipment, payment, quality, and other mutual obligations of the involved parties. Oracle Procurement supports the basic business processes of the procurement contract life cycle. Oracle Procurement Contracts enhances the ability of buying organizations to manage these stages by adding sophisticated contract management and compliance features to Oracle Purchasing, Oracle Sourcing, and Oracle iSupplier Portal. Note: Oracle Contracts and Oracle Purchasing are mandatory prerequisites for Oracle Procurement Contracts; Oracle Sourcing and Oracle iSupplier Portal are optional. Oracle Procurement Contracts - Key Features Oracle Procurement Contracts supports all the stages of a complete contract life cycle. The key stages of the contract life cycle are: • Establish Contract Standards, page 1-2 Introduction to Oracle Procurement Contracts     1-1
  • 20. Author Contracts, page 1-2 • Negotiate Contracts, page 1-2 • Approve and Sign Contracts, page 1-2 • Execute and Monitor Contracts, page 1-3 • Administer Changes, page 1-3 • Renegotiate and Close Out Contracts, page 1-3 Note: In Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration guide, the expressions "contract" and "business document" both imply any Sourcing or Purchasing document that contains contract terms. When appropriate, the more explicit expressions "sourcing document" and "purchasing document" are used. • Search Contracts, page 1-3 Establish Contract Standards You establish company-wide standards to manage your contracts by incorporating best practices that ensure all contracts are authored and executed based on approved legal and business policies and procedures. This streamlines your processes and reduces contractual risks. Author Contracts When you author contract terms, you leverage standard clauses, templates, and business rules set up in the library to define contractual obligations driven by legal and business requirements. You also set up and monitor tasks that enable the fulfillment of these obligations. Negotiate Contracts During negotiation, you create sourcing documents, such as RFIs or RFQs, with draft contract terms. Suppliers review, respond, and may suggest changes to the contractual terms. After all parties have reached agreement, and all sourcing documents have been submitted, an award is made. You track and archive all interactions with the prospective sellers for retrieval in case of disputes. Approve and Sign Contracts For the contract approval and signature process, you specify and communicate the guidelines to the concerned individuals in your organization, and you authorize who 1-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 21. can sign the contracts in your organization. For standard contracts you fine tune your review process; for exception cases you allocate additional legal review time. Execute and Monitor Contracts As you execute the contracts, you capture transactional data to enforce the agreed upon contract terms. The contracts are monitored to ensure that the contractual obligations, as defined in the contract terms, are fulfilled. Alerting and escalation mechanisms are defined and adhered to. Administer Changes You define a formal contract change request process for your organization and the supplier community. Amendments to contract terms are routed to designated individuals for approval. You keep track of the changes for audit trail purposes. Renegotiate and Close Out Contracts After all contractual obligations have been fulfilled or the contract has expired, you can renegotiate the contract to obtain optimal market pricing, or you can decide to close out the contract. Search Contracts The Enterprise Contracts Search feature enables you to search for keywords and text in structured data (such as contract terms) and unstructured data (such as text contained in attached documents). The search is performed for Oracle Purchasing, Oracle Sourcing, and Repository Contracts. Introduction to Oracle Procurement Contracts     1-3
  • 23. 2 Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies This chapter covers the following topics: • Installation Verification • Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies • Mandatory Dependencies • Conditional Dependencies Installation Verification Before proceeding with implementation of Oracle Procurements Contract and its dependencies, you must verify that you have installed Oracle Applications correctly. For more information, see Oracle Applications Installing Oracle Applications Guide. Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies To achieve the entire procurement contracts business flow, Oracle Procurement Contracts is built on infrastructure provided by various Oracle modules. Mandatory dependencies are required for Oracle Procurement Contracts to function properly. Conditional dependencies, when integrated, provide additional capabilities. This section describes mandatory and optional dependencies for Oracle Procurement Contracts. Mandatory Dependencies For all the features to function properly, Oracle Procurement Contracts requires installation and implementation of the following modules: • Oracle Purchasing: Provides the backbone to author, approve, amend, Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies    2-1
  • 24. communicate, and print contracts. For more information, see the Oracle Purchasing User's Guide. • Oracle Contracts: Provides contract terms library, contract document attachment, and contract terms authoring capabilities. For more information, see the Oracle Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide. • Oracle General Ledger: Enables set up of ledgers and books. For complete setup information, see the Oracle General Ledger User Guide. Set of Books are used as part of the setup for autonumbering of clauses. • Oracle Human Resources: Provides organization setup information. Define or confirm the definitions of your employees in Oracle Human Resources Management System. For more information, see the Implementing Oracle HRMS Guide. • Oracle Workflow: Provides notifications related to approvals of clauses, templates, and contracts. For more information see the Oracle Workflow Administrator's Guide. • Oracle XML Publisher: Provides information on setting up and using RTF and PDF templates that are used to preview and print contracts and contract templates. For more information, see the Oracle XML Publisher Users Guide. Conditional Dependencies The following conditional dependencies provide additional functionality but are not required for Oracle Procurement Contracts to function: • Oracle Sourcing: Provides complete contract terms negotiation capabilities. For more information, see Oracle Sourcing Implementation and Administration Guide. • Oracle iSupplier Portal: Allows suppliers to view contract terms and request changes. For more information, see the Oracle iSupplier Portal User's Guide. • Oracle E-Record: Provides electronic signature capabilities to Oracle Procurement Contracts. For more information, see the Oracle E-Records Implementation Guide. 2-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 25. 3 Implementation Overview This chapter covers the following topics: • Process Description • Implementation Task Sequence Process Description In procurement organizations, there is a need to author and negotiate procurement contracts using accepted legal and business terms. Many of these contracts tend to be similar in nature and can be created from previously defined templates. The Oracle Procurement Contracts Contract Terms Library is a repository of such templates and terms (clauses). This library also contains a repository of custom contract expert rules which bring in additional required clauses into a contract. These rules are based on information that is available in the contract or from additional questions to which contract authors respond during authoring. Procurement and Sourcing professionals can then create documents (including request for quotations (RFQ), blanket purchase agreements, and purchase orders) using standard templates, clauses, and contract expert rules. Setting up business documents and the Oracle Procurement Contracts Contract Terms Library are important steps in implementing Oracle Procurement Contracts. Implementation Task Sequence Before installing Oracle Procurement Contracts, you must install Oracle Purchasing. You also need to install Oracle Sourcing and Oracle iSupplier Portal, if you are planning to utilize additional contract functionality provided by these applications. For more information, see Oracle Procurement Contracts Dependencies , page 2-1. The following table describes the implementation process for Oracle Procurement Contracts: Implementation Overview    3-1
  • 26. Step Description Mandat Performed by Seeded One Time ory Responsibility Set Up 1 Set up organizations Yes Oracle Purchasing Super User Yes 2 Set up profile options Yes System Administrator Yes 3 Set up approval Yes Oracle Workflow Administrator Yes workflows 4 Set up lookup codes Yes System Administrator No 5 Enable keyword search Yes Contract Terms Library No Administrator 6 Set up layout template Yes XML Publisher Administrator Yes 7 Set up purchasing Yes Purchasing Super User Yes document format 8 Associate layout template Yes Purchasing Super User Yes to document types 9 Set up descriptive No System Administrator Yes flexfields 10 Set up AutoNumbering No System Administrator Yes 11 Set up value sets Yes System Administrator No 12 Set up function security No System Administrator Yes 13 Migrate clauses to contract Yes Contract Terms Library Yes terms library Administrator 14 Import clauses from No Contract Terms Library No external sources Administrator 15 Set up contract folders No Contract Terms Library No Administrator 16 Set up variables No Contract Terms Library No Administrator 3-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 27. 17 Set up numbering schemes No Contract Terms Library No Administrator 18 Deploy Searchable Objects Yes Application Search Yes Administration 19 Set up sections Yes Contract Terms Library No Administrator 20 Set up standard clauses Yes Contract terms Library No Administrator 21 Set up contract templates Yes Contract Terms Library No Administrator 22 Set up contract expert No Contract Terms Library No Administrator 23 Set up contract repository No Contracts Workbench Yes Administrator 24 Set up contract workbench No Contracts Workbench Yes Administrator Implementation Overview    3-3
  • 29. 4 Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts This chapter covers the following topics: • Setting Up Organizations For Contract Terms • Implementing Multiple Organizations Access Control • Profile Options and Profile Options Categories • Setting Up Approvers and Approval Workflow • Approval Workflows in Integrated Modules • Setting Up Lookup Codes • Enabling Keyword Search • Setting Up Layout Templates • Setting Up Purchasing Document Format • Using Descriptive Flexfields • Setting Up AutoNumbering • Setting Up Value Sets • Oracle Procurement Contracts Function Security • Importing Clauses from External Sources • Setting Up Contract Folders • Setting Up Variables • Setting Up Numbering Schemes • Deploy Searchable Objects • Setting Up Sections • Setting Up Standard Clauses • Setting Up Contract Templates • Setting Up Contract Expert Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-1
  • 30. Setting Up Contract Repository • Setting Up Contracts Workbench Setting Up Organizations For Contract Terms To use Oracle Procurement Contracts, you must define organizations in the Oracle Human Resources application. For more information, see Oracle HRMS Enterprise and Workforce Management Guide. Defining your organizations is the first step in the Procurement Contracts implementation since the contract terms library as well as procurement and sourcing documents are managed in these organizations. Note: If your procurement contracts implementation is global (you intend to use the solution world-wide across your different organizations or divisions) you must identify one global organization for the purpose of creating clauses and templates in the contract terms library. In addition, you must make the following business-related decisions to determine how your organizations need to be setup to implement Procurement Contracts: • How many organizations will be involved in the implementation? • Will any of these organizations establish and administer standard contract policies and terms at the global level? • Do your local organizations require customizing to meet local business and policy regulations? • Do you have the following user roles for the library defined? • Contract Terms Library Administrator • Approvers for the contract terms library for procurement contracts Note: NOTE: The approvers of the contract terms library may be different than approvers of the procurement contracts themselves. If you are also implementing Sales Contracts, you can have an approver defined who is different than for Procurement Contracts. Once these decisions are made, you are ready to setup contracts. To do this, you will find the operating unit classification in the organizations definition pages. For the operating unit listed in the Organization Classifications region, set up the following Contract Terms options: 4-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 31. Auto Adopt Global Clauses: This enables automatic adoption of global clauses in a local organization. The clauses do not have to be approved separately in the local organization if the Auto Adopt option is set to Yes. • Library Administrator (Buy Intent): Set a library administrator to receive notifications including • System Failures - For example, failure of concurrent processes. • FYI Notifications - For example, approval of global clauses that are now ready for adoption • Library Approver (Buy Intent):: Set a library approver for Buy Intent to route workflow approval notifications for clauses and templates. Note: Only users defined as FND_USERS, using the System Administrator responsibility, can be assigned the role of Library Administrator or Library Approver. If the users are no longer valid, make sure the contract terms setup is modified. • You must set up at least one contract template for each operating unit that is implementing Oracle Procurement Contracts. During contract authoring, this contract template can be applied to a Sourcing or Purchasing document. For details on how to create a contract template, see Creating Contract Templates, page 6-31. Note: Only users defined as FND_USERS can be assigned the role of Library Administrator or Library Approver. If the users are no longer valid, you must update the contract terms setup in the organizations setup. Even if your organization only implements Procurement Contracts, you must define an approver and administrator for the Sell intent in the setup described above. Failure to setup an approver and administrator for Sell intent may result in system errors while approving your clauses and templates. Steps: To set up operating units: 1. Log in to the Human Resources responsibility. 2. Open the Find Organization window. Navigation: Work Structures -> Organization -> Description. Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-3
  • 32. 3. Select the desired operating unit from the list of values. 4. Click the Find button. 5. In the Organization Classifications region, place the cursor in the Operating Unit classification. 6. Click the Others button. 7. Select the Contract Terms Setup option from the list of values. 8. In the Contract Terms Setup window, enter values for the following options: • Auto Adopt Global Clauses: This enables automatic adoption of global clauses in a local operating unit. The clauses do not have to be approved separately in the local operating unit if the Auto Adopt option is set to Yes. • Library Administrator for Buy Intent: Set a library administrator Buy intent to receive notifications when a global clause is created and needs adoption in the local operating unit. • Library Approver for Buy Intent: Set a library approver for Buy intent to route workflow approval notifications for clauses and templates. • Clause Sequence Category: Provide a value here if you want to activate the AutoNumbering function for clauses in the operating unit. Leave it blank if you want to number clauses manually. See: Setting Up AutoNumbering, page 4-17. Note: Users who are defined as FND_USERS, using the System Administrator responsibility, can only be assigned the role of Library Administrators or Library Approvers. If the users are no longer valid, you must manually update the information in the contract terms setup. For example, if an employee is no longer with your organization, ensure that the relevant updates are made to the setup that was explained earlier. Implementing Multiple Organizations Access Control The Multiple Organizations (Multi-Org) access control feature enables you to define the operating units within a specific responsibility that users can have access to. You can set up Multi-Org access control in the Contract Terms Library which enables users to access multiple operating units from one responsibility. In prior releases of Oracle Contracts, access to an operating unit through a responsibility was controlled using the MO: Operating Unit profile option. Users could define this profile option and access the library for the specific operating unit. 4-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 33. To define security profiles: 1. Log in to the Human Resources responsibility. 2. Open the Profile page. Navigation: Security > Profile page 3. Provide a name for the profile. 4. Select a business group to which all the operating units belong. If you have not defined your own business groups, select the default business group. 5. In the Security type field, select the "Secure Organizations by organization hierarchy and/or organization list" option from the list of values. 6. Navigate to the Organization Security tab. At this stage, you can select one of the following options: • Navigate to the Classification region and provide a list of operating units and their names. This will be the list of operating units under the security profile. • Select an organization in the Organization Hierarchy field. To use this option, you must first set up an organization hierarchy. See: Setting Up Organization Hierarchy, page 4-5. 7. Save your work. 8. Run the Security List Maintenance program. • You should select the One Named Security Profile option as the value for the Generate Lists for parameter and then provide the value of the security profile that you just created. • If you have multiple security profiles, you can run this program as many times as necessary. Also, you must run this program after you update the security profile definitions. To set up the organization hierarchy: 1. Log in to the Human Resources responsibility. 2. Open the Organization Hierarchy page. Navigation: Workstructures > Organization >Hierarchy 3. Provide a hierarchy name. Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-5
  • 34. 4. Save your work. 5. Provide the version number and start date. 6. Save your work and close the window. 7. Query the hierarchy that you just created. 8. Navigate to the Subordinates region. 9. If you receive a warning message that indicates "The organization is not current as at the start date," ignore it and provide the list of operating units that you want to include in the hierarchy. 10. Save your work. Profile Options and Profile Options Categories Consider the following profile options when implementing Oracle Procurement Contracts. Generally, the system administrator sets and updates profile values. See: Setting User Profile Options, Oracle Applications System Administrator's Guide - Maintenance. Profile options are grouped into one or more profile option categories enabling you to view only the profile options that pertain to your application or function. List Of Procurement Contracts Profile Categories • Contracts Security, page 4-7 • Contracts Setup, page 4-8 List Of Procurement Contracts Profile Options • EDR: E-records and E-signatures, page 4-9 • MO: Default Operating Unit, page 4-9 • MO: Security Profile, page 4-10 • OKC: Clause Import XML File Location, page 4-10 • OKC: Contract Expert Enabled , page 4-10 • Contracts Intent Access Control, page 4-7 4-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 35. Contract Repository Auto-Numbering Enabled, page 4-10 • OKC: Generate deviations report for approval, page 4-10 • OKC: Global Operating Unit, page 4-10 • OKC: Layout Template for Contract Deviations Report, page 4-10 • OKC:Use Clause Number in Contracts, page 4-11 • OKC: Terms Library Intent, page 4-8 • PO: Auto Apply Default Contract Templates, page 4-11 • PO: Contracts Enabled, page 4-11 • PO: Generate Amendment Documents, page 4-11 • Self Service Accessibility Feature, page 4-11 Contracts Security Category The table below lists the profile options that impact Contracts Security. This profile category is used to group all the profiles used to enforce security in Oracle Procurement Contracts. Contracts Security Profile Options Profile Option Default User System System System System Access Administrati Administratio Administrati Administrati on: Site n: on: on: User Application Responsibili ty Contracts Intent Access   Update Update Update Update Update Control, page 4-7 OKC: Terms Library Intent,   Update Update Update Update Update page 4-8 Contracts Intent Access Control When you define a contract and indicate the contract type, the system derives the contract's intent, which is an indication of whether the contract is buy-side, sell-side, or neither. Each contract type can be associated only with one intent. The possible values for Intent are Buy, Sell, Other, or any combination of these. This profile option restricts Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-7
  • 36. the users when that are creating or viewing Repository contracts, and when they are using the Contracts Workbench. Note: If this profile option is not set, the user will have access to all three intents. OKC: Terms Library Intent Use this profile option to restrict the Intent while creating a clause, template, or rules in the terms library. You can set the profile option value to Buy, Sell, or All. However, for Oracle Procurement Contracts the value should be set to Buy Note: If you leave this profile option blank, it will have the same effect as setting it to All. Contracts Setup Category The table below lists the profile options that impact Contracts Setup. This profile category is used to group all the profiles used in the setup of Oracle Procurement Contracts, including the contract terms library, contract expert, repository as well as contract authoring Contracts Setup Options Profile Option Default User System System System System Access Administrati Administratio Administrati Administrati on: Site n: on: on: User Application Responsibili ty EDR: E-records and   Update Update     Update E-signatures, page 4-9 MO: Default Operating         Update   Unit, page 4-9 MO: Security Profile, page   Update Update   Update Update 4-10 OKC: Clause Import XML     Update       File Location, page 4-10 OKC: Contract Expert     Update       Enabled , page 4-10 4-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 37. Profile Option Default User System System System System Access Administrati Administratio Administrati Administrati on: Site n: on: on: User Application Responsibili ty Contract Repository     Update       Auto-Numbering Enabled, page 4-10 OKC: Generate deviations       Update     report for approval, page 4- 10 OKC: Global Operating     Update       Unit, page 4-10 OKC: Layout Template for       Update     Contract Deviations Report, page 4-10 OKC:Use Clause Number     Update Update     in Contracts, page 4-11 PO: Auto Apply Default   Update Update Update Update Update Contract Templates, page 4-11 PO: Contracts Enabled,   Update Update       page 4-11 PO: Generate Amendment   Update Update Update Update Update Documents, page 4-11 Self Service Accessibility   Update Update Update Update Update Feature, page 4-11 EDR: E-records and E-signatures Use this profile option to enable electronic signature functionality. For more information about electronic and manual signatures, see Approve and Sign Contracts, page 5-25. MO: Default Operating Unit Optionally use this profile, in conjunction with the MO: Security Profile, to set a default Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-9
  • 38. operating unit for creating contracts. The value of this profile must be one of the operating units in the MO: Security Profile. MO: Security Profile Use this profile option to determine which operating unit or group of operating units have access to the Procurement Contracts responsibility. To set up this profile option, you need to first implement the Multi-Org Access feature. OKC: Clause Import XML File Location Use this profile option to specify the location of the XML file containing the clauses and other data that are to be imported into the Contract Terms Library. OKC: Contract Expert Enabled Indicates whether Contract Expert is used by an organization. Contract Expert is not enabled if the profile option value is set to No. Contract Repository Auto-Numbering Enabled If this profile option is set to Yes, the system will assign numbers automatically to the new contracts created in Contract Repository. If you set the profile option to No, the application users must enter contract numbers manually. Contract numbers must be unique across all manually and automatically generated numbers. OKC: Generate deviations report for approval Use this profile option to control whether the deviations report is attached to the approval workflow notification. If the profile option is set to No, the system will not attach the deviations report to the notification. For Oracle Sourcing, set the profile option to Not Applicable to remove this option from the Review Contract Deviations page. OKC: Global Operating Unit Use this profile option to define your global organization. Caution: Changing the value of this profile option, once it has been set, is not recommended. This could cause data issues with clauses and templates in the Contract Terms Library. OKC: Layout Template for Contract Deviations Report Identifies the layout template to control the format of the deviations report that is attached to the approval workflow notification. 4-10    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 39. OKC:Use Clause Number in Contracts Use this profile option to control whether the clause number is also displayed with the clause title when viewing contract terms in the structured view during contract authoring. For more information about structured terms, see the online help topics in Oracle Procurement Contracts. PO: Auto Apply Default Contract Templates Indicates if the default contracts template should be auto-applied to the purchasing document or not during the creation of the document. PO: Contracts Enabled To enable Oracle Procurement Contracts, you need to set the value of this profile to Yes. After completing any subsequent purchasing transaction, changing the value of this profile option to No may lead to data corruption and is not recommended. PO: Generate Amendment Documents To print the Amendment section in the contract document, set the value to Yes. Self Service Accessibility Feature Set to No to use the Rich Text feature in authoring clauses. Setting Up Approvers and Approval Workflow The system supports defining a single approver for each of the Buy and Sell intents as standard out-of-the-box functionality. Use the Operating Units setup to identify approvers of clauses and templates in the global and local operating units. For more information, see the Setting Up Operating Units section, page 4-2. You can customize the approval flows for clauses and templates to route it to multiple approvers or change approvers based on additional context using Oracle Workflow. For more information, see the Oracle Workflow Administrator's Guide. The workflow names are • Contract Template Approval: OKCTPAPP • Contract Clause Approval: OKCARTAP Approval Workflows in Integrated Modules The following table lists the workflows that govern the approval of a sourcing or purchasing document that includes Oracle Procurement Contracts clauses and templates: Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-11
  • 40. Technical Name Workflow Name POAPPRV PO Approval PONAPPRV Sourcing Approval PONAWAPR Sourcing Award Approval You can customize approval flows. For more information, see the Oracle Workflow Administrator's Guide. These workflows are delivered with Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing, and can be used to route purchasing documents and their associated contracts for special contractual approval. Setting Up Lookup Codes Refer to the Look Up Codes appendix, page D-28 for the list of system, user, and extensible lookup codes. Use these tables to identify the lookup codes that you must define for your implementation. Use the Application Object Library Lookups window to define the lookup codes. Note: Modifying seeded lookup values can corrupt data that was created using the lookup values. You cannot end date or disable seeded values. Enabling Keyword Search The Procurement Contract Terms Library supports searching by keyword for both clauses and templates. To effectively use this search feature, you must run the following concurrent processes on a periodic basis: • Synchronize Clauses Text Index: This program synchronizes the clauses text index. • Optimize Clause Text Index: This program optimizes the clauses text index. • Synchronize Template Text Index: This program synchronizes the contract templates text index. • Optimize Template Text Index: This program optimizes the contract templates text index. 4-12    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 41. Note: The recommended approach would be to run the Synchronize and Optimize concurrent programs together. The implementation teams need to determine the frequency of running these programs, depending on the specific business needs. If the clauses and templates are frequently updated, run these programs more often to obtain accurate search results. Setting Up Layout Templates To format and publish PDF versions of contract documents, Oracle Procurement Contracts uses specific layout templates in Oracle XML Publisher, an application in the Oracle E-Business Suite. Layout templates represent the format and layout of business documents. In Oracle XML Publisher, layout templates are created using XSL-FO, and are registered in the Template Manager. For more information, see the Oracle XML Publisher User's Guide. Oracle Procurement Contracts has seeded layout templates for each of the supported document types. For details on the seeded layout templates, see the Seeded Data appendix, page D-1. The seeded layout templates cannot be modified. However, you can download a copy of the layout to your desktop, modify it, and register it as a new layout template in Oracle XML Publisher. This section describes basic steps required to customize layout templates for contract templates using Oracle XML Publisher. The layout template that you select for a contract template defines how its format and layout appears when you generate the contract PDF. Creating a Layout Template: To change the layout, you need to create a new layout template in Oracle XML Publisher. To create a new template, you should start with a copy of one the seeded templates, for example Oracle Contract Terms Template. The following table displays the parameters that a layout template for contract templates should use. Field Content Application Oracle Contracts Core Data Source Name Contract Terms Data Definition Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-13
  • 42. Field Content Subtemplate Unchecked Template Type XSL-FO In addition, define the effective date range (start date and end date) of the layout template such that it allows you to preview the contracts and contract templates. If you leave the End Date field blank, you can use the layout template indefinitely. Prerequisites You must be familiar with Oracle XML Publisher and have access to Oracle XML Publisher Administrator Responsibility. 1. Log in to the XML Publisher Administrator responsibility. 2. Click the Templates link. The Templates Search page opens. 3. In the Application field, enter Oracle Contracts Core. 4. Click Go to view the search results. 5. Click the Duplicate icon for the Oracle Contract Terms Template. 6. In the Code field, enter a new code for the template. 7. In the Name field, enter a new name. 8. Click Apply to save the new template. 9. In the Template Files region, click the Download icon for the OKCTERM_en.XSL file. 10. Save the template to your desktop. 11. Open the template with a text or XSL editor. 12. Modify the layout or boilerplate to suit your needs. 13. Save the template with a new name, for example, MyTemplate_en.xsl. 14. In the Template Files region, click the Update icon for the OKCTERMS_en.xsl file. 15. Click the Browse button to locate and select your customized XSL-FO stylesheet 4-14    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 43. (Example: MyTemplate_en.xsl). 16. Click Apply. The system uploads the file and associates it with your layout template. 17. Click the Preview button to preview a sample document using your new layout template. Customizing the Contract Terms XSL-FO Stylesheet: To create a stylesheet for a contract template, you need to know the structure of the contract XML document that is transformed by the XSL stylesheet. The XSL-FO stylesheet, in the layout template, is applied to the contract XML document representing a contract template to create a PDF document. For a description of the contract XML format, see the XML Reference appendix, page E- 1. Associating Layout Template to Document Types: For every operating unit that is implementing Oracle Procurement Contracts, you must associate a layout template with the following purchasing and sourcing document types: • Standard Purchase Order • Blanket Purchase Agreement • Contract Purchase Agreement • RFQ • RFI • Auction For each document type, you need to specify a layout template for the following sections: • Procurement (either purchasing or sourcing) • Contract Terms and Conditions You can create custom layout templates for every section and load them to the system using XML Publisher. The layout templates determine the format of the Procurement and Contract sections in the PDF document. Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-15
  • 44. Steps 1. Log in to the Purchasing Super User responsibility. 2. Navigate to the Document Types form. Navigation: Set Up > Purchasing > Document Types 3. Select the Document Type from the list of values. 4. Use the Document Type Layout field to associate a layout template for the Sourcing or Purchasing section of the PDF. 5. In the Contract Terms Layout field, set the name of the layout template that is created for the Contract Terms and Conditions section of the PDF. Setting Up Purchasing Document Format To generate the contract document in the PDF format, you need to set the PO Output Format value to PDF. Steps: 1. Log in to the Purchasing Super User responsibility. 2. Navigate to the Purchasing Options window. Navigation: Set Up > Organization > Purchasing Options 3. Navigate to the Control tab. 4. In the PO Output Format field, select the PDF option from the list. 5. Save your work. Using Descriptive Flexfields Oracle Procurement Contracts supports the use of descriptive flexfields for users to enter additional information for the following: • Standard Clauses • Contract Templates • Variables • Contract Template Deliverables 4-16    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 45. Folders The following table displays the information for descriptive flexfields: Component Name Title Description Table Standard Clause OKC_CLAUSES Clause Versions Descriptive OKC_CLAUSE_ _DESCFLEX DFF flexfield for VERSIONS clause versions Contract OKC_TERMS_T Contracts Contracts OKC_TERMS_T Templates MPL_DFF Template DFF Template DFF EMPLATES_AL L Variables OKC_VARIABL OKC User Oracle Contracts OKC_BUS_VARI ES_DESCFLEX Defined user-defined ABLES_B Variables variables Flexfield flexfield Contract DELIVERABLES Additional Additional OKC_DELIVER Template _FLEX Attributes attributes on ABLES Deliverables deliverables Folder OKC_ART_DF OKC Clause Descriptive OKC_FOLDERS Folders DF flexfield for _ALL_B folders Setting Up AutoNumbering Use this setup to number clauses automatically during creation. Guidelines In all responsibilities that create clauses, set the Sequence Numbering profile option to yes. For more information on setting this profile option, see the Oracle Applications System Administrator's Guide. Note: You can only delete a numbering scheme that is not assigned to a contract template. If you define a numbering scheme with the "a,b,c," numbering type and a specific level with more that 26 entries, the system does not create further alphabets. Instead, the system uses symbols for all entries beyond 26. Preview the template or contract, as applicable, and make Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-17
  • 46. sure the numbering scheme used is changed to use some other type. Steps: 1. Log in to the System Administrator responsibility. 2. Define a document sequence. Navigation: Application > Document > Define Enter a sequence name, the Contracts Core application, an effective date, Automatic type, and an initial value. 3. Define a sequence category. Navigation: Document > Categories. Define the category using OKC_ARTICLES_ALL as the table to be associated. 4. Assign the category to a set of books. Navigation: Document > Assign. Associate the category defined with the set of books and sequence. 5. Set the OKC: Clause Sequence Category profile option with the sequence created above. Setting Up Value Sets Value sets are used in Oracle Procurement Contracts while creating user-defined variables and in Contract Expert. For more information, see the Defining Value Sets section of the Oracle Applications Developer's Guide. For all user-defined variables, value sets are supported subject to the following conditions: • Format Types: The supported format types are Number, Character, and Standard Date. You must only use the supported format types when defining value sets for user-defined variables. • Validation Types: The supported validation types are None, Independent, and Table. You must only use the supported validation types when defining value sets for user-defined variables. Based on the value set definition, the system displays the list of values in the following formats: • Table: A drop-down list or a list of values. 4-18    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 47. Independent: A drop-down list or a list of values. • None: an input field in the authoring, based on the following format types: • For the CHAR format type, the system displays an input field. • For the Number format type, the system displays an input field. However, users can only enter numeric values in this field. • For the Standard Date format type, the system displays a Date type field. Note: Value set information is used in user-defined variables in the Contract Terms Library. Deleting the value from a value set or deleting the value set could cause data issues that impact the following: • Contract templates containing clauses that use user-defined variables. • Business documents that use user-defined variables in standard and non-standard clauses. Oracle Procurement Contracts Function Security Oracle Procurement Contracts enables organizations to control users' access to contact authoring features. In this way, users with different roles, such as contract negotiators, contract administrators, and contract approvers, can have access to only those features they need to use. For example: • Contract negotiators may have standard authoring privileges allowing them access to standard clauses and pre-approved alternates from the library. • Contract administrators may have additional privileges allowing them to author non-standard clauses or remove contract terms. • Contract approvers or super users may have privileges that allow them to override standard authoring controls. For instance, with override authoring privileges, users can delete a mandatory clause from a business document or edit a protected clause. In Oracle Purchasing, the seeded Super User menu has full access to the features provided by Oracle Procurement Contracts. To restrict a specific function, choose one of the following options: • Exclude the corresponding function from the user's responsibility. • Create a new menu without the corresponding function, and associate the menu Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-19
  • 48. with the user responsibility. The type of access to a business document is governed by the security features in Oracle Purchasing, Oracle Sourcing, and Oracle iSupplier Portal. In addition to these existing security features, Oracle Procurement Contracts provides the following levels of access for authoring contractual terms and managing deliverables associated with a purchasing or sourcing document: • No Authoring Privileges: User may be able to create a purchasing or sourcing document, but without contract authoring privileges they would not be able to author contract terms to a business document. • Standard Authoring Privileges: Users can add or remove standard clauses, update variable values, and change the contract template. • Non-standard Authoring Privileges (Default): In addition to the available functions in the Standard Authoring Privileges level, users can author non-standard clauses and remove all the contract terms on a business document. The default access is set at the Non-standard Authoring Privileges level. • Override Authoring Controls Privileges: In addition to the available functions in the Non-standard Authoring Privileges level, users can delete mandatory clauses and edit clause text on protected clauses. For more information on function security, see the Seeded Data appendix, page D-29. For information on implementation considerations for function security, see Establish Authoring Roles and Controls , page 5-15. Setting Up Function Security for Contract Repository Functional security provides control over the user's access to certain functions in the repository. A user can have View-Only, Authoring, or Administrator responsibility. The following table displays the functions that each responsibility has access to: Function View-Only Authoring Administrat Responsibility Responsibility or Responsibili ty View contract Yes Yes Yes Create and update contract No Yes Yes Change status from Approved to No Yes Yes Signed 4-20    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 49. Function View-Only Authoring Administrat Responsibility Responsibility or Responsibili ty Manage deliverables No Yes Yes Manage risk No Yes Yes Terminate contract No Yes Yes Update contract administrator of a No No Yes contract Change status from Draft directly to No No Yes Signed Import contracts No No Yes Use Repository Setup tab No No Yes Importing Clauses from External Sources You can use the clause import feature to import existing clauses from external sources that your organization uses. You also can use this feature on an ongoing basis, where clause updates are continuously imported into the clause library, in order to stay current with changes in business process or government regulations. See: Importing Clauses , page 6-19. Setting Up Contract Folders You can organize clauses under different folders for easier retrieval. For more information, see Managing Folders , page 6-53. Setting Up Variables Oracle Procurement Contracts supports the use of business variables (tokens) in clause text. For more information, see Managing Variables , page 6-48. Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-21
  • 50. Setting Up Numbering Schemes When creating contract templates, you can apply a numbering scheme to the sections and clauses structure. This numbering scheme is applied to business documents in which the contract template is used. Use the Contract Terms Library to set up and manage numbering schemes. Steps: 1. Log in to the Contract Terms Library Administrator responsibility. 2. Navigate to the Numbering Schemes page. Navigation: Library > Numbering Schemes tab> Create Numbering Scheme button 3. Enter the Scheme Name. 4. Optionally, enter a Description for the scheme. 5. Optionally, select the Number Clauses check box to automatically number the clauses in the contract. 6. Click the Add Another Level button to define the first numbering level. 7. Enter the following information for the numbering level: • In the Sequence field, choose a sequence from the list of values. • Optionally, enter an End Character. For example, a close parentheses ()). • Optionally, select the Concatenate with Child check box to ensure that the child level includes the numbering of its parent during previewing and printing of the contract. For instance, you would set up the numbering scheme as: First level: • a,b,c • end character is "." • Concatenate with Child check box selected Second level: • I,II,III 4-22    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 51. end character is ")" The document will be numbered as: • First Level = a. • Second Level = a.I) 8. Click the Refresh button to preview the layout. 9. Optionally, add additional numbering levels. 10. Click Apply to save and close the Numbering Scheme page. Managing Numbering Schemes: You can make changes to your existing numbering schemes. You can also delete any numbering scheme that is not assigned to a contract template. If the numbering scheme has been updated in the Contract Terms Library, the next time a contract template using that numbering scheme is used to create a new contract, the latest numbering scheme updates are applied. For contracts that already use the numbering scheme you must manually apply the numbering scheme to reflect the updates onto the contract. 1. Log in to the Contract Terms Library Administrator responsibility. 2. Navigate to the Numbering Schemes tab. Navigation: Library > Numbering Schemes. The system displays the list of available numbering schemes. 3. To make changes to a numbering scheme, click the Update icon. 4. To delete a numbering scheme click the Delete icon. You can only delete the numbering schemes that are not used in contract templates. Deploy Searchable Objects From the Application Search Administration page, search and deploy the POC (Procurement Contracts) searchable objects. Setting Up Sections Sections are headings under which you organize contract clauses. The headings provide structure and organization to a printed contract document. You can define sections that can be used in authoring templates and contracts. Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-23
  • 52. For more information, see Managing Sections, page 6-51. Setting Up Standard Clauses A standard clause is the text that describes the legal or business language used to author a contract. Clauses are drafted based on both business and statutory requirements. For more information, see Managing Standard Clause, page 6-2. Setting Up Contract Templates Oracle Procurement Contracts enables you to define a standard set of templates to easily default contract terms for contracts authored by your organization. You can create templates that include both clauses and deliverables. For more information, see Managing Contract Templates , page 6-30. Setting Up Contract Expert Prerequisites • Set up the Contract Terms Library. • Set the Use Contract Expert profile option toYes at the site level. For more information, see the Setting Up Profile Options section, page 4-6. Note: Contract Expert uses Oracle Configurator to process and evaluate the Contract Expert rules on business documents. To function properly, in Oracle Configurator the SSL port requires a special setting. To use Contract Expert on business documents, you need to set up Contract Expert rules in the Contract Terms Library. To set up Contract Expert rules: • Create and approve clauses, page 6-2 • Create and approve contract templates, page 6-30 • Define value sets, page 4-18 • Create Constants, page 7-6 • Create Questions, page 7-3 • Create and activate a library of rules and assign them to appropriate contract 4-24    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 53. templates, page 7-8 • Enable Contract Expert on contract templates , page 6-30 • Determine the sequence of display of questions when Contract Expert is used on a business document, page 7-18 Setting Up Contract Repository Since the Oracle E-Business Suite 11i10 release, Oracle Contracts has provided the ability to author and maintain contract terms in buy-side and sell-side Oracle applications. For example, contract terms can be added to purchase agreements created in Oracle Purchasing, or to quotes created in Oracle Quoting. Oracle Contracts now enables you to create miscellaneous contracts, such as license agreements, non-disclosure agreements, and merger agreements, which are not specifically related to the functionality of other Oracle applications. You can also create purchase or sales agreements for miscellaneous items that are outside the normal purchasing or sales flows, for which full execution capabilities are not required. These types of contracts are stored in a new Contract Repository, and are called Repository contracts. Each Repository contract will have a user-defined contract type, unlike the contracts created in other Oracle applications, which have system-defined contract types. Repository Contracts are integrated with Contract Terms Library to enable Structured Terms Authoring. A Repository contract can include supporting documents and amendments, deliverables with notification capabilities, and risk information. Repository contracts support a flexible approval and signature process, and a bulk import process is available for loading legacy contracts into the system. This section covers the following topics: • Setting Up Profile Options, page 4-25 • Defining Approval Workflows, page 4-26 • Setting Up Contract Types, page 4-26 • Setting Up Risks, page 4-27 • Setting Up Contact Roles, page 4-27 Setting Up Profile Options Define the following profile options: • Contract Repository Auto-Numbering Enabled Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-25
  • 54. Contracts Intent Access Control For more information, see the Setting Up Profile Options section, page 4-6. Defining Approval Workflows Define approval hierarchy and approval rules through the Oracle Approvals Manager. For more information, see the Setting Up Approvers and Approval Workflow section, page 4-11. Setting Up Contract Types When users create Repository contracts in Oracle Contracts, they must select and assign one of the user-defined contract types, such as Non-Disclosure Agreement and Partnership Agreement, to the contract. You must define the contract types in advance. User can enable contract terms for Structured Terms Authoring. Steps 1. Log in to the Contracts Workbench Administrator responsibility. 2. Click the Contract Types link. The contract types you define should be unique across all organizations within the company. Note: For your reference, the Contract Types page displays the list of seeded and current user-defined contract types. 3. Click the Create Contract Type button. The system displays the Create Contract Type page. 4. In the Name field, enter a unique identifier for the contract type. 5. Enter a Description for the contract type. 6. Select an Intent from the list of values. Depending on the nature (Intent) of a contract, the contract could be buy-side, sell-side, or neither. Each Contract Type should be associated with one Intent. The possible values for Intent are Buy, Sell, and Other. If the Contracts Intent Access Control profile option is used, this selection will limit which users will be able to select this Contract Type. Important: If you select Intent as Other, Layout Template and Enable Contract Terms are disabled. 7. Select a Start Date. This is the date that the contract type becomes available. 8. Optionally, select an End Date for the contract type. After the End Date has passed, when creating new contracts, users will not be able to select this type. 9. Select the Enable Contract Terms check box. 4-26    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 55. 10. Select the appropriate Layout Template. 11. Click the Apply button. Setting Up Risks When users create Repository contracts in Oracle Contracts, they may select multiple risks associated with these contracts. For example: partner bankruptcy, non-performance of a deliverable, non-compliance with non-disclosure terms, loss or infringement of intellectual property, and damage to property or humans. This risks must be defined in advance. Steps 1. Log in to the Contracts Workbench Administrator responsibility. 2. Click the Risks link. Note: For your reference, the Risks page displays the list of all user-defined risks. Oracle Contracts does not provide seeded risks. 3. The risks you define should be unique across all organizations within the company. 4. Click the Create Risk button. The system displays the Create Risk page. 5. In the Name field, enter a unique identifier for the risk. 6. Enter a Description for the risk. 7. Select a Start Date. 8. Optionally, select an End Date for the risk. After the End Date has passed, the risk cannot be selected on a contract. 9. Click Apply to save the risk. Setting Up Contact Roles The contact role indicates the responsibility or function of different people in a contract. For example, an employee (internal contact) can be assigned the role of "Purchasing Manager" in a contract. There are no seeded contact roles. You can define an unlimited number of contact roles. These roles will be available to users when adding internal or external contacts to a party on a Repository contract. Steps 1. Login to the Contracts Workbench Administrator responsibility. Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-27
  • 56. 2. Click the Contact Roles. For your reference, the Contact Roles page displays the list of all user-defined roles. The roles you define should be unique across all organizations within the company. 3. Click the Create Contact Role button. The system displays the Create Contact Role page. 4. In the Name field, enter a unique identifier for the role. 5. Enter a Description for the role. 6. Select a Start Date. 7. Optionally, select an End Date for the role. After the End Date has passed, the role cannot be selected on a contract. 8. Click Apply to save the role. Setting Up Contracts Workbench A single view of all enterprise contracts is essential for effective management of contract activities, and for reporting and analysis of outstanding supplier and customer commitments. Oracle Contracts provides a centralized Contracts Workbench that gives you access and visibility to all contractual agreements in the enterprise. Contracts Workbench allows contract administrators to see which contracts require attention, provides extensive search capabilities, and has links to common tasks such as creating or approving a contract. Legal and financial managers can use Contracts Workbench as a research tool. A flexible security model ensures that contracts can only be viewed or updated by authorized users. Contracts Workbench provides a single view of the following types of contracts: • Contracts created in buy-side and sell-side Oracle applications: purchase orders, purchase agreements, negotiations, orders, quotes and sales agreements. • Repository contracts: For information, see Contract Repository, page 4-25. All of these contracts are automatically visible in the Contracts Workbench, as long as they include contract terms. This section covers the following topics: • Setting Up Profile Options, page 4-29 • Personalizing Contracts Workbench, page 4-29 4-28    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 57. Setting Up Profile Options You can use the Contracts Intent Access Control profile option to restrict the access to Contracts. For more information, see the Setting Up Profile Options section, page 4-6. Personalizing Contracts Workbench Oracle Framework includes the OA Personalization Framework, which enables you to personalize the appearance of Contracts Workbench without modifying any underlying code. The following are the most common ways to personalize Contracts Workbench: 1. The default bins for the Contracts Workbench are: • Notifications • Recent Contracts • Expiring Contracts • Contract Deliverables • Contracts at Risk You can use the personalization option to add the Bookmarks bin,, remove one of the above bins, or change the order the bins are displayed. 2. The default columns for the Advanced Search Results page are: • Contracts Number • Contract Name • Organization • Party Name • Contract Type • Intent • Status • Effective Date You can use the personalization option to remove one of the above columns, change the order the columns are displayed, or add any of the following columns: • Contract Administrator Setting Up Oracle Procurement Contracts    4-29
  • 58. Overall Risk • Version • Expiration Date • Termination Date • Amount • Currency • Authoring Party The personalization also impacts the Export option. After performing a search, the user can export the search results to a Comma Separated (CSV) file. The exported file will include only the columns shown on the screen. After personalization, columns that are available for personalization but not selected will not be included in the CSV file. For more information on personalization, see: • Oracle Applications Framework Personalization Guide Release 11i(Metalink Note 268969.1) • Oracle Applications Component Reference Release 11i (Metalink Note 269136.1) 4-30    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 59. 5 Implementation and Other Considerations This chapter covers the following topics: • Overview • Process Overview, Implementation Considerations, and Other Considerations Overview This chapter provides specific considerations for implementing Oracle Procurement Contracts, as well as additional considerations for end-users. It also provides an overview of the Oracle Procurement Contracts features that support the key stages of the procurement contract life cycle. Before you proceed with the implementation of Oracle Procurement Contracts, it is recommended that you address the business considerations outlined in the following table. The table also lists the sections in this guide where you can find relevant information: Question Related Section How many organizations will be involved in the Establish Contract Standards, page implementation? 5-2 Global Agreements, page 5-22 Which organizations will administer and control the Establish Contract Standards, page standard contract terms at the global level? 5-2 Implementation and Other Considerations    5-1
  • 60. Question Related Section How does your organization currently create and store Clauses, page 5-4 contracts? Contract Templates, page 5-5 Deliverables, page 5-9 Variables, page 5-9 Do you need to translate your standard terms into Contract Templates, page 5-5 multiple languages? Printed Contract Documents, page 5-23 Does your organization have a formal approval cycle for Approvals in Oracle Procurement the standard contract terms? If so, do you need additional Contracts, page 5-27 approvers to approve business documents with contract terms as compared to business documents without contract terms? What are the processes that you and your suppliers will Approve and Sign Contracts, page collaborate on in order to complete and sign off on 5-25 contractual obligations? Supplier Authored Contracts, page 5-20 What are the standard print formats for your contracts? Printed Contract Documents, page 5-23 Are there standard business rules based on which contract Contract Expert, page 5-6 clauses need to be included while authoring a contract? Is the contract term always the same based on a Automatic Application of purchasing document type? Templates, page 5-20 Process Overview, Implementation Considerations, and Other Considerations This section provides process overviews and specific considerations for the phases of the contracts life cycle. Establish Contract Standards 5-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 61. Process Overview Oracle Procurement Contracts enables you to establish and manage your contract standards in the Contract Terms Library, a feature of Oracle Contracts. You establish your contract standards by defining the standard clauses, contract templates, and contract deliverables that you want to enforce while authoring your contracts. Organizations that operate globally can use the Contract Terms Library to establish organization-wide standards and enforce them on a global basis. To accommodate local or country specific regulations, an organization may provide local contract library administrators the flexibility of tailoring these global standards. Create and Approve Standard Clauses Standard clauses contain the standard business language to be used in contracts. Contract administrators can create standard clauses in the library, route the clauses for approval, and publish the clauses for use across the organization. Contract administrators can optionally define alternate or incompatible clauses for a standard clause. Users can insert tokens, called variables, in the clause text. These tokens refer to the structured business terms that are negotiated on a contract. They are replaced with the negotiated values when the contract is printed. Create and Approve Contract Templates Companies implement best practices by creating standard contract boilerplates (templates) based on their unique contracting requirements. Contract templates enable rapid assembly and creation of contracts and minimize the overhead involved in legal review and approval. Contract templates may include a set of pre-defined, pre-approved standard clauses. They may also include deliverables that are tasks or documents required to fulfill a contractual obligation. For instance, organizations may create deliverables to track the submission of a status report on the progress of the contract. As with standard clauses, contract administrators can route contract templates for approval, after which the contract templates can be used in contracts. You can create global templates which can be adopted by local organizations and modified based on local organizations' requirements. Implementation and Other Considerations This section describes the implementation and other considerations for: • Contract Terms Library, page 5-4 • Clauses, page 5-4 • Contract Templates, page 5-5 Implementation and Other Considerations    5-3
  • 62. Setting up Contract Expert Rules, page 5-6 • Deliverables, page 5-9 • Variables, page 5-9 Contract Terms Library Oracle Procurement Contracts leverages Oracle Contracts' functionality for creating and managing standard clauses and contract templates, including deliverables. The features provided by Oracle Contracts are: • Contract Terms Library • Clauses • Templates • Deliverables • Variables • Folders • Sections • Contract Document Attachments • Printing Contractual Terms For detailed description of these features, see Setting Up Contract Terms Library, page 6-2. Before proceeding with implementation of Oracle Procurement Contracts, you should familiarize yourself with the setup procedures related to establishing contract standards in the Contract Terms Library. Clauses Implementation considerations for setting up clauses include: • Intent: When defining a new clause, you must specify an intent (Buy or Sell) for the clause. After setting the intent for a clause, it cannot be changed. • If your organization only uses the Contract Terms Library for the Buy intent, set the value for the OKC Clauses Library Intent profile option to Buy. This ensures that users only create clauses with the Buy intent. For Oracle Procurement Contracts the intent should always be Buy. 5-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 63. Include By Reference: Use this feature if you want to substitute an alternate referenced text instead of the full clause text on a printed contract. To define alternate text, use the Reference Text field while defining the clause. This is useful if your printed contract is extensive and contains commonly used terms that you do not have to repeat on every standard contract. Note that users with the Override Authoring Controls privileges can override this feature on a contract and choose to make the clause non-standard and include a special text. In this case, the system does not print the reference text; instead, the non-standard clause text from the contract is printed. For details on the function security, see Establish Authoring Roles and Controls , page 5-15. • Keyword Search Feature: To maximize the results of the search feature for standard clauses, ensure that the following concurrent programs are run periodically: • Synchronize Clause Text Index • Optimize Clause Text Index The frequency of running these programs should be determined during the implementation based on the usage frequency of the Keyword field during search. Other considerations for using clauses include: • Provision Check Box: Sourcing documents may have provisions as clauses that are applicable during the negotiation but are not intended to be part of the final contract. Select the Provision check box to mark such clauses as Provision. A provision clause can only be used in sourcing documents (such as RFQ) that are supported by Oracle Procurement Contracts. If you require a clause to be used in both Oracle Sourcing and Oracle Purchasing, verify that the Provision check box is not selected. You cannot change this attribute on subsequent versions of the clause. • Deliverable Variables: If the printed contract needs to contain a tabular list of deliverables, which are required to be fulfilled as part of contract execution, you must create a clause that holds one or all the deliverable variables in it. Depending on your business needs, you may include the deliverable variables as part of a clause that contains additional text, or create a clause that only contains one or more deliverable variables. Optionally, print the contract PDF document to validate the exact location of the deliverable table within the clause text. Contract Templates Contract templates are required to author procurement contracts. You can consider managing templates based on your specific needs, such as transaction types, products Implementation and Other Considerations    5-5
  • 64. or services procured, supplier categories, and so on. During contract authoring, users can search for the appropriate contract template by the template name. So make sure the template name reflects the major keywords that users might use during their search. Implementation considerations for setting up contract templates include: • Intent: When defining a new contract template, you must specify an intent (Buy or Sell) for the template. After setting the intent for a template, it cannot be changed. If your organization only uses the Contract Terms Library for the Buy intent, set the value for the OKC Clauses Library Intent profile option to Buy. This ensures that users only create templates with the Buy intent. For Oracle Procurement Contracts the intent should always be Buy. • Keyword Search Feature: To maximize the results of the search feature for contract templates, ensure that the following concurrent programs are run periodically: • Synchronize Template Text Index • Optimize Template Text Index Determine during implementation how often to run these programs based on the usage frequency of the Keyword field during a search. • Document Types: To author procurement contracts, ensure that you have created at least one template and assigned it to one or more procurement document types. Examples of document types are RFQ, Auction, and Standard Purchase Order. If you plan to use a common contract template to support multiple document types, note the following: If the contract template contains clauses that use variables sourced for specific document types, the system displays a warning if the same clause is used in a contract for a different document type. For example, if a contract template is assigned to document types RFQ and Standard Purchase Order, you can apply the template to RFQs in Oracle Sourcing or purchase orders in Oracle Purchasing. If this template contains a clause with a system variable "Sourcing Document Number" the value for this variable will be substituted on the RFQ, but not on the purchase order. For the users creating a purchase order, the system displays a warning indicating that the variable could not be resolved. One way to avoid issues on a contract is to carefully review the validations results for the contract template and decide whether or not to include clauses with these variables in the template. • Layout Template: When choosing a layout template for a contract template, ensure that you do not choose the RTF type layout template. The RTF type is not supported by Oracle Procurement Contracts. Contract Expert Rules Contract Expert is a rule-based contract creation tool that assists purchasing 5-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 65. professionals in authoring complex contracts. Using Contract Expert, organizations can define their business policy rules that govern the contract clauses to be included in a purchasing or sourcing document. Contract Expert rules are defined in the contract terms library. Rules can be applicable to specific templates or applied globally for all contracts authored in the organization. During authoring, Contract Expert leads you through a contract creation questionnaire and automatically adds needed clauses based on the responses that you provided In addition to author responses, policy rules can also be based on the business terms and other values contained in the purchasing or sourcing document, such as purchasing category, payment term, and agreed contract amount. For example, buying organizations may require additional clauses in contracts for the purchase of hazardous materials, or contracts for which the supplier is located in a specific foreign country. When setting up Contract Expert for authoring contracts consider the following: Profile Options • Ensure that the Profile Option OKC: Enable Contract Expert is set to Yes before using Contract Expert. Even if the profile option is set to No, the Contract Expert Rules setup will still be available, but contract templates cannot be made Contract Expert enabled unless the profile option value is Yes Value Set Restrictions: • Ensure that you understand the restrictions in using Value Sets provided in the Oracle Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide when you are creating questions based on response type 'List of Values'. For instance, Contract Expert does not support date based value sets. It is important you review these restrictions to avoid errors at later stages when creating rules. • Remember that deleting a value set or changing the name of a value set, after using it in a question, could potentially cause system issues when the question is used in a business document during contract authoring. Contract Templates and Contract Expert • Contract Templates must be Contract Expert enabled in order to use Contract Expert in business documents. • When a global template is copied in a local organization, the rules from the global template are not copied over. However, if the local organization already has rules that are assigned to all templates, you would notice that those rules are available for the template you just created. • Currently, the system allows you to create and approve contract templates that are Contract Expert enabled without any clauses. However, from an implementation perspective, it is recommended that you provide at least the outline structure in the template. It would be useful to define all the sections of the contract and the order Implementation and Other Considerations    5-7
  • 66. and numbering sequence that needs to be used for these sections. • It is recommended that you provide a Default Section assignment for clauses that are used in Contract Expert rules. This ensures that the clauses are placed in appropriate sections when Contract Expert is used on a contract. Contract Expert uses the following order to determine the section into which an expert clause is placed on a contract: • Obtain the Default Section assignment from the Clause Definition. • If the default section assignment is not found in the clause definition, get the Default Section assignment from the template. • You must create a contract template revision to update any of the Contract Expert fields. However, note that if you update the Expert Clauses Mandatory check box or the Default Section field by creating a revision, the changes take effect on all new and existing business documents the next time Contract Expert is used on a business document even though the template may not have been reapplied on the business document. • Exception to the previous point: If you disable Contract Expert on a contract template revision, this will not impact existing business documents that have already run Contract Expert using the original version of the contract template, unless the contract template is reapplied on a business document. In other words, you can continue to run Contract Expert on the business document until you explicitly reapply the contract template. • Note that if you choose to check Expert Clauses Mandatory on a contract template, all expert clauses will be made mandatory. Use this only if this is the desired behavior. Clauses that are made mandatory cannot be removed from the business document. Creating Expert Rules • Remember Questions and Constants can be reused across multiple organizations. You do not need to create these in every organization • Questions used in rules must be manually sequenced in the order in which you expect the sales personnel or a contract administrator to answer them. Dependent questions must be carefully placed under the main question so that they flow logically as the users are answering questions. • Remember rules are unique to an organization. So, even if you have similar rules in different organizations, you will have to create these rules individually in each organization. Unlike clauses or templates, rules cannot be copied across organizations. 5-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 67. During implementation, pay additional attention to the Apply to all Templates check box on a rule. Use it only if you are sure the rule will apply without exception to all templates (current and future) created in the organization. • Note that even though draft clauses are allowed to be included in a contract template, this does not apply to contract expert rules assigned to that template. All clauses used in rules must be in Approved status. • Note that numeric value sets are not supported for questions with response type of List of Values. If the response to your question is a number, remember to use a constant instead. Deliverables Deliverables are contractual commitments and obligations that can be associated to a contract template. This feature is specific to Oracle Procurement Contracts. Some considerations for using deliverables include: • Contract Templates: You may have a common contract template that supports multiple document types across Oracle Sourcing and Oracle Purchasing. When such a template is applied to a purchasing document, clauses marked as "Provisions" and deliverables of type "Negotiation" are not copied to the purchasing document. • Comments: When defining a deliverable on a contract template, the comments that you enter provide additional details of the purpose of the deliverable, to the buyer when the buyer authors the contract deliverables. This information, in the Comments field, is not available to the supplier from the iSupplier Portal. • Deliverable Types: Types of deliverable include Contractual, Internal Purchasing, and Negotiation. If a contract template, with all types of deliverables attached to it, is applied to a sourcing document, all the deliverables are copied to the sourcing document. However, only Negotiation type of deliverables can be acted upon during the sourcing event. Applying the same contract template to a purchasing document will not copy the Negotiation type deliverables. Variables Oracle Procurement Contracts supports the following types of variables: • System • User-defined • Deliverable Implementation and Other Considerations    5-9
  • 68. Note: Oracle Procurement Contracts does not support the Table type variable. Implementation considerations for setting up contract variables include: • Use the Value Set functionality to define values for the user-defined variables. Other considerations for using contract variables include: • When using the Display Clauses feature in the Variables library, the clauses listed are specific to the organization that you are currently in. • You cannot delete a variable if another procurement organization has used this variable in a clause. So if the system does not let you delete a variable that is not used in any clauses in your organization, it is possible that another procurement organization is using the variable in a clause. • To view the definition of a system variable used in Oracle Procurement Contracts, you must click the Variable Name link in the Variables library. You cannot alter the definition of system variables. For the seeded system variables, see the System Variables, page D-7 section. Negotiate Contracts Process Overview The contract negotiation process includes the stages of creating a sourcing document with contract terms, publishing it, gathering responses, and finally making an award. Online Negotiation for Oracle Sourcing Documents To enable online negotiation of procurement contracts, Oracle Sourcing must be implemented. In addition to the standard negotiation processes in Oracle Sourcing, Oracle Procurement Contracts enables buyers and suppliers to negotiate on the contractual terms during a sourcing event and to capture additional information through supplier-updatable contractual variables. Using Oracle Procurement Contracts, buyers and suppliers can manage deliverables that represent obligations arising from the negotiation process. They indicate the success or failure of the fulfillment of the deliverable by changing the status of the deliverable for the negotiation. For example, a buyer may require a sourcing supplier to give a project proposal presentation within a month of bid acknowledgement, and can define this requirement 5-10    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 69. as a negotiation deliverable. The supplier performs the presentation, and updates the deliverable status online. Note: After buyers award business to a supplier, they can create a purchasing document from a sourcing document. All the contract terms are copied over except those that are specific to the sourcing document. For more information on general negotiation operations in Oracle Sourcing, see the Oracle Sourcing online Help. Offline Negotiation for Oracle Purchasing Documents In an offline business scenario, a buyer creates a draft contract in Oracle Purchasing. The buyer and supplier then conduct negotiations offline. When both parties agree on the contractual details, including the contract terms, the buyer submits the contract for internal approval. Implementation and Other Considerations This section covers the implementation and other considerations for: • Authoring Negotiation Document, page 5-11 • Contract Terms Flow Down, page 5-12 • Contract Terms Validation in Oracle Sourcing, page 5-13 • Online Contract Negotiations, page 5-13 • Sourcing Templates Versus Contract Templates, page 5-13 • Approval Workflow, page 5-13 Authoring Negotiation Documents Implementation considerations for setting up the process of authoring negotiation with contract terms are: • Contract Document Attachment: • Oracle Purchasing supports the use of contract document attachments on a purchasing document, but Oracle Sourcing does not. To include additional contract-related documents in an online negotiation, you can add them to a sourcing document as a regular document attachment. • If you need to include these documents in the purchasing document, when the negotiation is awarded, you must ensure that the purchase order is not submitted for approval automatically from Oracle Sourcing. To do this, users of Implementation and Other Considerations    5-11
  • 70. Oracle Sourcing should make sure the Initiate Approval check box is not selected during the award process. As a result, the created purchasing document will have a status of Incomplete and is not automatically routed for approval and signatures. At this point, you can upload these attachments and classify them as Contract category in the Manage Contract Document page. • Once the purchasing document is approved, you cannot attach any documents with the Contract category unless you revise the purchasing document. Note: The supplier-updatable variables is a feature available only in Oracle Sourcing. So even if a purchasing document has such a variable, suppliers cannot update it from the Oracle iSupplier Portal application. Other factors to consider when implementing the process of authoring negotiation with contract terms are: • Flow down of Provision and Negotiation Deliverables: • You can define contractual, negotiation, and internal purchasing types of deliverables to a sourcing document. Only negotiation deliverables can be acted upon during the negotiation process. • Supplier Updatable Variables: • In the Contract Terms Library you can define a variable and enable it for supplier updates. On sourcing documents, such as a bid, bidders are asked to propose a value for these variables, which may be later used for analysis during the award process. The values provided by the bidder in the awarded bid are automatically carried over to the purchasing document. • You can use the user-defined variables feature to request additional information, such as a DUNS Number, from a supplier that is then printed in the final contract. Contract Terms Flow Down If you create a contract template and associate it with document types used only in Oracle Sourcing, it will still be used on a purchasing document created after awarding a sourcing document. You will not, however, be able to reapply the template to the purchasing document. When you change the contract template, the current template will not be available in the search results. Also, you cannot apply this template to a new purchasing document. 5-12    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 71. Contract Terms Validation in Oracle Sourcing When you publish or submit a sourcing document with contract terms for approval, the system validates the contact terms for errors and inconsistencies. The system only displays errors related to contract terms, but not the warning messages. Before publishing a contract or submitting it for approval, you should always validate the contract terms for inconsistencies using the Validate option in the Contract Terms page. For the seeded errors and warning messages, see List of QA Validations, page A-1. Online Contract Negotiation As an integral part of the Oracle Sourcing process, Oracle Procurement Contracts enables you to leverage many of Oracle Sourcing's capabilities for the purpose of contract terms negotiation. Supported features include: • Multi-round: You can use the multi-round functionality for negotiating contractual terms. In the first round, you can invite multiple suppliers. Then, another round can be initiated for detailed contractual negotiations with the selected supplier. • Online Discussion: You can use the online discussion feature in Oracle Sourcing to negotiate the detailed contract terms interactively. • Amendments: Sourcing suppliers can request changes in contract terms. A sourcing buyer can review the request and create amendments to the sourcing document if needed. Sourcing Template Versus Contract Templates Oracle Sourcing provides the Sourcing Template feature to ease the process of authoring sourcing documents. These templates include attributes, lines, supplier details, and so forth. With Oracle Procurement Contracts, you can also apply a contract template to a sourcing document. Contract templates are not part of the sourcing template. You can apply a contract template and a sourcing template separately to a sourcing document. Approval Workflow Some sourcing documents with contract terms may require special approvals. You can achieve this by using the various seeded workflow functions, such as "STANDARDCONTRACT", which checks for the existence of contract terms in a document. You can customize the workflow to submit the document to different approvers, based on whether the document contains non-standard clauses or other criteria that is appropriate to your business. For details on seeded workflow functions in sourcing approval workflow, see Approval Workflows, page B-1. Implementation and Other Considerations    5-13
  • 72. Author Contracts Process Overview Contract authoring is the process of adding contract terms to a purchasing or sourcing document. In order to add contract terms, users of Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing must first create their business documents. If Oracle Procurement Contracts is installed, users can then add or view contract terms in the following business documents: Document Type Required Application RFI Oracle Sourcing RFQ Oracle Sourcing Auction Oracle Sourcing Response Oracle Sourcing Quote Oracle Sourcing Bid Oracle Sourcing Standard Purchase Order Oracle Purchasing Blanket Purchase Agreement Oracle Purchasing Contract Purchase Agreement Oracle Purchasing Apply a Contract Template To add contract terms, you must first apply a pre-approved contract template to the business document. Execute Contract Expert Rules Expert enabled contract templates may have rules associated with them. Based on your responses to the questionnaire and the commercial terms of the contract, expert includes relevant clauses automatically in the contract. 5-14    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 73. Modify and Add Contract Terms After you have applied the contract template, you can modify the clauses and deliverables that were added from the contract template. You can also add clauses and deliverables specifically for the contract. Manage Contract Document Attachments With Oracle Procurement Contracts you can manage all your contract document attachments specific to a contract. These attachments can be contractual agreements, contract images or any supporting documents for the contract. Validate the Contract You can validate the contract, to check for inconsistencies and errors. Preview the Contract You can preview the contract, by generating and viewing an Adobe PDF version of the complete business document. For more information on creating business documents, see the Oracle Purchasing or Oracle Sourcing online Help. Implementation and Other Considerations This section covers the implementation and other considerations for: • Establish Authoring Roles and Controls, page 5-15 • Author Contracts, page 5-17 • Supplier Authored Contracts, page 5-20 • Master-Child Agreements, page 5-21 • Global Agreements, page 5-22 • Printed Contract Documents, page 5-23 • Cancel Contracts, page 5-24 Establish Authoring Roles and Controls Before using Oracle Procurement Contracts, you must determine the roles and responsibilities of the application users. The responsibility, with the seeded Purchasing Super User menu associated with it, will have full access to Oracle Procurement Contracts features. To restrict any functionality to a certain user, you need to exclude the corresponding security function from the user responsibility. Implementation and Other Considerations    5-15
  • 74. Available function security options include: • No Contract Access: If you want to restrict the access to author or view contract terms to certain users, ensure that the Manage Contract Terms function is excluded from the responsibility provided to these users. • Standard Contracts Authoring: Identify the users who would author standard contracts, but may not have permissions to author non-standard terms or to remove contract terms on a contract. For these users, remove the following functions from their responsibilities: • Allow Non-standard Terms • Override Authoring Controls • Non-standard Contracts Authoring: These are users in your organization with special responsibilities who can negotiate and author non-standard terms. For these users, remove the Override Authoring Controls function from their responsibilities. • Super User Privileges: These are users in your organization with overriding privileges. They are able to override standard privileges, to edit clauses that are text protected, or delete mandatory clauses. Use the menu from the seeded Oracle Procurement Contracts responsibility for these users. For the functions that are available in Oracle Procurement Contracts for user security, see the Seeded Responsibility section of Appendix D, page D-1. The following table displays the differences between a responsibility with full access to Procurement Contracts functionality to another responsibility without any access to Oracle Procurement Contracts features. Full Access to Procurement Contracts No Access to Procurement Contracts PO Entry form: The Terms window displays PO Entry form: The Terms window displays the Contract Terms region. Buttons are the Contract Terms region. Buttons are enabled, varied by the phase of the Authoring disabled and, if applicable, users can view the flow. contract template name. Print capability: The generated purchase order Print capability: The generated purchase order PDF document includes the contract terms PDF document only includes the purchase along with purchase order details. order details. PO Summary form: The With Contract Terms PO Summary form: The With Contract Terms check box is visible and enabled. check box is visible and enabled. Also, users can obtain a list of the purchase orders, open the purchase order, but not view the contract terms. 5-16    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 75. Full Access to Procurement Contracts No Access to Procurement Contracts Copy Function: Users can view the Contract Copy Function: Users can view the Contract Terms copy choices, all radio buttons are Terms copy choices, radio buttons are enabled. enabled. Also, users can copy the purchase order with contract terms to a new purchase order, but cannot view the contract terms on the new document. View Contract Terms: Users can view contract View Contract Terms: From the PO Summary terms from the PO Summary form. form, users cannot view contract terms. The menu option is displayed but disabled. The Contract Terms Library setup navigation The Contract Terms Library setup navigation and Manage Deliverables page is accessible. and Manage Deliverables page is not accessible. Author Contracts To create a contract, you can choose one of the following approaches: • New Contract: To author a contract, you can create a new purchasing document and then apply an appropriate contract template to the document. In the new contract, you can add or modify contract terms that were brought in from the contract template. • Oracle Sourcing: You can set up a sourcing document, with contract terms, to automatically create a purchasing document with contract terms after an award is made. • Copy Purchasing Document: You can create a contract by copying an existing contract. While copying, you have the following options: • Copy the contract terms from the original contract as-is. • Copy the contract terms from the original contract, but choose the latest versions of the clauses from the Contract Terms Library. • Do not copy the contract terms. In this case, you can start in the copied purchasing document by applying a default template or choosing another. • Purchasing Open Interface: You can use the existing Purchasing Open Interface to create purchasing documents. However, contract terms cannot be imported using the open interface. You should always import the purchasing document in the Incomplete status if you intend to apply a contract template subsequently. Implementation and Other Considerations    5-17
  • 76. Finally, when adding standard clauses to a procurement contract, if you perform a keyword search and encounter the error message "You have encountered an unexpected error. Please contact your System Administrator", it is possible that technical issues exist with the text index for clauses. If the text index has not been created, run the concurrent programs -- as detailed in the Using the Keyword Search Feature section -- to resolve the issue. Using Contract Expert The contract template for your business document must be Contract Expert enabled in order to use this feature, except in the following case: • If you have applied a Contract Expert enabled contract template to a business document, and then disabled Contract Expert in the contract template, you can continue to use Contract Expert on the business document, as long as you have not explicitly reapplied the contract template to the business document. Remember the following when you are answering Contract Expert questions on a business document: • Before you submit the business document for approval, you must answer all the mandatory questions. • If you want to edit responses to questions that depended on others, you must edit the lowest-level questions first, then work back up the hierarchy as far as you require. Changing the response to a parent question without first blanking the response to a dependent question will not cause the dependent question to be removed from the list of questions. • You may select a blank answer to a lower-level question to remove it from the list of questions. • If the response for a question is numeric, and you do not provide a value, the system uses 0 as the default value. It is strongly recommended that you provide a value, otherwise Contract Expert may bring in or remove clauses based on the response of 0. Remember to run Contract Expert if you have made changes to the business document. For instance, if you have changed value of Payment Terms in your business document and the change needs to bring in a different clause, you must run contract expert again to bring in the revised set of clauses into the document. If contract expert brings in clauses under a default section and you decide to move the clauses under different sections, remember to remove the empty sections from the document. The system will not do this automatically. Remember, if a clause, brought in by Contract Expert, has been made non-standard or replaced by an alternate, the system will not bring back the original clause the next time Contract Expert is run. However, if you have removed the clause from the document 5-18    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 77. and the clause is still recommended, it will be brought back into the document. If you have Contract Expert rule with a condition that uses the operator 'Not In' for a variable (for example, Payment Terms) and assume the business document does not have any payment terms filled in yet, the system will treat null as a valid value in this condition and execute the rule. Remember this behavior when defining rules with 'Not In'. So, in this case, if you wanted Clause A to be brought into the document if Payment Terms was Not In 'Net 30, Net 45 or Net 60', even though the document has no payment terms defined, Clause A will be brought into the document Using the Contract Deviations Report Deviations are changes to contract terms in a business document that make them different from the standards established by the following: • The contract terms in the contract template associated with the business document. • Contract Expert rules, if they apply to the business document Note: Because deviations are based on contract terms and rules associated with a contract template, the concept of contract term deviations does not apply to business documents whose Contract Source is attached document. Remember, not every change to the business document is reported as a deviation. For instance, if the section name has been modified or the clauses reordered within the document, these are not deviations. Remember, the Contract Approval Abstract is a powerful mechanism to report justifications for the contract deviations. If you report contract deviations in a special layout, you have several options: • You can modify the layout template for the deviations report to incorporate your unique formatting needs. • You can download the system generated deviations report , including the approval abstract, and format it offline and attach this offline document for approval. Remember to use the Category 'Approval Abstract' if you want to attach this document for approval. Only documents attached in the categories 'Contract' and 'Approval Abstract' will be attached to the approval notification. If you plan on using your document attachment as the contract deviations report, do not select the Generate for Approval check box in the document to avoid potentially attaching duplicate and incorrect reports in the approval notification. Impact of Contract Expert on Deviation Reports There are special considerations regarding Contract Expert and the reporting of deviations: Implementation and Other Considerations    5-19
  • 78. If Contract Expert has never been run on the business document, the deviation report will not report any Contract Expert related errors. If you validate the contract terms of the business document, the validation process will report a warning that Contract Expert has not been run. • If Contract Expert has been run on the business document, the deviation report will not report any Contract Expert related errors in the following cases: • Incomplete configuration: You have not provided responses to all the questions. • Invalid configuration: There are system issues with Contract Expert. • In both cases, remember to validate the contract terms of the business document to review the errors in the validation report. If Contract Expert has been run on the business document, and you run the deviation report, the system also runs the Contract Expert process. This evaluates the conditions and determines if the clauses on the document satisfy the conditions. If the results indicate that additional clauses should be included or that some clauses should be excluded, these will individually be reported as deviations. Automatic Application of Contract Templates If you have enabled the automatic application of contract templates for a Purchasing document, that document can be automatically sourced to the appropriate vendor and issued without any buyer intervention with your default contract. The default contract template is applied to all outgoing standard purchase orders, blanket purchase agreements, or contract purchase agreements. Setup Steps: 1. Set the system profile PO: Auto Apply Default Contract Templates to Yes. Note: This can be set at the Site, Application, Responsibility, or User level as is appropriate for your organization. 2. Using the Contract Administrator responsibility create the contract template that you wish to be a default and assign the document type to that contract with Default Template enabled. Supplier Authored Contracts At times you may receive contract documents authored by a supplier or an external party. For example, you purchase a software program and sign a software license agreement with a software vendor. The software vendor authors the contract, documenting the service level agreements that both parties have consented to. If you need to track these supplier-authored contracts, perform the following: 5-20    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 79. 1. · Navigate to the Update Contract Source page. 2. · Set the Authoring Party as Supplier. 3. · Upload the contract document provided by the supplier. Oracle Procurement Contracts supports two types of Contract Source, Attached Document and Structured Terms. In the case of Structured Terms, the contract terms are represented by the sections and clauses included in the contract. Otherwise the contract terms are represented by the primary contract document that is uploaded for the contract. You can utilize the Deliverables feature in either scenario. Collaboration using Microsoft Word Negotiating contract terms is one of the most important activities that contract administrators, library administrators, approvers and users carry out. Editing is needed in the internal phases of the contract lifecycle, when contracts are authored, reviewed and approved, and also in the external phases, when contracts are negotiated and signed. Oracle Procurement Contracts has an in-built word processor to effectively manage authoring and editing. However, to achieve widespread adoption, Oracle Procurement Contracts also supports standard applications and data, especially when collaborating with external parties, who may not always have the ability or the inclination to adopt new technologies proposed by the internal party. Oracle Procurement Contracts supports import of the Microsoft Word document and the synchronization of the changes with the structured contract stored in the system. Modifications to the original contract can be reviewed before changes are accepted. This two-way integration with Microsoft Word streamlines the contract collaboration process involving the buyer, contract administrator, legal and supplier. It also provides a non-intrusive, easy to use, bidirectional and reliable integration solution. Note: For full synchronization with Oracle Procurement Contracts, the Microsoft Word document should be in Microsoft Office 2003 XML format (also known as WordprocessingML). It must have been originally exported from Oracle Procurement Contracts using the Word Export Function. Master-Child Agreements Your organization may have a master service agreement (master contract) with a group of pre-approved suppliers, and later you create separate contracts (child contract) for specific transactions. For example, your company already has negotiated a master service agreement for general insurance and liability clauses with an advertising firm. Your company now wants to negotiate a separate contract for a specific advertising campaign with the same general insurance and liability clauses. In this case, you can design a campaign-specific child contract that references the master contract for its general liability and insurance clauses. Implementation and Other Considerations    5-21
  • 80. To achieve this, you can consider one of the following options: • Capture the master agreement as a global blanket purchase agreement or a contract purchase agreement (global or regular) with the general insurance and liability clause. Subsequently create a standard purchase order to capture the child contract. This standard purchase order should reference the master agreement and should have project-specific contract terms • Model a contract purchase agreement after a master agreement and reference it in a standard purchase agreement, if there are no specific lines in the master agreement. Referencing a master contract in a standard purchase order does not copy the contract terms from the master contract to the standard purchase order. Instead, the document number of the global blanket agreement or the contract purchase agreement is referenced in the standard purchase order. Furthermore, contract terms cannot be associated with planned purchase orders and blanket releases. Therefore, do not use a regular blanket purchase agreement as the master contract, if a child contract will need to have additional contract terms. Global Agreements Contract templates that are applied to a global agreement (for example, blanket purchase agreement or contract purchase agreement) are also effective in the operating unit that references the global agreement. Consider the following business case for an organization with two operating units, OU1 and OU2: • You create a contract template in OU1. • You create a global agreement in OU1 and apply the contract template. • You enable the global agreement for OU2. You can create global agreement in a central procurement organization and apply this contract template. If you enable the global agreement for other organizations, all operating units can utilize the contract terms associated with the global agreement, and you do not need to author them again in these operating units. Since the contract terms are now referenced in multiple operating units, while creating a contract template ensure the terms are legally applicable to all the operating units in which it is referenced directly or indirectly. Miscellaneous Contracts With Contract Repository you can create miscellaneous contracts, such as license agreements, non-disclosure agreements, and merger agreements, which are not specifically related to the purchasing function. You can create purchase agreements for miscellaneous items that are outside the normal purchasing flow, for which full 5-22    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 81. execution capabilities are not required. Add Contract Terms to Existing Contracts Your organization may have critical, high value contracts already is place. You can add contract terms to such contracts and start reaping the benefits provided by Oracle Procurement Contracts such as embedding contract clauses on the contract and managing deliverables. Printed Contract Documents Implementation considerations for printed contract documents include: • Customize Layout Template: Oracle Procurement Contract enables you to generate your purchasing document with contract terms in PDF format. You can customize the layout of the PDF document. Important factors to consider include: • Contract Format: You can create your own format for the contract document. For example, you may want to place the company logo on contract documents. After creating a custom XSL-FO stylesheet, you need to upload it into the XML Publisher template repository using the XML Publisher Administrator responsibility. Currently, Oracle Procurement Contracts only supports layout templates of type XSL-FO. For more information, see the XML Publisher User Guide. For details on how to set up layout template, see Setting Up Layout Templates , page 4-13. • Translation: You can translate the XSL-FO stylesheet to the local language so the content in the PDF file is created in the desired language. • Association: After creating your layout template, you need to associate the layout template to the document type that you need to use it with. Use the Document Types form to associate your layout template to the document type. The layout templates that Oracle Procurement Contracts uses are Document Type Layout and Contract Terms Layout. The Document Type Layout template defines the Cover Page and the Purchasing or Sourcing Document Details. The Contract Terms Layout template defines the Amendment, Terms, and Signature Block. The printed procurement contract consists of the Document Layout followed by the Contract Terms Layout. Both templates should be consistent and created with that knowledge in mind. For more information on seeded layout templates, see Layout Template, page D-1 . You should review your layout requirements for all these components, evaluate the default print layouts, and decide if changes are needed. Other considerations for printed contract documents include: Implementation and Other Considerations    5-23
  • 82. Printed document content: The system generates contract documents in PDF format. A contract document includes the following components: • Cover Page: This page contains the contract effectivity text for new contracts. In case of amendments to a contract, you can have different verbiage in the cover page. It also has the summary of the changes that the submitter enters while submitting the contract for approval using the Approval form. • Purchasing or Sourcing Document Details: This section includes the details on the purchasing or sourcing document, such as supplier address, item, need by date, and ship to location in a tabular structure. • Amendment: This section lists the details of the changes to each clause, section, and deliverable, after a Sourcing or Purchasing document is amended. • Terms: All the clause text and sections as heading, along with the deliverables, are printed in this section. • Signature: This section is for obtaining signatures of the relevant parties involved in the contract. Note: : If you upload a contract document as the representation of the contract that was not generated by Oracle Procurement Contracts, the system will not be able to merge the commercial section and the contract terms section of the Oracle Purchasing PDF document. Review Contract Terms Implementation considerations for printed contract documents include: • Microsoft Word Integration: You can export the section and clauses included by a contract template in a Microsoft Word format. You can send this Microsoft Word Document to you legal user for review. You can perform spell check and track changes utilizing the features provided by Microsoft Word. If the review comments are minimal, you can make those changes to the clauses and retain the structure of the contract terms. Otherwise, you can upload the Microsoft Word document as a representation of the contract. • Contract Deviation Report: Oracle Procurement Contract enables you to review the deviation in the contract terms compared to the standard contract template. You can attach the Contract Deviation Report to the approval notification. Cancel Contracts Purchasing document with contract terms can only be canceled from the Enter PO form 5-24    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 83. and not from the PO Summary form. Approve and Sign Contracts Process Overview Approve Contracts A contract must be approved internally by management, and optionally by legal professionals, before it is sent to the supplier for signing. Depending on the complexity of your contracts, you can route them to different or additional approvers. For example, if some contracts contain non-standard clauses that are specially negotiated, you can route those contracts to legal professionals for additional review and approval. See the Oracle Purchasing online Help for more details. Sign Contracts You must identify contract signatories and establish guidelines for the contract signature process and communicate it across the organization. Oracle Procurement Contracts supports two ways to sign a contract, manually or electronically. In both cases, the supplier's acceptance of the contract is recorded. Electronic Signature: To enable electronic signature, Oracle E-Records must be installed. During the award process in Oracle Sourcing, you choose "Document And Signature" as the acceptance criteria to require the supplier to electronically sign the purchasing document that is auto-created. In Oracle Purchasing, to require electronic signature, you set the acceptance criteria to "Document and Signature" while authoring a contract. After the contract is approved internally, the supplier receives a notification for signature. The supplier signs the contract online. A notification is sent to the buyer, who then signs the contract online. Oracle E-Records keeps the signed contract copies in the evidence store for future reference. Note: When you create an amendment for a signed document, the acceptance criteria is automatically set to "Document and Signature". You must set acceptance criteria to "None" if you do not require the amendments to be signed by the supplier. Digital Signature: You can enable Digital Certificate based signatures for your organization whether a contract is signed by supplier or the buyer. Oracle Procurement Contracts utilizes Oracle Workflow technology to enable this feature. Oracle's digital signature is PKCS7 compliant based on X.509 certificates. You need to obtain the digital certificate from third party certificate provider and upload these certificates to the user's browser and also the Oracle database. See the Oracle Workflow User's Guide for details. Implementation and Other Considerations    5-25
  • 84. Manual Signature: After the contract has been approved internally, the contract document can be e-mailed, or printed and sent to the supplier for manual signature. After the contract has been signed offline, the buyer can record the acceptance of the contract in an Acceptances screen. For more details on accepting contracts, see the Oracle Purchasing User's Guide. Implementation and Other Considerations This section covers the implementation and other considerations for: • Approve Contracts, page 5-26 • Approval Workflow, page 5-27 • Approvals in Oracle Procurement Contracts, page 5-27 • Contract Statuses, page 5-27 Approve Contracts The following factors are important to the approval process and your contract administrators and buyers should be familiar with them: • With Oracle Procurement Contracts you can approve both purchasing documents and legal terms through the existing purchasing approval workflow. As a result, approvers in legal and business groups can approve the document through the same approval process and thus minimize the disputes between the approvers in two groups. When you design or update the PO Approval workflow, you need to include approvers for legal terms. • You should make it a business practice to review all validations, including warnings, to help identify potential issues with the contract data and reduce the number of amendments. • You should also make it a business practice to run the Contract Deviations report and review those change identified. • To upload a contract document attachment in the Contract category, you need to initiate a new revision. You cannot classify a contract document attachment as Contract, if the purchasing document is in the Approved status. • The contract template that is applied in the initial version of a contract cannot be removed or changed after this version is signed and accepted by the supplier and the buyer. • In a new version of a purchasing document, you cannot modify contract documents that were carried over from a previous version. You can only delete them from the current version and upload the modified version. 5-26    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 85. In Oracle Procurement Contracts, buyers and suppliers can sign contracts manually or electronically. Signer identity is authenticated by requiring users to reenter usernames and passwords when signing contracts electronically or using a unique digital certificate (issued by a certification authority). • The system-generated contract PDF is only attached to the document after approval. If the PDF document is not attached after a purchasing document is approved, ensure that the PO Output format in Oracle Purchasing setup is set to PDF and the Approval workflow is functioning properly. Approval Workflow When a contract has a non-standard clause, you may want to route the contract to additional or different reviewers for special approvals. You can achieve this by using the workflow function seeded in the Purchasing Approval workflows. For details on seeded workflow function, refer to the Approval Workflows appendix, page B-1. Approvals in Oracle Procurement Contracts You should identify at which point in the business flow you want to customize your approval workflow and you also want to identify the individuals who would be performing the approval at each point. Given the various touch points described below, consider the nature and extent of changes you would require to your various workflow approval programs. • Approving Clauses: You approve clauses in the Contract Terms Library. • Approving Contract Templates: Standard clauses from the library are used for creating contract templates. You approve templates in the Contract Terms Library. • Approval Before Publishing: A template can be applied to a sourcing document and then you can submit the sourcing document for internal approvals before publishing it to external parties. • Approval During Award: You can submit a sourcing document for internal approvals before you make an award to a supplier. • Approving Purchase Orders: You can submit a purchasing document with contract terms for approval. Contract Statuses With Oracle Procurement Contracts, the existing purchasing document status have additional implications. The table below lists the event in a contract life cycle and related purchasing document status: Implementation and Other Considerations    5-27
  • 86. Event Description Status Buyer has approval authority on the spending Pre-approved amount, but chooses to submit the purchasing document for additional approval. Internal approver rejects the purchasing Rejected document. A purchasing document is approved by the Pre-approved internal approver and is waiting for supplier and buyer signatures. Supplier or buyer rejects the purchasing Rejected document during the signature process. Execute and Monitor Contracts Process Overview A signed document can be executed through the regular shipment and receiving processes supported by Oracle Purchasing. In addition, buyers and suppliers can execute and track additional contractual obligations through the deliverables feature provided by Oracle Procurement Contracts. It is important to note that buyers and suppliers can only manage deliverables that are assigned to them. This section covers the implementation and other considerations for: • Deliverables, page 5-28 • Supplier Contacts, page 5-29 • Search Contract Based On Clause Usage, page 5-29 Deliverables The due date for a deliverable can be set to: • Fixed due date. For example, December 10th, 2005. • Relative Due Date. For example, 10 days after the agreement expires. Deliverable due dates that cannot be resolved are not displayed on the Deliverables page until the event that it refers to actually occurs. For example, the system cannot resolve the due date for a deliverable, if it is set to "10 days after the purchase order is closed" until the purchase order is actually closed. The reason is, the system does not 5-28    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 87. know when the contract will be closed. Users will not have visibility to the deliverables until the purchase order is closed. To avoid the above situation, consider selecting events for which the due dates can be resolved. For example, the "Agreement expires" event for blanket agreement can be resolved based on the expiry date of the agreement. In the case of standard purchase order, you may consider using the event "10 days after purchase order signed" instead of "10 days after purchase order closed." Supplier Contacts During contract authoring, users can create one or more deliverables with a supplier contact associated with it. However, in order for the suppliers to follow through and manage these deliverables, they must have registered with Oracle iSupplier Portal as users of the application. Search Contract Based On Clause Usage To improve future contract negotiations, or to comply with regulatory requirements, contract administrators or legal may need to periodically review and revise their contract standards. Analyzing the contract language used in existing contracts is a critical step in effectively updating existing standards. Oracle Procurement Contracts enables users to search for all contracts where certain clauses are used, or have been modified. The search can be filtered by various criteria like contracts with a specific supplier, contracts above a certain amount, contracts for one or all Operating Units, or contracts authored using a specific template. Information on the number of times a certain clause has been used or modified is also provided as part of the results. Using Oracle Procurement Contracts you can perform the following kinds of search: • Contract Administrators can search for all contracts across multiple organizations that have any clause pertaining to a specific clause type. For example, 'Termination' to identify if any clauses are being created non-standard. • Legal professionals can find all contracts that use a specific clause that needs to be modified due to new regulations. • Contract Administrators and legal professionals can search for keywords and text from Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing and repository contracts. Note: Users can search for versions only if the contract belongs to Oracle Purchasing or the Repository Contracts. Administer Contract Changes Implementation and Other Considerations    5-29
  • 88. Process Overview You can amend a contract, including contract terms, at any time after the contract is signed. An amendment increments the version of the Sourcing or Purchasing document. A contract amendment may be initiated by the buyer or the supplier. Buyers need to review and approve change requests submitted by suppliers. To incorporate changes, buyers need to manually update the contract terms after approving the change request. For details on general amendments in purchasing and sourcing documents, see the Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing online Help. Implementation and Other Considerations This section covers the implementation and other considerations for setting up: • Amendment Cover Pages, page 5-30 • Supporting Documents, page 5-30 • Change Requests, page 5-30 • Printing Amendments, page 5-31 • Amendment Workflow Functions, page 5-31 Amendment Cover Pages With Oracle Procurement Contracts you can create custom layout for the cover page for an amendment document. For detailed instruction on customizing your contract document lay, refer to Setting Up Contract Terms Library. Supporting Documents If you have supporting documents for a contract that are critical, then changes to these documents may need to be governed by formal revision process. A formal revision process may require users to submit the changes for internal approval and supplier signature before the changes become effective. For your reference, changes are displayed in the PO Revision History page. To require a formal revision process, you should categorize the supporting document as a "Contract"' in the contract document attachment. Change Requests After the contract is signed and accepted by both parties, it can be executed. The supplier can request changes to contract terms using Oracle iSupplier Portal. After the buyer has reviewed and accepted the changes requested, the system does not automatically reflect the changes to the contract terms. The buyer need to revise the 5-30    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 89. purchase order and amend the relevant contract terms. Printing Amendments You can make changes to a contract after it is accepted and signed by the supplier and the buyer and it is ready to be executed. Any modification would appear in the Amendment section of the contract PDF file, if the PO: Generate Amendment Documents profile option is set to Yes. Other considerations include: • Amendment Descriptions: When you amend a contract clause or deliverable, you can annotate each amendment by entering text in the Amendment Description field that is specific to that particular amendment. In order to provide the business context and reason for amendments, you should provide an amendment description for all amendments. • Print Text feature: While amending a clause in a contract, you can use the Print Text feature to print the amended clause text in the Amendments section of the printed contract, in addition to the amendment description. Amendment Workflow Functions Any changes made to a signed contract would require approval. Oracle Procurement Contract provides you with additional workflow functions that you can use for routing the contract for special approvals, in case contract terms are amended. For the seeded workflow functions in the sourcing and purchasing approval workflows, see the Approval Workflows appendix, page B-1. Renegotiate and Close Out Contracts Process Overview When a contract nears expiration, you may renegotiate or close out the contract. Using Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing, you can renegotiate the business elements of an existing contract. If Oracle Procurement Contracts is enabled, you can additionally include contract terms during your renegotiation process. During the closeout process, you may require one or more tasks to be performed, such as submitting a contract performance report, or creating a budget versus actual cost analysis. With Oracle Procurement Contracts enabled, you can model these tasks as internal deliverables and track them as part of the contract. For more information on renegotiating and closing out contracts, see the Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing online Help. Implementation and Other Considerations    5-31
  • 90. Implementation and Other Considerations Monitor Expirations You can specify start and end dates on a blanket or a contract purchase agreement. To track the expiration of the contract, you can create an internal deliverable with a due date such as "one month before agreement expires." The person responsible for the deliverable would be notified and can take necessary actions before the contract expires. Note that standard purchase orders do not support start and end effective dates. To support closeout and renewal, you can use the Purchase Order Signed event or a fixed due date event when setting up the deliverables. Contract Renegotiation Contracts that are currently executed may have to be renegotiated after they expire. You can create a sourcing RFQ or a Reverse Auction from a purchasing document, like a blanket purchase agreement. The relevant attributes pertaining to the purchasing document are copied over to the newly created sourcing document. With Oracle Procurement Contracts, the contract terms associated with the purchasing document are copied over to the sourcing document as well. 5-32    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 91. 6 Setting Up Contract Terms Library This chapter covers the following topics: • Contract Terms Library • Managing Standard Clauses • Creating Standard Clauses • Defining Related Clauses • Assigning Clauses to Folders • Approving Clauses • Managing Clauses Across Organizations • Searching for Clauses • Contract Clause Analysis Report • Managing Changes to Standard Clauses • Importing Clauses • Managing Contract Templates • Creating Contract Templates • Adding Sections and Clauses • Creating Contract Template Deliverables • Validating Templates • Preview Templates • Approving Templates • Searching for Templates • Managing Changes to Contract Templates • Defining Global Templates • Managing Variables Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-1
  • 92. Managing Sections • Managing Folders Contract Terms Library Contract terms Library is the central library of all pre-approved clauses and contract templates that can be used to create contracts across the enterprise. The library gives the legal department and business organizations a powerful tool to create reusable clauses. Clauses can be grouped into sections and stored as reusable contract templates to codify best practices. Templates provide a framework for rapid assembly and creation of contracts. These capabilities provide the foundations for contract process standardization controls across the enterprise. Another key feature of the Contracts Terms Library is the ability to establish global standards and enforce these standards enterprise-wide. Organizations can manage clauses and templates centrally in a global organization. Local organizations can then use or duplicate these clauses and templates and customize them to meet their own specific local requirements. In addition to standard clauses and contract templates, the Contract Terms Library supports the creation and maintenance of a library of folders, sections and variables. Managing Standard Clauses A standard clause is the text that describes the legal or business language used to author a contract. Clauses are drafted based on both business and statutory requirements. Creating Standard Clauses You can create standard clauses in the following ways: • Create a new clause • Duplicate an existing clause Creating a New Clause: 1. Navigate to the Create Clauses page. Navigation: Library > Clauses tab > Create Clause button 2. Enter the following attributes: • Number. This field can be manually entered or automatically generated. To automatically generate the number, see the Setting Up Auto Numbering section. 6-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 93. Clause Title: Enter a title for the clause. The clause title is unique within an organization. • Display Name: Optionally enter the display name for the clause. The display name does not have to be a unique name. Your organization could have alternate names with the same display name. The system uses the Display Name on a printed contract field. If you leave this field blank, the Clause Title is used as the display name. • Intent: Select the intent of the contracts that can use the clause. Select the Buy or Sell option from the list of values. Note: Based on the OKC: Clause Intent profile option setup, you can create clauses for buy, sell, or both intents. If you set the profile option to either Buy or Sell, the system provides read-only access to the Intent field. This profile option also governs other feature in the Contract Terms Library, including contract templates and variables. • Type: Use the Type field to classify the clause according to the business purpose (for example, General or Payment terms). Select a clause type from the list of values. • Default Section: Optionally select the default section from the list of values. You can use sections as heading to format contracts. • Description: Optionally enter a description for the clause. • Status: The system controls this field. During the creation process, the clause is in Draft status. • Version: The system generates the version number. • Start date. Accept the default or change the start date. • End date. Optionally enter an expiration date for the clause. • Provision. Provisions are used in negotiation documents in Oracle Sourcing only. If applicable, select the Provision check box. • Protect text. To prevent modification to the clause text in documents, select the protect Text check box. • Global. To make the clause available to all organizations, select the global check box. This field is only available in the Global operating unit. • Text. Enter the necessary text for the clause. Clause texts can include business Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-3
  • 94. variables. In the text area you can choose one of the following modes: • Rich Text. The Rich Text editor provides special formatting of the text that is driven by business and legal requirements. The Rich Text editor provides a Tool bar and a Text area. • Text. The Text mode provides a plain text area only. If you use the Rich Text mode to enter the clause text and then toggle to the Text mode, the system displays the HTML source for the text you have entered. However, the system prints the clause using the Rich Text features even if you have toggled to the Text mode. • Add Variables. Click Add Variables to search for available variables, The Add Variables page appears. From this page you can search for available variables, then click the Insert icon to add the variable that you want into your text, at the location of the cursor within the text area. In the clause text, variables are displayed as tags in the format [@variable name@]. Note: If you do not use the Rich Text editor to author clause text, the system inserts the variables at the end of the test instead of where the cursor is located. You can use the Cut and Paste operation to move a variable tag, within the clause text to the appropriate location. • Instructions. Optionally enter instructions on how and when to use the clause in a contract template or business document. Users can view these instructions when they add the clause to a contract template or business document. • Allow Include by Reference. Select the check box to replace the clause text with the Reference text when the clause is used in a contract. Optionally enter the following information: • Reference Source. Provide the source of the clause that may not Be printed in full text. • Reference Text. Enter the reference text. The system prints the reference text instead of the clause text, on a printed contact. Note: If you select the Allow Include by Reference check box, the Reference Text field becomes mandatory. 3. To complete your operation, select one of the following buttons: • Submit. To submit the clause for approval, click this button. 6-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 95. Apply and Add Details. Click this button to save your work and move to the Update Clauses page. • Apply. Click Apply to save the clause and close the Create Clauses page. • Cancel. Click Cancel to close the Create Clauses page without saving the clause. Duplicating an Existing Clause: You can use the Duplicate feature to create new clauses form existing ones. The Duplicate feature is available from the Search and View Clauses pages. 1. Navigate to the Search Clauses page. Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab 2. Search and select a clause. For more information , see the searching for Clauses section. 3. Click the Duplicate button. 4. In the New Clause Title field, enter a unique title. 5. Optionally choose to copy folders and related clauses. 6. Click the Save and Continue button. 7. Enter of change the information as describes in the Defining Clauses section. Defining Related Clauses For any given clause, you can define alternate and incompatible clauses. You can use alternate clauses as a substitute for the main clause on a contract. Incompatible clauses cannot be used on the same contract. Note: You can add alternate an incompatible clauses to an approved clause without requiring the creation of a new version. 1. Navigate to the Create Clauses or Update Clauses page. 2. Open the Related Clauses subtab. 3. Click Add Another Row. 4. In the Relationship field, select one of the following options: Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-5
  • 96. Alternate • Incompatible 5. In the Clause Title field, enter the clause title. You can also use the List of Values icon to search and select the clause. 6. Click Save. 7. Click Compare to compare related clauses. Select the two clauses that you want to compare and then click the button. 8. Click Compare with Current to compare the related clause with the current clause. Select only one clause from the list and click the button 9. Click Remove to delete a clause relationship. Assigning Clauses to Folders You can assign clauses to folders from the Update Clause page. Note that you must have previously defined the folder 1. navigate to the Clauses page. Navigation: contract Terms Library > Clauses tab. 2. Open a clause for update. 3. Open the Clause Folders subtab. 4. Click Add Another Row 5. In the Name field, enter the folder name. You can also click the List of Values icon to search and select the folder name. 6. Click Save or Apply. Approving Clauses To make standard clauses available for use in contracts, they must be approved first. You can • Approve once clause at a time. • Select and submit more than one clause for approval at the same time. • Respond to approval. 6-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 97. Comment on either approval or rejection decision. You must have set up an approver first. Note: The default workflow supports a single approver. However, you can modify the workflow processes to include more approvers and route approvals based in additional business conditions. 1. Navigate to the Clauses page. Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab. 2. Create a new clause or search and open a clause in Draft status. 3. Click Submit to • Change the clause status from Draft to Pending Approval. • Send a workflow notification to the approver. 4. The approver opens the notification and reviews the clause. 5. The approver either approves or rejects the clause. As a result • The clause status is changed to Approved or Rejected. • A workflow notification informs the author of the clause of the decision. Managing Clauses Across Organizations This section discusses how organizations with global operations can manage clauses across multiple organizations. This feature is useful for companies that contract with customers across the globe with operations in different countries and locations. Organizations are identified based on the operating unit assignments in the define Organizations form. In this document, we refer to those operating units that have been set up to use the Contract Terms Library as organizations. A central organization can define global clauses and make them available for use by local organizations. To define global clauses, you need to identify your global organization, usually the corporate headquarters. The designated global organization is responsible for the creation of clauses for business terms that need to be enforced globally. On approval, the clauses are made available to local organizations. A workflow notification is sent to the local organizations that need to review the clause. In the local organizations, library administrators review the clause and decide if it needs to be modified to meet local requirements. If necessary, the clause is modified (localized) and routed for internal approvals. If not, the clause is adopted with no changes or modifications and routed internally for approvals. Alternatively, local Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-7
  • 98. organizations can be set up to automatically adopt all global clauses. Prior to creating global clauses, you must • Set up the OKC: Global Operating Unit profile option. This is a site level profile option to determine the operating unit that can create global clauses and templates. A check box to identify global type clauses and templates becomes available after you set up this profile option. • Create global clauses in the global organization • Approve global clauses to make them available in local organizations. This section covers the following topics: • Adoption of Global Clauses by Local Organizations, page 6-8 • Creating Global Clauses, page 6-9 • Notifying Local Operating Units, page 6-9 • Reviewing Global Clauses for Adoption, page 6-9 • Approving Global Clauses in Local Operating Units, page 6-11 • Viewing Adoption Status, page 6-11 • Adopting Global Clauses in a New Operating Unit, page 6-12 Adoption of Global Clauses by Local Organizations: You can set up your local organizations to adopt global clauses automatically or manually. • Auto adoption of global clauses. This feature provides automatic adoption of global clauses to operating units that do not require a manual review and approval process. For example, a company with more than one operating unit can define global clauses and make them available to all operating units. During the workflow approval for a global clause, when the clause is approved, the system verifies the operating units that are set to adopt clauses automatically. The system automatically adopts the global clause for these operating units with no manual intervention. • Manually adopting or localizing global clauses. For operating units that require a review and approval process, this feature enables them to make the global clauses available for use in their own organization. The operating units can use one of the following: • Adopt Global Clause as-is. Adopt the global clause without changes. The 6-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 99. system records the user name and system date and time of adoption along with the adopting organization. The local operating unit can adopt multiple global clauses at the same time. After adoption and approval of global clauses, the local operating unit can use the clauses to author contracts. • Localize Global Clauses. Localize the global clause by making some changes to the clause or translating it to the language of the local organization. The system creates a copy of the clause in Draft status. During localizations, you can modify the clause text and add or delete variables from the text. You can then submit the local clause for approval. the system records the approver name and data as the adoption details for the clause. Note that if you are not changing the intent of the clause text and only translating it into a local language, you can select the translation Only check box. This is for informational purposes and can be used to report on why a clause was localized. Creating Global Clauses: Use these steps to create a global clause. 1. Create a standard clause. 2. Select the Global check box. This check box is only available in the designated global organization. When a global clause is approved, it remains global on all subsequent versions. However, if an earlier version of a clause is not global, you can make the subsequent versions global. Note: When a global clause is approved, it remains global on all subsequent versions. However, if an earlier version of a clause is not global, you can make the subsequent versions global. Notifying Local Organizations: When a global clause is approved, the system send a notification to the library administrators, in all local organizations, to consider the clause for adoption. In case a local organization is set to automatically adopt global clauses, a notification is sent to these organizations informing the local administrators that a new global clause has been automatically adopted for their organization. Note that library administrators must be set up. Reviewing for Adoption: As the library administrator in a local organization, you can review and adopt global clauses. 1. Navigate to the Clauses page. Navigation: Contract terms Library > Clauses tab. Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-9
  • 100. 2. Search for Global clauses. For more information, see Searching for Clauses, page 6- 12. Note that: • A global clause that is approved (in the global operating unit) is available for adoption in local operating units. If a global clause is on hold or expired, although the clause is displayed in the search results, local operating units cannot adopt or localize it. • In a local operating unit, the first version of an adopted global clause must be manually assigned to a folder that is created in that operating unit. However, after adoption, the system assigns the subsequent versions of the global clause to the same folder. • Each time that a new version is created and approved for a global clause, that version becomes available for adoption in the local operating units. Each version of a global clause must be adopted individually. 3. In the Adoption Type field, choose available for Adoption Note: For performance reasons, you cannot search for clauses by the Adoption Type alone. In searching for clauses that are available for adoption, you must enter additional search criteria such as Clause Type or Keyword. 4. Click Go to view the list of available clauses. 5. Review every clause on a case-by-case basis and decide whether to adopt the clause as-is or localize it. • If a previous version of a global clause was adopted as-is, you must adopt subsequent versions of the clause in the same manner. You cannot change the adoption type on subsequent versions on a clause. • If the first version of a global clause is localized and the next version is now available for adoption, when you choose to localize the second version, the Localize page displays the text from the localized version. Currently, the system does not provide a comparison of the current localized text and the second version of the global text. To view the text of the second version of the global clause, you must view the clause form the Search page. 6-10    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 101. 6. Click for Adoption to view the full text and clause details. At this point you can: • Adopt the clause as-is. In this case, you only need to submit the clause for local approval. • Localize the clause. When you localize a clause, you can modify the text and check the Translation Only check box to indicate that the changes were for translation purposes. Submit the localized clause for approval on completing the modifications. Note that you can delete a clause that had been localized and is in draft status. This makes the original global clause available again for adoption. Approving Global Clauses in Local Organizations: At the time a global clause is adopted and submitted for local approval, the library administrator receives a workflow notification requesting approval for adoption of the clause. The local administrator can approve or reject the clause. After approval, the global clause (or the modified localized clause) becomes available for use in the local organization. If a clause is rejected, the local organization may choose to continue modifying the clause, based on the rejection comments, or modify the adoption type. For example, a clause that was previously adopted as-is can now be localized. When local organizations adopt a global clause, the system sends a notification to the global organization with details on date and type of adoption. Note: When approving or rejecting a clause or contract template, you can use the Comments section to provide your remarks in the Approval notification. Your comments are visible to the user who has submitted the original approval request. Also, you can send the approval notifications by e-mail. However, this would require additional configuration. For more information on how to set up the e-mail client to receive all notifications, see the Oracle Applications System Administrator's Guide. Viewing Adoption status: Global organizations can monitor when and how global clauses are adopted across local organizations. The Adoption Status report provides an overview of the adoption status across multiple local organization for a given global clause. This report is only available in the global organization and allows the global organization to analyze cases where the global clauses are not adopted in a timely manner. 1. Navigate to the Clauses page. Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-11
  • 102. 2. In the global organization, search for global clauses. For more information, see the Searching for Clauses, page 6-12. 3. Click the clause title to view the clause detail. 4. select the View Adoption Status option from the list. 5. Click Go the View Adoption Status report provides the following information: • Organization Name • Clause Title • Version • Adoption Type (indicates if the global clause was adopted as-is or localized) • Translation Only (indicates if the global clause was only translated to the local language). • Adoption Status (indicates if the clause was approved in the local organization or not). • Adoption Date (the date the clause was adopted. Adopting Global Clauses in a New Organization: For any new organization that is set up to adopt global clauses, Oracle Procurement Contracts provides a concurrent program to adopt all global clauses that were created before the new organization was created. To adopt the global clauses, you must run the Adopt Global Clauses for a New Organization concurrent program. It is not necessary to rerun the program for a given organization more than once, if all the migrated clauses and the new global clauses have been created in the global organization at the time of running the concurrent program. The clause status in the new organization could be one of the following: • Adopted: If the organization is set up to automatically adopt clauses. • Available for Adoption: If the organization is set up to manually adopt clauses Searching for Clauses You can search or browse to find clauses in the Clauses Library. This section covers the following topics 6-12    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 103. Searching for Clauses, page 6-13 • Using the Keyword Search Feature, page 6-14 • Browsing for Clauses, page 6-15 Searching for Clauses: 1. Navigate to the Clauses page. Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab 2. In the Search region, search for clauses by • Operating Unit (mandatory field) • Keyword • Type • Title • Number 3. To access additional search options, click the Show More Search Options link. These options are: • Intent • Status • Start and end dates • Provisions only • Variables used in the clause • Used in templates • Default section • Show all versions check box • Adoption Type (available only in local operating units) To perform your search, you must enter information in the Operating Unit field and one of the following fields: • Number Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-13
  • 104. Title • Keyword • Type • Status • Start Date • End Date • Used in Templates • You cannot perform blind searches or start your search criteria with the wildcard character (%). • If you do not select the Show All Versions check box, the system displays only the latest version of the clauses that match the search criteria. • Description does not work with leading searches. Also, the description returns only those clauses for which the description begins with the search criteria that you enter. For instance, if you enter A% in the Description field, only those clauses for which the description begins with the letter A are returned. 4. Click Go to view the search results. 5. In the Search Result section, select the check box for any clause and click one of the following buttons: • Submit. Submit the clause for approval. • Duplicate. Create a new clause by copying from an existing clause. • Create New Version. Create a new version. • Review for Adoption. This button is available only to local organizations for adopting global clauses. See: Approving Global Clauses in Local Operating Units section, page 6-11. Using the Keyword Search Feature: You can search for clauses in the Contract Terms Library using the Keyword Search feature. The system searches for clauses than contain the text you enter in any of the 6-14    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 105. following fields: • Clause Title • Display Name • Clause Description • Clause Text To perform the keyword search, you must run the following concurrent programs periodically: • Synchronize Clauses Text Index • Optimize Clauses Text Index If you have not run the concurrent programs, the search will not provide accurate results. The frequency for running these programs must be decided on a case-by-case basis. You can schedule the concurrent programs to run together automatically at predefined intervals. Note: You do not need to run the foregoing concurrent programs for each operating unit. Running the program synchronizes the data across the operating units that use the Contract Terms Library. Browsing for a Clause: In addition to search, you can use the Browse feature to search for clauses using folders. 1. Navigate to the Clauses page. Navigation: Library > Clauses tab 2. Click Browse to search through folders for the clause that you want to retrieve. The system displays the list of available folders. 3. To view all clauses assigned to a folder, select the check box for that folder. 4. Optionally, click the clause title to view clause details. 5. If applicable, select the check box for any clause and click and of the following buttons: • Submit. Submit the clause for approval. • Duplicate. Create a new clause by copying from an existing clause. • Create New Version. Create a new version. Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-15
  • 106. Review for Adoption. This button is available only to local organizations for adopting global clauses. • Update. Open the clause for update Contract Clause Analysis Report The Contract Clause Analysis report enables you to search for the contracts where a given set of clauses is used. After entering the search criteria for the clauses and the contracts, the system displays a list of all appearances of the clauses in those contracts. For more information on Contract Clause Analysis report, see the online help topics in Oracle Contracts, Oracle Procurement Contracts, or Oracle Sales Contracts. Managing Changes to Standard Clauses This section covers the following topics • Updating clauses • Versioning clauses • Comparing clauses • Placing clauses on hold • Deleting clauses Updating Clauses: You can modify clauses and their versions subject to certain business rules. When updating a clause, you can: • View and assign alternate clauses • View and assign incompatible clauses • Add clauses to folders • View all versions of the clause • Choose one version and compare with the one that is being updated • Change the status to On Hold (only if the clause is in Approved status) • Submit the clause for approval 6-16    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 107. Delete the clause (only if the clause is in Draft status). Note: A new version is required if: • The clause is inactive • The clause is in Approved status and the attributes that are controlled at the clause version level need to be updates. 1. Navigate to the Clauses page. Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab 2. Search for the clause that you want to update. 3. Verify the clause status: • If the clause is in draft status, all the fields are available for update. • If the clause is in any other status, certain fields are protected and cannot be updated. 4. Click the Update icon. The system opens the clause for update. 5. Make the necessary changes: • Except for the first version of a clause in draft status, you cannot change the clause number, title, and intent. • For clauses with the approved status, you cannot make changes to the following fields: Display Name, Start Date, Provision, and Global check boxes, Clause Text, and Allow Include by Reference. 6. Select one of the following actions: • Create new version (not available for clauses in draft status) • Submit for approval (only available for clauses in draft status) • Put on hold (not available for clauses on draft status) • Delete (only available for clauses in draft status). • Apply • Save Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-17
  • 108. Cancel Versioning Clauses: The Versioning feature enables you to make changes to clauses that are already in use on contracts. You can modify clause details including clause text and description. New versions need to be approved before they can be used in contracts. A new version is required if: • The clause is not in draft status • the clause is approved and the attributes controlled at the clause version level require updating. 1. Navigate to the Clauses page. Navigation: Library > Clauses tab. 2. In the Search region, enter the search criteria for the clause that you want. 3. Click Go. The system displays the search results. 4. Select the check box for the clause. 5. Click Create New Version. Fields from the previous version are copied to the new version. You cannot change clause title, number, and intent, when creating a new version. 6. Select one of the following options: • Apply • Save • Submit • Cancel You can delete the new version of a clause if it is in draft status. Comparing Clauses: You can compare any two versions of a clause. the system provides a redline comparison of the changed made to the clause text. You can choose any two versions of a clause, and then click the Compare button available in the Version History subtab of Updating Clause page. 6-18    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 109. Placing Clauses on Hold: You can place clauses on hold to prevent them from being used in contract templates and contracts. You can also release the hold to make the clause available again. 1. Navigate to the Clauses page. Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab 2. Search for the clause that you want put on hold. 3. Verify the clause status. 4. Click the Update icon or the clause title link. 5. Click Put on Hold 6. Click Yes to confirm. 7. To release the hold, open the clause for update. 8. Click release Hold. The system confirms the release. Deleting Clauses: You can only delete clauses that are in draft or rejected status. 1. Navigate to the Clauses page. Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Clauses tab 2. Search for the clause you want to delete. 3. Verify the clause status. 4. Click the Update icon or the clause title link. 5. Click Delete. The system asks you to confirm your request for deletion. 6. Click Yes. Importing Clauses You use the Clause import feature to import clauses into the Contract Terms Library. In addition to clauses, you can import the following related entities: • Variables • Value sets that are used in variables Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-19
  • 110. Value set values • Clause relationships that establish a clause to be an alternate or incompatible with one or more clauses Clause import can also be used on an ongoing basis to update these entities in the library. You can import clauses and the related entities using the following methods: • Open Interface, page 6-26: For this method, use SQL*Loader, PL/SQL Scripts, or JDBC to load the entities directly into the corresponding interface tables. This process is outside the scope of the Clause import program. The clause import validates the data and imports the content into the library. • XML Data File, page 6-27: Using this method, you import data directly from a source XML file that conforms to the XML schema that is published for import. The clause import validates the XML data and imports the content into the library. The following tables identify and describe the attributes that are imported for each entity: Clauses Attribute Description Clause Number Number that identifies the clause. Two alternatives for a clause could have the same number. Description Description of the clause. Title Clause title or name. Clause Type Type of clause. Display Title Title that is displayed for the clause in the application. Start Date Date from which the clause can be used. End Date Date until which the clause can be used. 6-20    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 111. Attribute Description Date Published Date that uniquely identifies the updates. This date determines whether the update is subsequent to the one already in the clause library and whether a new version of the clause will be created. Clause Text Legal text of the clause. The variables in the clause text should be enclosed within <Var> and <Var/> tags. Intent Business intent of the clause: (B) for Buy and (S) for Sell. Language Language in which the clause is authored. Provision Indicator Indicates whether the clause is a provision. It only applies to clauses with the Buy intent. Include By Reference Indicator Indicates whether the clause should be used by reference in a contract. Reference Source Source from which clause is referenced. Reference Title Title of the clause in the source. Operating Unit Operating unit using the clause. Global Clause Indicator Indicates if the clause is a global clause (all operating units can use them). Standard Indicator Indicates whether the clause is standard or nonstandard. Clause Status Status of the clause. Valid values are Draft, Approved, Pending Approval, and Rejected. Lock Text Indicator Indicates if the clause text can be modified. Action Action that the import process should perform on the clause. Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-21
  • 112. Clause Relationships Attribute Description Clause1 Number Clause number of the first clause. Source Clause1 Title Clause title of the first clause. Clause2 Number Clause number of the second clause. Source Clause2 Title Clause title of the second clause. Relationship Type Relationship type code: • ALTERNATE: Clause1 and Clause2 are alternatives to each other. • INCOMPATIBLE: Clause1 and Clause2 are incompatible with each other. User-Defined Variables Clauses can have variables embedded in the clause text. System variables are already defined in the system and are available for use in clause text. However, user-defined variables must be defined in the system before they can be used in clauses. A variable code uniquely identifies the variable and must be specified as part of the definition. It is recommended that the variable code follow the pattern OKC$<intent>$<code> and must be unique in the system. For example, if the variable is the VAT code of the supplier and is used in buy-side transactions, then the code could look like OKC$B$VATCODE where B stands for buy intent. User-Defined Variables Attribute Description Code Variable code that uniquely identifies the variable. Name Variable name. Description Description of the variable. 6-22    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 113. Attribute Description Data Type Data type of the value of the variable. Valid values are Date, String, and Number. Valueset Code of the valueset used. Intent Intent of the variable: B (Buy) and S (Sell). External User Updatable Indicates whether suppliers can update the variable. • Y, if suppliers provide the value. • N, if suppliers do not provide the value. Note: This attribute is not available for Sales Contracts. Language Language of the variable. Contract Expert Enabled Indicator Indicates whether the variable can be used in Contract Expert. • N: Do not use in Contract Expert. • Y: Enabled for use in Contract Expert. Note that the value set for the variable should have a format type that is character or number and validation type independent. Value Sets Each user-defined variable that is embedded in the clause sources the value from a value set. Value sets can also be defined during the import process. Value sets can either enforce the data types or the actual values that a variable can have. It is recommended that value sets that are defined during the import process should have a name in the format OKC$<SOURCE>$<VALUESETNAME> to distinguish them from other value sets in Oracle Applications. For example, a value set for a variable called Business Type used in a FAR clause can have the name OKC$FAR$BUSINESSTYPE. Each valueset should have the following attributes: Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-23
  • 114. Value Sets Attribute Description Name Name of the value set. Description Description of the value set. Format Type Format of the values that are provided by the value set: • D (Date) • N (Number) • C (Character) Minimum Size of Values Minimum number of characters for each value in the value set. Valid values are 1–38. Maximum Size of Values Maximum number of characters for each value in the value set. Valid values are 1–38. Uppercase Values Allowed Indicator Indicates whether uppercase values are allowed: • Y: Allowed • N: Not Allowed Precision Allowed for Number Types Number of decimal points allowed for number values. Validation Type Validation type for the value set: • N: None • I: Independent Each value set that has validation type of independent should have a list of valid values. 6-24    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 115. Value Set Values Attribute Description Value Actual value Description Description of the value Interface Tables Used for Import: The following tables are used during the import process: Interface Tables Used for Import Table Name Description OKC_ART_INTERFACE_ALL This is the main interface table where the users load data from external systems. OKC_ART_RELS_INTERFACE This is the interface table that stores the relationships between clauses. OKC_VARIABLES_INTERFACE This interface table is used to import variables that are used in clauses. OKC_VALUESETS_INTERFACE This interface table is used to import value sets that are used in variables. OKC_VS_VALUES_INTERFACE This interface table stores the values for the value sets that are used in variables. OKC_ART_INT_ERRORS This table stores the errors that are reported by the run in the validation or import mode. OKC_ART_INT_BATPROCS_ALL This is an internal system table that stores the batch run details. This includes the processing status as well as all the parameters that are used for the run. For detailed information about the preceding tables, see the Oracle eTechnical Reference guide (eTRM). Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-25
  • 116. Clause Import - Open Interface Method: The following tasks constitute the Clause Import With Open Interface procedure: • Preparing and loading data • Importing in validate mode • Reviewing error messages • Correcting errors • Importing data into the library • Approving imported clauses in draft status • Purging interface records Prerequisites • Set up necessary lookup codes, for example, clause types. • Set up all necessary data, for example, variables and sections. • Operating unit setup: • Set up clause approvers for Buy and Sell intent. • Determine whether the AutoNumbering option should be set up for the operating unit. Steps 1. Format the data in a form that is suitable for loading into the interface table. For example, if you are using SQL*Loader to load data into the interface tables, you can choose to use a comma separated data file (CSV) and a control file that describes the data format. 2. Run the Import Clauses concurrent program in validation mode to identify any invalid data or errors. This is recommended but not a mandatory step. You can specify the following parameters for the Import Clauses concurrent program: 6-26    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 117. Concurrent Possible Values Mandat Function Program ory Parameter Batch Name Name of the batch Yes Provide a batch name to easily identify the records that you are importing. Run in Yes / No No Set to Yes if you want to run in Validation validation mode to identify potential Mode errors. Commit Size 1 to 300 Yes Indicates the maximum number of records that the system processes and commits to the database at one time. For example, if you have 1,000 records to be imported and your commit size is set to 100, and an error occurs on the 150th record, the system has already processed the first 100, and the data will not be reprocessed the next time that you run the program. Consult your database administrator for the appropriate value. 3. The Import program generates a report that lists the success and error messages. The errors at this stage would primarily be related to data format or missing required data. Review the report and correct the errors outside the system and prepare the data for a reload. 4. Reload the data into the interface table after correcting the errors. 5. Run the Import Clauses concurrent program in import mode to create or update data in the library. If the program was run previously in the validation mode with no errors, then the import should succeed. The Import program generates a report that lists the success and error messages. Records with errors remain in the interface tables until they are purged or corrected. 6. If clauses are imported in Draft status, they must be approved before they are available for authoring contracts. If they are imported in the pending approval status, the system automatically routes the clauses to approvers for review and approval. 7. Purge the Interface records. See: Purge Interface Records, page 6-30. Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-27
  • 118. Clause Import - XML Data File Method: Prerequisites Set up the following: • Necessary lookup codes, for example, clause types. • Necessary data, for example, variables and sections. • For the operating unit: • Set up clause approvers for Buy and Sell intent. • Determine whether the AutoNumbering option should be set up. • The OKC: Clause Import XML File Location profile option. This specifies the location (file directory) of the XML file. This is mandatory setup for using the XML-based import. To import clauses using XML 1. Data preparation: Format the data to be imported in a form that is suitable for XML import. This involves generating an XML file with the clause data that conforms to the XML schema that was published for import (see the table below for how to access the schema definition file in Oracle XML Publisher). Schema Definition Application XML Schema XML Preview File File Name Clause Import XML Contracts Core OKCXMLIMPDFN.x OKCXMLIMPDFN.x Data Definition sd ml 2. Staging the XML import file: Copy the XML file to the location specified by the OKC: Clause Import XML File Location profile option. 3. Import in the Validate mode: Run the Import Clauses from XML File concurrent program in the Validate mode to identify any invalid data or errors. This is recommended but is not a mandatory step. The program parses the XML file and populates the interface tables. You can specify the following parameters for the concurrent program: 6-28    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 119. Parameter Possible Defa Manda Function Values ult tory XML File Name   No Yes Name of the XML import file. The file must be present in the location that is specified by the profile option OKC: Clause Import XML File Location. Default Any operating No No Identifies the operating unit for Operating Unit unit for which which the Import process needs to contract terms run. Leave it blank if the operating are enabled unit has already been provided for each record in the XML file. This value is used as the default for those records for which the operating unit is not provided. Create as Global Yes/No No No If this parameter is set to Yes, it will Clause (Default) import all clauses as global clauses. Note that the operating unit in which the clauses are imported must be set up as the global operating unit. Default Clause Approved, No No This identifies the status in which to Status Draft, Pending import the clauses. Leave it blank if Approval the records already have a status. This value is used as the default for those records for which the status is not provided. Validate Only Yes/No Yes No Run the Import process in validate mode to identify invalid data or errors. 4. Review the error messages: The import program generates a report that lists the success and error messages. The errors at this stage would primarily be related to data format or missing required data. Review the report and correct the errors outside the system and prepare the data for a reload. 5. Correct the errors: Review the report in the log file and correct errors in the XML data file. 6. Import data into the library: Run the Import Clauses from XML File concurrent program in import mode to create or update data in the library. If the program was Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-29
  • 120. run previously in validation mode with no errors, then the import should go through successfully. The Import program generates a report that lists the success and error messages. 7. Approvals: If clauses are imported in the Draft status, they must be approved before they are available for authoring contracts. If they are imported in the Pending Approval status, the system automatically routes the clauses to approvers for review and approval. 8. Purge the interface records. See: Purge Interface Records, page 6-30. Purge Interface Records: To optimize performance, you should periodically run the Purge Clause Import Interface Table concurrent program. This program purges records in the interface tables for clauses and the other related entities. The following table describes the parameters for the Purge program: Concurrent Program Mandat Purpose Parameter ory Start Date, End Date No Use the Start and End Dates to identify the range of dates for interface records that need to be purged. Process Status No Provide a specific status if you want to purge interface records with that status. The possible values are Error, Success, and Warning. Batch Name No Provide a specific batch name if you want to purge records belonging to that batch only. Note: If you do not specify any parameters, the system displays the following warning message: "No parameters found for this run. This request will delete all the records for your organization in the interface tables." Managing Contract Templates Oracle Contracts enables you to define a standard set of templates to easily default terms for contracts authored by your organization. You can create templates that include both clauses and deliverables. These templates can then be used to default clauses and deliverables on a contract. 6-30    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 121. Not that the Deliverables functionality is currently supported only on contract templates with the Buy intent. 1. Creating Contract Templates To create a contract template, you can: • Create a new contract template • Duplicate from an existing template Creating a New Contract Template: 1. Navigate to the Create Template page 2. Select an operating unit from the list of values. The list of values is based on the security profile that was defined for the responsibility that you are using. For more information, see Setting Up Operating Units, page 4-2 and Setting Up Profile Options, page 4-6. Note: After you save a template, you cannot change its operating unit, even if the template is in Draft status. Make your selection carefully when creating a template from the list of available operating units. 3. Enter a unique name for the template. This template name must be unique within an organization. 4. Select the intent for the template. Normally for procurement it would be Buy. Note: You cannot change the intent on a template even if the template is in draft status if it contains clauses or deliverables or is associated to one of more document types. You must remove these if you want to change the intent. 5. Accept the default start date (system date) or change the date. 6. Optionally, enter a description for the template. 7. When you create a new template, the system sets the template status to draft. Except for the On Hold status, the system controls all statuses on a template. You can manually change the status of a template from Approved to On Hold. 8. Link all contract templates that have the same context and purpose but are in Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-31
  • 122. different languages. To do this, use the Language and Translated from Template fields to specify the language and primary template for the contract template: • The list of values for the Languages field displays all active languages that have been installed in your instance. • The list of values for the Translated from Template field includes all contract templates that are in the same operating unit as the current template, with the same intent but in a different language. • If you select a Translated From template, you also must select a language for the template. • You cannot update the Translated From Template field on a template that is referenced by other translated templates. • You can update the Language and Translated from Template fields after approval without requiring a template revision. After you save the template, the system displays the Translated Templates subtab. If applicable, the subtab displays the following information: Name, Description, Language, Status, and Translated From. 9. Select a layout template from the list of values. The layout template is used by the system to prepare the template for preview. 10. Optionally, enter an instructions for using the template. 11. Optionally, select the Global check box to make the template available for duplication in all operating units. This is applicable only for global operating units. For more information, see the Global Templates section, page 6-47. 12. Select the Contract Expert Enabled check box to make the Contract Expert feature available on a business document to which the template is applied. By selecting the check box: • Contract Expert rules can be assigned to the template. • All existing Contract Expert rules with the Apply to All Templates option selected are assigned to the template automatically. For more information about creating and assigning rules, see the Creating Rules section, page 7-9. • The system displays the Rules subtab (after the user has saved the template). From the Rules subtab, you can view the Contract Expert rules that are applicable to the contract template. Also, you can view the sequence of 6-32    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 123. questions that are used in the rules. 13. Select the Expert Clauses Mandatory check box if you want to make the clauses, brought in by Contract Expert, mandatory on the business documents. You can select the Expert Clauses Mandatory check box only if you first select the Contract Expert Enabled check box. Note: Selecting this box makes all of the Contract Expert clauses mandatory on the contract. You cannot apply this option to only certain clauses. 14. Select a Default Section if the template is enabled for Contract Expert. Contract Expert places the clauses that it selects into the Default section of the template if those clauses do not have a default section assigned to them in the library. Note: If you want to make changes to the Contract Expert fields after a contract template has been approved, see the special considerations that apply when you change Contract Expert fields on contract template revision, page 7-1. 15. In the Document Types region, you can assign the template to one or more business document types. This allows the users to select this template during authoring a contract for this document type. 16. To add a document type, click Add Another Row and enter the following information: • Select the Document Type from the list of values. • Optionally, select the Default Template check box to set the template as a default for all business documents that are authored using that document. type. All contract types for Repository Contracts. For Oracle Sourcing the valid document types are: • RFQ • RFI • Auction For Oracle Purchasing the valid document types are: • Standard Purchase Order Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-33
  • 124. Blanket Purchase Agreement • Contract Purchase Agreement 17. Click Apply and Add Details. 18. Add sections and clauses to the template. See Adding Sections and Clauses, page 6- 36. 19. If Contract Expert is enabled on the contract template, you can click the Rules tab to view the list of rules that are assigned to the template. From the Rules table, you can click a rule link to view the rule details. You can also view the question sequence in the Questions table. You can change the question sequence for the contract template on the Contract Expert tab. For more information, see the Managing Question Sequence section, page 7-18. 20. Add deliverables to the template. See Creating Contract Template Deliverables, page 6-37. 21. From the Actions menu, choose: • Submit. Submit the template for approval. A contract template created with no clauses or deliverables cannot be submitted for approval. • Validate. Run the QA check process to validate that the template is correct. If the validation returns errors, you cannot submit the template for approval until the errors are corrected. • Preview. Preview the contract template to ensure that the format and layout of the template is according to the organization's contract printing standards. • Delete. Delete the contract template. You can only delete templates in draft or rejected status. Consider the following when creating and using contract templates: • Searching for templates: As a convenience, you can perform blind searches on contract templates. If you are not sure about the criteria to search for templates, clicking Go, without entering any criteria, displays all the templates that exist in the system. However, note that Operating Unit is a mandatory search parameter. • Using Language and Translated from Template features: If your company creates contracts in multiple languages, you may want to consider using these features. The Language and Translated from Template fields help you when selecting a contract template that you want to apply to a business document. In addition, if you are 6-34    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 125. using Oracle iStore, the system automatically displays the template in the appropriate language, based on the language preferences setup. • Clauses used in language templates: Clauses do not have languages associated with them. So, if you are creating templates in a specific language, ensure the clauses that you want to add to the template are also in the appropriate language. • Default section for Contract Expert: This section is used to bring in Contracts Expert clauses that are not already assigned to any other section. From an implementation perspective, if you use Contract Expert to bring in the clause, a default section should be assigned to that clause. Also, the list of values, for the default section on the template, is based on the sections that are created in the Contract Terms Library. For example, if you create a new section on the template, you cannot set this section as the default section. If a section that was assigned as the default section is later inactivated, this change will not impact existing contracts. However, when the template is next updated, an appropriate warning is provided to update the default section assignment. • A contract template that is enabled for Contract Expert can also contain standard clauses and sections. As with all contract templates, its constituent clauses and sections are automatically added to a business document when the contract template is applied to the business document. • Clauses are not mandatory for templates enabled for Contract Expert. However, they are mandatory for other templates. Duplicating from an Existing Template: You can create new templates by copying existing templates. Templates that the same organization has created are available to copy, regardless of the template status. The system copies all clauses and deliverables from the original template to the new one. You can also duplicate a global template in the local organization. 1. Navigate to the Contract Templates page. 2. Search for the source template. 3. In the Results section, select the source template. 4. Click Duplicate to open the Duplicate Contract Template page. 5. In the Name field, enter a new name for the template. The system copies the entire content of the source template along with the new section, subsections, layout, and formatting details to the new template. The new template's status is draft. 6. Make other necessary changes to the new template. Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-35
  • 126. 7. Save the template. 8. From the Actions menu, select an action and click Go. Adding Sections and Clauses Use these procedures to add sections and clauses to a template. 1. Navigate to the Create Contract Templates page. 2. Enter the general information for the template. 3. Click Apply and Add Details. 4. Navigate to the Clauses subtab. In the Clauses subtab, you can define the structure and layout of the template consisting of sections, subsections and clauses. This is the component that contains all the contract terms. From the Clauses subtab, you have access to the following options: • Add Sections. You can build a hierarchy of sections and subsections and insert clauses into this hierarchy. You can create a new section or select from a library of sections. If you pick a section from the library, you cannot override the section name. To add clauses, you need to define at least one section on the template. • Add Clauses. To add a clause, select a location for the clause in the hierarchy and click the Add Clause button. You can insert clauses only in the context of a section or subsection. You can search for clauses by browsing through folders, or based on: • Keyword • Number • Clause Type • Title • Default Section • Provisions Only. Select the check box only if you want to search for Provision type clauses (this field is available for templates with the Buy intent only). 5. To make a clause mandatory in the template, select Mandatory. You cannot delete a mandatory clause (except through special privileges) on a contract. 6-36    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 127. 6. If a clause has alternate relationships defined, the Select Alternate icon is enabled. Click Select alternate to view all the alternates for the clause on the template. If you select an alternate clause, it replaces the original clause on the template. 7. After creating the necessary sections and subsections and inserting clauses, you can use the Move button to change the order of clauses and sections in the template. Select the sections or clauses that you want to move and click Move. Select the location in the hierarchy where you want to move the selections to. Then, for sections, use the Location field to indicate whether you want to move before, after or within the selected location. 8. You can apply a numbering scheme to the sections and clauses structure. Use the Renumber button to renumber the terms. Note that if you have used the Move feature to reorganize sections or clauses, or added or removed sections or clauses, the system will not automatically renumber the sections and clauses. You need to use the Renumber feature to reapply the numbering scheme. Creating Contract Template Deliverables Business enter into contractual agreements with their trading partners, and as part of the contractual agreement, will have commitments to fulfill. The commitments on the contracts, besides products and services bought or sold, are classified as deliverables, under the Terms and Conditions of the contract. In addition to the contractual commitments that business need to fulfill, they might define other internal tasks that contribute to the overall execution of the contract. You can define deliverables as part of the contract template creation process. If a contract refers to a contract template, all deliverables associated with that template are copied to the contract. Note: You can only define deliverables for templates with the Buy intent. 1. Navigate to the Create Contract Templates page. 2. In the Deliverable subtab, select Create Deliverable. 3. Enter the Deliverable Name. This is the name of the task being requested. 4. Select the deliverable type. You can define the following type of deliverables: • Contractual Deliverable. A deliverable on a contractual document (for example, Purchase Orders, Blanket Purchase Agreement) • Negotiation Deliverable. A deliverable on a negotiation document (for example, Request for Quote (RFQ), Request for Information (RFI)). Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-37
  • 128. Internal Purchasing Deliverable. Internal Purchasing deliverables are used to track internal schedules and commitments relevant to a contract. They are not part of the contractual terms of a contract and hence do not directly represent a formal commitment between the parties. 5. Select the responsible Party. The responsible party is specified as the party that fulfills the deliverable. 6. Optionally, enter the Description of the task and how to perform it. 7. Optionally, select Buyer Contact. The buyer contact is the person responsible for performing the deliverable if you select the Buyer Organization as the responsible party. In case the supplier company is responsible for performing the deliverable, the buyer contact is responsible to accept the fulfillment of the deliverable. 8. Optionally, select the Requester. This is the name of the person who has requested the deliverable. The requester usually verifies if the deliverable was completed satisfactorily. 9. Optionally, enter any Comments. These comments are visible only to the internal users of the buying organization. 10. Use the Due Date region to define one time or recurring deliverables. A one time deliverable can have a fixed due date relative to a contract lifecycle event on the document. With a relative due date, you can identify a date that is based on a period of time before or after a certain business document event. For example, five days after the contract is signed, or two weeks after the RFQ is published. In this case, you need to specify both the period of time and the event. For deliverables that have a relative due date, the actual due date will be calculated when the contract on which the template is applied is approved or is signed. You are not required to provide a fixed due date for a deliverable on a contact template. However, you are required to provide complete due date information if the deliverable is a one time deliverable with a relative due date, or a recurring deliverable. All events related to business documents with the same intent as the template are available for users to choose while defining a relative due date. Selecting a particular business document event for a due date on a deliverable would also make the deliverable specific to that given business document for execution (for example, five days after the blanket purchase agreement is closed). This deliverable is copied over and executed only on a blanket purchase agreement. If the contract template containing this deliverable is applied on a purchase order document, the deliverable is dropped. If the same contract template is applied on a negotiation, for example, an RFQ which concludes in a blanket purchase agreement award, then the 6-38    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 129. deliverables related to the blanket purchase agreement are retained on the negotiation document and carried forward to the blanket purchase agreement. Deliverables can also be of a recurring nature. For example, a progress report is due every first Monday of the month. You can define a recurring deliverable by selecting the repeating due date type. The repeating deliverable instances are created upon approval or signing of the contract they are on. You can track and update the status of each instance like a one time deliverable. To create a recurring deliverable, you need to enter the following: • Start Date. This is specified through a fixed date or a date relative to a certain event. • Repeating Type. For example: daily, weekly, or monthly. • Frequency. In combination with the repeating Type, this gives the frequency of the repeating deliverable, such as every six weeks, or every three months. • In case of weekly frequency events, the day of the week on which to repeat. • In case of monthly frequency events, the month on which to repeat. Example A report needs to be sent on the fifth day of the month every three months (every quarter) after the purchase agreement is signed. In this case: • The event is the signing of the purchase agreement. • Frequency is monthly. • Interval is 3. • Day of the month is 5. 11. Use the Notifications region to inform the contacts about the progress of deliverables. Notifications are sent during the lifecycle of the deliverable, after the contract has been signed. Note that you can only define recipient for escalation notifications here, all others are sent to contacts on the deliverables. The notifications have a subject, a message body, and buttons to take certain actions, a notes area, and attached documents. Notifications can be sent for a deliverable in the following scenarios: • Prior to Due Date. You can specify how many days, weeks, or months to wend the notification before the due date. Recipient of this notification is the buyer contact and supplier contact. • Status Change. send notifications for any status change of the deliverable. Statuses could be any of the following: completed, submitted, rejected, Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-39
  • 130. canceled, or failed to perform. • Overdue. Send notifications when the due date of the deliverable is passed. • Escalate after Due date. You can specify how many days after the due date to send an escalation notification. You can also specify the recipient of the notification. 12. In the Attachments region, attach any additional documents as part of the deliverable creation that you want your trading partner to see. for example, you might want the supplier to use a standard progress report template for this contract. You must provide a description for the attachment to identify the nature, context, and purpose of the attachment on the deliverable. In addition, you need to specify a name for the attachment. Click Add Attachments, and define your attachment as one of the following types: • File. You can attach a file from your local desktop. • URL. You can specify a URL where the document is available. • Text. You can enter information in the Text field. 13. Click Apply. Validating Templates Prior to submitting a contract template for approvals, you can validate the template to identify potential errors and warnings. In addition, the system automatically runs the validation process when you submit a template for approval. If any error conditions are found, the template is not submitted for approval. You must fix the error conditions and resubmit the template for approval. The table below displays the type of validations that the system performs when you run the validation process. Validation Type Condition Description Inactive Clauses Error This validation checks for clauses in draft, expired, rejected, or on hold status. Templates with clauses in these statuses cannot be submitted for approval. Note that this error is enforced only for those clauses that do not have any approved, previous versions. 6-40    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 131. Validation Type Condition Description Alternate Clauses Warning This validation checks for the presence of two alternate clauses on the same template. Incompatible Clauses Warning This validation checks for the presence of incompatible clauses on a document. Layout Template not Defined Warning This validation checks if the contract template has a layout template assigned to it. Invalid Variable for Warning This validation checks if the system variables Document Type embedded within clauses used in the template are supported for the document types in which the contract template is used. Duplicate Clauses Warning This validation checks if the contract template contains duplicate clauses. You can run the QA process at any stage during the template creation. The system also runs the QA process when a template is submitted for approval. 1. Navigate to the Contract Templates page. Navigation: Library > Contract templates tab 2. Open the template for update. 3. Select the Validate option from the list. 4. Click Go. The system performs the validation and displays the results along with the suggested fixes. 5. Click Printable Page if you want to print the list of validations. 6. If applicable, fix the error conditions and resubmit the template for validation. Preview Templates Oracle Contracts uses the Layout template, assigned to the contract template, to prepare the template for preview. 1. Navigate to the Contract Templates page. Navigation: Library > Contract templates tab Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-41
  • 132. 2. Search for the template that you want to preview. 3. Click Go. The system displays the search results. 4. Select the Update icon for the template. 5. select the Preview option from the Actions list of values. 6. Click Go. The system displays the template in the Portable Document Format (.pdf). Approving Templates You can use a standard workflow process to submit the templates for approval. You need to request approval: • When a new template is created. • After making updates to a rejected template. • When a template revision is created. Approvers can approve or reject the template. When a template is rejected, the system sends a workflow notification to the author of the contract template. The reason for rejection is also included in the workflow notification. The submitter can update the template based on the comments and resubmit the template for approval. 1. Navigate to the Contract Templates page. Navigation: Library > Contract templates tab 2. Open the template for update. 3. Select the Submit option from the Actions list of values. Alternatively, from the search results, query the template and click the Submit button. Searching for Templates To find a template in the Contract Terms Library, choose one of the following options: • Searching for templates • using the Keywork Search feature Searching for Templates: Use these procedures to search for contract templates. 1. Navigate to the contract Templates page. 6-42    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 133. Navigation: Library > Contract templates tab 2. To access the Advanced search options, click the Show More Search Options link. 3. search for the template using the following criteria: • Template Name • Keyword. Keywoard searches on the Template Name, Description, and Instructions fields • Status. Search on Approved, Draft, Rejected, Revision, On Hold, and Pending Approval templates. • Template Intent. Search on Buy, Sell, or All. • Contains Clause. Search for a specific clause that is used in a template. Note that the version of the clause is not considered in this search. If a clause has multiple versions, the system retrieves the templates that use any of those versions. • Used in Document Type. Search on the document type usage for the template. • Template Effectivity. Search for templates based on Start and End dates. • Owning Organization. (only available for local organizations). Search for template used in the local organization or the global organization. Note that the search is set by default to local organization. Also, if the owning organization is set to Global, the only applicable status value is Approved. You cannot search for global templates in other statuses in a local organization. • Default Templates Only. Search for any templates that are used as the default for document types. • Global Only (only available for global organizations). Search for global templates in the global organization. 4. Click Go. The system displays the templates that matched your criteria. Using the Keyword Search Feature: You can search for templates in the Contract Terms Library using the Keyword Search feature. The system searches for templates that contain the text that you enter in any of the following fields: • Template Name • description Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-43
  • 134. Instructions To perform the keyword search, you must run the following concurrent programs periodically: • Synchronize Template Text Index • Optimize Template Text Index If the concurrent programs have not been run, the search will not provide accurate results. Companies must decide on the frequency for running these programs on a case-by-case basis. Managing Changes to Contract Templates Updating Templates: You can update general information about an approved template including the description, instruction, document type, and layout template. However, you must create a revision to update any of the sections, clauses, or deliverables. You can update templates in any of the following statuses: • Draft. The template name, intent, and start date fields can be updated only in the first version of the template in draft status. You can update all other fields and attributes of the template • Approved. To update an approved template for its layout and content, first you need to create a revision. then you can make modifications to the revision, approve it, and replace the original template. • Pending Approval. You cannot update templates in this status. You can also perform the following updates to contract templates: • Place on Hold • Release the Hold • End date 1. Navigate to the Contract Terms page. Navigation: Library > Contract Templates tab. 2. Enter the search criteria for the template. 3. Click Go. The system displays the search results. 4. select the Update icon for the template you want to update. You can perform the 6-44    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 135. following actions while updating a template: • Add, update or delete sections and clauses. • Add, update, or delete deliverables (only available for templates in draft, rejected, and revision statuses) • Submit for approval (only available for templates in draft, rejected, and revision statuses) • Place on hold (not available for templates in draft, rejected, and revision statuses) • Delete (only available for templates in draft, rejected, and revision statuses) • Validate (all statuses) • Create revision (only available for templates in approved status) • Preview Reordering Deliverables: You can change the sequence in which the deliverables are printed. 1. Navigate to the Contract Terms page. Navigation: Library > Contract Templates tab. 2. Enter the search criteria for the template. 3. Open the template for update. 4. Click the Deliverables tab. 5. Click Reorder. The Reorder Deliverables page opens. 6. For each deliverable that you want to re-sequence, click the deliverable and then click the Up or Down arrow. Deliverables are printed in the order that you specified. 7. Click Apply. Creating Template Revisions: You can create revisions to approved contract templates. However, you cannot change the following fields: • Template Name Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-45
  • 136. Intent • Start Date Revisions need to be approved before they can be made available for use in authoring business documents. After a template revision has been approved, it completely replaces the original approved template. Template history of previous approved versions is not currently supported. 1. Navigate to the Contract Terms page. Navigation: Library > Contract Templates tab. 2. Enter the search criteria for the template. 3. Open the template for update. The template must be in approved status. 4. Choose the Create Revision option form the Actions list of values. 5. Click Go. The status of the template changes to revision. 6. Make the necessary changes. 7. Submit the template for approval. Placing Templates on Hold: You can place templates on hold to prevent usage on contracts. You can also release the hold and make templates available again. You can only place templates that are in approved status on hold. 1. Navigate to the Contract Terms page. Navigation: Library > Contract Templates tab. 2. search for the template that you want to place on hold. 3. Click Go. The system displays the search results. 4. Select the Update icon for the template. 5. Choose the Place on Hold option from the Actions list of values. 6. Click Go. Deleting Templates: You can delete templates that are in draft or rejected status 1. Navigate to the Contract Terms page. 6-46    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 137. Navigation: Library > Contract Templates tab. 2. Search for the template that you want to delete. 3. Click Go. The system displays the search results. 4. Select the Update icon for the template. 5. Choose the Delete option from the Actions list of values. 6. Click Go. 7. Click Yes to confirm. Defining Global Templates To define a global template, you need to identify your global organization, usually the corporate headquarters. The designated global organization is responsible to for the creation of templates that local organizations can use. On approval, the global templates are available for local organizations to duplicate. The global templates feature is different from the global clauses. Unlike a global clause, the system does not track adoption of global templates. It is up to the local organizations to determine if they want to duplicate a global template. The system allows a local organization to duplicate the global template subject to the following conditions: • If the global template has clauses that are not global, these clauses are not copied over during copy. • If a local organization has adopted clauses manually, only those clauses that have been adopted and approved in the local organization will be copied over. • If the local organization has localized clauses, the global clauses will be replaced by approved localized clauses during copy. The process of creating and using global templates includes: • Global Operating Unit profile option. Users must set this site level profile option to determine global operating unit. You use the same profile option to create global clauses. • Global check box in the contract template. To create a global template, users must select the Global check box. Once the template is approved, it becomes available in local organizations for copy. • Duplicate Global Templates. Local organizations can search for global templates using the search field Owning Organization and selection the Global radio button. Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-47
  • 138. Note that users can preview the global template first to ensure that the contract terms meet their requirements. Users in local organizations cannot modify or delete global templates. Managing Variables Oracle Contracts supports the use of business variables (tokens) in clause text. During authoring, values from the business document replace the variables. Oracle Contracts supports the following types of variables: • System-defined variables. Represent contract document attributes such as payment terms, customer name, and supplier name. You can embed system variables in the clause text, which will automatically be substituted with values when the clause is used in a contract. • Table variable. Attach Table type variables to clause text to display product and pricing information as part of contract terms. The actual products and prices are sourced from the business document during contract authoring. Note that table variables are currently supported only for Sell intent contracts. Oracle Contracts supports the following seeded table variables: • Lines • Modifiers • Price Lists • Deliverable variables. Attach Deliverable type variables to clause text to display deliverable information as part of contract terms. Note that deliverable variables are currently supported only for Buy intent contracts. Oracle Contracts supports the following seeded deliverable variables: • Supplier Contractual Deliverable • Buyer Contractual Deliverable • Supplier Negotiation Deliverable • All Negotiation Deliverables • User-defined variables. User-defined variables are tokens that the business defines over and above the system variables. Users must provide values for these variables as part of the contract authoring process. Creating Variables: Oracle Contracts provides seeded and user-defined variables: 6-48    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 139. Seeded variables cannot be deleted or modified. Seeded variables include: • System Variables. These variables represent contract document attributes. • Deliverables Variables. These variables capture deliverable information on a contract. • Table Variables. These variables capture structure information such as items and price lists that map to multiple rows. • User-Defined variables are based on the needs of the organization's contractual documents. These variables are replaced with values during contract authoring. In most cases, you can update or delete these variables. As a prerequisite to defining variables, you must define any value sets they use. 1. Navigate to the Create Variable page. Navigation: Library > Variables tab > Create Variable 2. In the Variable Name field, enter the name that you want the system to display in clauses. 3. Optionally, enter a description for the variable. 4. In the Value Set field, choose a value set from the list of values. 5. In the Intent field, choose the intent for the variable. You can choose the Buy or Sell option from the list of values. Only clauses with the same intent can use the variable for embedding. 6. Optionally, select the External Party Updateable check box to allow updates to the variable by external users. Note that currently the system supports this feature only for authoring contracts with the Buy intent. Suppliers can be required to provide values for user-defined variables during the negotiation process. By selecting the External Party Updateable check box, the variables are displayed in the iSupplier Portal for supplier inputs. Suppliers using the iSupplier Portal to respond to purchase orders or blanket agreements cannot update variables in their responses. 7. Click Apply to save the variable. Searching for Variables: You can search for both user-defined and system variables. For performance reasons, you must search on at least on of the following: • Name • Description Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-49
  • 140. Type The system does not support wildcard searches. 1. Navigate to the Variables page. Navigation: Library > Variables tab 2. IN the Variables Search region, you can perform searches on variables by: • name • Description • Type • Intent. 3. Click Go. The system displays the list of variables that match your search criteria. 4. To view a variable, click the Variable Name link. Displaying Clauses Using a Variable: You can obtain a list of clauses that use a specific variable. 1. Navigate to the Variables page. Navigation: Library > Variables tab 2. Search for the variable you want. 3. In the Results section, select the variable's check box. 4. Click Display Clauses to view clauses that use the variable. The system displays all versions of t clause that use the specific variable. Note: Clauses are displayed only for the current organization. Even though the variables can be used across multiple organizations, the users can only view clauses and other details for the organization they are currently in. Managing Changes to Variables: You can only change or delete user-defined variables. Updating User-Defined Variables: You can update user-defined variables. However, you cannot change the value set in a 6-50    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 141. variable that is used in a contract. 1. Navigate to the Variables page. Navigation: Library > Variables tab 2. Search for the variable that you want to update. . 3. Click the Update button to open the variable for update. You cannot update the variable name or intent. Also, once the variable has been used in a clause, you can only update the variable description and select the Disable check box. You must create a new variable if you want to change the value set assigned to a user-defined variable after the variable has been used in a clause 4. Make the necessary changes. 5. Select the Disable check box if you want to prevent further use 6. Click Apply to save the variable. Managing Sections Sections are headings under which you organize contract clauses. The headings provide structure and organization to a printed contract document. You can define sections that can be used in authoring templates and contracts. Previously defined sections are not required for creating contract templates since you can also define template-specific sections when creating a template. Creating Sections: 1. Navigate to the Create section page. Navigation: Library > Sections tab > Create Section button. 2. Enter the following parameters: • Code • Name • Description (optional) • Effective From • Effective To (optional) 3. Click Apply to save the new section and close the Create Section page. Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-51
  • 142. Note: If you end date a section, it will not impact existing contract templates of business documents. However, the inactive section cannot be used to author new contract templates or business documents. Searching for Sections: Use these procedures to search for sections. 1. Navigate to the Sections page. Navigation: Library > Sections tab. 2. Enter your search criteria • Name • Code 3. Click Go. The system displays the sections that match your search criteria. Updating Sections: You cannot update a section name after it has been saved. End dating a section only impacts clauses, contract templates, and contracts authored in the future. The system continues to use the end-dated sections if sections have already been used in a contract template or contract. However, in the case of contract templates in draft status, the system provides an error message when users view the section details from the template. 1. Navigate to the Sections page. Navigation: Library > Sections tab 2. Search for the section that you want to update. 3. Click the Update icon for the section. 4. Make the necessary changes. You can change the Description and the Effective To fields. 5. Click Apply to save your changes and close the page. Note: You must manage Sections using the Create and Update Sections pages in Oracle Contracts. Sections sshould not be created or modified using the Oracle Applications Foundation Lookups 6-52    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 143. module. Managing Folders You can organize clauses under different folders for easier retrieval. After creating folders, you can use the Update Folders feature to organize clauses in different folders. You can assign the same clause to more than one folder. Creating Folders: Folders are unique within an organization. Organizations that use the Contract Terms Library must create their own folders. When reviewing the clauses for adoption, folders that are created in a global organization are not copied over or created in the local organization. 1. Navigate to the Create Folder page. Navigation: Library > Folders > Create Folder 2. Enter a name for the folder. 3. Optionally, enter a description for the folder. 4. Click Save of Apply. Searching for Folders: For performance reasons, you must provide at least a name or description when searching for folders. You cannot use wildcard searches. 1. Navigate to the Folders page. Navigation: Library > Folders tab 2. Enter either a folder name or description. 3. Click Go. The system displays all folders that match your search criteria. Updating Folders: You can update folders by changing the folder name or description, and adding or removing clauses. 1. Navigate to the Folders page. Navigation: Library > Folders tab 2. Search for the folder you wish to update. Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-53
  • 144. 3. In the Result section, click the Update icon for the folder you want to change. Adding Clauses to Folders: You can assign one clause to more than one folder 1. Navigate to the Folders page. Navigation: Library > Folders tab 2. Search for the folder you want to update. 3. In the Result section, click the Update icon for the folder that you want to add clauses to. 4. Click Add Clauses to open the Search Clause page. 5. Enter the search criteria for the clause. Note that you can add clauses of any status to a folder. The system does not maintain references to a specific version of a clause when it is added to a folder. When you browse a folder to select clauses on a contract template or contract, the appropriate version will be selected on the template or the contract. 6. Click Go to view the search results. 7. Select the clause(s) that you want to add. 8. Click Apply to add the clauses to the folder. 9. Click Save or Apply to save your changes. Removing Clauses from Folders: 1. Navigate to the Folders page. Navigation: Library > Folders tab 2. Search for the folder you want to update. 3. In the Result section, click the Update icon for the folder that you want to add clauses to. 4. In the Clauses section, select the checkbox for the clause that you want to remove. 5. Click Remove. 6. Click Save or Apply to save your changes. 6-54    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 145. Deleting Folders: 1. Navigate to the Folders page. Navigation: Library > Folders tab 2. Search for the folder you want to update. 3. In the Result section, click the Delete icon for the folder that you want to add clauses to. 4. Click Yes to confirm. Setting Up Contract Terms Library    6-55
  • 147. 7 Contract Expert Administration This chapter covers the following topics: • Overview • Managing Questions • Creating User Questions • Searching for Questions • Updating Questions • Managing Constants • Creating Constants • Searching for Constants • Updating Constants • Managing Rules • Creating Rules • Searching for Rules • Activating Rules • Disabling Rules • Updating Rules • Managing Question Sequence • Creating Dependencies Between Questions • Using Contract Expert on Business Documents Overview The Contract Expert feature enables organizations to define rules for creating contracts and reporting policy deviations. Contract Expert Administration    7-1
  • 148. Contract Creation Rules: These rules assist users in authoring complex contracts with minimal legal supervision. Using Contract Expert, companies can centrally define and enforce their business policy rules that govern the contract clauses to be included in a contract document. Rules can be applicable to specific templates or applied globally for all contracts that are authored in the organization. After rules are defined, you can invoke Contract Expert while authoring a business document like Sales Agreement, Sales Order, Blanket Purchase Agreement, or Purchase Order. Contract Expert leads you through a contract creation questionnaire and automatically adds required clauses based on the responses that you provided. In addition to the responses to these questions, rules can also be based on the terms that are negotiated on a business document, such as payment or shipment terms, and item category. For example, contracting organizations may require additional clauses in contracts involving hazardous materials, or in contracts for which the supplier or customer is located in a specific foreign country. Contract administrators can choose to remove the clauses that are brought in by Contract Expert or select alternates during negotiation. However, these changes are flagged as deviations during the approval process, ensuring proper scrutiny of all nonstandard terms. • Policy Deviation Rules: These rules can capture and report changes in business terms on business documents as deviations from corporate policy. As a result of negotiations on business documents, organizations may negotiate terms that exceed preapproved company policies and regulatory limits. For example, as a policy, all customers are allowed payment terms of Net 45. However, the contract administrator may agree to payment terms of Net 60 on a specific business document. This deviation should be brought to the attention of contract approvers to ensure that all deviations from corporate standards are approved in accordance with the approval policies. The Policy Deviation Rules feature helps you define all such corporate policies and identify any variations from these policies on contracts. The sections in this chapter include: • Managing Questions, page 7-3 • Managing Constants, page 7-6 • Managing Rules, page 7-8 • Managing Question Sequence, page 7-18 • Creating Dependencies Between Questions, page 7-19 • Using Contract Expert on Business Documents, page 7-20 7-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 149. Managing Questions In Oracle Contracts, you can define questions that drive both clause selection and policy deviation rules. You can also define the response type that is appropriate for different questions. When you author a business document, Contract Expert displays the list of questions for which responses are required and the appropriate set of responses for you to select from. This section covers the following topics: • Creating User Questions, page 7-3 • Searching for Questions, page 7-5 • Updating Questions, page 7-5 Creating User Questions You can create three types of questions, which are distinguished by the type of response: Yes/No, Numeric, or List of Values. You must provide the intent for the question, that is, Buy or Sell. A question name must be unique for a given intent. After you define these question types, questions are available across all operating units that use the Contract Terms Library. Prerequisites If the response type to a question is Numeric, you must set up constants. If the response type to a question is List of Values, you must set up value sets with the following properties: • Format Type = Char • Validation Type = Independent, Translatable Independent, or Table. For more information, see the Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide. Steps To create user questions: 1. Navigate to the Create Questions page. Navigation: Contract Expert > Questions tab > Create Question button Contract Expert Administration    7-3
  • 150. 2. In the Name field, enter a short name for the question. The name must be unique for a given intent and across all operating units. 3. In the Description field, describe the purpose of the question. 4. In the Intent field, select the intent for the question: Buy or Sell. 5. In the Question Prompt field, enter the question that you want to appear at run time for the users to respond to. 6. Use the Disable check box to disable the question to prevent it from being used in a rule. The Disable check box is available only in Update mode. 7. Select a response type from the list of values. The system supports the following response types: • Yes and No: At run time, the response appears as a drop-down list with two values, Yes and No. Select the appropriate response. • Numeric: The response is a numeric value that should be provided at run time. • List of Values: This option provides an enumerated list of values as its response. For example, possible responses to the Contract Type question could include Fixed Price, Cost Plus Pricing, and Services only Pricing. 8. If in the Response Type field you selected the List of Values option, the system displays the Value Set field. Enter a value set or use the Search for Value Set icon to search for and select a value set. Note: You must set up value sets as described in the prerequisites section, page 7-3. For example, if your question checked that a contract type should include the values Fixed Price, Cost Plus Pricing, and Services only Pricing, you would first need to define these three values in a value set. Then, when creating the question, you would need to select Response Type = List of Values, and Value Set = the name of your defined value set. 9. Click Apply to activate and save the question. Note: Contract Expert does not currently support default responses on user questions. An exception, however, is a question with response type Numeric that always defaults to 0 in the business document. You 7-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 151. must change this default value when answering numeric questions. Searching for Questions Use these steps to search for questions. Steps To search for questions: 1. Navigate to the Questions page. Navigation: Contract Expert > Questions tab 2. Enter your search criteria for the question. The following fields are available as search criteria: • Name • Description • Question Prompt • Intent You can also search on the following fields: • Value Set Note: The Value Set search provides only the value sets that have been used in the questions, not all the value sets that were created in the system. • Response Type • Enabled check box 3. Click Go. The system displays the questions that match your search criteria. Updating Questions You can make changes to the existing questions. However, you cannot update Name, Intent, Response Type, and Value Set if the question is used in a rule. You can update Contract Expert Administration    7-5
  • 152. Description and Question Prompt even if the question is used in a rule. For the prompt changes to take effect on a business document, you must run the Contract Expert: Synchronize Templates concurrent program. Steps To update questions: 1. Navigate to the Questions page. Navigation: Contract Expert > Questions tab 2. Search for the question that you want to update. For more information, see the Searching for Questions section, page 7-5. The system displays the questions that match your search criteria. From this page, you can select one of the following options: • Update: To make changes to a question, click the Update icon. The system displays the Update Question page. You can use the Disable check box to prevent the question from being used in a new rule. This will not impact existing rules that use this question. • Delete: A question cannot be deleted if it is used in a rule. To delete a question, click the Delete icon. The system displays the Warning page. Click Yes to confirm. Managing Constants You can define numeric constants in Oracle Contracts. Numeric constants can be used in Contract Expert rules that use numeric conditions. For instance, you may want to define a rule as follows: • Condition: All contracts for which the contract amount is greater than $1,000,000. • Result: Add the Special Payment Terms clause. Define a constant called Contract Amount Threshold. In the constant, provide a value of $1,000,000. Then, when you create the rule, you simply use the Contract Amount Threshold constant instead of entering the amount $1,000,000 on the rule. This way, if the threshold is increased later to $2,000,000, you need to update only the constant definition instead of every rule that uses this condition. This section covers the following topics: • Creating Constants, page 7-7 7-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 153. Searching for Constants, page 7-7 • Updating Constants, page 7-8 Creating Constants You must provide the intent for the constant, that is, Buy or Sell. A constant name must be unique for a given intent. After they are defined, constants are available across all operating units that use the Contract Terms Library. Steps To create constants: 1. Navigate to the Create Constant page. Navigation: Contract Expert > Constants tab > Create Constant button 2. In the Name field, enter a short name for the constant. 3. In the Description field, describe the purpose of the constant. 4. Select the intent for the constant: Buy or Sell. 5. In the Value field, enter a numeric value for the constant. 6. Click Apply to save the constant. Searching for Constants Use these steps to search for constants. Steps To search for constants: 1. Navigate to the Constants page. Navigation: Contract Expert > Constants tab 2. Optionally, enter your search criteria: • Name • Description Contract Expert Administration    7-7
  • 154. Intent Note: You can perform a blind search. You can also enter the single wildcard character % as your search parameter. 3. Click Go. The system displays the constants that match your search criteria. Updating Constants The name and intent of a constant cannot be changed if the constant is used in a rule. Use the following steps to update a constant. Steps To update constants: 1. Navigate to the Constants page. Navigation: Contract Expert > Questions tab 2. Search for the constant that you want to update. For more information, see the Searching for the Constants section, page 7-7. The system displays the constants that match your search criteria. From this page, you can select one of the following options: • Update: To make changes to a constant, click the Update icon. The system displays the Update Constant page. You can make changes to the name, description, intent, and value of the constant if the constant is not used in any rules. If the constant is included in a rule, you can change only its value and description. • Delete: You can delete a constant if it is not used in a rule. To delete a constant, click the Delete icon. The system displays the Warning page. Click Yes to confirm. Managing Rules Contract Expert rules are created based on Buy or Sell intent for a specific organization. These rules can be applicable to all templates of one organization or can be associated with specific templates. This section covers the following topics: • Creating Rules, page 7-9 7-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 155. Searching for Rules, page 7-13 • Activating Rules, page 7-14 • Disabling Rules, page 7-16 • Updating Rules, page 7-17 Creating Rules To define a rule, you can enter multiple values for a single condition. The system displays a search page so that you can select multiple values and add to the rule. Use the following steps to create a rule. Steps To create rules: 1. Navigate to the Create Rule page. Navigation: Contract Terms Library > Contract Expert > Rule tab > Create Rule button 2. Select the operating unit for the rule. 3. Select one of the following rule types: • If you want to set up a rule to bring additional clauses into a business document, select the Clause Selection rule type. • To set up a rule to capture and report changes in business terms on contracts, select the Policy Deviation rule type. For more information about the rule types, see the Contract Expert - Overview section, page 7-1. 4. Enter a unique name for the rule to identify the rule. 5. Enter a description explaining the nature and purpose of the rule. 6. Select the intent for the rule: Buy or Sell. 7. Review the Status field, which is a read-only field. Contract Expert supports the following statuses for a rule: • Draft: When you can create and update a rule, the rule is in the Draft status. • Active (in Progress): When the rule is submitted for activation, the status of the Contract Expert Administration    7-9
  • 156. rule is changed from Draft to Active (in Progress). • Active: The status of the rule is changed to Active when it is available for use in Contract Expert. • Disabled (in Progress): This is the status of the rule while Contract Expert is performing the process of disabling the rule (when the disabled rule is exported to Oracle Configurator). • Disabled: The status of a rule is changed to Disabled when it is no longer available for use in Contract Expert. • Revision: When you update an Active rule, its status is changed to Revision. 8. To add a condition, click the Add Another Row button. 9. Select the Match All or Match Any condition option. If the conditions must all be true to select the results, select the Match All radio button. Select the Match Any radio button if any condition can be true to select the results. 10. In the Type field, select one of the following condition types: • Clause: The Clause type is available only for Clause Creation rules. Use this type if the rule requires a Contract Expert selected clause to be present in the business document. For instance, select the Clause type to create a rule to bring in Clause B if Clause A, which was selected by Contract Expert, is present in the document. • Variable: You can use the Variable type to create Clause Creation and Policy Deviation rules. Use this type for the Clause Creation rules if a system or user-defined variable drives the clause selection on a business document. For instance, bring Clause A if the variable Payment terms = Net 30 is in the document. For Policy Deviation rules, use this type if a system or user-defined variable drives the policy deviation for a business document. For instance, if Contract Amount is less than $1,000,000, then the standard for Payment Terms is Net 30. Or if the non-solicitation remedy is more than $25,000, then the standard for Termination Days is 30 days. • Question: Use this type if a user question should drive the clause selection or policy deviation on business documents. For instance, bring Clause A if the answer to Question B is Yes. 7-10    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 157. Note: You can use both system and user-defined variables to define Contract Expert rules. For more information about Variables, see Managing Variables, page 6-48. 11. Select a name in the Name field: the available options are based on the condition type that you selected in the Type field: • Clause: The Name field is not available for this option. • Variable: The system provides access to a search page for both seeded and user-defined variables. • Question: The system provides access to a search page for questions that are defined in the Contract Expert. 12. Select an operator in the Operator field. Operators provide the logic in defining a condition, for instance, Payment terms IS Net 30. To create a rule, Oracle Contracts supports the following operators: • Logic Condition operators • IS • IS NOT • IN (allows selection of multiple values) • NOT IN (allows selection of multiple values) • Numeric Condition operators: • >=: Greater than or equal to • <=: Less than or equal to • =: Equal to • Not equal to • >: Greater than • <: Less than 13. Depending on the Type and other options, you must select one or more values in either the Value or Update Values field. For example: Contract Expert Administration    7-11
  • 158. For condition Type = Clause, use the Update Values field. • For condition Type = Question and if the response type is "Yes or No" or the question uses a value set of type Independent, use the Value field. • For condition Type = Question with response type of Numeric or List of Values, use the Update Values field. You can click the Show Details link to view the selected values for Question and Variable conditions, and clause name for Clause conditions. Note: If you select multiple values in a condition, the system displays "Multiple values" in the Value field. Click the Show/Hide icon in the Details field to view all the value selections. 14. Click the Remove icon if you want to delete a condition from a rule. 15. Use the Results region to define the results if the defined conditions are met. The Results region is available only for Clause Creation rules. In the Results region, you can select clauses that must be brought in and ask the user additional questions on a business document. 16. In the Results - Clauses region, click the Add Clauses button to add another Result row to the rule. The Results - Clauses Table displays the Clause Title and Description for the clauses that you have chosen. 17. In the Results - Clauses Table, you can access the following: • Show Details: The system provides a hide or show option to display general information about one clause or all the clauses. • Remove icon: You can use the icon to delete a result row from the rule. 18. Use the Question Table of the Results region to select one or more additional questions that should be asked at run time if the conditions are met. Note: This is one of the steps that is required to set up dependencies between questions. For more details, see Creating Dependencies Between Questions, page 7-7. The Question table includes: • Question: You can select from the list of questions that are already defined during Contract Expert setup. 7-12    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 159. Question Prompt: The system displays the question prompt details from the library. • Delete icon: You can delete a question row from the rule. • Add Questions button: Click this button if you want to add another question to the result row of the rule. 19. Use the Contract Template Assignments region to assign the rule to one, many, or all contract templates. You can assign contract templates in Draft or Approved status to a rule. Only contract templates that are Contract Expert-enabled and belong to the same intent as the rule will be available to be assigned to the rule. Note: Even though you can assign templates in any status to a rule, because only approved templates can be used to author business documents, the rules are effective only when applied to approved templates. • To assign a rule to all contract templates in an organization, select the Apply to All Templates check box. • To select and assign one or more contract templates, click the Add Template button. 20. Select one of the following options: • Cancel: The system closes the Create Rule page without saving any changes. • Save: The system validates the rule but does not close the page. If the rule fails validation, the system displays an error message. • Apply: The system validates the rule and displays the Rules Summary page. If the rule fails validation, the system displays an error message. • Apply and Add Another: The system validates the rule that was created and opens a new Create Rule page. If the rule fails validation, the system remains in the page and displays an error message. Searching for Rules Use these steps to search for existing rules. Steps To search for rules: Contract Expert Administration    7-13
  • 160. 1. Navigate to the Rule page. Navigation: Contract Expert > Rules tab 2. In the Search region, search for rules by: • Operating Unit (mandatory field) • Name • Intent • Status • Contains Clause (search for a rule that uses a specific clause) This option searches only for clauses that are currently used in rules. • Contains Variable (search for a rule that uses a specific variable) The list of values displays only those variables that have been used on rules. • Contains Question (search for a rule that uses a specific question) The list of values displays only those questions that have been used on rules. • Assigned to Template (search for a rule that is assigned to a contract template) The list of values displays only the templates that are Contract Expert-enabled. 3. Click Go. The system displays the rules that match your search criteria. Activating Rules You can activate draft rules and make them available for use in Contract Expert. Prerequisites You must assign at least one contract template to the rule, but the contract template need not be in the Approved status. Steps To activate rules: 1. Navigate to the Rules page. Navigation: Contract Expert > Questions tab 7-14    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 161. 2. Search for the rule that you want to activate. For more information, see Searching for Rules, page 7-13. The system displays the rules that match your search criteria. 3. Click Activate. The Active Rules: Confirmation page appears. This page provides validation information on rules that are eligible to be published and those rules that cannot be published due to validation problems. The validations include the following: • The rule contains invalid clauses (that is, clauses that are not in the Approved status) in conditions or results. • The rule contains questions with invalid value sets. That is, the value set is not valid either because it was set up incorrectly or because a value set has been removed. For details of setting up value sets, see the prerequisites in the Creating User Questions section, page 7-3. • The rule contains no contract template assignments. • The rule contains inactive questions. • Values that are used in rules are invalid. For instance, the values that are used in a value set are no longer valid. 4. If validation errors occur, you cannot complete rule activation. You must first correct the errors, and then restart the Rule Activation process. 5. When the Activate Rules: Confirmation page shows only rules that are ready to be activated, click Finish. This generates the following processes: • The system submits the Contract Expert: Activate Rules concurrent program, and the status of the rule is changed to Active (in Progress). • If the program finishes successfully, the status of the rule changes to Active. • If any system errors are encountered during the activation process, the system stops the concurrent program, and the status of the rule remains Active (in Progress). The rule will be picked up for disabling the next time that you select other rules to be activated. • Alternatively, you can run the Contract Expert: Activate Rules concurrent program manually from the Contract Terms Library Administrator responsibility. Contract Expert Administration    7-15
  • 162. On successful completion of the rule activation process, the system makes the rule available for use in Contract Expert. Note: To improve database performance, run the following Configurator concurrent programs periodically: • Purge Configurator Tables: This program physically removes all logically deleted records in the tables and subschemas of the CZ schema. • Purge to Date Configurator Import Tables: This program deletes data in the CZ_IMP tables, and the corresponding data in the CZ_XFR_RUN_INFOS and CZ_XFR_RUN_RESULTS control tables. The data for the number of days, which is specified in the Input parameter, is retained. For more information, see the Oracle Configurator Implementation Guide. For additional information about improving database performance, see the Oracle Configurator Performance Guide. Disabling Rules You can disable active rules and make them unavailable for use in Contract Expert. Steps To disable rules: 1. Navigate to the Rules page. Navigation: Contract Expert > Rules tab 2. Search for the rule that you want to disable or activate. For more information, see the Searching for Rules section, page 7-13. The system displays the rules that match your search criteria. 3. Click Disable. When you choose to disable a rule: • The system runs the Contract Expert: Disable Rules concurrent program, and the status of the rule is changed to Disabled (in Progress). • If the program finishes successfully, the status of the rule changes to Disabled. • If any system errors are encountered during the disabling process, the system 7-16    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 163. stops the concurrent program, and the status of the rule remains in the Disabled (in Progress). The rule is picked up for disabling the next time that you select other rules to be disabled. • Alternatively, you can run the Contract Expert: Disable Rules concurrent program manually from the Contract Terms Library Administrator responsibility. Updating Rules The steps for updating active rules are: Steps To update rules: 1. Navigate to the Rules page. Navigation: Contract Expert > Rules tab 2. Search for the rule that you want to update. For more information, see the Searching for Rules section, page 7-13. The system displays the rules that match your search criteria. From this page, you can update, duplicate, or delete rules. 3. Update Rules: If you click the Update icon, the system changes the status of the active rule to Revision; if you update a draft rule, the status remains Draft. The system allows updates to the conditions, results, and template assignments. However, you cannot update the following fields: • Operating Unit • Rule Type • Name • Intent • Apply to All Templates 4. Delete Rules: You can delete only rules in the Draft status. 5. Duplicate Rules: You can duplicate rules within your organization. The system creates a new rule. You must provide a new name and description for the rule. The system validates the rule when you click the Save, Apply, or Apply and Add Another button. The contract template assignments are also copied during the Contract Expert Administration    7-17
  • 164. duplicate process Managing Question Sequence You can view the default sequence of questions that are used in a contract template and update the ordering sequence. The sequence controls the order in which the questions are displayed during document authoring. Use the following steps to view and reorder the sequence of questions. Steps: To manage question sequence: 1. Navigate to the Rules page. Navigation: Contract Expert > Rules tab 2. To view or reorder the question sequence, select a contract template to use to view or update the sequence and then click the View Question Sequence button to open the View Question Sequence page. 3. Use the Contract Template field to search for and select a template. The system displays the default sequence of questions for the selected template. In the Questions area of the View Question Sequence page, the column Displayed During Authoring, when selected, indicates the availability of questions during document authoring. The questions that are not selected belong to inactive rules. To enable these questions, you must activate the rules. 4. To change the question sequence, click the Reorder button. The system displays the Reorder Question page. To indicate a dependant question, the system shows a character (-) next to the question. Organize the dependent questions in the desired order within the main question. 5. Use the Up and Down arrows to change the question sequence. Note: During authoring, a dependent, lower-level question appears only if a higher-level question is answered. If the dependent question is not properly organized under the higher-level question, the dependent question appears out of sequence in the questionnaire during document authoring. For more information about question dependencies, see Creating Dependencies Between Questions, page 7-19. 6. Click Apply to save and close the page. 7. Run the Contract Expert: Synchronize Templates concurrent program to publish the 7-18    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 165. updates to question sequence. You must run this concurrent program manually to enable the changes at run time for document authoring. The concurrent program can finish with either of two statuses: • Completed/Normal • Completed/Error: If the program fails due to system errors, a notification is sent to the Contract Expert Administrator. Creating Dependencies Between Questions This section describes how to set up independent and dependent questions for a Contract Expert session. Overview When you use Contract Expert, in the process of authoring a business document, you typically are asked a series of questions. Your answers to the first-level questions may cause further questions to appear in the Contract Expert session. These extra questions are dependent questions. In turn, answering these dependent questions can cause lower-level dependent questions to appear, up to a maximum of five levels. Ultimately, the objective of the questions is to specify which clauses are to be added to the business document. Setting Up Independent Questions The following describes the general principle of defining a first-level, or independent, question in a rule: • In the Conditions region, specify a Question type condition. • In the Results region, specify one or more clauses, but no additional questions. • Associate the rule with a Contract Expert-enabled contract template. When you answer the question in a Contract Expert session during contract authoring, Contract Expert may add the clauses that are specified in the rule results, but no further questions will appear. Setting Up Dependent Questions You can set up to five levels of dependency for questions. The method of setting up dependent questions is illustrated in the following diagram that shows the simplest case of dependent question setup. Contract Expert Administration    7-19
  • 166. The following are the general principles that are involved in the setup of all the elements to produce a dependent question: • Create the questions first. • Create the rules. Which rule is created first does not matter. • Add the questions to the rules, as shown in the diagram. • Associate both rules with a Contract Expert-enabled contract template. Note: If Rule R2 is the only rule that is associated with a contract template, then Q2 becomes an independent (that is, first-level) question in a Contract Expert session for any business document that uses that contract template. Using Contract Expert on Business Documents You can use the Contract Expert functionality to author contract terms and conditions based on the corporate standards and policies. Observe the following guidelines when using Contract Expert: • Start with a standard contract template that may contain some standard clauses. • Use Contract Expert on the business document to bring in additional clauses, based 7-20    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 167. on criteria including items, item categories, payment terms, and other business terms in the document. • You may need to provide additional responses in Contract Expert to drive further clause selection. • All of the Contract Expert-recommended clauses are brought into the business document and organized under appropriate sections. • You can periodically run Contract Expert on the business document to ensure that the document contains all the appropriate clauses based on the latest set of business rules. For more information about using Contract Expert on business documents, see the online help topics in Oracle Contracts, Oracle Procurement Contracts, and Oracle Sales Contracts. Contract Expert Administration    7-21
  • 169. A QA Validations This appendix covers the following topics: • Validations - Overview • Contract Templates Validations • Contract Expert Validations • Business Documents Validations • Repository Validations Validations - Overview This appendix lists all validations that are provided by the system during validation of contract templates and business documents. Contract Templates Validations The following table lists all errors and warnings that the system uses as part of the validation process for Contract Templates. Validation Type Condition Description Alternate Clauses Warning Checks for the presence of alternate clauses on the document. Clause Default Section Error Checks whether the default section of the draft clause is valid. QA Validations    A-1
  • 170. Validation Type Condition Description Clause Inactive Variable Error Checks whether the draft clause contains an inactive variable. Clause Invalid Status Change Error Checks whether the clause is being changed to an invalid status. Clause Type Error Checks whether the clause type of the draft clause is valid. Clause Variable Invalid Value Error Checks whether the draft Set clause contains a user-defined variable with an inactive value set. Contract Expert Template Not Warning Checks whether a template is Exported not exported for Contract Expert. Contract Expert Template Not Warning Checks whether a template is Published not published for Contract Expert. Duplicate Clauses Warning Checks the document for presence of repeated clauses. Empty Section Warning Checks for the presence of sections with no clauses. Inactive Clauses Error This checks for the presence of invalid clauses in the document. Incompatible Clauses Warning Checks for the presence of incompatible clauses on a document. Invalid Default Section in Warning This checks for the presence Template of a valid default section in the Contract Expert area. A-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 171. Validation Type Condition Description Invalid Variable for Warning Checks for variables without Document Type any document type association. Layout Template Not Defined Warning Checks whether a stylesheet has been defined on a template. Template Rules That Are Not Warning Checks whether any rules are Active attached to templates that are not active. Template With No Active Warning Checks whether the template Rules has no Active rules attached. Translated Template Has Warning Checks whether the parent Been Revised template has been revised. Translated Template is Warning Checks whether the parent Invalid template is expired or on hold. Contract Expert Validations The following table lists all errors and warnings that the system uses as part of the validation process for Contract Expert rules. Validation Type Condition Description Expired Clause Error Checks for any expired clause that is used in the rule. Invalid Clause Error Checks for any On Hold clause that is used in the rule. Draft Clause Error Checks for any Draft clause that is used in the rule. QA Validations    A-3
  • 172. Validation Type Condition Description Circular Dependency Error Checks for questions with circular dependencies on other rules. Invalid Question Valueset Error Checks for an invalid valueset Query query in a question that is used on a rule. Invalid Variable Valueset Error Checks for an invalid valueset Query query in a variable that is used on a rule. Missing Valueset Value in Error Checks for any missing Question valueset values for a question that is used in a rule. Missing Valueset Value in Error Checks for missing valueset Variable values for a variable that is used in a rule. Invalid Valueset in Question Error Checks for deleted valueset for a question that is used in a rule. Invalid Valueset in Variable Error Checks for deleted valueset for a variable that is used in a rule. Invalid Question Error Checks for disabled questions in the rule. Invalid Default Section Warning Checks for the effectivity of the default section that is associated with the template. Missing Template Association Error Checks for missing template associations in non-organization-wide rules. Invalid Procedure in Variable Error Checks for invalid procedure in the variable that is used in a rule. A-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 173. Validation Type Condition Description Invalid Procedure Name in Error Checks for incorrect Variable procedure name format for user-defined variables. The correct format is: <schema name>.<package name>.<procedure name> Invalid or Missing Procedure Warning Checks for invalid procedure in a new user-defined variable. Business Documents Validations The following table lists errors and warnings that are used in the application, during authoring, as part of the validation process for contract documents. Note: The Error and Warning conditions may have been defined differently based on the individual application. Refer to the relevant documentation within Procurement Contracts and Sales Contracts for the exact condition that is used in the relevant applications. Validation Type Condition Description Alternate Clauses Warning Checks for the presence of alternate clauses on the document. No Clause Amendment Warning Checks for the presence of Description amended clauses without amendment descriptions. No Clauses Exist Warning Checks whether any clause exists on the document. Inactive Clauses Warning Checks for the presence of inactive clauses in the document. QA Validations    A-5
  • 174. Validation Type Condition Description Check Contract Warning Checks whether you have Administrator defined a contract administrator for the document. Duplicate Clauses Warning Checks the document for the presence of repeated clauses. Empty Section Warning Checks for the presence of sections with no clauses. Contract Expert not Run on Warning Checks whether Contract Document Expert has been run on a document. Unresolved External Warning Checks for the presence of Variables external variables without values. Incompatible Clauses Warning Checks for the presence of incompatible clauses on a document. Incomplete Contract Expert Warning Checks for an incomplete Configuration Contract Expert configuration based on current document attribute values. Unresolved Internal Variable Warning Checks the document for the presence of internal variables without values. Invalid Contract Expert Setup Warning Checks for an invalid Contract Expert configuration based on the current document attribute values. Old Version of Clause Used Warning Checks the document for older versions of a clause from the library. Contract Locked Warning Checks whether the contract has been locked. A-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 175. Validation Type Condition Description New Contract Expert Clause Warning Checks whether Contract Expert returns a clause that is not in the Contract Expert configuration that is currently in the document. Not Required Contract Expert Warning Checks for Contract Expert Clause clauses in the document that are no longer required. Primary Contract Document Warning Checks whether a primary not Found contract document is uploaded when the Contract Source is set to Attached Document. No Section Amend Warning Checks whether the Description amendment description is missing for a section-related change during amendment of a document. Inactive Template Warning Checks for an inactive contract terms template when it is used to create business document terms and conditions. Unassigned Clause Warning Checks for clauses that are not assigned to any section. Unresolved System Variable Warning Checks for the system variables without any values. Invalid Variable for Warning Checks for the variables Document Type without any document type association. Repository Validations The following table lists the validation codes for Repository. QA Validations    A-7
  • 176. Validation Type Condition Description Validate Effective Date Error Checks whether the contract has a valid effective date. Validate External Party Warning Checks whether the contract has an external party. Contract Type Active Warning This checks whether the contract has a valid contract type. Contact Role Active Warning Checks the contract for the presence of invalid contract roles. Risk Active Warning Checks whether the contract was assigned an invalid risk. External Party Active Warning Checks for the presence of invalid external parties in a contract. Contact Active Warning Checks for the presence of invalid contacts in a contract. A-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 177. B Workflows This appendix covers the following topics: • Workflows - Overview • Approval Workflows Workflows - Overview The following tables list the new workflows for Contract Terms Library, Repository, and Deliverables. Approval Workflows The following table lists the Oracle Purchasing approval workflow functions that you can utilize for routing the purchasing document for special approvals based on contract terms. Workflows    B-1
  • 178. Condition Function Name Mode Parameter Name Return Value Checked Standard IS_STANDARD_ Update p_deviation_from_s • NO_CHANGE: Contracts CONTRACT tandard No change from Contract template. • ARTICLES_CH ANGED: Only clauses changed from the contract template. • DELIVERABLE S_CHANGED: Only deliverables changed from the contract template. • ALL_CHANGE D: Both clauses and deliverables changed from the contract template. Template IS_CONTRACT_ Update p_templ_expired • Y: Yes Expired TEMPLATE_EX PIRED • N: No B-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 179. Condition Function Name Mode Parameter Name Return Value Checked Clauses Exist IS_CONTRACT_ Update p_article_exists • NONE: No ARTICLES_EXIS Amend clause exists. T • ONLY_STAND ARD: Contains standard clauses only. • NON_STAND ARD: Contains non- standard clauses. Deliverables IS_CONTRACT_ Update p_deliverable_exists • NONE: No Exist DELIVERABLES deliverable _EXIST exists. • CONTRACTU AL: Contains contractual deliverables only. • INTERNAL: Contains internal deliverables only. • ALL: Contains contractual and internal deliverables. Workflows    B-3
  • 180. Condition Function Name Mode Parameter Name Return Value Checked Clauses IS_CONTRACT_ Amend p_article_amended • NONE: No Amended ARTICLES_AM clauses ENDED amended. • ONLY_STAND ARD: Only standard clauses are amended. • NON_STAND ARD: Non-standard clauses are amended Deliverables IS_CONTRACT_ Amend p_deliverable_amen • ALL: All Amended DELIVERABLES ded deliverables are _AMENDED amended. • NONE: No deliverable is amended. • CONTRACTU AL: Only contractual deliverables are amended. • INTERNAL: Only internal deliverables are amended. The following table lists the Oracle Sourcing Approval workflow functions that you can utilize for routing the sourcing document for special approvals based on contract terms. B-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 181. Condition Function Name Mode Parameter Name Return Value Checked Standard STANDARDCO Update p_deviation_from_s • NO_CHANGE: Contracts NTRACT tandard No change from contract template. • ARTICLES_CH ANGED: Only clauses changed from the contract template. • DELIVERABLE S_CHANGED: Only deliverables changed from the contract template. • ALL_CHANGE D: Both clauses and deliverables changed from the Contract template. Template TEMPLATEEXPI Update p_templ_expired • T: True Expired RED • F: False Workflows    B-5
  • 182. Condition Function Name Mode Parameter Name Return Value Checked Clauses Exist ARTICLESEXIST Update p_article_exists • NONE: No Amend clause exists. • ONLY_STAND ARD: Contains standard clauses only. • NON_STAND ARD: Contains non- standard clauses. Deliverables DELIVERABLES Update p_deliverable_exists • NONE: No Exist EXIST deliverable exists. • CONTRACTU AL: Contains contractual deliverables only. • INTERNAL: Contains internal deliverables only. • CONTRACTU AL_AND_INT ERNAL: Contains contractual and internal deliverables. B-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 183. Condition Function Name Mode Parameter Name Return Value Checked Clauses ARTICLESAME Amend p_article_amended • NONE: No Amended NDED clause is amended. • ONLY_STAND ARD: Only standard clauses are amended. • NON_STAND ARD: Non-standard clauses are amended. Workflows    B-7
  • 184. Condition Function Name Mode Parameter Name Return Value Checked Deliverables DELIVERABLES Amend p_deliverable_amen • ALL: All Amended AMND ded deliverables are amended. • NONE: No deliverable is amended. • CONTRACTU AL: Only contractual deliverables are amended. • INTERNAL: Only internal deliverables are amended. • SOURCING: Only sourcing deliverables are amended. • CONTRACTU AL_AND_INT ERNAL: Contractual and internal deliverables are amended. • CONTRACTU AL_AND_SOU RCING: Contractual and sourcing deliverables are amended. • SOURCING_A ND_INTERNA L: Sourcing and internal B-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 185. Condition Function Name Mode Parameter Name Return Value Checked deliverables are amended. Workflows    B-9
  • 187. C Concurrent Programs This appendix covers the following topics: • Contract Terms Library Contract Terms Library The following table lists the new concurrent programs for Contract Terms Library. Concurrent Program Technical Name Description Synchronize Clauses Text ARTSYNCCTX Use this program to Index synchronize the clauses text index and enable searching for clauses using the Clause Keyword field. The keyword searches the clause name, clause display name, clause description, and clause text fields. Optimize Clause Text Index ARTOPTCTX Use this program to optimize the clauses text index for improved performance when users search for clauses using clause keyword. Concurrent Programs    C-1
  • 188. Concurrent Program Technical Name Description Synchronize Contract OKCTMPLSYNCCTX Use this program to Template Text Index synchronize the contract templates text index to search for templates using the template keyword field. The keyword searches the template name and description. Optimize Contract Template OKCTMPLOPTCTX Use this program to optimize Text Index the contract templates text index for improved performance when users search for templates using the template keyword. Adopt Global Clauses for a OKCADPNEWORG Use this program to New Organization automatically adopt approved global clauses for a new local organization. Import Clauses OKCARTIMPORT Use this program to import external clauses into the Clause Library. This program validates data in the open interface table, and imports the valid clauses into the Contract Terms Library. Migrate Standard Clauses to OKCSTDARTMIG Use this program to migrate 11.5.10 standard clauses to multiple organizations. This program is used for upgrades from earlier releases. Purge Clause Import Interface OKCPURARTINF Use this program to purge Table data from the Clause Interface table after the clause import has been completed. C-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 189. Concurrent Program Technical Name Description Overdue Deliverable Notifier OKCOVERDUEDELMGR Use this program to periodically send out notifications or e-mail messages to the concerned parties for all overdue deliverables. Deliverable Due Date Notifier OKCBEFOREDUEDELMGR Use this program to periodically send out reminder notifications or e-mail messages for all deliverables that are about to become due. Deliverable Escalation OKCESCALATEDELMGR Use this program to Notifier periodically send notifications to the escalation assignee for all overdue deliverables. Concurrent Programs    C-3
  • 190. Concurrent Program Technical Name Description Oracle Contracts Purge OKCPURGE Use this program to purge Routines data that is used in the application. Currently, purge of the following data is allowed through this program: • QA Validation Errors: Purges all validation results (errors or warnings) that are generated during contract template or business document approvals. • Standard Deviations Date: Purges all deviations data that is generated when the Contract Deviations report is run (either by the system or by the user) on a business document. • Contracts Workbench: Purges the oldest items in the Recent Contracts bin. C-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 191. D Seeded Data This appendix covers the following topics: • Responsibility • Deliverables • Document Types • Layout Template • Notifications • Procurement Notifications • System Variables • Lookup Codes • Function Security Responsibility The seeded responsibilities are: • Contracts Workbench Administrator • Contracts Workbench User • Contract Terms Library Administrator This responsibility can be used only if the MO: Operating Unit profile option has a value that is assigned either at the site level or for this responsibility. To create new responsibilities for the Contract Terms Library, use the following: • Root Menu: OKC Contracts Application HTML Root Menu • Data Group: Standard Seeded Data    D-1
  • 192. Request Group: Contract Terms Request Group To create new responsibilities for the Contracts Workbench, use the following: • Root Menu: OKC Contract Repository Root Menu • Request Group: Contract Repository Requests (available to the Contracts Workbench Administrator responsibility) Note: Changing the seeded menu structure is not recommended. You must first customize the standard menus, and then create responsibilities. Deliverables The following table displays the seeded deliverables: Name Description All Contractual Deliverables All contractual deliverables. All Negotiation Deliverables All negotiation deliverables. Buyer Contractual Deliverables Contractual deliverables where the buyer is the responsible party. Supplier Contractual Deliverables Contractual deliverables where the supplier is the responsible party Supplier Negotiation Deliverables Negotiation deliverables where the supplier is the responsible party. Document Types The following table displays the seeded document types which can be associated to contractual terms: Name Description Document Class Application AUCTION Auction SOURCING Oracle Sourcing D-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 193. Name Description Document Class Application AUCTION_RESPON Bid SOURCING Oracle Sourcing SE PA_BLANKET Blanket Purchase PO Oracle Purchasing Agreement PA_CONTRACT Contract Purchase PO Oracle Purchasing Agreement PO_STANDARD Standard Purchase Order PO Oracle Purchasing RFI RFI SOURCING Oracle Sourcing RFI_RESPONSE RFI Response SOURCING Oracle Sourcing RFQ RFQ SOURCING Oracle Sourcing RFI_RESPONSE Sourcing Quote SOURCING Oracle Sourcing Layout Template To print contract documents and the Deviations reports, Oracle Procurement Contracts provides seeded layout templates in Oracle XML Publisher. The layout templates are stored in the XML Publisher Layout Template repository. The following table lists the seeded layout templates in Oracle Procurement Contracts: Document Type Document Type Layout Contract Terms Layout Standard Purchase Order Standard Purchase Order Oracle Contract Terms Stylesheet Template Blanket Purchase Agreement Blanket Agreement Stylesheet Oracle Contract Terms Template Contract Purchase Agreement Contract Agreement Oracle Contract Terms Stylesheet Template Seeded Data    D-3
  • 194. Document Type Document Type Layout Contract Terms Layout Sourcing RFI Sourcing Style Sheet Oracle Contract Terms Template Sourcing RFQ Sourcing Style Sheet Oracle Contract Terms Template Auction Sourcing Style Sheet Oracle Contract Terms Template The following table lists the seeded layout templates for the Deviations Report: Name Type Description Contract Deviations Sourcing RTF The main Rich Text Format template for Template Sourcing. Contract Deviations RTF The main Rich Text Format template for Purchasing Template Purchasing. Contract Deviations Report RTF Sub template for contract deviations Template summary details. Contracts RTE Handler XSL-FO Sub template for handling HTML tags Template used in Rich Text Editor for contracts. Contract Deviations XSL-FO Sub template containing all context Constants Template information. Contract Deviations Variable XSL-FO Sub template for variables resolution. Resolution Template Notifications The following table lists the different types of notifications that are seeded in Oracle Contracts: D-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 195. Seeded Notifications Type Business Context Description Clauses Clause submitted for Notifies the global or local approval organization approvers when a global or local clause requires approval. Clauses Global Clause approved Sends a notification to the requestor and library administrators of local organizations when a global clause is approved. Clauses Clause rejected Sends a notification to the requestor in a global or local organization when a clause is rejected. Clauses Auto-adoption of global Sends a notification to the clause library administrator of a local organization when a global clause is automatically adopted in that organization. Clauses Global clause available for Notifies the library adoption administrator of a local organization when a global clause is available for adoption. Clauses Clause requiring approval for Sends a notification that a adoption global clause was adopted in a local organization and submitted for approval. Clauses Clause adoption approved Sends a notification that a global clause was approved for adoption in a local organization. Clauses Clause adoption rejected Sends a notification that a global clause was rejected for adoption in a local organization. Seeded Data    D-5
  • 196. Type Business Context Description Contract Templates Contract template submitted Notifies global or local for approval organization approvers when a global or local template requires approval. Contract Templates Contract template approved Sends a notification to requestor when a contract template is approved. Contract Templates Contract template rejected Sends a notification to requestor in a global or local organization when a contract template is rejected. Contract Deliverables Overdue notification Sends a notification for overdue status on the due date of the deliverable. Contract Deliverables Before due notification Sends a notification prior to the due date of a deliverable. Contract Deliverables Escalation notification Sends a status notification to escalation assignee after the due date if the deliverable was performed. Contract Deliverables Status change notification Sends a notification when either party changes the status of the deliverable. Repository Approval request notification Notifies the contract approver when a contract requires approval. Repository Contract approved Notifies the contract approval notification requester that the contract has been approved. Repository Contract rejected notification Notifies the contract approval requester that the contract has been rejected. D-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 197. Type Business Context Description Repository Contract expiration Notifies the contract notification administrator that a contract is about to expire. Procurement Notifications The following table lists the notifications seeded for Oracle Procurement Contracts: Type Business Context Description Signature Buyer responding to contract after Notifies the supplier that the buyer has supplier signature responded to the contract. Signature Contract approval Notifies the supplier that the contract was sent for signature. Signature Supplier rejects the contract Notifies the buyer that the supplier has rejected the contract. Signature Supplier signs the contract Notifies the buyer that the supplier has signed the contract, and the contract is now requires the buyer signature. System Variables The following tables display the: • Seeded system variables in Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Sourcing. • Sources used by the system to retrieve values. • Document types in which the values are used. Oracle Purchasing Seeded System Variables The following table displays the seeded system variables in Oracle Purchasing. Legend: • A - Sourced from the document. Seeded Data    D-7
  • 198. B - Organization, Legal Entity, Supplier Site, Ship-to, and Bill-to addresses are a concatenation of the address components. For example, Address Lines, City, State, Zip Code, and Country. • Note that Organization, Legal Entity, Ship-to, and Bill-to address formats follow the HR Locations address format. However, Supplier Site address format follows the PO Vendors address format. System Description Source Standard Blanket Contract Variable Purchas Purchas s/ e Order e/ Global Global Agreeme Contract nt Purchas e Agreeme nt Header Level           Organization Organization Organization A A A name Organization Address of Organization Address A A A Address (B) organization Organization Address style Organization Address A A A Address Style Style Organization Organization Organization Address A A A Address Line address line 1 Line 1 1 Organization Organization Organization Address A A A Address Line address line 2 Line 2 2 Organization Organization Organization Address A A A Address Line address line 3 Line 3 3 Organization Organization Organization Address A A A Address - address - town or - Town or City Town or City city D-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 199. System Description Source Standard Blanket Contract Variable Purchas Purchas s/ e Order e/ Global Global Agreeme Contract nt Purchas e Agreeme nt Organization Organization Organization Address A A A Address - address - postal - Postal Code Postal Code code Organization Organization Organization Address A A A Address - address - country - Country Country Organization Organization Organization Address A A A Address - address - region - Region 1 Region 1 1 Organization Organization Organization Address A A A Address - address - region - Region 2 Region 2 2 Organization Organization Organization Address A A A Address - address - region - Region 3 Region 3 3 Legal Entity Legal entity Legal Entity A A A name Legal Entity Address of the Legal Entity Address A A A Address (B) legal entity Legal Entity Address style Legal Entity Address A A A Address Style Style Legal Entity Legal entity Legal Entity Address A A A Address Line address - line 1 Address Line 1 1 Legal Entity Legal entity Legal Entity Address A A A Address Line address - line 2 Address Line 2 2 Seeded Data    D-9
  • 200. System Description Source Standard Blanket Contract Variable Purchas Purchas s/ e Order e/ Global Global Agreeme Contract nt Purchas e Agreeme nt Legal Entity Legal entity Legal Entity Address A A A Address Line address - line 3 Address Line 3 3 Legal Entity Legal Entity Legal Entity Address - A A A Address - address - town or Town or City Town or City city Legal Entity Legal Entity Legal Entity Address - A A A Address - address - postal Postal Code Postal Code code Legal Entity Legal Entity Legal Entity Address - A A A Address - address - country Country Country Legal Entity Legal Entity Legal Entity Address - A A A Address - address - region Region 1 Region 1 1 Legal Entity Legal Entity Legal Entity Address - A A A Address - address - region Region 2 Region 2 2 Legal Entity Legal Entity Legal Entity Address - A A A Address - address - region Region 3 Region 3 3 Document Document type Type A A A Type PO PO document PO Number A A A Document number Number Document Document Revision A A A Revision revision number D-10    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 201. System Description Source Standard Blanket Contract Variable Purchas Purchas s/ e Order e/ Global Global Agreeme Contract nt Purchas e Agreeme nt Supplier Supplier name Supplier Name A A A Name Supplier Site Name of the Supplier Site Name A A A supplier site Supplier Site Address of the Supplier Site Address A A A Address (B) supplier site Supplier Supplier address Supplier Address - A A A Address - - line 1 Line 1 Line 1 Supplier Supplier address Supplier Address - A A A Address - - line 2 Line 2 Line 2 Supplier Supplier address Supplier Address - A A A Address - - line 3 Line 3 Line 3 Supplier Supplier address Supplier Address - A A A Address - - line 4 Line 4 Line 4 Supplier State Supplier address Supplier State A A A - state Supplier Zip Supplier address Supplier Zip Code A A A Code - zip code Supplier Supplier address Supplier Country A A A Country - country Supplier Name of supplier Supplier Contact A A A Contact contact Seeded Data    D-11
  • 202. System Description Source Standard Blanket Contract Variable Purchas Purchas s/ e Order e/ Global Global Agreeme Contract nt Purchas e Agreeme nt Supplier Supplier Supplier Classification A A A Classification classification Supplier Supplier Supplier Minority A A A Minority minority type Type Type Ship To Ship to address Ship To Address A A A Address Ship To Address style Ship To Address - A A A Address - Style Style Ship To Ship to address - Ship To Address - A A A Address - line 1 Line 1 Line 1 Ship To Ship to address - Ship To Address - A A A Address - line 2 Line 2 Line 2 Ship To Ship to address - Ship To Address - A A A Address - line 3 Line 3 Line 3 Ship To Ship to address - Ship To Address - A A A Address - town or city Town or City Town or City Ship To Ship to address - Ship To Address - A A A Address - postal code Postal Code Postal Code Ship To Ship to address - Ship To Address - A A A Address - country country Country D-12    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 203. System Description Source Standard Blanket Contract Variable Purchas Purchas s/ e Order e/ Global Global Agreeme Contract nt Purchas e Agreeme nt Ship To Ship to address - Ship To Address - A A A Address - region 1 Region 1 Region 1 Ship To Ship to address - Ship To Address - A A A Address - region 2 Region 2 Region 2 Ship To Ship to address - Ship To Address - A A A Address - region 3 Region 3 Region 3 Bill to Bill to Address Bill to Address A A A Address (B) Bill to Address style Bill to Address - Style A A A Address - Style Bill to Bill to address - Bill to Address - Line 1 A A A Address - line 1 Line 1 Bill to Bill to address - Bill to Address - Line 2 A A A Address - line 2 Line 2 Bill to Bill to address - Bill to Address - Line 3 A A A Address - line 3 Line 3 Bill to Bill to address - Bill to Address - Town A A A Address - town or city or City Town or City Seeded Data    D-13
  • 204. System Description Source Standard Blanket Contract Variable Purchas Purchas s/ e Order e/ Global Global Agreeme Contract nt Purchas e Agreeme nt Bill to Bill to address - Bill to Address - Postal A A A Address - postal code Code Postal Code Bill to Bill to address - Bill to Address - A A A Address - country Country Country Bill to Bill to address - Bill to Address - A A A Address - region 1 Region 1 Region 1 Bill to Bill to address - Bill to Address - A A A Address - region 2 Region 2 Region 2 Bill to Bill to address - Bill to Address - A A A Address - region 3 Region 3 Region 3 Transaction Document PO Currency A A A Currency transaction currency Functional The currency that Functional Currency A A A Currency an operating unit uses to conduct business Buyer Buyer name Buyer A A A PO Total Total amount of PO Total Amount A     Amount the purchase (Transaction (Transaction order in the Currency) Currency) transaction currency D-14    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 205. System Description Source Standard Blanket Contract Variable Purchas Purchas s/ e Order e/ Global Global Agreeme Contract nt Purchas e Agreeme nt PO Total Total amount of PO Total Amount A     Amount the purchase (Functional Currency) (Functional order in the Currency) functional currency Agreement Total agreement Agreement Amount   A A Amount amount for (Transaction (Transaction blanket or Currency) Currency) contract agreement in the transaction currency Agreement Total agreement Agreement Amount   A A Amount amount for (Functional Currency) (Functional blanket or Currency) contract agreement in the functional currency Rate Type Rate type Rate Type A A A Rate Date Rate date Rate Date A A A Rate Rate Rate A A A Payment Terms of Payment Terms A A A Terms payment Freight Terms of freight Freight Terms A A A Terms Carrier Carrier Carrier A A A Seeded Data    D-15
  • 206. System Description Source Standard Blanket Contract Variable Purchas Purchas s/ e Order e/ Global Global Agreeme Contract nt Purchas e Agreeme nt FOB Free on board FOB A A A designation Pay On Pay-on terms Pay On A A A Acceptance Acceptance Acceptance Method A A A Method method Acceptance The required due Acceptance Required A A A Required By date for the By Date Date acceptance Agreement Effective start Effective Start Date A A A Start Date date of the agreement Agreement Effective end Effective End Date   A A End Date date of the agreement Minimum Minimum release Minimum Release   A A Release amount for Amount (Transaction Amount blanket or Currency) (Transaction contract Currency) agreements in the transaction currency Minimum Minimum release Minimum Release   A A Release amount for Amount (Functional Amount blanket or Currency) (Functional contract Currency) agreements in the functional currency D-16    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 207. Oracle Sourcing Seeded System Variables The following table displays the seeded system variables in Oracle Sourcing. Legend: • A - Sourced from the document. • B - Organization, Legal Entity, Supplier Site, Ship-to, and Bill-to addresses are a concatenation of the address components. For example, Address Lines, City, State, Zip Code, and Country. • Note that Organization, Legal Entity, Ship-to, and Bill-to address formats follow the HR Locations address format. However, Supplier Site address format follows the PO Vendors address format. System Description Source Buyer' Sour Requ Variable s cing est Auctio Requ for n est Infor for mati Quot on e Header           Level Organizati Organization name Organization A A A on Organizati Address of organization Organization Address A A A on Address (B) Organizati Address style Organization Address A A A on Style Address Style Organizati Organization address line 1 Organization Address A A A on Line 1 Address Line 1 Seeded Data    D-17
  • 208. System Description Source Buyer' Sour Requ Variable s cing est Auctio Requ for n est Infor for mati Quot on e Organizati Organization address line 2 Organization Address A A A on Line 2 Address Line 2 Organizati Organization address line 3 Organization Address A A A on Line 3 Address Line 3 Organizati Organization address - town Organization Address - A A A on or city Town or City Address - Town or City Organizati Organization address - Organization Address - A A A on postal code Postal Code Address - Postal Code Organizati Organization address - Organization Address - A A A on country Country Address - Country Organizati Organization address - Organization Address - A A A on region 1 Region 1 Address - Region 1 Organizati Organization address - Organization Address - A A A on region 2 Region 2 Address - Region 2 D-18    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 209. System Description Source Buyer' Sour Requ Variable s cing est Auctio Requ for n est Infor for mati Quot on e Organizati Organization address - Organization Address - A A A on region 3 Region 3 Address - Region 3 Legal Legal entity name Legal Entity A A A Entity Legal Address of the legal entity Legal Entity Address A A A Entity Address (B) Legal Address style Legal Entity Address A A A Entity Style Address Style Legal Legal entity address - line 1 Legal Entity Address A A A Entity Address Line 1 Address Line 1 Legal Legal entity address - line 2 Legal Entity Address A A A Entity Address Line 2 Address Line 2 Legal Legal entity address - line 3 Legal Entity Address A A A Entity Address Line 3 Address Line 3 Legal Legal Entity address - town Legal Entity Address - A A A Entity or city Town or City Address - Town or City Seeded Data    D-19
  • 210. System Description Source Buyer' Sour Requ Variable s cing est Auctio Requ for n est Infor for mati Quot on e Legal Legal Entity address - postal Legal Entity Address - A A A Entity code Postal Code Address - Postal Code Legal Legal Entity address - Legal Entity Address - A A A Entity country Country Address - Country Legal Legal Entity address - region Legal Entity Address - A A A Entity 1 Region 1 Address - Region 1 Legal Legal Entity address - region Legal Entity Address - A A A Entity 2 Region 2 Address - Region 2 Legal Legal Entity address - region Legal Entity Address - A A A Entity 3 Region 3 Address - Region 3 Document Document type (Auction) Type A A A Type Sourcing Sourcing document number (Auction) Number A A A Document Number Ship To Ship to address Ship To Address A A A Address D-20    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 211. System Description Source Buyer' Sour Requ Variable s cing est Auctio Requ for n est Infor for mati Quot on e Ship To Address style Ship To Address - Style A A A Address - Style Ship To Ship to address - line 1 Ship To Address - Line 1 A A A Address - Line 1 Ship To Ship to address - line 2 Ship To Address - Line 2 A A A Address - Line 2 Ship To Ship to address - line 3 Ship To Address - Line 3 A A A Address - Line 3 Ship To Ship to address - town or Ship To Address - Town A A A Address - city or City Town or City Ship To Ship to address - postal code Ship To Address - Postal A A A Address - Code Postal Code Ship To Ship to address - country Ship To Address - A A A Address - country Country Ship To Ship to address - region 1 Ship To Address - A A A Address - Region 1 Region 1 Ship To Ship to address - region 2 Ship To Address - A A A Address - Region 2 Region 2 Seeded Data    D-21
  • 212. System Description Source Buyer' Sour Requ Variable s cing est Auctio Requ for n est Infor for mati Quot on e Ship To Ship to address - region 3 Ship To Address - A A A Address - Region 3 Region 3 Bill to Bill to Address Bill to Address A A A Address (B) Bill to Address style Bill to Address - Style A A A Address - Style Bill to Bill to address - line 1 Bill to Address - Line 1 A A A Address - Line 1 Bill to Bill to address - line 2 Bill to Address - Line 2 A A A Address - Line 2 Bill to Bill to address - line 3 Bill to Address - Line 3 A A A Address - Line 3 Bill to Bill to address - town or city Bill to Address - Town A A A Address - or City Town or City Bill to Bill to address - postal code Bill to Address - Postal A A A Address - Code Postal Code Bill to Bill to address - country Bill to Address - A A A Address - Country Country D-22    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 213. System Description Source Buyer' Sour Requ Variable s cing est Auctio Requ for n est Infor for mati Quot on e Bill to Bill to address - region 1 Bill to Address - Region A A A Address - 1 Region 1 Bill to Bill to address - region 2 Bill to Address - Region A A A Address - 2 Region 2 Bill to Bill to address - region 3 Bill to Address - Region A A A Address - 3 Region 3 Transactio Document transaction Negotiation Currency A A A n currency Currency Functional The currency that an Negotiation Currency A A A Currency operating unit uses to conduct business Buyer Buyer name (Enterprise) Contact A A A Agreemen Total agreement amount for Total Agreement A A   t Amount blanket or contract Amount (Transacti agreement in the transaction on currency Currency) Agreemen Total agreement amount for Total Agreement A A   t Amount blanket or contract Amount (Functiona agreement in the functional l currency Currency) Payment Terms of payment Payment Terms A A A Terms Seeded Data    D-23
  • 214. System Description Source Buyer' Sour Requ Variable s cing est Auctio Requ for n est Infor for mati Quot on e Freight Terms of freight Freight Terms A A A Terms Carrier Carrier Carrier A A A FOB Free on board designation FOB A A A Agreemen Effective start date of the Effective Start Date A A   t Start agreement Date Agreemen Effective end date of the Effective End Date A A   t End Date agreement Minimum Minimum release amount Minimum Release A A   Release for blanket or contract Amount (Transaction Amount agreements in the Currency) (Transacti transaction currency on Currency) Minimum Minimum release amount Minimum Release A A   Release for blanket or contract Amount (Functional Amount agreements in the functional Currency) (Functiona currency l Currency) Outcome Oracle Purchasing Style of (Auction) Outcome A A the purchasing document created as an outcome of a negotiation Outcome Document Type of the (Auction) Outcome A A   Document Oracle Purchasing document Document Type Type created as an outcome of a negotiation D-24    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 215. System Description Source Buyer' Sour Requ Variable s cing est Auctio Requ for n est Infor for mati Quot on e Title Sourcing document title (Auction) Title A A A Response Response style Response Style A A A Style Response Method to determine how Bid/Quote Ranking A A A Ranking responses are ranked Enterprise Enterprise name Auctioneers / Buyer A A A Name Open The date the negotiation Open Response Date A A A Response opens Date (If the Open Response Date is set to Null, the System Date would be used.) Close The date the negotiation Close Response Date A A A Response closes Date Preview During the preview period, Preview Date A A A Date all eligible suppliers can view the auction/RFQ, but not submit responses Scheduled The date by which the Scheduled Award Date A A   Award auction/RFQ is awarded Date Amendme Amendment description Amendment Description A A A nt Descriptio n Response Response document number Response Number A A A Number Seeded Data    D-25
  • 216. System Description Source Buyer' Sour Requ Variable s cing est Auctio Requ for n est Infor for mati Quot on e Response Currency of the response Response Currency A A A Currency document Contract Expert System Variables The following table displays seeded Contract Expert system variables and value sets associated with them. System Variable Purchasing Value Set Sourcing Value Set Organization OKC_XPRT_OPER_UNIT OKC_XPRT_OPER_UNIT Legal Entity OKC_XPRT_LEGAL_ENTITY OKC_XPRT_LEGAL_ENTITY Document Type POC_XPRT_DOC_TYPE POC_XPRT_DOC_TYPE Supplier Name POC_XPRT_SUPPLIER NOT APPLICABLE Supplier Country OKC_XPRT_COUNTRY NOT APPLICABLE Transaction Currency OKC_XPRT_CURRENCY OKC_XPRT_CURRENCY Functional Currency OKC_XPRT_CURRENCY OKC_XPRT_CURRENCY PO Total Amount NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE (Transaction Currency) PO Total Amount (Functional NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE Currency) Agreement Amount NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE (Transaction Currency) D-26    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 217. System Variable Purchasing Value Set Sourcing Value Set Agreement Amount NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE (Functional Currency) Global Flag OKC_XPRT_YES_NO OKC_XPRT_YES_NO Rate Type OKC_XPRT_RATE_TYPE NOT APPLICABLE Payment Terms POC_XPRT_PAY_TERMS POC_XPRT_PAY_TERMS Freight Terms POC_XPRT_FREIGHT_TERM POC_XPRT_FREIGHT_TERM S S Carrier OKC_XPRT_CARRIER OKC_XPRT_CARRIER FOB POC_XPRT_FOB POC_XPRT_FOB Pay On POC_XPRT_PAY_ON POC_XPRT_PAY_ON Supply Agreement Flag OKC_XPRT_YES_NO NOT APPLICABLE Minimum Release Amount NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE (Transaction Currency) Minimum Release Amount NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE (Functional Currency) Outcome NOT APPLICABLE PON_CONTRACT_TYPE_PO Style NOT APPLICABLE PON _BID_VISIBILITY_CODE Display Scoring Criteria Flag NOT APPLICABLE PON _YES_NO Currency Responses Allowed NOT APPLICABLE PON _YES_NO Flag Invitation Only Participation NOT APPLICABLE PON _YES_NO Flag See Other Supplier's NOT APPLICABLE PON _YES_NO Responses Flag Seeded Data    D-27
  • 218. System Variable Purchasing Value Set Sourcing Value Set Selective Response Allowed NOT APPLICABLE PON _YES_NO Flag Full Quantity Response NOT APPLICABLE PON _YES_NO Required Flag Multiple Responses Allowed NOT APPLICABLE PON _YES_NO Flag Multiple Rounds Allowed NOT APPLICABLE PON _YES_NO Flag Manual Close Allowed Flag NOT APPLICABLE PON _YES_NO Manual Extend Allowed Flag NOT APPLICABLE PON _YES_NO AutoExtend Allowed Flag NOT APPLICABLE PON _YES_NO Response Prices Decrease NOT APPLICABLE PON _YES_NO Flag Item Category POC_XPRT_ITEM_CATEGO POC_XPRT_ITEM_CATEGO RY RY Purchasing Style PO_XPRT_PURCHASING_ST NOT APPLICABLE YLE Transportation Arranger PO_XPRT_TRANSPORTATI NOT APPLICABLE ON_ARRANGED Outcome Document Type NOT APPLICABLE PON_CONTRACT_TYPE Lookup Codes Standard ACCEPTANCE_TYPE Lookup Codes The following table displays the values for the ACCEPTANCE_TYPE lookup code: D-28    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 219. Look Up Code Value Description ACCEPT WITH CHANGES Accepted purchase order and changes are present. ACCEPTED TERMS Accepted all purchase order terms. OPEN Open ON SCHEDULE Purchase order on schedule. UNACCEPTABLE CHANGES Unacceptable purchase order changes. For more information about lookup codes, see Lookup Codes, Oracle Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide. Function Security The following table lists the security functions provided by Oracle Procurement Contracts and the specific functionality that these functions and sub-menus would enable in Oracle Purchasing, Oracle Sourcing, and Oracle iSupplier Portal: New Menu or Function Technical Name Description Name Author Contract Terms in PO_CONTRACT_TERMS Controls whether Oracle Oracle Purchasing Purchasing users can author contract terms. Author Deliverables Main OKC_AUTHOR_DELIVERAB Author Deliverables main Menu LES_MAIN menu: included in Sourcing Buyer and Sourcing Super User menus. Contract Terms Access in PON_BUYER_CONTRACT_T Enables Sourcing Buyer to Oracle Sourcing ERMS access contract terms. Contract Terms Library OKC_TERMS_LIBRARY_MA Enables Oracle Purchasing Access IN users to directly access the contract terms library. Seeded Data    D-29
  • 220. New Menu or Function Technical Name Description Name Contract Terms User OKC_CONTRACT_TERMS_ Contracts Terms User: USER included in Sourcing Buyer and Sourcing Super User menus. Create RFQ PON_NEG_CRT_CONTRAC Used to grant/deny access to <RFQ_NUMBER>: Define TS the Enter Contract Terms Contract Terms page. Manage Deliverables OKC_DELIVERABLES_WKB Enables access to the Manage NCH_VIEW Deliverables option under the Orders tab in Oracle iSupplier Portal. Manage Deliverables for PO PO_DELIVERABLES_WKBN Controls the display of the CH following: • Deliverables tab in the Professional Buyer's Work Center • Manage Deliverables option in the Action list for a purchase order • Manage Deliverables option in the navigator menu • Update Deliverable Status button in the Terms window in Forms Manage Deliverables Main OKC_MANAGE_DELIVERA Manage Deliverables main Menu BLES_MAIN menu: gives Oracle Sourcing and Oracle Purchasing users access to manage deliverables. Manage Contract Deliverables POS_MANAGE_DELIVERAB Controls whether a supplier is LES enabled to manage deliverables. D-30    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 221. New Menu or Function Technical Name Description Name Sign Purchase Order POS_SIGN_ORDER Controls whether a supplier is enabled to sign purchase orders. Update Response PON_DELIV_RES Enables access to the Update Deliverables Response Deliverables page. View Contract Amendments POS_VIEW_AMENDMENTS Controls whether a supplier is enabled to view contract deliverables and clauses. View Document PO_VIEW_DOCUMENT Controls whether a supplier is enabled to view the PDF version of a purchase order document. Seeded Data    D-31
  • 223. E XML Reference This appendix covers the following topics: • Contract Terms XML Reference Contract Terms XML Reference The complete definition of the contract terms XML is provided as an XML schema seeded with Oracle Contracts. You can find the XML schema file in the XML Publisher data definition Contract Terms Data Definition. The XML defined in this section represent contract templates. However, the contract XML is also included in sourcing documents, procurement contracts, sales contracts, quotes and other contracts to represent contract terms. Contract Terms XML The complete definition of the XML format is provided as an XML schema. The XML schema file can be found in the XML Publisher data definition Contract Terms Data Definition. The ContractTermsAM element is the top-level node of the XML document for a contract template. Other XML documents, such as sales contracts XML, include the ContractTermsAM element as a child node. The ContractTermsAM XML element has the following structure: ContractTermsAM VariablesMetaDataVO (1) VariablesMetaDataVORow (0 or more) ParametersVO (1) ParametesVORow (1) SectionsArticlesToPrintVO (1) SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow (0 or more) DeliverablesAM (1) DeliverablesAllForBusinessDocExpVO (0 or 1) DeliverablesAllForBusinessDocExpVORow (0 ormore) XML Reference    E-1
  • 224. DeliverablesForAllSourcingExpVO (0 or 1) DeliverablesForAllSourcingExpVORow (0 or more) DeliverablesForInternalContractualExpVO (0 or 1) DeliverablesForInternalContractualExpVORow (0 or more) DeliverablesForExternalSourcingExpVO (0 or 1) DeliverablesForExternalSourcingExpVORow (0 or more) DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVO (0 or 1) DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVORow (0 or more) DeliverablesForInternalSourcingExpVO (0 or 1) DeliverablesForInternalSourcingExpVORow (0 or more) The following is an example of a contract terms XML document. This XML document is a shortened version of the preview XML document that is also available in the Contract Terms Data Definition. <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?> <ContractTermsAM type="AM" name="ContractTermsAM1"> <VariablesMetadataVO type="VO" name="VariablesMetadataVO"> <VariablesMetadataVORow> <ArticleVersionId>6319</ArticleVersionId> <VariableCode>EXTERNAL_CONTRACTUAL_DEL</VariableCode> <VariableType>D</VariableType> <DocType>TEMPLATE</DocType> <ViewObjectName>DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVO</ViewObjectName> <ExternalYn>N</ExternalYn> </VariablesMetadataVORow> <VariablesMetadataVORow> <ArticleVersionId>6313</ArticleVersionId> <VariableCode>1022</VariableCode> <VariableType>U</VariableType> <ExternalYn>N</ExternalYn> </VariablesMetadataVORow> </VariablesMetadataVO> <ParametersVO type="VO" name="ParametersVO"> <ParametersVORow> <PrintAmendments>0</PrintAmendments> <DocumentName>Example Contract Template</DocumentName> </ParametersVORow> </ParametersVO> <SectionsArticlesToPrintVO type="VO" name="SectionsArticlesToPrintVO"> <SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow> E-2    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 225. <UniqueId>SECTION14394</UniqueId> <StructureLevel>1</StructureLevel> <ObjectType>SECTION</ObjectType> <DocumentId>3941</DocumentId> <DocumentType>TEMPLATE</DocumentType> <DisplaySequence>10</DisplaySequence> <Label>I.</Label> <Title>Contract Terms and Conditions</Title> <ArticleText /> <CatId>14394</CatId> </SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow> <SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow> <UniqueId>ARTICLE36293</UniqueId> <StructureLevel>2</StructureLevel> <ObjectType>ARTICLE</ObjectType> <ParentId>14394</ParentId> <DocumentId>3941</DocumentId> <DocumentType>TEMPLATE</DocumentType> <DisplaySequence>10</DisplaySequence> <Label>1.</Label> <Title>Limitation of Government Liability</Title> <ArticleNumber>10415</ArticleNumber> <ArticleText> <P>a) A <var name="1022" type="U" meaning="Contract Type"/> <EM>[insert specific type of contract]</EM> definitive contract is contemplated. </P> <P>(b) In performing this contract, the Contractor is not authorized to make expenditures or incur obligations exceeding <var name="OKC$B_AGREEMENT_AMOUNT_TXN" type="S" meaning="Agreement Amount (Transaction Currency)" /> <var name="OKC$B_TXN_CURRENCY" type="S" meaning="Transaction Currency" />. </P> </ArticleText> <ArticleVersionId>6312</ArticleVersionId> <ArticleId>6006</ArticleId> <CatId>36293</CatId> <InsertByReference>N</InsertByReference> </SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow> </SectionsArticlesToPrintVO> XML Reference    E-3
  • 226. <DeliverablesAM type="AM" name="DeliverablesAM1"> <DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVO type="VO" name="DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVO"> <DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVORow> <DeliverableId>29101</DeliverableId> <DeliverableName>Prototype</DeliverableName> <ResponsiblePartyName>Supplier Organization</ResponsiblePartyName> <PrintDueDate>01/03/2004</PrintDueDate> </DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVORow> </DeliverablesForExternalContractualExpVO> </DeliverablesAM> </ContractTermsAM> ContractTermsAM The ContractTermsAM element is the top-level node (root node) of the Contract Terms XML for contract templates. The following table displays the nodes for the ContractTermsAM element: Element/Attribute Set to Null Type Comments VariablesMetaDataV Yes Complex The definition and O values for variables. Contract templates do not contain variable values. ParametersVO Yes Complex Parameters that describe how the document should be printed. SectionsArticlesToPri Yes Complex Sections and articles ntVO of the contract terms. DeliverablesAM Yes Complex Deliverables included in the contract template. ContractTermsAM Components The following sections describe the components of the ContractTermsAM: E-4    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 227. SectionsArticlesToPrintVO This XML element contains the text of sections and clauses for the contract terms. The SectionsArticlesToPrintVO is a child element of the ContractTermsAM element. It only contains SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow elements. Each of these elements contains either a section or a clause. The following table displays the child elements for the SectionsArticlesToPrintVORow element: Element/Attribute Set to Null Type Comments Uniqueld No String The unique identifier for this element. The unique identifier is composed of the prefix "SECTION" or "ARTICLE" and the CatId. StructureLevel No Integer The indention level of the section or clause. For example, sections with StructureLevel=2 are subsections. ObjectType No Enumeration The object type is either SECTION or ARTICLE. ParentID No Long The CatId of the parent element. For a subsection this would be the identifier of the section in which you find the subsection. Since only sections and not clauses can be parents, the CatId is unique. DocumentID No Long The identifier of the contract document. XML Reference    E-5
  • 228. Element/Attribute Set to Null Type Comments DocumentType No String The type of the contract document. For a contract template, the type is TEMPLATE. DisplaySequence No Integer The display or printing order for sections and clauses. Label No String The sequential number defined by the numbering scheme for sections and clauses. Title No String The title of a section or a clause. ArticleNumber No String The clause number. ArticleText No String The text of the clause. This text may contain selected HTML tags such as <EM>, <STRONG> or <B>. Oracle Contracts ensures that all tags are closed and XML compliant. ArticleId No Long The unique clause identifier (may be identical to a section identifier). ArticleVersionId No Long The unique identifier for the clause version. E-6    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 229. Element/Attribute Set to Null Type Comments CatId No Long A document may contain the same clause more than once. Therefore, the ArticleId and the ArticleVersionId may not be unique for a document. However, the CatId is different, even if the same clause is twice in the same document. InsertByReference Yes Enumeration Especially in government contracts (FAR), clauses may be inserted by reference. If this clause should be inserted by reference, the value is "Y", otherwise "N". ReferenceText Yes String The text shown when a clause inserted by reference. AmendDescription Yes String The amendment description for the clause. If the clause has not been amended or no amendment description has been provided, the element is missing. XML Reference    E-7
  • 230. Element/Attribute Set to Null Type Comments AmendmOperation Yes String The translated Meaning description of the AmendmentOperatio nCode. For English language, the values are: Added, Updated, and Deleted. If the deliverable has not been amended, the element is missing. AmendmentOperatio Yes Enumeration The code for the nCode amendment operation. The code can be set to: ADDED, UPDATE, or DELETED. If the deliverable has not been amended, the element is missing. PrintTextYm Yes String If the clause has been amended, the user chooses if the complete clause text should be displayed (PrintTextYn="Y") or not (PrintTextYn="N"). DeliverablesAM This XML element contains the deliverables for the contract terms. The DeliverablesAM element is a child element of the ContractTermsAM and may contain the multiple child elements. The child elements correspond to the deliverable variables supported by Oracle Contracts. The following table displays the child elements for the DeliverablesAM element: Element/Attribute Set to Null Type Comments DeliverablesAllForBu Yes Complex All deliverables of the sinessDocExpVO document. E-8    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 231. Element/Attribute Set to Null Type Comments DeliverablesForAllSo Yes Complex All deliverables urcingExpVO specific to the sourcing phase. DeliverablesForIntern Yes Complex All internal or alContractualExpVO outbound contractual deliverables. DeliverablesForExter Yes Complex All external or nalSourcingExpVO inbound deliverables during the sourcing phase. Deliverables that have to be fulfilled by the other party. DeliverablesForExter Yes Complex All external or nalContractualExpVO inbound contractual deliverables. Deliverables that have to be fulfilled by the other party. DeliverablesForIntern Yes Complex All internal or alSourcingExpVO outbound deliverables during the sourcing phase. Each of these elements may have multiple child elements witch has the same name and the added suffix "Row". For example, the DeliverablesAllForBusinessDocExpVO element has DeliverablesAllForBusinessDocExpVORow child elements. Each of these elements contains the data for one deliverable. The following table displays the child elements for each of these DeliverablesRow elements: Element/Attribute Set to Null Type Comments DeliverableId No Long The unique identifier of the deliverable. XML Reference    E-9
  • 232. Element/Attribute Set to Null Type Comments DeliverableName No String The name of the deliverable. Description Yes String The description of the deliverable. ResponsiblePartyNa No String The name of the party me that is responsible for fulfilling the deliverable. Either "Supplier Organization" or "Buyer Organization". PrintDueDate Yes String A string that describes the date when the deliverable is due. This may be a fixed date such as "03/10/06", or an expression such as "Due 30 days after Purchase Order Signed". AmendmentNotes Yes String The amendment description for the deliverable. If the deliverable has not been amended the element is missing. AmendmentMeaning Yes String The translated description of the AmendmentCode. For English the values are: "Added", "Updated" and "Deleted". If the deliverable has not been amended the element is missing. E-10    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 233. Element/Attribute Set to Null Type Comments AmendmentCode Yes Enumeration The code for the amendment operation: ADDED, UPDATE or DELETED. If the deliverable has not been amended the element is missing. VariablesMetaDataVO The VariablesMeatDataVO contains variable values (for user variables) or the XPath to the element that contains the data for the variable. Typically contract templates do not contain variable values. The only exception is deliverable variables, since deliverables can be associated with templates. The variable section is automatically resolved by the code in the stylesheet, and there should be little need to customize this code. The VariablesMetaDataVO is a child element of the ContractTermsAM element. It may only contain multiple VariablesMetadataVORow elements. These child elements describe the variables that may be found in the contract template. Element/Attribute Set to Type Comments Null ArticleVersionId Yes Long This field is only important for user variables since user variables may have different values for different clauses. The identifier of the clause version that has this value. VariableCode No String The code of the variable: a unique identifier in the document. VariableType No Enumeration The variable type: • D: Deliverable • S: System • U: User • T: Table XML Reference    E-11
  • 234. Element/Attribute Set to Type Comments Null DocType Yes String The type of the contract document. For a contract template the type is TEMPLATE. Value Yes String The value for a user variable CatId Yes String The CatId of the clause that contains this value for the user variable. ViewObjectName Yes String XPath of the data associated with system variable. AttributeName Yes String The name of the element that contains the variable. The element is relative to the XPath of the "ViewObjectName" ExternalYn Yes Enumeration Indicates if the variable is external (Y) or not (N). In a negotiation, this flag controls, if a variable should be communicated to an external party or not. ParametersVO The ParametersVO contains information about how to print the document. The ParametersVO element is a child of the ContractTermsAM and contains one ParametersVORow child element. The following table displays the child elements that the ParametersVORow element contains: Element/Attribute Set to Type Comments Null PrintAmendments No Enumerati This parameter determines the print area. It can on be set to: • 0: Only the contract is printed. • 1: Only the amendment (change) is printed. • 2: Amendments and changes are printed. E-12    Oracle Procurement Contracts Implementation and Administration Guide
  • 235. Element/Attribute Set to Type Comments Null DocumentName Yes String The name of the contract document. ContractStatus Yes String Status of the Contract: • Draft • Pending Approval • Approved • Rejected Watermark Text Yes String The text for the watermark. Organization Name Yes String Name of the organization that owns the document. XML Reference    E-13
  • 237. Glossary Adopt As-Is An option that allows a local organization to adopt a global clause without modification. However, the clause still goes through formal approvals in the local organization. Amendment Any changes made to the terms of a signed contractual business document. These changes could be made to the contract language or to the deliverables. Auto-Adoption Allows organizations to use global clauses automatically, without formal approval processes. Business Document A document generated in the procurement contracting business flows. For example, Standard Purchase Order, Blanket Purchase Agreement, and RFQ. Clause Business or legal language that constitutes the terms of a contract. Note that in earlier releases of Oracle Contracts, clauses were referred to as articles. Contract A binding agreement between two or more individuals or organizations that describes the obligations and rights of the parties and is enforceable by law. Contract Document Any document that is used for the purpose of or incidental to a contractual negotiation or execution. Examples of contract documents include, signed contract image and supporting documents. Contract Template A document containing standard (boilerplate) terms that organizations use to rapidly Glossary-1
  • 238. create new contracts with pre-approved legal language. Contract Terms See: Terms and Conditions., page Glossary-5 Contract Terms Library A centralized repository for approved Contract Templates., page Glossary-1 Contract XML The XML document that represents a contract's terms. Oracle Contracts uses this document to generate the contract document in PDF using a layout template configured by the user. Contracts Workbench Users can access contracts authored in other applications such as Oracle Order Management, Oracle Quoting, Oracle Procurement and Oracle Sourcing and manage repository contracts from the contracts workbench. Contractual Deliverable A task that is part of the contract's terms, and that one of the parties needs to perform during the life of the contract. Data Source Name The name of the data definition for a layout template. Deliverable A task that needs to be performed as part of the execution of the contract, either once or in a repeating fashion. Deliverables are part of the terms of a contract. Deliverable Variable A variable that captures the list of deliverables applicable to a contract. The list appears in table format on a printed contract. Document Type A categorization of business documents, in the Contract Terms Library, to identify documents that are generated in the procurement contracting business flows. Execute a Contract Means to fulfill the commitments under the contract. Note that some organizations use this term to describe the act of signing of a contract. Glossary-2
  • 239. External Party Represents all business units or organizations with which a contract can be entered into. In the application, External Party specifically identifies supplier as understood in the procurement flows. Global Organization An operating unit in an organization that sets contract standards for all operating units worldwide. Insert by Reference Allows users to print only a reference to the full clause text on a printed contract without printing the entire text. The text of a clause with this attribute is standard and publicly available. A reference to the location of the full text is sufficient on the printed document. This is typically used in procurement contracts of U.S. government agencies. Intent Determines the usage of contract. Internal Deliverable A task that the internal party needs to perform but is not part of the terms. Internal Deliverables typically are fulfilled to augment the contractual deliverables and stay compliant with contract terms. Internal Party Internal party represents a business unit or organization that has implemented and uses the Oracle Procurement Contracts solution. Keyword Search An easy method to search for clauses and contract templates in the Contract Terms Library. The search is performed across several attributes, such as Description, Title, and Clause Text. Layout Template A document that defines the layout of contract templates or contract terms on other business documents. The layout template is designed using the following file types: • XSL-FO • RTF (Rich Document Format) • PDF (Portable Document Format) Glossary-3
  • 240. Local Organization An operating unit of a larger organization. Local organizations subscribe to global clauses approved by the global organization, and adopt or localize them for use in local contracts., page Glossary-4, page Glossary-1 Localization The process by which a local organization uses Oracle Contracts to modify global clauses to enable the use of clauses in that organization. Negotiation Deliverable A deliverable that needs to be performed during the negotiation phase of the contract. It is authored and managed in Oracle Sourcing. Numbering Scheme A definition of the numbering format that numbers clauses and sections in a printed contract. Party Refers to any business unit or organization representing both sides of a contract, whether internal or external. PDF (Portable Document Format) An open printable-document standard that Adobe Systems, Incorporated developed and that Oracle Contracts uses as the format for printed contracts. Use the Adobe Acrobat application to view and print PDF documents. Provision Used in the Federal Government contracting. A provision is a type of clause that is used only in negotiations and is dropped when the negotiation is converted to a contract. Redline Comparisons Compares and highlights the differences between two pieces of clause text. Oracle Contracts offers redline comparisons between two versions of a standard clause, between a non-standard clause and its original standard clause, and more. Rich Text Editor An online editing tool used to format clause text on a business document or in the Contract Terms Library. The rich text editor supports font effects (bold, italic, underline), alignment, indentation, and bulleted or numbered lists. Glossary-4
  • 241. RTF The Rich Text Format (RTF) specification provides a format for text and graphics interchange that can be used with different applications, output devices, operating environments, and operating systems. Section Section is a categorization that helps group clauses under a logical common heading. System Variable A variable whose value is set by Oracle Procurement Contracts and represents an attribute of the purchasing document. For example, PO Amount, Payment Terms, and PO Number. Table Variable One of several variables that capture certain types of structured information, such as items and price lists, in sales contracting flows. Template See: Contract Templates or Layout Template, page Glossary-3, page Glossary-1 Terms and Conditions The set of clauses and deliverables that together constitute the terms and conditions of a contract. Also known as the legal language of the contract. User-Defined Variable Variables that an organization defines over and above the system variables. Users must provide values for these variables as part of the contract authoring process. Variable A piece of information that is generated by the system or filled in by the user, and can appear inside a clause. Variables often represent a negotiated term or a field from the business document. XML (eXtensible Markup Language) An industry standard for formatting data to allow easy exchange and processing of business documents. Oracle Contracts uses Contract XML documents to format contracts for previewing and printing. XSL-FO Stylesheet (eXtensible Stylesheet Language - Formatting Objects) An industry standard for formatting XML documents. Oracle Contracts uses XSL-FO stylesheets to format XML data documents for printing. Glossary-5
  • 243.   Index XML import, 6-27 A Close Out Contracts, 5-31 Contract Amendment, 5-29 Administer Contract Changes, 5-29 Contract Authoring, 5-14 Amendments, 5-29 Contract Clause Analysis report, 6-16 Application Object Library Lookups window, 4- Contract expert 12 managing constants, 7-6 Approval Workflows, 4-11 managing questions, 7-3 Approve and Sign Contracts, 5-25 managing rules, 7-8 approve, 5-26 overview of, 7-1 sign, 5-25 using contract expert on business documents, Approvers, 4-11 7-20 Author Contracts, 5-14 Contract expert constants automatic application of contract templates, 5- managing, 7-6 20 searching for, 7-7 cancel contracts, 5-24 updating, 7-8 Contract Deviations Report, 5-19 Contract expert questions Contract Expert, 5-18 updating questions, 7-5 create a contract, 5-17 Contract expert rules global purchasing agreement, 5-22 activating, 7-14 master service agreement, 5-21 creating, 7-9 printed contract documents, 5-23 disabling, 7-16 roles and responsibilities, 5-15 searching for, 7-13 supplier authored, 5-20 setting up question sequence, 7-18 Automatic Application of Contract Templates, 5- updating, 7-17 20 Contract Negotiation, 5-10 AutoNumbering, 4-17 Contract Standards, 5-2 Contract Templates, 4-24 C Contract terms library clauses setting up approval rules, 4-11 importing, 6-19 setting up contract expert, 4-24 open interface, 6-26 setting up lookup codes, 4-12 searching for, 6-12 Contract Terms Library Index-1
  • 244. muli-org access control, 4-4 XML data file method, 6-27 Contract Terms Setup window, 4-4 Importing Clauses, 6-19 Create Constant page, 7-7 Importing Clauses from External Sources, 4-21 Create Questions page, 7-3 Create Rule page, 7-9 K Key Features, 1-1 D Defining security profiles, 4-5 L Dependencies, 2-1 Layout Templates, 4-13 conditional, 2-2 create, 4-13 mandatory, 2-1 document types, 4-15 Descriptive Flexfields, 4-16 stylesheet, 4-15 Lookup codes, 4-12 E Lookup Codes, D-28 Enabling Keyword Search, 4-12 Execute and Monitor Contracts, 5-28 M clause usage, 5-29 Managing Clauses deliverables, 5-28 across operating units, 6-7 supplier contact, 5-29 Managing contract expert constants creating constants, 7-7 F Managing contract expert questions, 7-3 Find Organization window, 4-3 creating user questions, 7-3 Flexfields, 4-16 searching for questions, 7-5 Folders, 4-21 Managing contract expert rules, 7-8 Function Security, 4-19 creating dependencies between questions, 7-19 repository functions, 4-20 Managing standard clauses searching for clauses, 6-12 G Master-Child Agreements, 5-21 multi-org access control Global Clauses for contract terms library, 4-4 adoption by local operating units, 6-8 Multiple Organizations Access Control, 4-4 approving in local operating units, 6-11 creating, 6-9 reviewing for adoption, 6-9 N viewing adoption status, 6-11 Negotiate Contracts, 5-10 Numbering Schemes, 4-22 I Implementation Tasks, 3-1 O Oracle iSupplier Portal, 3-1 Operating units, 4-2 Oracle Purchasing, 3-1 Organization hierarchy, 4-5 Oracle Sourcing, 3-1 Organization Hierarchy page, 4-5 steps, 3-1 Organizations For Contract Terms, 4-2 Importing clauses Overview, 1-1 methods of, 6-20 open interface method, 6-26 P purge interface, 6-30 Index-2
  • 245. profile option categories contracts security, 4-7 V contracts setup, 4-8 Value Sets, 4-18 Profile Options, 4-6 Variables, 4-21 Profile Options Categories, 4-6 user-defined, 6-22 Purchasing Document Format, 4-16 Q Questions setting up, 7-19 setting up dependent , 7-19 setting up independent , 7-19 Question sequence managing, 7-18 Questions page, 7-5 R Renegotiate Contracts, 5-31 Rule page, 7-13 S Searching For Clauses, 6-12 browsing, 6-15 keywords, 6-14 searching, 6-13 Sections, 4-23 Security profiles, 4-5 Setting up approval rules for contract terms library, 4-11 Setting Up AutoNumbering, 4-17 Setting up contract expert for contract terms library, 4-24 Setting Up Layout Templates, 4-13 Setting up lookup codes for contract terms library, 4-12 Setting Up Numbering Schemes, 4-22 Setting up operating units for contract terms library, 4-2 Setting up organization hierarchy, 4-5 Setting Up Organizations, 4-2 Setting Up Profile Options, 4-6 Setting Up Purchasing Document Format, 4-16 Setting Up Value Sets, 4-18 Standard Clauses, 4-24 Index-3